RC

RoadCalc™ by Eagle Point
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of the vendor. The software described in this manual is furnished
under a license agreement and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms
of the agreement.
Eagle Point has carefully prepared this program package, including research,
development, and testing to ascertain its effectiveness and accuracy. However, no
warranty of any kind is made with respect to this program package or its related material,
except as may be expressly stated in the licensing agreement or other contractual
document. In no event is Eagle Point liable for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with, or arising out of, the furnishing, performance, or use of this program
package.
The installation program used to install Eagle Point software, InstallShield, is licensed
software provided by InstallShield Software Corporation.
ColorFast™, RoadCalc™, LANDCADD™, Virtual Simulator™, as well as the ColorFast™
and Eagle Point logos, are unregistered trademarks of Eagle Point.
AutoCAD® is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
MicroStation® is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc.
Windows® and DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other
registered or unregistered trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Copyright © Q3, 2005, by Eagle Point. All rights reserved.
ROADCALC
TA B L E
OF
CONTENTS
1 Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
RoadCalc Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
RoadCalc Design Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Previous RoadCalc Users . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
CAD Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Menu Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Library vs. Manage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Alignment Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Special Alignments and Profiles . . . . . . . . . . 10
Template – Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Condition Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2 Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Alignment Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Right-of-Way Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Horizontal Angle Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Horizontal Circular Curve and Spiral
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Station Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Superelevation Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Superelevation Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Edit Alignment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
New PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Modify PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Horizontal Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Superelevation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Superelevation Transition Parameters . . . . . 45
Rollover Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Superelevation Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
MRS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Create Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Table of Contents i
Horizontal Speed Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Horizontal Speed Table Library . . . . . . . . . . . 59
New Horizontal Speed Parameters . . . . . . . . 60
Superelevate Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Combining Spirals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Reference Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Preview Alignment Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Manage Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
New Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Associate Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Convert Objects to Alignment . . . . . . . . . 71
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Offset Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Manage Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
New Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Utility Annotation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Generate Alignment Reports . . . . . . . . . 79
View Alignment Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Synchronize Graphics and Data . . . . . . . 81
PT Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3 Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Cross-Sections Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Original Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Generating Subsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Design Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Actual Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Skewed Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Cross-Section Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Import/Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Manage Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Manage Surfaces – Original Tab . . . . . . . . . . 98
New Original Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Manage Surfaces – Design Tab . . . . . . . . . . 101
New Design Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Manage Surfaces – Actual Tab . . . . . . . . . . 103
Example – Multiple Actual Surfaces . . . 104
Edit Cross-Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
New Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
ii RoadCalc
Build Station List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
New Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Query Cross-Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Pin Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Extract Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Global Surface Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Preview Cross-Section from Surface
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Generate Subsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Existing Pavement Parameters . . . . . . . . . . 128
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
New Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Generate Cross-Section Reports . . . . .130
Import Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Transfer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Transfer Settings – Import Tab . . . . . . . . . . 133
Transfer Settings – Export Tab . . . . . . . . . . 134
Transfer Settings – Editor Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Assign Points to Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Export Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Create User Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
View Cross-Section Graphics . . . . . . . .141
Cross-Section Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Cross-Section Settings – General Tab . . . . 142
Cross-Section Settings – Precision Tab . . . 143
Synchronize Cross-Section Graphics
and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
4 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Profile Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
RoadCalc Profile Coordinate Systems . . . . 146
Vertical Curve Parameters . . . . . . . . . .148
Edit Profile Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
New VPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Vertical Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Vertical Speed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Vertical Speed Table Library . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
New Vertical Speed Parameters . . . . . . . . . 158
Create Vertical Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Spot Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Table of Contents iii

Preview Profile Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Manage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
New Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Convert Objects to Profile . . . . . . . . . . . 163
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Extract Profile from Surface Model . . . . 164
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Original Ground Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Generate Profile Reports . . . . . . . . . . . 166
View Profile Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Profile Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Profile Settings – General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Define Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Profile Settings – Sight Parameters Tab . . . 171
Profile Settings – Sewer Display Tab . . . . . . 171
Synchronize Profile Graphics and Data 172
5 Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Constructing Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Typical Section Level Mapping
Considerations for MicroStation V8 . . . . . . . 178
Edit Typical Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . 178
New Breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Generate Typical Section Reports . . . . . . . . 182
Typical Section Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Manage Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . 183
New Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Typical Section Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Construct Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Precision Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Define Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
View Typical Section Graphics . . . . . . . 196
6 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Transition Typical Section Breakpoints . . . . 198
Superelevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Dynamic Alignments and Profiles . . . . . . . . 200
iv RoadCalc
Special Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Special Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Special Alignments and Profiles . . . . . . . . . 206
Slope Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Single Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Right of Way Correction Slope . . . . . . . 211
Benching Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Width Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Clear Zone Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
No Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Condition Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Example 1: Condition Table based
on Depths Only (Cut and Fill) . . . . . . . . 219
on Materials (Cut and Fill) . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Fill Ditches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
No Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Slope Seeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Slope Rounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Design Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Typical Section Locations . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Condition Table Locations . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Run Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Associate Alignments and Profiles . . . .233
New PT Code Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Slopes Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
New Single Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
New Right of Way Correction Slope . . . . . . 239
New Benching Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
New Width Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
New Clear Zone Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Manage Condition Tables . . . . . . . . . . .245
New Condition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
New Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Condition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Condition Settings – General Tab . . . . . . . . 250
Condition Settings – No Grade Tab . . . . . . . 252
New No Grade Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Condition Settings – Slope Seeding Tab . . . 254
Condition Settings – Slope Rounding Tab . . 255
Edit Design Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
New Typical Section Location . . . . . . . . . . . 259
New Condition Table Location . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Run Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Table of Contents v
Run Design – Automatic Method . . . . . . . . . 263
Step Through Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Processing Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Describe Processing Warnings . . . . . . . . . . 268
Possible Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
7 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Cross-Section Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
New Cross-Section Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings . . . . . . . . 274
Edit Cross-Section CAD Settings . . . . . . . . . 277
Edit Cross-Section Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Edit Cross-Section Offsets and Elevations . 279
New Offset/Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Edit Cross-Section Slope Annotation . . . . . . 282
New Slope Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Edit Cross-Section Reference Lines . . . . . . 285
New Reference Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Edit Cross-Section Text Settings . . . . . . . . . 287
Modify Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Format Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Stations to Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Plan and Profile Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
New Plan and Profile Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings . . . . . . 297
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Edit Plan and Profile CAD Settings . . . . . . . 302
Edit Plan and Profile Precision . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Edit Station/Elevation Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 304
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Edit Alignment Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Edit Horizontal Station Labels . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Edit Direction and Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Edit Circular Curve Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Edit Spiral Curve Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Edit Profile Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Edit Vertical Station/Elevation Labels . . . . . 315
vi RoadCalc
Edit Vertical Curve Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Edit Custom Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Show Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Adjust Plan and Profile Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Mass Diagram Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
New Mass Diagram Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Edit Mass Diagram Sheet Settings . . . . . . . 325
Edit Mass Diagram CAD Settings . . . . . . . . 326
Edit Mass Diagram Precision . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Edit Mass Diagram Volume Settings . . . . . . 328
Breaklines from PT Codes . . . . . . . . . .329
Profiles from PT Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Catchlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
3-D Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Inherit Elevation From Design . . . . . . . .335
Create Surface Model From Road . . . . .339
Select Multiple Models to Merge . . . . . . . . . 341
Volume Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Raw Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Mass Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Volume Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Pavement Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Design Earthwork Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Actual Earthwork Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Balance Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Volume Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Volume Settings – Display Tab . . . . . . . . . . 356
Volume Settings – Calculation Tab . . . . . . . 358
Volume Pay Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Adjustment Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
New Adjustment Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Borrow Pits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
New Borrow Pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Compaction Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
New Compaction Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Zero Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Add Zero Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Station and Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Draw Station/Coordinate Object . . . . . . . . . 373
Catchpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Table of Contents vii

Elevation/Depth at Offsets . . . . . . . . . . 375
Cross-Section Staking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Sub-project Prototype Settings . . . . . . . 379
New Sub-project Prototype . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
RoadCalc Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
viii RoadCalc
CONCEPTS
In this chapter:
CHAPTER
RoadCalc Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Previous RoadCalc Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Chapter 1: Concepts 1
RoadCalc Concepts
RoadCalc is a computer software package with roadway design, earthwork computation
and drafting capabilities. It is an interactive tool providing speed, accuracy and economy
of roadway design.
The methods employed by RoadCalc for roadway design are derived from conventional
design. However, full advantage is taken of the speed, accuracy and iterative capacity of
the computer.
RoadCalc offers you all the basic features:
Field data entry, reduction and viewing
Horizontal curve calculation
Vertical curve calculation
User-defined “intelligent” design typical sections called Dynamic Typical Sections
Tabulation of earthwork volumes
Cross-section, plan and profile and mass diagram plotting
And RoadCalc offers these advanced features:
Alignments
Right-of-Way control to force slopes to tie inside of the Right-of-Way
Unlimited station equation adjustments
Multiple design alignments (100 per sub-project)
Superelevation by AASHTO or user-defined criteria
Transition spiral definition and combining spirals
Utility definition for display in cross-sections and profiles
Cross-Sections
Extract cross-sections from an Eagle Point surface model or directly from CAD
drawings
Skewed cross-sections
Cross-section editing (design, original and actual) with automatic volume updating
Subsurface generation from boring logs or existing edge of road
Cross-section data translation to and from other systems (over 70 predefined formats)
Material specific compaction factors applied to cut or fill
Zonal compaction factors
Slope staking reports
2 RoadCalc
Profiles
Chapter 1: Concepts
Graphic entry and editing of profile data
Link to Profiles module for placing storm/sanitary sewer structures and pipe
annotation
AASHTO design speed table criteria for profiles
Multiple Design Profiles (100 per sub-project)
Typical Sections
Dynamic Typical Sections for matching multiple alignments and profiles
System-wide user typical section library
Edit typical sections graphically or in tabular format
Define Components of commonly used “features” on typical sections (Curb and
Gutter, Barriers, Shoulders, etc.)
Use Components to construct typical section geometry
Process
Slope Library to store different types of catch-slopes including: Single Slopes, R.O.W
controlled, Benching and Clear Zone
Condition statements to determine what is applied based on cut and fill criteria
Automatic catch-slope rounding
Independent station locations for typical sections and slope “treatments” to reduce the
number of typical sections needed
Step-through processing to view and edit the design cross-sections as they are
constructed
Volumes
Earthwork computations, including: Raw, Mass and Balance volumes
Pavement volumes
“As-built” volume computations
Adjustment volumes
User-defined borrow pits
Volumes over a range of stations
Seeding/Topsoil volumes
Output (Plots and Printouts)
User-defined, user-savable plotting formats
Slope annotation, elevation and offsets annotated for any point and surface labeling
on cross-section plots
R.O.W. dimension and reference line labeling on cross-section plots
Profile over plan, plan only and profile only plot options
Elevation annotation for up to four profiles including “on curve” placement
Custom North arrow and user-defined text for horizontal and vertical curves
Conventional methods are the foundation from which RoadCalc was developed. This
concept is important to the overall understanding of the potential of RoadCalc. Therefore,
when faced with a dilemma of how best to use RoadCalc to accomplish a specific task, it
is helpful to ask, “How would it be done conventionally?”
To illustrate, consider the steps normally taken in the conventional design process:
Field work
Establish benchmarks
Conduct PI survey
Conduct centerline survey
Conduct cross-section survey
Conduct location survey
Preliminary office work
Draft survey alignment
Draft location survey information
Reduce cross-section notes
Draft cross-sections
Develop contour map from cross-section notes
Alignment design
Select tangent lines
Calculate design curve data
Station the centerline
Profile design
Draft original ground profile
Select tangent lines
Select design curve lengths
4 RoadCalc
Cross-section design
Chapter 1: Concepts
Create plastic templates of “typical sections”
Calculate centerline elevations
Superimpose templates on original cross-sections
Choose cut vs. fill condition
Control ditch profiles
Impose Right-of-Way restrictions
Volume calculations
Planimeter end areas
Compute volumes
Apply compaction factors
Mass diagram analysis
Draft mass diagram
Analyze mass diagram
Plan submittals
Cross-Section plots
Plan and Profile plots
There is a definite similarity between items on this list and the menu options available
within RoadCalc. This makes sense, given that RoadCalc is founded on the same basic
principles used in conventional methods.
When following a more traditional method, these steps can be very time consuming.
Consider the time needed to redesign and redraft design cross-sections and replot and
annotate the profile. With RoadCalc, all of these changes are made quickly and easily.
Horizontal alignments are stored graphically as well as numerically with a dynamic link
between both; changing the graphics updates the numbers automatically and vice versa.
With Dynamic Typical Sections a minimal amount of typical sections are needed. Special
alignments and profiles can be used to control how the design cross-section should look.
Processed cross-sections, with the design typical section already applied, may also be
modified graphically or numerically. After any changes are made, end-areas and volumes
are automatically recalculated and updated in the output windows. Cross-Section and
Plan and Profile plots are created automatically with the push of a button, without
positioning viewports or copying graphics. Because RoadCalc stores the data files with
Intelligent Indexing, the information is recalled quickly without having to remember any file
names.
At the heart of RoadCalc’s power are the design cycles. By adjusting the profile, typical
sections and other design elements, reviewing the results, then adjusting them again, you
can achieve the most suitable balance of quantities and an aesthetic design with a
minimum of effort.
The following figure illustrates the key steps you might take as you work on a sub-project
in RoadCalc. Depending on your sub-project, you might skip some steps. For instance, if
you don’t use typical sections to generate the design cross-sections, you would skip the
step in Design Input that includes creating typical sections.
Figure 1-1 Sub-project Design Flow
6 RoadCalc
Chapter 1: Concepts
Figure 1-2 RoadCalc 3-D Design Module
RoadCalc Design Model

The figure above is intended to illustrate the concept that RoadCalc is based upon. That
is, when laying out the design geometries, working in RoadCalc is very much like working
on paper. The Alignments, Profiles (or vertical Alignments), and Cross Sections are all
two-dimensional. While there may be other three dimensional information in the plan
drawing, you need only be concerned with the horizontal component of the Alignment. The
vertical component will be dealt with in the Profile drawing. This concept allows you to deal
with design in a familiar fashion, and let the computer do the work of combining the
components to achieve the desired design.
Previous RoadCalc Users

Imagine setting up your plan and profile sheets to look exactly like the Department of
Transportation standards, then saving those settings for use on future projects. Imagine
defining typical sections that can be used from project to project without redrawing or
redefining them. And then imagine being able to establish criteria that modifies these
typical sections so that different design constraints may be met on different projects.
These are a few of the powerful features included in RoadCalc and can be found
throughout the module. You’ll also find that your new version of RoadCalc is faster and
creates fewer data files than previous versions.
No other design package on the market offers the level of design/CAD integration found in
RoadCalc. Its Windows interface and enhanced CAD interaction, along with other Eagle
Point modules, handles all aspects of design.
For users familiar with RoadCalc Version 6 (the stand-alone product), the concept of a
project has also changed. What used to be a project – one horizontal alignment, one
profile, one set of cross-sections – is now a sub-project. A project may consist of several
sub-projects, one for every alignment on the site. The plan view drawing shows the whole
site, containing planimetric information for all of the sub-projects together.
For those users who are familiar with the 12.0 or 13.x AutoCAD versions or the 4.2 or 5.x
MicroStation versions, a few conceptual changes have been made.
CAD Interaction
In more places in the software you are able to interact with the CAD graphics while your
dialog box remains open and on screen. This allows for a more seamless integration with
the CAD engine of choice. For example, Node ID’s and directions and lengths of objects
can now be selected to “fill in” data in the RoadCalc dialog boxes.
Menu Layout
The menu layout still is set up so that you work through the menus and commands in a left
to right, top to bottom fashion to complete a project. This provides guidance in what
information needs to be entered next to complete a project. The commands in the menus
have changed in name and some in function. The reason for this is to provide you easier
access to the commands and dialog boxes used most often. What used to be a dialog box
that was three or four dialog boxes deep, now exists on the menu or is one or two dialog
boxes away. This menu system is used in other Eagle Point modules so the look and feel
of the software is tremendously tight. A few of the name and functionality changes are
described next.
Library vs. Manage

In many places the word library, (which in previous versions denotes a central location in
the menu structure to organize certain objects such as Alignments, Profiles, Templates
etc.) has had its meaning changed in the new RoadCalc menu structure. In the rest of the
system, a “library” is used to denote a central location where files are stored that are
accessed across all projects (i.e. the Node Library is stored in the C:\PROGRAM
8 RoadCalc
FILES\EAGLE POINT SOFTWARE\EGPT\SUPPORT folder and can be read by any
Chapter 1: Concepts
project). The PT Code Library, Speed Table Library, and Template Library are examples
in the 13.1 and 5.5 versions of RoadCalc, where a central location is used to store items
or data that all sub-projects can access. In the previous versions of the software, the
Alignment Library command did not take on the same meaning. In this case, alignments
are project specific and are not accessed by other projects.
The concept of these libraries still exists but have changed to have less hierarchical
meaning. If you wish to see a listing of all like objects within a sub-project (Alignments,
Profile, Typical Sections, etc.) you would chose the various “Manage...” options from the
main RoadCalc pull-down menus. The command or menu option will also follow a
standard that the menu options will be action-based or verbs, while the menu they get
accessed from are objects, or nouns.
Thus, when you see a menu option of “Manage...” you should take that to mean you are
managing the object that is the menu heading; i.e. if you choose “Manage...” from the
Alignments menu, you will be managing your alignments for a given sub-project. If more
than one manage command exists under one main menu heading, the command will
differentiate what you are managing.
Alignment Database
Alignments that are going to be used in RoadCalc may be defined different ways. Within
RoadCalc there are tools to convert CAD objects to alignments and tools to enter
horizontal PI information by coordinates and bearings and distances. COGO also has
commands to traverse alignments and to convert CAD objects into alignments. And with
the addition of a project-wide alignment database, RoadCalc can use alignments that are
defined by any means in other drawings within the project. A RoadCalc sub-project is
used to create a subset of all of the project’s alignments that are to be used in a specific
corridor design.
When establishing this subset, you can associate alignments from within the alignment
database or create entirely new alignments within a RoadCalc sub-project that
automatically get added to the alignment database.
Refer to Associate Alignment on page 69.
When you edit an alignment in a RoadCalc sub-project (i.e. add/remove PI’s, enter curve
data, etc.) the graphic that represents the alignment automatically updates. If you are
making changes to an alignment while not in the drawing/design file that the alignment
was originally defined in, RoadCalc will remind you when the editing is finished (i.e. the
Edit Alignment Data dialog box is closed) that the alignment graphic needs to be updated.
If no other user is accessing that drawing/design file you will be prompted to save changes
in your current CAD graphic and the alignment drawing will be opened and updated and
you will return to your previous CAD graphic. If another user is currently accessing the
alignment drawing/design file you will be prompted to send a message to you informing
you why a change was made. When that user runs another Eagle Point command, a
dialog box will appear with a warning indicating who changed what alignment and that
Eagle Point is going to update the graphic alignment. The message will also inform that
user to save changes to that CAD graphic so that the data and graphic remain in sync.
Special Alignments and Profiles

Special Alignments and Profiles are additional geometries that can control the placement
of points on the design typical sections. Some common uses of these additional
geometries are edge of road alignments to widen/narrow lanes and ditch profiles to control
drainage through certain areas of the project. In previous releases of RoadCalc when you
added the alignment or profile to their respective libraries, you needed to supply additional
information about the PT Codes, side and control types that were to be used to
dynamically stretch the typical sections. This information is no longer entered at the point
you add alignments and profiles because you generally don’t know exactly how that
alignment and/or profile will be used until you start defining your typical sections. To
specify what alignments and profiles control what points on the typical section, you now
use the Associate Alignments and Profiles command found in the Process menu. The type
of input is similar to before with the Side, PT Code, Control Type and Control PT Code
being associate to an alignment, profile or both.
Template – Typical Section

The word “template” has been removed from the RoadCalc menu and changed to Typical
Section. But it is not just renaming Templates to Typical Sections because the concept of
what a template is has changed.
What can be accomplished with templates in the 13.x and 5.x versions of the software will
now be handled by multiple commands. A Typical Section in Eagle Point is the closest
counterpart to what templates are in the 14/13 and 5.5 versions, however slopes will no
longer be defined and saved with a typical section. A Typical Section would be the part of
the final design cross-section that is all of the paving surfaces minus the subgrade
catchlines.
A typical section may be constructed three ways; by keying in the numeric geometry of the
typical section surfaces; by drawing CAD lines (with a few additional drawing tools
available other than the CAD engine); or by inserting blocks/cells into the typical section
graphic.
The typical section is saved locally as in previous releases (i.e. the same location as the
rest of sub-project’s data files). A typical section may be saved to a central location to the
\PROGRAM FILES\EAGLE POINT SOFTWARE\EGPT\SUPPORT folder so that it can be
copied and saved locally in another sub-project. This allows for constructing only a few
typical sections that are truly typical, and saving those so that they may be used in other
sub-projects.
10 RoadCalc
Slopes
Chapter 1: Concepts
You will enter the slopes you want using the Slopes Library command found in the
Process menu. If you want to work similarly to what you are used to in versions 14/13 and
5.x, you would construct a typical section in CAD out to the point where the catchslopes
would start. Then you would enter in the slope information by choosing the Slopes Library
command from the Process menu. You then assign a name and type of slope you want to
apply to the typical section. There are many more types of slopes that you can specify
including; Single, R.O.W. Correction, Benching, Width, and Clear Zone. The No Grade,
Slope Rounding and Slope Seeding options in the 14/13 version are found as optional
settings on the Manage Condition Tables dialog box (Figure 6-33 on page 246).
For more information, see Slope Types on page 208.
Slopes are also not cut or fill specific. The conditions that are built from these slopes
determine whether the typical section is in cut or fill.
Slopes are saved to a global folder that is accessible by all sub-projects. This way the
different types of slopes only need to be defined once. The listing of slopes is an
expanding tree-view that is setup with the highest level of items being the slope types and
the next level being the defined slopes of those types. This will aid you in selecting the
appropriate slope when constructing a condition table.
Condition Tables
Condition Tables are used during the processing of the typical sections onto the original
ground cross-sections to determine what types of slope treatments are used depending
on the conditions of the terrain. A condition table combines some of the features that
Material Slopes and Depth Slopes provided users in past releases of RoadCalc but with
some enhancements.
Along with the Typical Section locations, a condition table provides RoadCalc with the
possible design choices to make during the processing of the design input (i.e alignments,
profiles and typical sections). A table contains the possible solutions that RoadCalc
should use when processing the design through different materials at varying depths. It
also contains the design choices that should be made when the typical section is in fill.
You can define many different Condition Tables per sub-project to accommodate varying
conditions within a project. You setup the locations of where the different condition tables
should be used by RoadCalc in the Edit Design Locations command found in the Process
menu. Condition tables are saved within the sub-project instead of in a global library
because of the varying conditions from project to project. However, every sub-project
starts with a default condition table that contains the default slope that should be applied,
regardless of materials or depths. Set this default using the Settings command on the
Manage Condition Tables dialog box.
For more information about Condition Tables, refer to Manage Condition Tables on page
245.
12 RoadCalc
ALIGNMENTS
In this chapter:
CHAPTER
Alignment Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Edit Alignment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Manage Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Associate Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Convert Objects to Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2
Offset Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Manage Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Generate Alignment Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
View Alignment Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Synchronize Graphics and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
PT Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Chapter 2: Alignments 13
Alignment Concepts
Alignments represent the two-dimensional horizontal geometry of a given baseline. The
RoadCalc centerline alignment that is defined within a sub-project is the geometry that
RoadCalc bases its cross-sections on. Any one sub-project has just one centerline to
base this stationing on. You can however add up to 99 additional alignments that control
offset geometry from that centerline. For example, you can add eastbound and westbound
road centerlines as additional alignments while another alignment (i.e. median) controls
the stationing.
For more information see Alignment Database on page 9.
If the project is to:
Superelevate the roadway automatically
Account for horizontal curves during volume calculations
Impose right-of-way restrictions on the design
Use station equations
Generate cross-sections from a Surface Modeling surface model
Translate cross-section data from an ASCII file carrying Northing-Easting coordinates
alignment data must be entered. Otherwise skip the Alignments pull-down menu and go to
the Cross-Section menu.
Alignments can be created numerically or graphically in the plan view graphic. Horizontal
PI and curve data can be entered by Nodes, coordinates or by angles and distances into
the alignment data dialog boxes. Or you may use CAD tools to draw lines or arcs for the
alignment directly into the plan graphic. Superelevation and spiral data can be entered in
the alignment data dialog boxes as well.
Alignments can also be modified either numerically or graphically. Through Intelligent
Indexing, RoadCalc ensures that a numeric change automatically updates the graphic
representation.
Conversely, if a graphic change is made in CAD, a single command updates the numeric
data. Even if that step is forgotten, RoadCalc knows that the graphic representation does
not match the numeric data and wants you to choose which information is correct and
update the other.
RoadCalc represents alignments as 2-D objects consisting of lines, arcs and spirals with
no elevation. Tangent lines are lines; circular curves are arcs; and spirals are
approximated by several small arc segments. These elements carry attribute data that
identifies the sub-project to which they belong and which alignment number they are.
There are also attributes that indicate which direction the stationing runs and how long any
spirals are.
14 RoadCalc
Right-of-Way Alignments
Right-of-way data can be entered the same way as centerline data, except for the
commands dealing with stationing, station equations, superelevation and speed tables,
which are not available.
If the sub-project has Right-of-Way restrictions in more than one zone on the sub-project
with unrestricted sections in between, unrestricted sections can be created on the R.O.W.
Alignment by toggling the unrestricted toggle when adding new PIs, inserting PIs or
modifying PIs.
Chapter 2: Alignments
After entering the right-of-way alignment geometry, be sure to specify the different types of
right-of-way correction in the Slopes Library. An explanation of the two types of right-of-
way correction follows.
Type 1: If a catchpoint lies outside the R.O.W. line, RoadCalc steepens the cut slope
or fill slope to put the catchpoint at the R.O.W. line. R.O.W. controlled slopes are to be
defined in the Slope Library.
Type 2: If a catchpoint lies inside the R.O.W. line, RoadCalc widens the ditch to put
the catchpoint at the R.O.W. line. R.O.W. controlled slopes are to be defined in the
Slope Library.
The figure below and Figure 2-4 on page 17 illustrate the two types of R.O.W. constraints.
Figure 2-3 Type I Right of Way
The figure above illustrates a R.O.W. Type 1 slope. The default slope of 4:1 H/V is applied
to the typical section during processing. If it ties outside the R.O.W. line (as in the cut
condition in the figure), then RoadCalc applies a slope that ties directly to the R.O.W. line
(3.5:1 H/V in this case). However, if it can’t tie into the R.O.W. line even with the maximum
slope specified, it applies the maximum slope and generates a “Right-of-Way Exceeded”
16 RoadCalc
warning message after processing. If the default slope does tie within the R.O.W., no
further checks are necessary.
Figure 2-4 Type II Right of Way
Using Type 2 slopes makes RoadCalc widen the drawn ditch such that the default slope
then ties into the R.O.W. line. Type 2 does not use the maximum slope in cut situations,
only in Fill, and then it behaves like R.O.W. Type 1. The cut condition in the figure above
illustrates how RoadCalc widens the ditch. PT codes 3 (Toe of Foreslope) and 4 (Toe of
Cutslope) must be placed on the typical section. The geometry between these PT codes is
stretched until the default slope of 2:1 H/V ties directly into the R.O.W. line. If RoadCalc
finds that the catchpoint is outside the R.O.W. line when it uses the narrowest possible
ditch, it will generate a “Right-of-Way Exceeded” error message when it is done
processing profiles and typical sections.
For either type of right-of-way, if the actual catchpoint control line is to be a certain
distance within the R.O.W. line, enter a buffer width to specify this distance. For example,
if the R.O.W. line follows a fence but the catchpoints are to remain at least 3 feet inside the
fence line, type in a buffer width of 3 feet.
If a control Type 2 is used, define the typical sections with the narrowest ditch allowable.
RoadCalc only widens the ditch to reach the R.O.W. line. It will not make the ditch
narrower.
Horizontal Angle Types

The following figure illustrates the angle types and directions that are available when
adding PI data into RoadCalc.
18 RoadCalc
For more information, refer to Horizontal Direction Formats in the Eagle Point Menu
documentation.
Figure 2-5 Horizontal Angle Types
Horizontal Circular Curve and Spiral Parameters
The following figures show the parameters used in horizontal and circular curves.
Figure 2-6 Horizontal Circular Curve Parameters
Figure 2-7 Transition Spiral Parameters
20 RoadCalc
Station Equations
Station equations are used to assign or change the station at a particular location on the
alignment. An example of this would be the need to match the stationing of the existing
alignment after redesigning a curve on the alignment. When a curve is lengthened or
shortened, the difference in stationing can be made up with a station equation. There are
two types of station equations: gap equations and overlap equations. The figure below
and Figure 2-9 on page 22 illustrate the use of station equations.
Figure 2-8 Gap Equation Example
The figure above illustrates how an equation can be defined on a new alignment so that
when it “re-joins” with the old alignment, the old stationing is met. The new alignment is
shorter than the old by 13.4 feet, so an equation of Station Back =16+45.80 and Station
Ahead=16+59.20 effectively lengthens the stationing so that the new alignment ties into
the old.
Figure 2-9 Overlap Equation Example
The figure above illustrates how an equation can effectively shorten a new alignment that
is longer than the original. In this overlap situation two of the same station values may
exist. Station 16+50 would occur 9.20 feet before the equation, as well as 4.2 feet after the
equation. Whenever stations that exist more than once are queried or used in any way,
RoadCalc will prompt you to pick which instance of the station 16+50 before the equation
or station 16+50 after the equation.
Superelevation Concepts
The superelevation parameters that are keyed into the software allow RoadCalc to
superelevate a normal crown typical section automatically. RoadCalc will rotate the
pavement courses through the different key stations based on the distances (or stations)
to the key locations of crown removed, reverse crown, begin full superelevation, end full
superelevation, reverse crown, crown removed and back to normal crown. Figure 2-10 on
page 23, Figure 2-11 on page 24 and Figure 2-12 on page 25 show these key transition
stations starting with the (A) details showing normal crown and finishing with the full
superelevation in the (D) details. By having RoadCalc do this for you, time is saved in not
having to draw those key station typical sections and develop edge of road profiles.
22 RoadCalc
RoadCalc follows superelevation methods recommended by AASHTO (Method 5
AASHTO, 1990, 1994) with the 2/3 - 1/3 transition rule by default. These parameters are
customizable to allow for more flexible design. RoadCalc also supports the three types of
pavement rotation. For an undivided roadway, assign a superelevation type indicating
whether the superelevation is to revolve about the centerline (Type I) or the inside
superelevation limit (Type II) or the outside superelevation limit (Type III). The figure
below, Figure 2-11 on page 24, and Figure 2-12 on page 25 illustrate the three different
types of rotation.
Figure 2-10 Type I Superelevation (Rotation About the Centerline)
With Type I Superelevation, the pavement rotates about the centerline. Around a left hand
curve, the right edge of pavement starts to move upward as soon as superelevation starts
it moves at a continuous rate of change through crown removed, reverse crown all the
way to maximum superelevation. The left edge of pavement does not start to move
downward until after the right edge of pavement reached reverse crown. Then the left
edge moves downward at the same rate the right edge moves upwards until maximum
superelevation is attained. Figure 2-13 on page 26 shows the edges of pavement and
centerline profiles. Note that the centerline (the point of rotation) does not change its
profile.
Figure 2-11 Type II Superelevation (Rotation About the Inside Pavement Edge)
24 RoadCalc
Type II Superelevation (with a crowned typical section) actually starts out similar to Type I
Superelevation. Around a left hand curve, the right edge of pavement moves upward as
soon as superelevation begins rotating about the centerline until reverse crown is
achieved. Then the rotation point moves from the centerline to the inside edge of
pavement. Then, both the centerline and right edge of pavement move up at the same
rate until maximum superelevation occurs.
When the road is not crowned (as in a divided highway) the rotation is always about the
inside edge of pavement. Figure 2-18 on page 31 illustrates Type II Superelevation on a
divided, non-crowned highway.
Figure 2-12 Type III Superelevation (Rotation About the Outside Pavement Edge)
Type III Superelevation holds the elevation of the outside edge of pavement through
superelevation rotation. As soon as superelevation begins, both the centerline and the
inside edge of pavement lower at the same rate.
This maintains the -2% cross-slope on the left side as the right side lowers to 0%, and
then to reverse crown. See Figure 2-12 on page 25, details A,B and C. After reverse
crown is achieved, the left side then begins to lower at a faster rate.
See the figure below for an illustration of the edges of pavement and centerline profiles.
The figure below illustrates the way RoadCalc superelevates and the parameters it uses
to define the superelevation. For each type, the top part of the figure shows a profile view
of the superelevated section of road and the bottom part shows cross-sections of the
crown of the road.
Figure 2-13 Superelevation Parameters and Type
26 RoadCalc
The locations of some of these superelevation parameters along the alignment are
illustrated in the figure below.
Figure 2-14 Superelevation “Key Stations”
When the break point differs from the superelevation limit, define the typical sections for
Type 2 or Type 3. Then, place the break point on the typical section at the rotation point(s),
left and right of centerline, and give them PT Codes of -1 (Optional Superelevation
Rotation Point). During processing, RoadCalc will check for that PT Code while it is
superelevating. If it finds one, it will rotate the pavement around that point instead of the
centerline or the corresponding limit of superelevation. See the figure below.
Figure 2-15 PT Codes on Divided Highways
If a typical section like that shown in Figure 2-16 on page 29, in part A, exists, RoadCalc
normally superelevates the subsurfaces as shown in B or C. In B, the subsufaces are no
longer parallel to the top surface. In C, the subsurfaces have breaks in them to maintain
parallel surfaces.
Ideally, the typical section should superelevate as shown in D. For undivided roadways
with uncomplicated subsurface configurations, RoadCalc can superelevate in this
fashion.
To superelevate the subsurfaces this way, draw the typical section with the subsurfaces
tying into the typical section shoulder slopes and place PT Codes of -2 (optional
28 RoadCalc
superelevation limit) on the top surface at the edge of the road. During processing, after
the slopes get applied, the subsurfaces will extend out to intersect the catchslope.
Figure 2-16 Superelevating Subsurfaces
For a divided roadway, assign the PT code of 2 (superelevation limit) to the four edges of
road on the typical section. Or if you need to specify controlling alignments for widening
the lanes you can alternatively use PT codes -6, -5, -4 and -3 on the four edges of road on
the typical section so that two occurrences of a PT code do not exist on one side of a
typical section.
You may also superelevate divided highways using the same principles as outlined in the
previous example (Figure 2-16 on page 29) with PT codes -16, -15, -14 and -13. See the
figure below and Figure 2-18 on page 31.
Figure 2-17 Crowned Divided Highway (Type II Superelevation)
30 RoadCalc
Figure 2-18 Non-Crowned Divided Highway (Type II Superelevation)
Superelevation Calculator
The Superelevation Calculator is used when the data supplied in the AASHTO Speed
Tables does not pertain to the current design specifications. RoadCalc uses the AASHTO
Method 5 procedures for determining the superelevation transition distances and
maximum superelevation rate (AASHTO Geometric Design of Highways and Streets, pp
152-164, 1990 and pp 153-166, 1994). By following that procedure you arrive at three
possible solutions for the superelevation runoff distance.
Metric
For Speeds ≤ 50 KPH
3
VD
SR = ------------------
-
( 28 ) ( R )
2.1
For Speeds > 50 KPH
1000 m ⁄ km
SR = ( V D ) ( 2 Seconds )  --------------------------------------------------------------------------
 ( 60 min ⁄ hour ) ( 60 sec ⁄ min )
2.2
or
SR = ( w ) ( e ) ( MRS )
2.3
English
For Speeds ≤ 30 MPH
SR = 100
2.4
For Speeds > 30 MPH
5280 ft ⁄ mi
SR = ( V D ) ( 2 Seconds )  --------------------------------------------------------------------------
 ( 60 min ⁄ hour ) ( 60 sec ⁄ min )
2.5
or
SR = ( w ) ( e ) ( mrs )
2.6
where:
SR = Superelevation Runoff distance
VD = Design Speed (KPH or MPH)
w = Horizontal lane width (meters or feet)
e = Computed superelevation rate
MRS = Maximum Relative Slope
The minimum SR value is the largest of the three computed SR values. From the
calculated SR value, the X, Y and TR distances may be computed. The X and Y distances
are calculated the same whether or not you have spirals. The TR distance gets calculated
32 RoadCalc
differently depending if spirals are used in your design. RoadCalc rounds the results of
these calculations to the nearest five feet in English projects and the nearest one meter in
metric projects.
The X value is calculated by:
X = (--------------------
SR ) ( C -)
(e)
2.7
where:
X = Distance from the beginning of superelevation to where adverse crown is
removed
SR = Superelevation Runoff distance
C = Pavement Cross-slope
e = Computed superelevation rate
The Y value is calculated by:
Y = 2X
2.8
where:
Y = Distance from the beginning of Superelevation to where the outside lane
achieves reverse crown.
X = Distance from the beginning of Superelevation to where adverse crown is
removed.
The TR value is calculated by:
TR = X + ( SE ) ( SR ) (non-spiraled curves)
2.9
TR = X (spiraled curves)
2.10
where:
TR = Computed tangent runout distance
X = Distance from the beginning of superelevation to where adverse crown is
removed
SE = Percentage of superelevation that is applied before the circular curve
SR = Computed superelevation runoff distance
Edit Alignment Data
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcaldata
ICON:
The Edit Alignment Data command displays a dialog box (below) that contains the
numerical information for the various PIs of the active alignment. Changes to the
alignment data can be made with the options in this box.
As changes are made to the alignment data, the alignment graphic automatically updates
if the alignment drawing/design file is opened. If it isn’t opened the changes are
automatically updated in the alignment project database, and when this dialog box is
closed you are prompted to update the alignment graphic.
See Alignment Database on page 9 for more information.
Figure 2-19 Edit Alignment Data Dialog Box
Edit Alignment Data Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Alignment This drop list gives the name of the current alignment. To edit an alignment other than the
currently displayed alignment, use this list box to select the desired one.
Manage This option (the icon next to the drop list) provides access to the Alignment Manager to
Alignments add, copy, associate or delete alignments.
PI# This field indicates the horizontal alignment Points of intersection (PIs) which include the
Beginning of Project (BOP) and End of Project (EOP).
Status A PI can have two status types: “F” for denoting that the PI is fixed and “U” for denoting
that the PI started an unrestricted zone. Only non-centerline alignments may have
unrestricted PIs.
34 RoadCalc
Edit Alignment Data Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Station This field reports the station value of the highlighted PI in feet (or meters).
Northing This field reports the northing (Y coordinate) of the PIs in feet (or meters).
Easting Reports the easting (X coordinate) in feet (or meters).
Angle Denotes the angular value between two sequential PIs.
Distance Reports the distance between two sequential PIs in feet (or meters).
New PI Enter PI coordinate values (northing and easting) or angles and distances between PIs.
Using this command places the PI at the end of the alignment PI list.
For more information see New PI on page 36.
Insert PI Place a PI by coordinate value (northing and easting) or by angle and distance. The new
PI is placed in the list before the currently highlighted PI. The same options available for
New PI are available for Insert PI.
For more information see New PI on page 36.
Modify PI Change PI data with the Modify button.
For more information, see Modify PI on page 39.
Delete PI Click this icon to delete the highlighted PI from the list and remove it from the alignment
graphic.
CAD Settings Click this icon to change the CAD settings for the active alignment.
Print Options Print an alignment report by clicking on this button.
For more information, see Generate Alignment Reports on page 79.
Curve Data View and edit the curve parameters for the currently highlighted PI. Key station
coordinates are displayed as static text for the current PI along with any spiral data
entered and the design speed for the curve.
For more information, see Horizontal Curve Data on page 40.
Station Data Enter or edit the BOP station of an alignment with this option. This command also allows
station equations to be entered and modified.
For more information, see Station Data on page 63.
Preview This option displays the alignments that are in the alignment manager to a Windows
Alignment dialog box. Using this option does not require CAD to be loaded.
Graphic For more information, see Preview Objects in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Re-size Dialog These icons change the size and display of the PI list between Figure 2-19 on page 34,
Buttons Figure 2-20 on page 36, and Figure 2-21 on page 36.
Figure 2-20 Edit Alignment Dialog Box (Display Coordinates)
Figure 2-21 Edit Alignment Dialog Box (Display Angles/Distances)
New PI
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA NEW PI
An unlimited number of PIs may be entered into RoadCalc. Enter PIs two ways – by
Coordinates or by Angles and Distances. The first PI must be entered by coordinates only,
therefore the different angle types in the method drop list are unavailable (there is no back
tangent direction available). Selecting the New PI button will open the New PI dialog box
(Figure 2-22 on page 38).
PIs can now be entered by a Node ID or coordinates.
36 RoadCalc
The first PI entered in a project must be entered by coordinates (or Node ID) only. Until
this is done, the angle option area is unavailable. If coordinates aren’t important to the
sub-project, just enter zeroes for the BOP coordinates. When entering coordinates they
may be state-plane, local or assumed.
By changing the method drop list PIs may be entered by Node ID or coordinates or by
angle and distance. When the method is set to coordinates, the Northing and Easting
values may be typed in or picked from the CAD graphic. Use the pick in CAD (PIC) button
to graphically pick the location (coordinates) of the PI. If an Eagle Point Node exits at the
location of a desired PI type, type the Node ID or select it graphically using the PIC button.
Remember that when using the PIC button, what you are selecting in CAD depends on
which edit fields have focus (i.e., to graphically select a Node, put focus into the Node ID
edit field and select the PIC button).
When the method is set to one of the angle or direction options, the dialog box looks like
the one in Figure 2-23 on page 38. Enter the angle/direction and distance numerically or
use the PIC button to select an object in the CAD graphic to retrieve the direction or
distance along that object.
RoadCalc accepts angles in DDD.MMSS or DDD.DDD format depending on the project
format specified. For example, to enter 18 degrees, 43 minutes, 30 seconds in
DDD.MMSS type 18.4330. To enter it in DDD.DDD type 18.725.
See Horizontal Angle Types on page 18.

A toggle button allows the coordinates of any PI to be fixed. A fixed coordinate is indicated
with an “F” in the status column on the Edit Alignment Data dialog box (Figure 2-19 on
page 34). When PIs are modified, added or deleted, RoadCalc holds the coordinates of a
fixed PI and recalculates the angle and distance to it.
For non-centerline alignments, zones may be defined where the special alignment isn’t
used, allowing the typical section to control the offset of the breakpoint (location of the
alignment PT code) or to establish unrestricted R.O.W. zones. To create such a zone,
enter the entire alignment without gaps putting a PI at the beginning and end of each
unrestricted region. Then, turn on the Unrestricted button on the dialog box for the PI at
the beginning of each zone. If the PI(s) that immediately follows an unfixed PI is also
marked as unfixed, RoadCalc uses the angles and distances to replace the unfixed PI(s)
at new coordinates. An unrestricted PI is indicated with a “U” in the status column of the
Edit Alignment Data dialog box (Figure 2-19 on page 34).
Figure 2-22 New PI Dialog Box Using Coordinates Method
Figure 2-23 New PI Dialog Box Using Angular Methods
New PI Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Method This allows you to change the method in which to input PIs. Change the coordinates,
directions or angle options.
Node ID Enter the Node ID in this field to calculate the Northing and Easting of the PI.
Northing Enter the Northing (Y coordinate) for the new PI.
Easting Enter the Easting (X coordinate) for the new PI.
Angle/Direction Enter the angle or direction from the current PI to the next PI. You may enter a specific
direction, overriding the Method drop list, by using the *1, *2, etc. method or by using the
two-letter direction abbreviation.
See Horizontal Angle Types on page 18 for more information.
Distance Enter the distance in feet (or meters) from the current PI to the next PI.
Fix Toggle this option on to hold the coordinates of this PI when a change is made to the
previous PI.
Unrestricted This establishes a “zone” where a secondary alignment (those other than the centerline)
should not control what happens on a cross-section.
Pick in CAD Use this icon to select objects or points in CAD to retrieve information from the graphic.
38 RoadCalc
Modify PI
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA MODIFY PI
You can edit the data for a PI by highlighting it in the Edit Alignment Data dialog box
(Figure 2-19 on page 34) and selecting the Modify PI button. The Modify PI dialog box
(below) displays. The information that displays is the Coordinate information of that PI plus
the angle and distance to the next PI. When the Northing or Easting is modified, it affects
the placement of that PI. Likewise, the Fix and Unrestricted toggles affect the current PI. If
the angle or distance is modified, it is affecting the placement of the next PI.
Figure 2-24 Modify PI Dialog Box
Modify PI Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Node ID Enter the Node ID in this field to calculate the Northing and Easting of the PI.
Northing Enter the Northing (Y coordinate) for the PI in this field.
Easting Enter the Easting (X coordinate) for the PI in this field.
Method Change the angle/direction type to the next PI. Changing the type does not recalculate the
angle/direction that is already entered.
Angle/Direction Enter the angle or direction from the current PI to the next PI. You may enter a specific
direction, overriding the method drop list, by using the *1, *2, etc. method or by using the
two-letter direction abbreviation.
See Horizontal Angle Types on page 18.
Distance Enter the distance in feet (or meters) from the current PI to the next PI.
Fix Toggle this option on to hold the coordinates of this PI when a change is made to the
previous PI.
Unrestricted This establishes a “zone” where a secondary alignment (those other than the centerline)
should not control what happens on a cross-section.
Horizontal Curve Data
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA CURVE DATA
View and edit PI curve parameters with the Curve Data button on the Edit Alignment Data
dialog box (Figure 2-19 on page 34). In addition to reporting the curve and spiral
geometry, the Horizontal Curve Data dialog box (Figure 2-25 on page 41) reports the rated
speed for the curve based on the active speed table. The grid control at the upper left
corner of the dialog box displays the previous PI in the first column, the current PI in the
second column and the next PI in the third column. Only the data in the second column
may be edited. Use the Next PI and Previous PI buttons to change which PI is current.
Station and Coordinates for the current PI are also displayed for the “key” stations along
the curve (PC, PI, PT, etc.).
Degrees of curve can be entered as either arc definition or chord definition of the curve in
either DDD.MMSS or DDD.DDD format according to the degree of curvature input setting
and the angular units input setting found in the Units command on the Eagle Point System
menu. The tangent length, radius, length of curve, chord length, and external and middle
ordinate can also be entered to the define the curve for the highlighted PI. You may also
enter the PC or PT stations of the desired curve.
See Horizontal Circular Curve and Spiral Parameters on page 20.
Access to the superelevation data for the current PI is also available from the Horizontal
Curve Data dialog box. The speed tables and combining spiral data can be accessed from
here as well.
The spread control edit fields behave differently than most other edit fields. Click once into
the edit field to give it focus. Where you click is where the blinking cursor will appear. Then
double click in the edit field to highlight the entire value. You may also click once on the
edit field where there are no numbers and then immediately start overwriting the number
currently there by typing new data.
By entering any one of the curve parameters and pressing the Tab key, the other fields
automatically update their values.
To erase the curve data for a particular PI, enter 0 (zero) for the radius value.
This version of RoadCalc supports non-tangent curves.
To view the curve information for the any PI while the curve data dialog box is displayed,
click and highlight a PI in the PI list.
40 RoadCalc
If you are editing a curve parameter in the Horizontal Curve Data dialog box, a spiral
length or the maximum superelevation, RoadCalc calculates and displays a new design
speed in the curve data box using the active speed table.
Figure 2-25 Horizontal Curve Data Dialog Box
Horizontal Curve Data Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
I This is the internal or delta angle of the PI and is displayed in either DDD.MMSS or
DDD.DDD format according to your angular units output setting.
Ic This is the internal angle of the curve. If spirals are used, this value will be less than the
delta angle (I).
Da This is the degree of curve arc definition.
Dc This is the degree of curve chord definition.
T This is the tangent length.
R This is the radius.
L This is the length of curve.
C This is the chord length.
E This is the external ordinate.
M This is the middle ordinate.
BC (Begin Enter the station at which the curve begins. This is the location of the point of curvature
Curve) Station (PC) or the tangent to spiral point (TS).
EC (End Curve) Enter the station at which the curve ends. This is the location of the point of tangency (PT)
Station or the spiral to tangent point (ST).
Next PI Use this button to change which PI is current.
Horizontal Curve Data Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Previous PI Use this button to change which PI is current.
Design Speed This field reports the design speed of the current PI based on the curve data and
superelevation data entered and the active speed table.
Spiral In In the Length field, enter the length of the spiral going into the curve.
Spiral Out Enter the length of spiral going out of the curve in the Length field.
Spiral These values, shown in the PI Spiral group, are the calculated spiral parameters based on
Parameters the degree of curve and spiral length entered.
PI Stationing View the stations and coordinates of PC, PI, PT and radius points along the alignment. If
spirals are used in the alignment, four additional key points will have their station and
coordinate values displayed. They are the tangent to spiral (TS), spiral to curve (SC),
curve to spiral (CS) and spiral to tangent (ST) locations.
Superelevation Provides access to the superelevation parameters for the current PI.
Data
For more information refer to Superelevation Data, below.
Horizontal This button accesses the speed tables and options to modify the Speed Table Library.
Speed Tables Curves can also be created based on criteria set up in each table.
For more information, see Horizontal Speed Tables on page 57.
Combining This button provides access to enter combining spiral lengths between the current curve
Spirals and next curve.
For more information, see Combining Spirals on page 61.
Superelevation Data
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA CURVE DATA SUPERELEVATION DATA
Enter and modify superelevation parameters with the Superelevation Data button on the
Horizontal Curve Data dialog box (Figure 2-25 on page 41). Roadway curves can be
superelevated in two ways: using typical sections and special profiles to control the crown
slopes or allowing RoadCalc to superelevate automatically. If AASHTO criteria for
superelevation is to be followed, use RoadCalc’s automatic superelevation feature to
save the time it would take to define the typical sections manually. RoadCalc’s automatic
superelevation is applicable to both divided and undivided roadways.
The maximum superelevation (MSE) for the curve is input as a percentage. There are
three superelevation types to choose from with the option button. If working on a divided
roadway, RoadCalc ignores the superelevation type and rotates the pavement around the
superelevation limit PT Codes closest to the centerline.
See Superelevation Concepts on page 22.
42 RoadCalc
Enter the superelevation parameters by keying in the distances between key stations or
where you want the key stations to occur.
The middle column of superelevation parameters on the Superelevation Data dialog box,
contains the parameters for the current PI. The adjacent columns display the parameters
for the previous and next PI’s. To change the parameters for either of those PI’s, use the
Next PI and Previous PI button or highlight the PI you want to edit in the PI list.
RoadCalc can also transition the superelevation between two curves, either compound or
reverse, that have different maximum superelevation rates. When leaving the first curve, it
is desirable to transition the superelevation runoff from it, so that it blends into the
superelevation runoff into the next curve without having the cross-slopes go back to
normal crown. Use the superelevation transition parameters to set the minimum length in
which RoadCalc will perform this straight-line transition.
You also can specify a maximum rollover percentage to have RoadCalc automatically
adjust shoulder slopes to accommodate high maximum superelevation rates. Figure 2-32
on page 51 and Figure 2-31 on page 50 show what will happen when rollover is not used,
when rollover is used on the high and low sides, and when rollover is only used on the
high side, respectively.
Figure 2-26 Superelevation Data Dialog Box
Superelevation Data Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
TR In Tangent Runout. The distance from the Beginning of Superelevation (BS) to the Point of
Curvature (PC) or to the Tangent to Spiral (TS) for a spiral curve.
X In This is the distance from the beginning of superelevation (BS) to where the adverse crown
is removed (PX).
Superelevation Data Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Y In This is the distance from the beginning of superelevation (BS) to where the outside lane
achieves reverse crown (PY).
SR In This is the distance from PX to where the maximum superelevation is achieved.
BS This is the beginning of superelevation station.
PX In This is the station at distance X after BS.
PY In This is the station at distance Y after BS.
MS In This is the station at which maximum superelevation begins.
TR Out This is the tangent runout. The distance from the end of superelevation (ES) to the point of
tangency (PT) (or the spiral to tangent for spiraled curves).
X Out This is the distance from the point where adverse crown is achieved (PX) to the end of
superelevation (ES).
Y Out This is the distance from where the outside lane achieves reverse crown (PY) to the end
of superelevation (ES).
SR Out This is the distance from the end of maximum superelevation to the point where adverse
crown is achieved (PX).
MS Out This is the point at which maximum superelevation ends.
PY Out This is the station at a distance Y before the ES.
PX Out This is the station at a distance X before the ES.
ES This is the end of superelevation station.
Distance With this option selected, enter the transition distances for superelevation.
Stations With this option selected, enter the station value at which the superelevation transitions
occur.
MSE Enter the maximum superelevation rate in this field based on the slope type.
MSE Slope Type Use this option to enter the MSE cross-slope as % Slope, H/V, V/H or Unit/Unit.
Type Specify the type of superelevation to be used. There are three types:
Type 1: The pavement is revolved about the centerline.
Type 2: The pavement is revolved about the inside superelevation limit.
Type 3: The pavement is revolved about the outside superelevation limit.
Superelevation If overlapping superelevation exists (the translation out of the first curve overlaps the
Transition transition in of the second curve) or when the tangent from the ES to next BS is within a
specified length, RoadCalc can perform a straight-line transition from the maximum
superelevation of curve 1 to the maximum superelevation of curve 2. To do this, turn the
Super Transition toggle on and select the Parameters button below the toggle.
Refer to Superelevation Transition Parameters on page 45 for more information.
Rollover Use this option to control the maximum allowable grade difference between the pavement
and shoulder.
See Rollover Parameters on page 48 for more information.
Superelevation This provides access to a calculator to solve for the TR, X, Y, and SR distances based on
Calculator a desired design speed and other inputs.
For more information, see Superelevation Calculator on page 31.
44 RoadCalc
Superelevation Transition Parameters
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA CURVE DATA SUPERELEVATION DATA SUPERELEVATION
TRANSITION PARAMETERS
If overlapping superelevation exists (the transition out of the first curve overlaps the
transition in of the second curve) or when the tangent from the ES to the next BS is less
than the minimum specified length, RoadCalc will perform a straight-line transition from
the maximum superelevation of curve 1 to the maximum superelevation of curve 2. The
transition options can be applied universally for all PIs or differently for each individual PI
by changing the Apply to options.
The figure below and Figure 2-28 on page 47 illustrate the effects of using superelevation
on compound curves and reverse curves.
Figure 2-27 Superelevation Transition on Compound Curves
46 RoadCalc
Figure 2-27 on page 46 shows that when superelevation transition is being used on
compound curves, the transition distance is used to change the typical section cross-slope
between varying maximum superelevation rates.
Figure 2-28 Superelevation Transition on Reverse Curves
Figure 2-28 illustrates the effects of using superelevation transition on reverse curves. By
looking at the cross-sections, it can be seen that a straightline transition occurs between
the 6% maximum superelevation curve to the right and the 6% maximum superelevation
curve to the left.
Figure 2-29 Superelevation Transition Parameters Dialog Box
Superelevation Transition Parameters Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Current PI Use this option to set different transition criteria for individual PIs.
All PIs Use this option to set the same transition criteria for all PIs.
Minimum Length This field defines the minimum.
to Perform
Transition
Rollover Parameters
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA CURVE DATA SUPERELEVATION DATA ROLLOVER
PARAMETERS
The rollover function adjusts the shoulder slope of a superelevated road based on a
maximum slope difference of the road slope and the shoulder slope. (Typically, maximum
algebraic slope difference between three break points: the centerline, superelevation limit
and the shoulder.) It can also adjust the inside shoulder slope to match the pavement
cross-slope as it superelevates.
When the high side rollover function is activated, the maximum slope difference and PT
code boxes become active and have default numbers in them. Enter the maximum slope
difference and the PT code of the shoulder. The maximum slope controls the slope of a
line drawn from the superelevation PT code to the PT code of the shoulder (typically 10). If
the slope difference exceeds the maximum slope, RoadCalc calculates the elevation
where the shoulder PT code should be based on the maximum slope and places the
shoulder PT code there (see Figure 2-31 on page 50).
Using the Low Side rollover toggle on the Rollover Parameters dialog box (Figure 2-33 on
page 52), RoadCalc will adjust the inside (or low-side) shoulder to match the pavement
48 RoadCalc
cross-slope superelevation rate once the pavement cross-slope equals the shoulder
cross-slope. See Figure 2-32 on page 51.
Figure 2-30 Superelevated Road with No Rollover Criteria Chapter 2: Alignments
Figure 2-31 Superelevated Road with High-side Rollover Only
50 RoadCalc
Figure 2-32 Superelevated Road with High-side and Low-side Rollover Specified
Figure 2-33 Rollover Parameters Dialog Box
Rollover Parameters Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Current PI Use this option to set different rollover criteria for individual PIs.
All PIs Use this option to set the same rollover criteria for all PIs.
Highside Use When this is toggled on, RoadCalc will change the shoulder cross-slope to meet the
Rollover maximum allowable difference in slope.
High Side PT This denotes the PT code to be placed on the typical section where the shoulder slope
Code ends.
Refer to PT Code Library on page 82 for more information.
PT Code Library Click one of these icons to gain access to the PT Code Library to add or modify PT codes.
Slope The maximum allowable cross-slope difference between the pavement and shoulder.
Lowside Use When toggled on, RoadCalc changes the inside shoulder slope to meet the pavement
Rollover cross-slope during superelevation.
Low Side PT This denotes the PT code to be placed on the typical section where the shoulder slope
Code ends.
Refer to PT Code Library on page 82 for more information.
Superelevation Calculator
CALCULATOR
The Superelevation Calculator is used when the data in the supplied AASHTO speed
tables do not pertain to the current design specifications. RoadCalc uses the AASHTO
Method 5 procedure for determining the superelevation rate (AASHTO Geometric Design
of Highways and Streets, pp 153-166, 1994). Once this is calculated, the SR distance can
be computed and the other necessary superelevation parameters are calculated and
entered into the Superelevation Data dialog box (Figure 2-26 on page 43). The equations
52 RoadCalc
RoadCalc uses from the Method 5 procedure are outlined in Superelevation Calculator on
page 31.
The degree of curve (Da) and Radius are read from the curve data for the alignment. If no
curve information was specified for the PIs, the Create Curve option will fill in that data
based on the values entered in Superelevation Calculator, as well as the superelevation
data into the Superelevation Data dialog box (Figure 2-26 on page 43). Either the Da or
radius must be entered as RoadCalc will calculate the other. The MSE (maximum
superelevation rate) is used to calculate the maximum cross-slope in a full superelevation
situation. Pavement width is used in the calculation of the superelevation runoff and is
entered in feet or meters. The cross slope is entered as a percentage and is used to
calculate the tangent runout distance. The number of lanes needs to be specified because
the superelevation runoff distance needs a multiplier applied to it if there are more than
two lanes.
The AASHTO standard lane multipliers are included in RoadCalc and may be modified or
additional lane values may be added into the lane table. Click on the MRS Parameters
button to add or modify the number of lanes and the MRS multiplier. The last parameter to
specify is whether to use spirals in the design or not. If Use Spirals is toggled on,
RoadCalc greys out the SE% field and sets the value to 100 percent. AASHTO specifies
that if spirals are used, the superelevation runoff is effected over the whole of the
transition curve. More simply, through 100 percent of the transition. If spirals are not used,
toggling this option off activates the SE field so that a percentage may be entered for how
much superelevation runoff occurs before the circular curve.
Once all the parameters are entered use the Calculate button to display the results for the
TR, X, Y, SR and spiral lengths. You can then select the Create Curve button to use these
results as the parameters for the specified PI(s). Likewise, the results can be copied into a
speed table for future use in designing curves.
Figure 2-34 Superelevation Calculator Dialog Box
Superelevation Calculator Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Design Speed Specify the design speed to be used in the superelevation calculation in MPH (or KPH).
Da This is the degree of curve (arc definition).
Radius This is the radius of the circular curve.
MSE This is the maximum superelevation limit entered as a percent slope.
Cross Slope This is the pavement cross-slope entered as a percent slope.
Lane Width This is the lane width in feet (or meters).
# of Lanes Enter the number of lanes here to determine the MRS multiplier.
SE% Enter the percentage of how much superelevation occurs before the start of the curve.
Use Spirals Toggle this option on to assume that the SE value will be 100 percent and that spiral
information is entered into the curve data dialog box or speed table.
Calculate Select this button after the Input information is entered to have RoadCalc calculate the
TR, X, Y, SR and Spiral Length.
MRS Parameters Opens the MRS Parameters dialog box (Figure 2-35 on page 55). Add or modify different
design speeds and MRS values to be used by RoadCalc. You may also add or modify the
MRS multiplier corresponding to the number of lanes specified.
For more information refer to MRS Parameters, below.
Calculation Displays the calculated values of TR, X, Y, SR and Spiral Length.
Results
Create Curve Use this option to create the circular curve and superelevation parameters for the
currently highlighted PIs. Numeric information is automatically updated in the curve data
and superelevation data dialog boxes.
For more information, refer to Create Curve on page 56.
Send to Table This button allows you to add the calculation results to the speed table of your choice.
MRS Parameters
CALCULATOR MRS PARAMETERS
The MRS Parameters command provides access to the MRS Table and the Lane Table.
The MRS Table contains a maximum relative slope value (MRS) for any design speed.
The default values are taken from the AASHTO Geometric Design of Highways and
Streets 1990 and 1994. These values may be edited or additional values may be entered.
54 RoadCalc
The Lane Table contains MRS multipliers to be used when more than two lanes are being
designed. These values are also defaulted to AASHTO specifications. They may be added
to or modified depending on your design.
Figure 2-35 MRS Parameters Dialog Box
MRS Parameters Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Design Speed This indicates the desired design speed in MPH (or KPH) corresponding to the maximum
relative slope.
MRS This is the maximum relative slope for profiles between the edge of the two-lane
pavement and the centerline.
New Design Specify additional design speeds and corresponding MRS values for RoadCalc to use.
Speed
Modify Design Click this icon to edit the existing design speeds and MRS values for the currently
Speed highlighted selection.
Delete Design Click this icon to remove the highlighted Design speed from the MRS Table.
Speed
Print MRS Table Click this icon to print the MRS Table information.
Number of Specify the number of lanes that pertain to the MRS Multiplier.
Lanes
MRS Multiplier This is the constant by which to multiply the maximum relative slope specified in the MRS
Table.
New MRS Specify additional lane and multiplier values for RoadCalc to use.
Multiplier
Modify MRS Click this icon to edit the number of lanes or the MRS multiplier for the currently
Multiplier highlighted selection.
Delete MRS Click this icon to remove the highlighted MRS Multiplier from the lane table.
Multiplier
Print Lanes Click this icon to print the lanes table information.
Tables
Create Curve
CALCULATOR CREATE CURVE
This command may be accessed from the Superelevation Calculator or from the
Horizontal Speed Tables dialog box (Figure 2-37 on page 57). Based on the curve and
superelevation parameters, either from the calculator or from the current Speed Table,
RoadCalc will write the information to the highlighted PI’s Curve Data and Superelevation
Data dialog boxes (Figure 2-25 on page 41 and Figure 2-26 on page 43, respectively). The
list of PIs has multi-select capability to highlight more than one PI to create the curve and
superelevation information for. Use the Ctrl key in combination with a mouse click to
highlight more than one individual PI or use the Shift key in combination with a mouse
click to highlight a range of PIs. The figure below shows the Create Curve dialog box.
Figure 2-36 Create Curve Dialog Box
Create Curve Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
PI List This displays all of the PIs that can have curve and superelevation data applied to.
Select All This highlights the entire list of PIs so that all of the PIs are designed with the same data.
Unselect All This unhighlights the entire list of PIs.
Speed Table This displays which speed table is being used (if applicable).
Design Speed This displays the speed for which the curves are to be designed.
Radius This is the radius that will be used to design the curve.
Da This is the degree of curve (arc definition) that will be used to design the curve.
56 RoadCalc
Horizontal Speed Tables
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA CURVE DATA HORIZONTAL SPEED TABLES
To help in selecting curve and superelevation parameters, RoadCalc provides several

speed tables. The tables give AASHTO’s recommendations for spiral lengths and
superelevation parameters based on design speeds and degrees of curve (Method 5
AASHTO, 1990, 1994). These tables can be edited and customized.
To access the Speed Tables, select the Horizontal Speed Table Data button on the
Horizontal Curve Data dialog box (Figure 2-25 on page 41). This opens the Horizontal
Speed Tables dialog box (below). A speed table has a title at the top, a list of speeds in the
left-hand list box and a table of curve parameters in the right-hand list box. The curve
parameters correspond to the highlighted speed – as different speeds are highlighted, the
curve data changes. A table may have up to 20 speeds and each speed may have up to
30 lines of curve parameters.
The tables work in two ways. First, by choosing a design speed and degree of curve or
radius, curve and superelevation data is generated for a single curve, or for all the curves
on the alignment. Second, when viewing curve data or superelevation data, RoadCalc
checks the current curve and superelevation parameters against the current speed table
and reports back the design speed. If any curve or superelevation parameters are
changed, RoadCalc updates the design speed accordingly.
The curve parameters in the speed table correspond to the similarly labeled parameters
on the Horizontal Curve Data dialog box and the Superelevation Data dialog box (Figure
2-26 on page 43). The last column, Sp L, is the spiral length.
Figure 2-37 Horizontal Speed Tables Dialog Box
Horizontal Speed Tables Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Speed Table This displays the name of the currently highlighted table.
Horizontal Click on this icon to access the Speed Table Library. This Library contains all of the Speed
Speed Tables Tables that were ever defined in RoadCalc.
Library For more information, see Horizontal Speed Table Library on page 59.
Speed This list displays the desired design speed for the curve.
Da This column displays the degree of curve (arc definition).
Radius This column displays the radius of the curve.
MSE This displays the maximum superelevation rate (% slope).
TR This is the tangent runout. The distance from the beginning of superelevation (BS) to the
point of curvature (PC) or to the tangent to spiral (TS) for a spiral curve.
X This is the distance from the beginning of superelevation (BS) to where the adverse crown
is removed (PX).
Y This is the distance from the beginning of superelevation (BS) to where the outside lane
SR This is the superelevation runoff. The distance from PX to where the maximum
superelevation is achieved.
Sp L This is the spiral length.
New Speed This option allows an additional design speed to be input and placed at the end of the
speed list.
Modify Speed Changes to the currently highlighted design speed can be made with this option.
Parameters originally set for the old speed now become the parameters for the new
speed.
Delete Speed Removes the highlighted speed and all its parameters from the current speed table.
Print Speed This prints the parameters for all of the speeds for the highlighted table.
Table
New Horizontal Input the curve and superelevation parameters for the highlighted speed.
Speed
For more information, refer to New Horizontal Speed Parameters on page 60.
Parameters
Modify Change any of the curve and superelevation parameters for the highlighted speed by
Horizontal selecting this option.
Speed For more information, refer to New Horizontal Speed Parameters on page 60.
Parameters
Delete Removes the highlighted parameters for the current speed from the current speed table.
Horizontal
Speed
Parameters
Superelevate Enters the superelevation data for the highlighted PIs based on the active speed table. If a
Curve PI contains no curve data, then it is not available to superelevate.
For more information, see Superelevate Curve on page 61.
Create Curve This command will enter the design curve and superelevation parameters into the curve
and superelevation tables for the highlighted PIs.
See Create Curve on page 56 for more information.
58 RoadCalc
Horizontal Speed Tables Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Superelevation Click this button to access the Superelevation Calculator (Figure 2-34 on page 53).
Calculator For more information, see Superelevation Calculator on page 52.
Horizontal Speed Table Library

ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA CURVE DATA HORIZONTAL SPEED TABLES HORIZONTAL
SPEED TABLE LIBRARY
The Horizontal Speed Table Library is a collection of all the speed tables ever entered into
RoadCalc.
Like the libraries of translator formats and PT Codes, the Horizontal Speed Table Library is
universal – if changes are made to it in one project, the changes are carried to all projects.
Figure 2-38 Horizontal Speed Table Library
Horizontal Speed Table Library Definitions

Options Function
New Speed Click this icon to add a new speed table name to the Speed Table Library.
Table
Modify Speed Click this icon to modify the name of the highlighted speed table.
Table
Copy Speed Use the Copy icon to copy an existing speed table so that the data can be modified.
Table
Delete Speed Click this icon to remove the highlighted speed table from the library. All speeds and
Table parameters from the table are deleted.
Print Speed Click this icon to print the parameters for all of the speeds for the highlighted table.
Table
New Horizontal Speed Parameters
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA CURVE DATA HORIZONTAL SPEED TABLES NEW
HORIZONTAL SPEED PARAMETERS
Enter the superelevation parameters for the highlighted design speed for the current
speed table. The figure below shows the New Horizontal Speed Parameters dialog box as
an example.
Figure 2-39 New Horizontal Speed Table Parameters Dialog Box
New Horizontal Speed Table Parameters Dialog Box

Option Function
Design Speed This indicates the desired design speed for the curve.
Da This is the degree of curve (arc definition).
Radius This is the radius of the curve.
MSE This is the maximum superelevation rate (% slope).
TR This is the tangent runout. The distance from the beginning of superelevation (BS) to the
point of curvature (PC) or to the tangent to spiral (TS) for a spiral curve.
X This is the distance from the beginning of superelevation (BS) to where the adverse crown
is removed (PX).
Y This is the distance from the beginning of superelevation (BS) to where the outside lane
SR This is the superelevation runoff. The distance from PX where the maximum
Spiral Length The length of spiral curve.
60 RoadCalc
Superelevate Curve
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA CURVE DATA HORIZONTAL SPEED TABLES
SUPERELEVATE CURVE
Select the Superelevate Curve command to enter the superelevation data for the
highlighted PI based on the current speed table (see the figure below).
The PIs in the list are only the PIs that contain curve data. More than one PI may be
selected to write the superelevation data to. Use the Ctrl key in combination with a mouse
click to highlight more than one individual PI or use the Shift key in combination with a
mouse click to highlight a range of PIs.
Figure 2-40 Superelevate Curve Dialog Box
Superelevate Curve Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
PI List The PIs in the list are the PIs that have curve data. More than 1 PI can be selected.
Select All Click on this to highlight all PIs in the list.
Unselect All Click on this to unhighlight all the PIs in the list.
Design Speed This is the speed to which the curve will be designed.
Combining Spirals
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA CURVE DATA COMBINING SPIRALS
Combining spirals may be entered to transition between two circular curves instead of
using compound curves or curves separated by tangents. RoadCalc also supports
combining spirals created in the Eagle Point COGO module. If using combining spirals,
the Spiral Out label on the first curve or the Spiral In label of the second curve will contain
the combining spiral length (depending on which curve has the smaller radius).
To enter combining spirals you must define the alignment PIs for the two curves and an
additional PI between them. With the intermediate PI current, select the Combining Spirals
button. Based on the position and radii of the surrounding curves, RoadCalc calculates
the length of combining spiral that can be placed between the two curves such that they
are not “thrown” or adjusted from their original points of tangency. The calculated spiral
length is then entered in the spiral out of the first curve or the spiral in of the second curve,
depending on which curve has the smaller radius. The intermediate PI that needed to be
entered is then removed leaving the two curve PIs with a combining spiral between them.
To remove the combining spiral simply enter a 0 (zero) for the spiral out or in. RoadCalc
then adds the intermediate PI back to the alignment. See the figure below.
Figure 2-41 Combining Spirals
62 RoadCalc
Figure 2-42 Combining Spirals Dialog Box
Combining Spirals Dialog Box Definition
Option Function
Curve Number Both Curve numbers for the curves being joined by a spiral are displayed here.
Da The degree of curve (arc definition) for each of the curves are displayed here.
Radius This is the radius of the circular curve for the two curves.
Spiral Length This is the calculated length of the spiral that combines the two curves in this field.
Station Data
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA STATION DATA
Enter or edit, the beginning of project (BOP) station by selecting the Station Data button in
the Edit Alignment Data dialog box (Figure 2-19 on page 34). Station equations may also
be entered through the Station Data dialog box (Figure 2-43 on page 64).
Station equations are used to assign or change the stationing at a particular location on
the alignment. An example of this would be the need to match the stationing of the existing
alignment after redesigning a curve on that alignment. If a curve was lengthened or
shortened, the difference in stationing would be made up with a station equation.
If there are station equations on the alignment, enter them with the New Station Equation
button. An unlimited number of equations can be entered, but must be maintained in the
correct order.
If station equations are defined, RoadCalc inserts annotation for them in the plan graphic
using the CAD settings for the text. If the alignment or the equations in the dialog boxes
are edited, the program erases and redraws the equations at their proper locations.
See Station Equations on page 21.
As in previous versions of RoadCalc, a cross-section must be defined at the station back
and station ahead of each station equation on the alignment.
If typical section locations or profiles have been entered and the station equations have
been modified, the stationing of these elements may change. Verify that all stationing is
correct before using processing using the Run Design command.
Figure 2-43 Station Data Dialog Box
Station Data Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Beginning This is the beginning of project station. Set to 0.00 by default, it can be changed to set the
Station stationing along the centerline alignment.
Reference Use this option to assign a particular point along the alignment of a station, so that
Station RoadCalc back-calculates the BOP Station.
For more information, see Reference Station, below.
Station Back This is the true value of the station located at the point of the equation.
Station Ahead This is the new value of the station whether greater than (gap equation) or less than
(deficit equation) the station back value.
New Station When you click on this button, a dialog box for you to enter the Station Back and Station
Equation Ahead fields displays.
Insert Station Inserts a station equation before the currently highlighted equation.
Equation
Modify Station Change the Station Back or Station Ahead data in a station equation.
Equation
Delete Station This removes the highlighted equation from the alignment. The station data updates
Equation automatically and the text is removed from the plan graphics.
Reference Station
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA STATION DATA REFERENCE STATION
The Reference Station command may be used to find the BOP Station by knowing the
station of a point along the alignment. This command is helpful to assign the BOP to a
64 RoadCalc
project where you know the station of an intersection along the alignment. Type in or
graphically pick the point (by using the PIC button) where the stationing is known, and
enter the station value. When the OK button is pressed, RoadCalc subtracts the length of
the alignment (up to the point selected) from the station entered, to calculate the BOP
station.
Figure 2-44 Reference Station Dialog Box
Reference Station Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Node ID Enter the Node ID numerically or graphically, that represents the point at which the station
is known. RoadCalc back-calculates the BOP Station.
Northing This is the Northing value (Y-coordinate) of the known point.
Easting This is the Easting value (X-coordinate) of the known point.
Station Enter the known station of the selected point so that RoadCalc can back-calculate the
BOP.
Pick in CAD Use this button to select objects or points in CAD to retrieve information from the graphic.
Preview Alignment Graphics

ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS EDIT DATA PREVIEW ALIGNMENT GRAPHICS
ICON:
The Preview Alignment Graphic command is used to display the defined alignment
graphically in a window rather than through CAD. No graphic modifications can be made,
however, the graphics can be updated when a numeric change is made.
For more information, refer to Preview Object in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Manage Alignments
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS MANAGE
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcalman

Any additional alignments that are created, as well as the default alignments (Centerline,
ROW Left and ROW Right) display in the Manage Alignments dialog box (Figure 2-45 on
page 67), also referred to as the Alignment Manager. The Alignment Manager displays
when Manage is selected from the Alignments pull-down menu. This allows alignments to
be added, copied, modified or deleted from the list, and allows changes to be made to the
settings for an alignment.
The listing of alignments is a subset of the all of the alignments defined in the project that
are to be used by RoadCalc for a particular corridor design. By default, three alignments
are named within the sub-project (Centerline, ROW Left and ROW Right) because they
have special meaning. These alignments get added to the project’s Alignment Database
as soon as the alignment geometry is defined. You can define alignment geometry using
the Edit Alignment Data command, by using the Convert Objects to Alignment command
or by associating alignments that are already defined within the project.
The Centerline alignment is used as the baseline, or the alignment on which cross-section
stations are based. If an alignment already exists within the project that should be used in
this fashion, highlight the Centerline alignment in the Manage Alignments dialog box
(Figure 2-45 on page 67) and select Associate Alignment. This displays the Associate
Alignment dialog box (Figure 2-47 on page 70), which lists all of the project alignments.
From this listing you can select the alignment geometry you wish to use as the sub-
project’s Centerline either copying the alignment to another name or by directly editing the
previously defined alignment.
See Associate Alignment on page 69.
As an alternative, use the commands within RoadCalc (Edit Alignment Data, Horizontal
Curve Data, etc.) to define the alignment including curve, spiral and superelevation
parameters. Once information for an alignment exists, that alignment name gets added to
the project Alignment Database.
See Edit Alignment Data on page 34.
If the catchpoints on the sub-project are to be constrained by a right-of-way (R.O.W.) line,
enter the geometry of the R.O.W. for the left and/or right sides of the centerline. To enter a
left or right-of-way line, select ROW Left or ROW Right in the Edit Alignment Data dialog
box (Figure 2-19 on page 34).
See Right-of-Way Alignments on page 15.
You may also establish special alignments other than those listed above to control the
offsets of certain points on the typical sections. Add these additional alignments by using
66 RoadCalc
the New Alignment command which allows you to specify the name of the alignment.
Then use the tools mentioned before to create the alignment geometry (either associating
an alignment that is already defined, using the Convert Objects to Alignment command
and/or using the Edit Alignment Data commands).
You no longer need to specify the side, PT Code, Control Type or Controlling PT Code
when adding a new alignment. These settings are defined within the Associate Alignments
and Profiles command found in the Process menu.
Figure 2-45 Manage Alignments Dialog Box
Manage Alignments Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Alignment This is the number assigned to an alignment by RoadCalc. Alignments 1-3 cannot be
Number deleted as they have special meaning within the sub-project.
Alignment Name This is the specified description of the alignment.
Drawing/Design This is the path to the drawing or design file where the alignment graphic resides.
File Path
New Alignment This adds a special alignment to the Alignment manager. Use the Edit Alignment Data
command to enter in the PI, curve superelevation and stationing data or use the Associate
Alignment command to use an alignment already defined within the project.
Refer to New Alignment on page 68 for more information.
Modify Click this icon to edit the Name of the highlighted Alignment.
Alignment
Refer to New Alignment on page 68 for more information
Copy Alignment This copies the highlighted alignment data and graphic to a new alignment name and
adds it to the Alignment Database.
Delete This removes the highlighted alignment data and graphic from the project, including the
Alignment Alignment Database. All PI information is deleted.
CAD Settings Assign the CAD properties to the Alignment graphic using this command.
Generate This allows you to print the Listing of Alignments, the PI data, the Horizontal Curve Data,
Alignment Speed Tables, MRS Tables and Lane Table.
Reports
Refer to Generate Alignment Reports on page 79 for more information.
Manage Alignments Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Associate Use this command to associate an alignment that is already defined within the project.
Alignment Highlight the alignment in the alignment manager listing that you want to associate a
defined alignment to and select the Associate Alignment command. After selecting the
alignment in the Associate Alignments dialog box choose OK. The alignment name in
RoadCalc is changed to match the name in the Alignment Database and the Drawing
Path column now indicates the alignment is defined in some CAD graphic. If you
associate the wrong alignment, use the Associate Alignments command again,
highlighting the proper alignment on the Alignment Manager and in the Associate
Alignment dialog box (Figure 2-47 on page 70).
Remove This command removes the association of the data in the Alignment Database with the
Association alignment highlighted. If you remove the association with one of the default alignments
(numbers 1, 2 or 3) the alignment name and data is kept in the Alignment Database and
the sub-project number is set to 0. The alignment name in the Manage Alignments dialog
box is returned to the default (either Centerline, ROW Left or ROW Right) and is marked
as “Not Defined.” The data can no longer be edited within RoadCalc. If the Remove
Association is performed on an alignment other than the defaults, the same things happen
except the alignment name within the Manage Alignments dialog box is set to “Undefined
Alignment #” where # is the number of the alignment in the list.
New Alignment
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS MANAGE NEW ALIGNMENT
This command adds a special horizontal alignment name to the list of alignments in the
Alignment Manager. These alignments are used in conjunction with profiles and typical
sections to control what the design cross-sections will look like.
Define special horizontal alignments, such as turning or passing lanes, by clicking on the
New Alignment button from the Alignment Manager. The New Alignment dialog box
(below) displays. From this box, enter the alignment name. Then use the Associate
Alignment command to use an alignment already defined within the project or use the
commands within RoadCalc to define the geometry of the alignment (Edit Alignment Data
or Convert Objects to Alignment).
You no longer need to specify the side, PT code, control type or controlling PT code when
adding a new alignment. These settings are defined with the Associate Alignments and
Profiles command found in the Process menu.
Figure 2-46 New Alignment Dialog Box
68 RoadCalc
New Alignment Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Alignment Enter the name assigned to the special alignment. This is for reference only.
Associate Alignment
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS MANAGE ASSOCIATE ALIGNMENT
When you highlight an alignment in the Manage Alignments dialog box (Figure 2-45 on
page 67) and select the Associate Alignment command the dialog box in Figure 2-47 on
page 70 displays. This allows you to select an alignment that is already defined within the
project as an alignment for the current sub-project. Use the PIC button to graphically
select the alignment or highlight the name in the list. When the OK button is selected on
the dialog box, you are prompted to either make a copy of the selected alignment or to use
the alignment data directly out of the Alignment Database without making a copy.
When you choose to make a copy of the alignment, another entry will be made into the
Alignment Database with the RoadCalc alignment name and sub-project information that
is a duplicate of the chosen alignment. Any modifications made within RoadCalc are
written to the copied alignment.
If you choose to associate the selected alignment, RoadCalc accesses the alignment
directly from the database. When a change is made to the alignment in RoadCalc, that
change is immediately written to the project Alignment Database. If the path to the
associated alignment is to your current drawing, changes made to the alignment data
using the Edit Alignment Data command will also immediately affect the alignment
graphic.
If you associate the wrong alignment, use the Associate Alignment command again,
highlighting the proper alignment on the Alignment Manager and in the Associate
Alignments dialog box. If you no longer wish to use a project alignment and would like to
define the RoadCalc alignment with different data, use the Remove Association
command. This leaves the alignment in the project Alignment Database but removes the
link that was made with the alignment in the Manage Alignments command. If you wish to
completely remove an alignment from the project use the Delete Alignments command on
the Manage Alignments dialog box. This not only removes it from the list but it also deletes
all PI data from the Alignment Database and alignment CAD graphic.
As changes are made to the alignment data, the changes are automatically saved to the
Alignment Database and the alignment graphic is updated immediately if you are editing it
in the alignment’s drawing/design file. When you close the Edit Alignment Data dialog box
and you are not in the proper drawing/design file and if no other user is accessing that
drawing/design file, you will be prompted to save changes in your current CAD graphic.
Then RoadCalc will open the alignment drawing, update the graphic and redisplay your
previous CAD graphic. If another user is currently accessing the alignment drawing/design
file you will be prompted to send a message to the user informing them why a change was
made. When that user runs another Eagle Point command, a dialog box will appear with a
warning about who changed what alignment and that Eagle Point is going to update the
graphic alignment. The message will also inform that user to save changes to that CAD
graphic so that the data and graphic remain in sync.
For more information refer to Alignment Database on page 9.
Figure 2-47 Associate Alignment Dialog Box
Associate Alignment Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
RoadCalc This text indicates what RoadCalc alignment to which you are going to associate some
Alignment alignment. It is the name of the alignment as it appears in the Manage Alignments dialog
box (Figure 2-45 on page 67). If you choose to Associate the alignment instead of making
a copy of it, the RoadCalc alignment name will be changed to match the alignment name
in the Alignment Database.
Selected This indicates the alignment that is selected from the project Alignment Database for the
Alignment association. It is the highlighted alignment in the list or the alignment that was selected
from CAD using the PIC button.
PIC button Use this command to graphically select the desired alignment with which to make the
association.
Project This is a listing of all of the alignments in the project Alignment Database. If an alignment
Alignments list has been associated, the Sub-Project column displays the sub-project number and name
with which the alignment was associated. The path to the drawing that contains the
alignment graphic is also displayed.
70 RoadCalc
Convert Objects to Alignment
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS CONVERT OBJECTS TO ALIGNMENT
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcalign

ICON:
This command may be used to convert existing lines, arcs, spirals and complex objects
into an alignment.
You may graphically select the CAD objects, specify the endpoint to start stationing from
and enter the starting station and an alignment name to place an alignment in a sub-
project.
Figure 2-48 Convert Objects to Alignment Dialog Box
Convert Objects to Alignment Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Alignment Select the alignment to which you want the objects to be converted.
Manage This provides access to the Alignment Manager to add a new alignment name.
Alignments
For more information, see Manage Alignments on page 66.
Beginning This is the beginning of the project station. It is 0.00 by default and can be changed to set
Station the stationing along the centerline alignment.
Station Data This button allows you to add and remove station equations on the centerline alignments.
For more information, see Station Data on page 63.
Defined Click on this button to display a list of all of the project alignments to use as reference.
Alignments
QuickSteps
1. Select Alignments Æ Convert Objects to Alignments.
You are prompted:
Select the objects you wish to convert:
2. Graphically select the objects to convert to an alignment. When you are done
selecting objects, press the Enter key in AutoCAD/BricsCad or the Reset button
on your pointing device in MicroStation.
You are prompted:
Pick a point near the beginning of the alignment:
3. Select a point near the beginning to establish the station direction of the
alignment.
The Convert Object to Alignment dialog box (Figure 2-48 on page 71) displays.
4. Select an alignment name and enter the beginning station value.
5. You may set up station equations for the alignment, if desired, using the Station
Data button.
6. You may list the names of the alignments already defined in the project by using
the Defined Alignments button.
7. Click on Apply to finish converting the objects to an alignment.
The alignment graphic is redrawn using the CAD properties defined in the RoadCalc
Alignment CAD Settings command.
Offset Alignments
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS OFFSET
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcaloff

RoadCalc allows you to create an alignment by entering stations and offsets from an
alignment already defined. The station value entered will be based on the centerline
stationing. A negative offset value means the point entered will be located on the left side
of the active alignment whereas a positive value will locate the point to the right. To
construct the offset alignment graphic, enter a from station and offset pair and a to station
and offset pair and select the Apply button. This draws the offset alignment according to
the stations and offsets entered. The values that were in the To Station and Offset edit
fields are now listed in the From Station and Offset edit fields so that additional station and
offset values can be applied. The CAD Settings button provides access to set the offset
alignment’s CAD properties.
The Follow Curve toggle will offset the circular curves and spirals if on. If this is toggled off,
the offset alignment will have a straight line drawn between the station-offset pairs
entered.
Enter negative values for the offset to place a PI to the left of the active alignment.
72 RoadCalc
Once an offset alignment is placed graphically, turn it into a design alignment by using the
Convert Objects to Alignment command.
Figure 2-49 Offset Alignment Dialog Box
Offset Alignment Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Alignment to Select which defined RoadCalc alignment to offset.
Offset
From Station Enter the centerline station value where the first point of the offset line segment is to
begin. Once the first segment is offset, the To Station value is placed here to begin the
next segment of the offset line.
From Offset Enter the perpendicular offset value where the first point of the offset line is to begin. Enter
a negative value to offset the specified alignment to the left side. Once the first segment is
offset, the To Offset value is placed here to begin the next segment of the offset line.
To Station Enter the centerline station value where the last point of the offset line segment is to end.
To Offset Enter the perpendicular offset value where the last point of the offset line segment is to
end.
Follow Curve With this option on, the offset alignment will follow curves and spirals.
CAD Settings Assign the CAD properties to the offset line using this command. For more information,
refer to CAD Settings in the Getting Started manual.
Manage Utilities
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS MANAGE UTILITIES
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcutil

The Manage Utilities command provides a means to define three-dimensional geometry
as a utility so that it appears graphically when viewing RoadCalc cross-sections and
profiles. When you define a new utility you provide a Name and other information that is
used to represent what the Utility looks like when it is viewed in cross-section and in
profile. The Annotation button allows you to set how the utility will be annotated. You then
use the Convert Objects to Utility command found on the Manage Utilities dialog box to
define the horizontal and vertical geometry of the utility.
Utilities are stored on a per-project basis. When utilities get defined within a sub-project,
that definition is available to other sub-projects within the same project. That way, when
you are using multiple sub-projects within a particular area, you only need to define the
utility once, and depending on the sub-project, RoadCalc displays the utility whenever it
encounters it. With the utility geometry defined, RoadCalc displays the utility when you
are viewing cross-sections, creating cross-section sheets and when viewing the profile.
For more information, see Utility Annotation Settings on page 76.
Figure 2-50 Manage Utilities Dialog Box
Manage Utilities Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Number This column displays the number of the utility.
Name This column displays the name of the utility. This name appears within every sub-project
of a project that has utilities defined.
Defined This column indicates if the utility geometry has been defined using the Convert Objects to
Utility command. “Yes” means the utility has been defined at least once, “No” indicates
that the Convert Objects to Utility command has not yet been issued.
Elevation Type This displays the elevation type with which the utility is defined. Set it to either Invert or
Crown to control how the cross-section and profile representation of the utility is
displayed.
Diameter Specify the diameter of the utility in inches (or millimeters). This value is always used
when displaying the utility profile and may be used to display the utility in cross-section if a
cross-section symbol is not defined. If the utility does not have a diameter (i.e. an
underground cable) specify the diameter to be very small.
New Utility This command allows you to add a new utility to the project. After specifying the Name
and display properties, use the Convert Objects to Utility command to define the three-
dimensional geometry.
For more information see New Utility on page 75.
74 RoadCalc
Manage Utilities Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Modify Utility Use this command to Modify the Name, Elevation Type, Diameter and other cross-section
symbol properties of the highlighted utility.
This command is similar to the New Utility command. For more information see New
Utility, below.
Delete Utility This removes the currently highlighted utility from the project.
Utility CAD Assign the CAD properties to the utility using this command.
Settings
Convert Objects Use this command to define the horizontal and vertical geometry of the utility by
to Utility highlighting a utility in the Utility Manager and selecting this command. The objects you
can select must have the proper three-dimensional information (x, y and z coordinates) on
every vertex of the utility.
Annotation Use this command to control what gets placed as annotation next to the utility.
Settings
New Utility
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS MANAGE UTILITIES NEW UTILITY
The New Utility dialog box (below) is used to establish a name and properties of a utility.
These settings control how the utility will look when it is displayed in cross-section or in
profile. The diameter entered is used to show the utility section as a circle or ellipse (if a
vertical stretch factor is being applied). When the profile of the utility is displayed, the
diameter is used to draw parallel lines. Enter very small diameters for utilities such as
underground cable. After entering a new utility, use the Convert Objects to utility command
on the Manage Utilities dialog box (Figure 2-50 on page 74).
Figure 2-51 New Utility Dialog Box
New Utility Dialog Box Definitions

Object Function
Name This field displays the name of the utility. This name appears within every sub-project of a
project that has utilities defined.
New Utility Dialog Box Definitions
Object Function
Elevation Type This displays the elevation type that the utility is defined with. It is either Invert or Crown,
which controls how the cross-section and profile representation of the utility is displayed.
Diameter Specify the diameter of the utility in inches (or millimeters). This value is always used
when displaying the utility profile and may be used to display the utility in cross-section if a
cross-section symbol is not defined. If the utility does not have a diameter (i.e. an
underground cable) specify the diameter to be very small.
Fill Toggle this option on if you wish to see the cross-section symbol filled (or hatched) when it
is displayed.
Utility Annotation Settings

ALIGNMENTS MANAGE UTILITIES ANNOTATION SETTINGS
The Annotation Settings button on the Manage Utilities dialog box (Figure 2-50 on page
74) provides access to the display and annotation settings of each utility. The settings in
the upper portion of the Utility Annotation Settings dialog box (Figure 2-52 on page 77)
control what gets annotated with every utility that is viewed in either a RoadCalc Cross-
Section view (singly in CAD, in the Query Cross-Section dialog box or in Cross-Section
Sheets) or a RoadCalc Profile view. Toggle the options on to see the name, station, offset,
elevation, diameter or a user-defined note. The Label setting controls what text is placed
for each piece of annotation. The <> brackets indicate where RoadCalc will insert the
calculated value. The Order column determines in what sequence the annotation appears
and the Annotation Placement setting controls whether the text is placed above, below, to
the left or to the right of the utility. The lower portion of the dialog box contains settings for
how RoadCalc displays the utility when RoadCalc Cross-sections or RoadCalc Profiles
are viewed.
The Cross-Section Display Distance is used by RoadCalc to determine which utilities
within the specified distance should be viewed when looking at an individual cross-section.
The distance is used to calculate a boundary around a cross-section. If the utility crosses
into that boundary it is displayed. How the utility is shown in the Cross-Section view is
determined by the angle from parallel tolerance. If the utility is within the specified angle
tolerance from the cross-section line, it is displayed in profile form. If it is outside the angle
tolerance, every vertex of the utility (including if it intersects the cross-section line) will be
shown as a utility cross-section. Figure 2-53 on page 78 shows the result of using a cross-
section display distance of 50 feet and an angle from parallel tolerance of 45 degrees.
The Profile Display Settings are very similar to the Cross-Section Display settings except
they control how the utility should be drawn when looking at a RoadCalc profile view. The
Profile Display distance is used to offset the centerline alignment both left and right by the
specified amount. Then, RoadCalc checks if the utility falls within the bounding corridor. If
it does, the utility is going to be shown in the Profile View. The Profile Angle from parallel
76 RoadCalc
tolerance is then used to determine whether the utility is displayed as a profile or cross-
section. If the utility is within the angle tolerance measured from the centerline, it is
displayed in profile form. If it is outside the tolerance, every vertex of the utility (including if
it intersects the centerline alignment) will be shown as a utility cross-section. Figure 2-54
on page 79 shows the result of using a Profile Display Distance of 150 feet and an Angle
from parallel tolerance of 60 degrees.
Figure 2-52 Utility Annotation Settings Dialog Box
Utility Annotation Settings Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Utility This drop list contains every utility that is defined in the Manage Utilities dialog box (Figure
2-50 on page 74). Each utility has its own settings for the display and annotation of when
it’s viewed.
Annotation The toggles for each item control whether or not that item should be annotated when the
utility is viewed. The label lets you specify what text appears with the utility and the order
controls the sequence in which the labels are placed. Items that can be annotated include
the name, station, offset, elevation, diameter or a user-defined note.
Annotation This option controls where the Annotation items appear when the utility is viewed. Choose
Placement to place the annotation above, below, to the left or right of the utility.
Cross-Section This distance defines the boundary in which RoadCalc will search for the utility to see if it
Display Distance should be displayed in a RoadCalc cross-section. The distance is used to offset the
cross-section line and form a boundary around the cross-section. If the utility falls inside
the boundary, it is seen in the RoadCalc cross-section view.
Utility Annotation Settings Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Cross-Section This angle tolerance (measured in degrees) is used to determine whether a utility is seen
Angle from as a profile in a RoadCalc cross-section view. If the closest utility leg to the cross-section
parallel is within the tolerance, it is displayed in profile form.
tolerance
Profile Display This distance defines the boundary in which RoadCalc will search for the utility to see if it
Distance should be displayed in a RoadCalc profile. The distance is used to offset the centerline
alignment and form a boundary around it. If the utility falls inside the boundary, it is seen in
the RoadCalc profile view.
Profile Angle This angle tolerance (measured in degrees) is used to determine whether a utility
from parallel segment (leg) is seen as a profile in a RoadCalc profile view. If a utility leg is within this
tolerance tolerance, it is displayed in profile form.
Example 1
The following is an example of how RoadCalc displays utilities in a cross-section view.
The top portion of the diagram shows the Plan view of the Centerline alignment and three
utilities. The lower portion shows the Station 10+00 cross-section. A Display Distance of
50 feet and an Angle from Parallel tolerance of 45 degrees are assumed.
Figure 2-53 Utilities Displayed in a RoadCalc Cross-Section View
78 RoadCalc
Example 2
The following is an example of how RoadCalc displays utilities in a profile view. The top
portion of the diagram shows the Plan view of the Centerline alignment and three utilities.
the lower portion shows the road profile and the three utilities. A display distance of 150
feet and an angle from parallel tolerance of 60 degrees are assumed.
Figure 2-54 Utilities Displayed in a RoadCalc Profile View
Generate Alignment Reports

ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS GENERATE REPORTS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcalrep

To print an alignment report to a file or printer, select Generate Reports from the
Alignments menu or click on the Print button from the Edit Alignment Data dialog box
(Figure 2-19 on page 34). The Generate Alignment Reports dialog box (Figure 2-55 on
page 80) displays.
Many different reports can be generated from this command. By toggling on the different
options, the reports will be printed according to your Print Setup options.
The Alignment Listing toggle will produce a printout of the alignments contained in the
Alignment Manager. The alignment number, name and alignment drawing/design file for
each alignment will be printed.
The PI Data and Horizontal Curve Data toggles will print information for the alignment
name selected. The last choice in the Alignment drop list is all the alignments which will
print out the toggled information for every alignment in the Manager. With the PI Data
toggle on, each PI’s station, Northing, Easting, angle and distance values along with any
station equations for that alignment are printed. If the Horizontal Curve Data toggle is on,
the Circular Curve Spiral and Superelevation parameters are printed along with the
Stations and Coordinates of “key” stations (PC, SC, PI, CS, RP, etc.). If the Horizontal
Speed Tables option is toggled on, the speed table name in the Speed Table drop list will
be printed with all of the superelevation parameters for every speed in that table. The last
choice in the drop list is All Speed Tables, which will print out the information for every
horizontal speed table defined.
The MRS and lane tables can also be printed out by toggling on those options.
Figure 2-55 Generate Alignment Reports Dialog Box
Generate Alignment Reports Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Alignment When this is toggled on, RoadCalc prints the alignment number, name, and alignment
Listing drawing/design file for all alignments in the Alignment Manager.
Individual This denotes which alignment will be printed if either the PI Data toggle or Horizontal
Alignments Curve Data toggle is on.
Name
PI Data When this is toggled on, RoadCalc prints the coordinate and angle and distance
information for each PI.
Horizontal Curve When this is toggled on, RoadCalc prints the curve, spiral and superelevation information
Data entered for each PI.
80 RoadCalc
Generate Alignment Reports Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Horizontal This denotes which speed table will be printed if the toggle below is turned on.
Speed Tables
Name
Horizontal Toggle this on to prints the speed table information for the selected table.
Speed Tables
MRS Table This option prints the MRS table information.
Lane Table This option prints the lane table information.
View Alignment Graphics
ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS VIEW ALIGNMENT GRAPHICS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcalview
ICON:
Use the View Alignment Graphics command to display the alignment graphics placed in
CAD.
If numeric changes were made to the alignment while the Plan Graphic was not loaded,
RoadCalc will display the Synchronize Graphics and Data dialog box (Figure 2-56 on
page 82) asking which information is correct – the graphic representation or numeric.
See Synchronize Graphics and Data, below.
Synchronize Graphics and Data

ROADCALC ALIGNMENTS SYNCHRONIZE GRAPHICS & DATA
KEY-IN COMMAND: syncalignments
ICON:
This command can be accessed to verify that the graphic representation of a RoadCalc
object matches the numeric information. If differences exist, you determine whether the
graphic or numeric information is correct. Selecting the Update Graphics button will write
the numeric information to the graphic. Selecting the Update Data button will write the
graphic information to the numeric.
This dialog box will also automatically display if RoadCalc finds any differences when
accessing a data set and corresponding graphic.
This option is unavailable until the plan CAD graphic is loaded.
Figure 2-56 Synchronize Graphics and Data Dialog Box
Synchronize Graphics and Data Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Update Graphic Click on this button to update the alignment graphics in CAD from the numeric data.
Update Data After graphically modifying a RoadCalc alignment, use this command to update the
numeric data based on the graphic changes.
PT Code Library
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcptcode
PT codes are used in many different ways throughout RoadCalc. The most common use
is to denote a point on a typical section that is to change to meet the offset of a special
alignment or the elevation of a special profile. A PT code is associated to an alignment
and/or a profile using the Associate Alignments and Profiles command found in the
Process menu. When that same PT code is encountered by RoadCalc during its
processing of a typical section, it moves that point to meet the alignment and/or profile.
Another use for PT codes is for annotation and querying of certain break-points on the
design cross-sections. Offsets and elevations may be annotated in cross-section plots by
referencing PT Codes. Exporting points to ASCII files references which shots are to be
translated by PT Codes.
When a new PT Code is added to the library that PT Code is available to all sub-projects.
82 RoadCalc
There are 30 default PT Codes that cannot have their numbers changed but can have
their descriptions and blocks/cells changed. Because these codes have special meaning
to RoadCalc they also cannot be deleted from the PT Code Library.
PT Code Use
-16 through -13 These codes are used to denote the four Superelevation Limit points on a divided
highway typical section. They produce subsurface superelevation like the -2 PT Code
but are available to also use as special Alignment PT Codes that can be used to
widen and narrow the typical section geometry.
-6 through -3 These codes are used to denote the four Superelevation Limit points on a divided
highway typical section that follow the same rules as the 2 PT Code. They produce
subsurface superelevation like the 2 PT Code of previous releases but are available
to also use as special Alignment PT Codes that can be used to widen and narrow the
typical section geometry.
-1 This is used to denote an optional point of rotation for superelevation other than what
Types 1, 2 and 3 use.
0 This is used to denote a point on a cross-section that is not assigned any special
properties.
1 This code is used to represent the point on the typical section that is controlled by the
Centerline Alignment and Centerline Profile.
2 This code is used to denote the limits of superelevation when using RoadCalc’s
automatic superelevation. PT Codes -6 through -3 are now available to produce the
same type of superelevation as PT Code 2 when used for divided highways.
3 and 4 This code is used to denote the Toe of Foreslope and Toe of Cutslope or where a
ditch segment begins and ends. It is used during the Run Design command when a
width controlled slope or a R.O.W. controlled slope is processed or when the Fill
Ditches toggle is on.
998 and 999 These codes are used on the left and right sides of a typical section to denote the
ditch stake points on the subgrade (lowest) surface. When these codes exist on the
foreslope, the 1004 and 1005 PT codes get placed by RoadCalc during processing
onto the cut catchslope at the same elevation.
1000 and 1001 These codes represent the left and right catchpoints (or daylight points) respectively.
1002 and 1003 These codes get placed at the break point of a Clear Zone slope during the
processing of the Run Design command.
1004 and 1005 These codes get processed onto the final cut catchslope of a processed typical
section if the PT codes of 998 and 999 are placed onto the typical section on the
foreslope of a ditch.
Figure 2-57 PT Code Library
PT Code Library Definitions

Option Function
PT Code This indicates the number used to identify different PT codes.
Description This is an alphanumeric description for the PT code. This will be the description that
displays in the description field of a data translated cross-section file.
New PT Code Enter a positive number up to four digits long and an alphanumeric description for a new
PT code. You may optionally specify a block (or cell in MicroStation) to display a symbol
on a cross-section where the PT code exists. The new PT code appears in ascending
order within the list.
Modify PT Code Click on this icon to change the number, description or block/cell name of the highlighted
PT code. You cannot modify the PT code number of the 30 default entries (PT codes -16
through 11 and 998 through 1005).
Delete PT Code Click on this icon to removes the highlighted PT Code from the library. You cannot delete
the 30 default entries in the PT code library (PT codes -16 through 11 and 998 through
1005).
Print PT Code Click on this icon to print all information associated with the PT Codes in the library.
Library
84 RoadCalc
CROSS-
SECTIONS CHAPTER
In this chapter:
Cross-Sections Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Manage Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Edit Cross-Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Pin Slope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Extract Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Preview Cross-Section from Surface Model . . . . 123
Generate Subsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
3
Generate Cross-Section Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Import Cross-Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Export Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Create User Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
View Cross-Section Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Cross-Section Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Synchronize Cross-Section Graphics and Data . 143
Chapter 3: Cross-Sections 85
Cross-Sections Concepts
The commands found in the Cross-Sections menu allow you to input, edit and translate
the cross-sectional data. Enter and edit the data directly with the Edit Cross-Sections
routine, or bring the cross-section data into RoadCalc from outside sources using the
Extract Cross-Sections or the Import Cross-Sections routines.
Original Surfaces
An original surface represents the existing, or “in-place” material on a site. RoadCalc
always needs at least one original ground surface. By default, a surface named “Original”
exists in the Original Surface Manager. Each surface represents the top of a material. The
materials that exist on-site are then quantified during processing of the typical sections so
that an earthwork report may be developed.
The order in which the surface names appear should reflect how the materials are situated
in the ground. If a site contains a layer of topsoil, then a layer of clay and then a limestone
layer, the surfaces should appear in that same order. If another material is introduced
further down station that lies above the limestone, it should be inserted as a surface name
before the limestone and after the clay.
The removal method specifies how the material will be treated during volume calculations.
By setting a surface to a normal removal method, RoadCalc removes the material in a cut
situation, adds the amount to the total cut volume and then may re-use the material later
for balancing a fill situation. A surface marked as Normal removal has nothing done to it in
a fill situation. The Strip removal method is intended to be used on a undesired or
unsuitable building material like topsoil or peat. By specifying a Strip removal method for a
surface, RoadCalc removes the material in a cut situation and adds the amount to the
total cut. The same amount is then also added to the fill needed at that station because it
is assumed the material is taken off-site or is used only as a top “dressing” and may not be
used as fill. In a fill situation, a strip material is removed between the typical section catch-
points as well. As in a cut situation, this amount of material is added to the total cut volume
and fill volume. See Figure 3-1 on page 87. Once a material that has a Normal removal
86 RoadCalc
method is added to the Original Surface Manager, another material beneath it cannot have
a strip removal method set.
Chapter 3: Cross-
Sections
Figure 3-1 Strip Material in a Fill Situation
A Type is also set on subsurfaces (surfaces other than the topmost surface). This option is
used when entering data for these surfaces and using the Generate Subsurfaces
command to approximate what the subsurface looks like. Generally, a few core samples
are taken on a site to determine how the underlying surfaces are situated. By marking a
surface as a parallel surface, a single shot for a subsurface may be added and RoadCalc
will approximate what the surface looks like by adding more shots automatically at the
same depth as the entered shot. A parallel surface may have varying depths at different
stations on a job. An Absolute surface type is used for subsurfaces that are more planar,
or “shelf-like,” such as limestone and bedrock. When a shot is entered, additional shots
are generated at the constant elevation of the shot entered. An existing pavement type
surface is similar to a parallel type surface and is used to represent an existing roadbed in
a cross-section. The difference is that only three shots are entered and they may be
keyed-in by station and offset or by station and alignment. When generating subsurfaces,
RoadCalc also ties the existing pavement surface vertically into the topmost original
ground surface, providing a closed surface from which volumes can be calculated.
The Automatic Point Generation option determines whether or not RoadCalc will add
additional shots for the subsurface. If automatic point generation is turned off for a
particular surface, RoadCalc will not generate any extra points during entry and edit, but
when you switch to a different cross-section or different surface, RoadCalc makes sure
the subsurface extends out as far as the ground surface. If it doesn’t, then points will be
generated so that it does.
Generating Subsurfaces
If the sub-project has original subsurfaces, the subsurface data need not be entered at
every station. RoadCalc provides a Generate Subsurfaces command that interpolates
subsurface data from the control data entered. RoadCalc uses the control stations to
make a surface model for the subsurfaces, then uses this model to interpolate subsurface
data for the intermediate sections.
This feature is also useful if subsurface data exists for only a few stations. If soil borings
have been taken at every 10th station, enter the ground surface data for every station and
enter subsurface data for the stations with the boring data. Mark the sections with
subsurface data as control stations and create the intermediate subsurface data with the
Generate Subsurfaces command.
Whether a subsurface is labeled as Parallel, Absolute or Existing Pavement determines
how RoadCalc handles the data during the subsurface generation process. For a Parallel
surface, RoadCalc first converts the offsets and elevations of the surface into offsets and
depths, and then builds a triangulated network. At the interpolated stations, RoadCalc
converts the depths back to elevations and writes the data to the disk. This results in
surfaces that are more or less “parallel” to the ground surface. An Absolute surface does
not have its elevations converted to depths, so the resulting interpolated surfaces are not
affected by the contour of the ground surface. Figure 3-2 on page 89 illustrates the
difference. An existing pavement surface is generated similarly to a parallel surface except
88 RoadCalc
the surface ties in vertically to the topmost original ground surface at the left and right
offsets entered.
Figure 3-2 Generating Subsurfaces
Chapter 3: Cross-
On original surfaces, a point may never be above an overlying surface or below an
Sections
underlying one. If a point that violates this rule is entered, RoadCalc gives an error
message. When RoadCalc generates a subsurface with automatic point generation, such
a surface conflict may occur. If it does, RoadCalc modifies the generated surface to
prevent the surfaces from crossing. Figure 3-3, below, illustrates this.
Figure 3-3 Modified Subsurface
Design Surfaces
A design surface is used to represent the materials that are being placed on-site.
Generally, they are developed by processing typical sections onto original ground
surfaces, but they may also be hand entered, imported from ASCII files or extracted from
surface models. There are three different types assigned to a design surface name –
Normal, Undercut and Overbreak.
A Normal type is assigned to surfaces that are defined on a typical section. This would be
used for surfaces ranging from concrete, asphalt, curb and gutter, shoulder, medians, to
gravel, subbase, binder courses and subgrade.
Defining an undercut type surface is a way of removing a section of existing material from
the project and filling it in with a different material. For example, use undercut if you are
placing a road through a marshy area. Some of the marsh ground may need to be
replaced and filled with crushed rock. In this case, an undercut zone would be specified.
Undercut may also be used if there is a design cut line above the original ground surface.
In this instance, RoadCalc would cut below the original ground surface and fill the cut
area with a different material. When earthwork volumes are calculated, you may choose to
include or not to include the undercut volume in the design earthwork settings. You can
ignore the undercut line by indicating in the status window that undercut volumes aren’t to
be included. The first illustration (A) in the figure below shows when undercut volumes are
not included. If RoadCalc is told to include undercut in the volume calculations, the
program adds any cut material from the undercut “zone”’ to the cut volumes, and adds the
same amount to the fill volumes, as the second illustration (B) in Figure 3-4 shows.
Figure 3-4 Undercut Type Surfaces
If a surface is marked as an overbreak type surface, RoadCalc allows an overbreak line to

be created as part of the design (see Figure 3-5 on page 91). With this line, volumes can
be separated from actual surfaces into volumes inside the overbreak line and volumes
outside the line. For example, if the contractor isn’t paid for any cutting outside a tolerance
line, enter the tolerance line as an overbreak line. Requesting only the volumes inside the
overbreak line will give the pay quantity. In Figure 3-5 on page 91, the shaded region
represents material outside the overbreak line.
90 RoadCalc
An overbreak line is generated by specifying an overbreak distance in the Typical Section
Settings. The overbreak distance is the distance between the cut line and the overbreak
line. When using these typical sections while processing the design, RoadCalc generates
an overbreak line whenever the sub-project is in cut. The line will be parallel to the
cutslope and at the overbreak distance away from it.
Figure 3-5 Overbreak Type Surface
Chapter 3: Cross-
If RoadCalc is to compute the proper end areas, the design surfaces must tie into each
other properly. When typical sections are used to generate design surfaces, RoadCalc
Sections
handles the tying automatically. However, if design surfaces are entered directly, make
sure they tie together correctly. The two rules to follow for design surfaces are:
The endpoints of the lowest design surface (highest surface number) must tie into the top
original surface (the original ground surface)
The endpoints of each pavement surface (design surfaces above the lowest design
surface) must tie into the next lower design surface (the one with the next highest surface
number). Figure 3-6, below, shows how design surfaces would tie together on a typical
cross-section.
Figure 3-6 Design Surfaces Tying Together
Carefully consider how to arrange the design surfaces to fulfill these requirements, as
Figure 3-7 and Figure 3-8, shown below, illustrate.
Figure 3-7 Matching Two Surfaces
Figure 3-8 Tie-ins on a Curb and Gutter
Actual Surfaces
Actual surfaces are entered in the Actual Surface Manager and are used to represent “as-
built” conditions. They may be hand entered, imported or extracted from surface models to
be superimposed over a proposed design. Volumes are also calculated for each actual
surface and may be queried on an individual surface basis or as an accumulated volume
from prior actual surfaces. If an overbreak design surface was defined, you may also
choose whether to include volumes inside the overbreak line within the Actual Surface
Volume Settings.
As with design surfaces, the actual surfaces must tie together properly for RoadCalc to
calculate the correct end areas. The rules for tying together actual surfaces are:
The endpoints of the first actual surface (the one with the lowest surface number)
must tie into the top original surface (the original ground surface).
An endpoint of a subsequent actual surface must tie into a previous actual (lower
surface number) surface or the top original surface, whichever surface is “more
recent” at that offset. Higher numbered actual surfaces are more recent than lower. All
actual surfaces are more recent than original ground.
92 RoadCalc
Figure 3-9, below, shows an example of how actual surfaces tie together.
Figure 3-9 Actual Surfaces Tying Together
Skewed Cross-Sections
Skewed cross-sections are available for cross-section locations that require an angle
Chapter 3: Cross-
other than the default of perpendicular to the alignment (0 degrees).
Sections
Determine the angle at which the cross-sections will be skewed by one of five methods:
Left Hand Forward (LHF)
Right Hand Forward (RHF)
Deflection Left (DL)
Deflection Right (DR)
Azimuth (AZ): Based upon 360 degrees
Selecting LHF allows angles to be entered from -90 degrees to 90 degrees to be read
from the second and third quadrants. Selecting RHF allows angles to be entered -90
degrees to 90 degrees to be read from the first and fourth quadrants. Figure 3-10 on page
94 illustrates the LHF and RHF methods and quadrants. Selecting Deflection Left allows
angles to be entered from 0 degrees to 180 degrees to be read from the second and third
quadrants. Selecting Deflection Right allows angles to be entered from 0 degrees to 180
degrees to be read from the first and fourth quadrants. If neither of these four are
specified, use the Azimuth method and enter an angle between 0 degrees and 360
degrees as shown in Figure 3-12
Figure 3-10 LHF and RHF for Measuring Skew Angle
Figure 3-11 DL and DR for Measuring Skew Angles
Figure 3-12 360 Degree Method for Measuring Skew Angle
The Right Hand Forward convention can be explained by imagining the gray line (the light
solid line) in Figure 3-13 on page 95 represents a person’s arms extending out from their
sides, 90 degrees, looking up-station along the alignment. The black line (the heavy solid
94 RoadCalc
line) in each figure represents the person’s arms if they rotate their body (keeping their
arms straight), to the angle specified. In the first figure, the person’s right arm moved
forward 20 degrees or rotation. In the second figure, the left arm moved forward 20
degrees (LHF) which causes the right arm to move backwards 20 degrees, or -20 degrees
forward (RHF).
Figure 3-13 Explanation of RHF Convention
Chapter 3: Cross-
Cross-Section Settings
Sections
Specify the horizontal and vertical curve tolerances for the cross-section by selecting the
Settings command from the Cross-Sections menu. The values for the horizontal and
vertical tolerance can be specified to selectively remove points from the information being
used to generate the cross-sections. This is useful when generating cross-sections from
dense surface models to reduce the number of points used for each section by removing
redundant points.
Consider an example (represented by Figure 3-14 on page 96) of the vertical tolerance
equaling VT and the horizontal tolerance equaling HT. The program would work as
follows:
The vertical distance for point #2 would be checked (represented by line V1). It is less than
the vertical tolerance (VT) so it fails. The program now checks the horizontal distance (line
H1). Line H fails the horizontal tolerance (HT) also so the point is not used. Now the
program checks the next point, point #3. The vertical distance for point #3 (line V2) is
greater than the specified vertical tolerance (VT) so the point is used. The horizontal
tolerance is not checked because the point passed the vertical tolerance. A line would now
be connected between points 1 and 3 (shown as a dashed line). Point #4 is next and the
vertical distance (line V3) is less than the specified tolerance. The point fails so the
horizontal distance is checked and is greater than the horizontal tolerance. The point is
kept and a line from point #3 to point #4 is generated.
Figure 3-14 Horizontal and Vertical Curve Tolerance
Import/Export Data
This routine provides an interface between RoadCalc and external sources of cross-
section data. The translator reads cross-section data from an ASCII file and translates it
into RoadCalc’s binary format. The ASCII file may be in one of RoadCalc’s pre-defined
formats, or define a custom format for the data. RoadCalc can also translate from
RoadCalc binary to ASCII formats.
The data in the ASCII file can be in coordinate or station-offset format, but the data must
be taken along cross-section lines. Also, if the ASCII file contains data in station-offset
format, the stations must be listed in order along the sub-project. If the data is in
coordinate format, the stations may be out of order, but the horizontal alignment must be
entered before translating.
When importing a coordinate ASCII file, you can toggle on the station tolerance option
found in the transfer settings. Specify the station tolerance and station interval. This allows
you to force the points in the ASCII file to fall on exact station values within the tolerance
specified. When the option is toggled on, the station values along the centerline alignment
are calculated for the points. The calculated stations in the file are compared to the interval
stations along the centerline alignment. The difference between their actual station value
and the stations at interval will then be compared to the station tolerance. If the point is
inside the tolerance the shot is assigned to the interval station. If a shot is outside the
tolerance it is added to a running list and displayed at the end of the command. When all
other shots are given an interval station, the Assign Points to Station dialog box (Figure 3-
46 on page 137) is displayed. This allows you to decide what to do with all shots outside of
the station tolerance. Points can be discarded or assigned to existing or new station
values. To assign a point to a station value, highlighting the rows that belong to the same
station and then use the Assign Station button to enter the station at which the shots
96 RoadCalc
belong. As changes are made (i.e., a group of shots are assigned a station) the list of
points in the Assign Points to Station dialog box are updated by removing the shots that
were in the highlighted group. If points are not assigned to a station value and the Assign
Points to Station dialog box is closed, the shots are discarded.
Before translating, remove any extraneous lines from the ASCII file – title blocks,
comments (unless they are part of a descriptor field) and any blank lines, whether they are
at the beginning, middle or end of the file.
If the station values in the ASCII file are part of a descriptor field (as they are in many
coordinate formats), then the descriptor for the first point on each cross-section must
contain an N followed by the station value.
If the ASCII file contains sideshots that aren’t to be translated, group these shots at the
end of each cross-section and put an XX in the descriptor field of the last point that will be
translated for that cross-section. RoadCalc ignores all points including and after the one
marked with the XX until it reaches the points on the next cross-section.
If translating original subsurfaces, design or actual surfaces, original ground cross-section
data must already be in RoadCalc at every station. If attempting to translate non-original
ground data into a station where there is no original ground, RoadCalc will ignore the data
and generate an error message.
Chapter 3: Cross-
If there is already cross-section data for the surface you are translating, RoadCalc must
know what to do if it encounters a station in the ASCII file that matches a station already in
Sections
the sub-project. It can either overwrite the old data at that station or add the new shots to
the shots already there (append). If a window displays asking if the old data is to be
overwritten, indicate the action to be taken.
RoadCalc first counts the points in the ASCII file, then translates the data from the ASCII
file into the RoadCalc cross-section files.
After translating, RoadCalc may display a warning dialog box. If original subsurfaces,
design or actual surfaces were translated, RoadCalc lists stations where it found no
original ground. Also, if a design or actual surface was translated, RoadCalc indicates
stations where the new surface didn’t tie properly or extended past original ground. If the
surface didn’t tie, RoadCalc forces it to tie by adding a vertical segment at the edge of the
cross-section.
Manage Surfaces
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS MANAGE SURFACES
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcsurfman
The Manage Surfaces command provides access to the list of surfaces that are to be used
for the current sub-project. The three types of surfaces each have their own list and are
separated onto three tabs on the Manage Surface dialog box.
For each type of surface you can add, modify and delete them using the buttons on each
tab page. You can also set the CAD properties for each surface or print a listing of the
surfaces.
See Manage Surfaces – Original Tab, below, New Design Surface on page 103 and
Manage Surfaces – Actual Tab on page 103.
Manage Surfaces – Original Tab

ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS MANAGE SURFACES ORIGINAL TAB

The Original Surface Listing (below) is the first of three surface listings available in the
RoadCalc program. The three surface listings represent the three types of cross-sections
that RoadCalc maintains.
Original surfaces are the terrain before construction begins.You can enter these surfaces
in many different ways:
Enter the numbers manually (as from a field book)
Draw the cross-sections graphically
Extract the surfaces from an Eagle Point surface model
Translate them into RoadCalc from an ASCII file created by a data collector or other
external source
When beginning a sub-project, RoadCalc creates one default original surface called
SURFACE. This is shown as surface #1 in the Original Surface Library.
One original surface – the ground surface – or up to 100 surfaces, each representing the
top of a layer of material, such as topsoil or rock, can be included. The Original Surface
library must contain all the original surfaces used in the sub-project, maintained in order
from the top surface to the deepest surface. Original surfaces cannot cross each other. If
topsoil is defined as surface #1 and subsoil as #2, no subsoil points above the topsoil
surface can be entered.
If there is more than one original material, RoadCalc keeps track of cut volumes for each
of them.
The Volumes routine also assigns compaction factors by zone along the sub-project. If this
feature is used, RoadCalc ignores any compaction factors that may have been assigned
to the original materials.
98 RoadCalc
For more information, see Original Surfaces on page 86.
Figure 3-15 Manage Surfaces Dialog Box – Original Tab
Manage Surfaces Dialog Box – Original Tab Definitions

Option Function
Name This field contains the name describing the material.
%Cmp Factor This column displays the compaction factor for each original material. RoadCalc applies
the factors to fill or cut volumes during volume calculations to compensate for shrinkage or
Chapter 3: Cross-
swell. Enter swell factors as positive percentages and shrinkage factors as negative
percentages.
Sections
With one original material, RoadCalc uses its compaction factor throughout the job. With
more than one original material, RoadCalc averages the compaction factors of the
various materials. The program weights the averages by the cut volumes of each original
material in each balance zone.
Removal Method This column denotes an original material as Normal or Strip removal. RoadCalc removes
a Normal original material only in a cut condition. A Strip layer will be completely removed
between the catch points whether the section is in cut or fill. The lowest original material
must be Normal. All of the layers above a Strip layer must also be defined as Strip.
Type Defining a subsurface as Parallel or Absolute affects the way RoadCalc generates points
for that surface during data entry and edit.
Parallel: A subsurface marked parallel uniformly follows the surface above it at
some defined depth when point generation is turned on.
Absolute: A subsurface marked as absolute follows its own predefined depth
regardless of what the surface above it is.
Existing Pavement: One original surface may have the type of existing
pavement. Use this type of surface when quantities are needed of an existing
road bed.
Generate Points If an X appears in this column, this indicates RoadCalc will interpolate all subsurface
points according to the type set.
New Original To include a new surface in the project, click on the New icon. Through this dialog box, all
Surface data for the new surface, such as material name, compaction factor, removal method and
boundary type, can be entered.
For more information, see New Original Surface on page 100.
Manage Surfaces Dialog Box – Original Tab Definitions
Option Function
Insert Original Use this option to place a new surface between two existing surfaces. RoadCalc places
Surface the new surface in front of the currently highlighted surface.
Modify Original This option allows data for an existing surface to be changed.
Surface
Delete Original This removes the highlighted original surface from the list. All shots on all stations with this
Surface surface are removed.
CAD Settings This allows you to change CAD settings for any of the original surfaces. Be sure to specify
unique layers/levels for every surface, regardless of the type (Original, Design or Actual).
For more information, see CAD Settings in the Getting Started manual.
Print This generates a printout of the Original Surface design and actual surfaces to an output
device (printer or ASCII file).
New Original Surface

ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS MANAGE SURFACES ORIGINAL TAB NEW ORIGINAL SURFACE
A new surface can be added to the Original Surface Manager by clicking on the New or
Insert buttons. An existing surface can be modified by clicking on the Modify button. All
three dialog boxes contain identical fields. The figure below shows the New Original
Surface dialog box as an example.
When adding a new original surface, you will need to provide a name. You can set what
compaction will be used on the surface, the removal method, type of surface and if point
generation is toggled on.
Figure 3-16 New Original Surface Dialog Box
New Original Surface Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Name The name entered in this field describes the material.
100 RoadCalc
New Original Surface Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
%Compaction This allows you to define a compaction factor for each original material. RoadCalc applies
the factors to fill or cut volumes during volume calculations to compensate for shrinkage or
swell. Enter swell factors as positive percentages and shrinkage factors as negative
percentages.
Removal Method This allows you to define an original material as Normal or Strip removal. RoadCalc
removes a Normal original material only in a cut condition. A Strip layer will be completely
removed between the catch points whether the section is in cut or in fill. The lowest
original material must be Normal. All of the layers above a Strip layer must also be defined
as Strip.
Type Defining a subsurface as Parallel or Absolute affects the way RoadCalc generates points
for that surface during data entry and edit.
Parallel: A subsurface marked parallel uniformly follows the surface above it at
some defined depth when point generation is turned on.
Absolute: A subsurface marked as absolute follows its own predefined depth
regardless of what the surface above it is.
Existing Pavement: An existing pavement surface may be generated to develop
removal quantities of an existing roadbed. Only one original surface may be of
this type, and once it is added it becomes the first surface in the Original
Chapter 3: Cross-
Surface Manager.
Point Toggle this option on to have RoadCalc interpolate all subsurface points according to the
Sections
Generation Type set.
Manage Surfaces – Design Tab

ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS MANAGE SURFACES DESIGN TAB

Design surfaces represent the proposed cross-sections. Up to 100 design surfaces may
exist. You will need to specify a name for the surface and the type of surface (Normal,
Undercut or Overcut). Undercut and Overbreak surface types have specific meaning and
are explained in further detail in Design Surfaces on page 89.
Design surfaces are usually generated by processing typical sections onto original ground
cross-sections but may be entered by inputting shots by hand, extracting data from
surface models or by importing data from ASCII files.

If typical sections have been defined and a surface is being added, an alert box will
display with the message: You must redefine your templates.
Figure 3-17 Manage Surfaces Dialog Box – Design Tab
Manage Surfaces Dialog Box – Design Tab Definitions

Option Function
Name This field contains the name describing the type of material used.
Type This field displays the type of design surface – Normal, Undercut or Overbreak.
New Design Initially there are no design surfaces. Click on the Add option to enter them. Enter them in
Surface order from the top to the bottom.
For more information, see New Design Surface on page 103.
Insert Design This places a design surface immediately before the highlighted surface.
Surface
Modify Design This allows you to change the name or type for the highlighted design surface.
Surface
Delete Design This removes the highlighted design surface from the list. All shots on all stations with this
CAD Settings This allows you to change the CAD settings for any of the design surfaces. Be sure to
specify unique layers/levels for every surface, regardless of the type (Original, Design or
Actual).
For more information, refer to CAD Settings in the Getting Started manual.
Print This icon generates a printout of the original design and actual surfaces to an output
device (printer or ASCII file)
102 RoadCalc
New Design Surface
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS MANAGE SURFACES DESIGN TAB NEW DESIGN SURFACE
To add more surfaces to the Design Surface Manager, use the New or Insert icons on the
Manage Surfaces dialog box. To modify the surface material, use the Modify icon. All three
commands are identical.
The material name is used by RoadCalc when displaying surface data or end area
volumes. The type assigned to the design surface name tells RoadCalc how to process a
certain surface. Most surfaces should be defined as normal types. These would include
asphalt, curb, sidewalk, median, base, subbase, shoulder and subgrade materials. The
undercut and overbreak types are explained in more detail in Design Surfaces on page 89.
Manage Surfaces – Actual Tab

ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS MANAGE SURFACES ACTUAL TAB
Chapter 3: Cross-
Sections
Actual surfaces can be entered as the construction progresses to allow for periodic
volume calculations. Enter actual surfaces using any of the methods available for original
surfaces.
Use actual surfaces during construction to record intermediate stages of construction or to
compare the constructed cross-sections to the designed cross-sections by superimposing
them onto the design cross-sections. Also use actual surfaces to compare the volumes
placed to what should have been placed.
Figure 3-18 Manage Surfaces Dialog Box – Actual Tab

Manage Surfaces Dialog Box – Actual Tab Definitions
Option Function
Name This field contains the name describing the actual material.
New Actual To include a new actual surface in the list, click on the New option. Through the dialog box
Surface which displays, enter the name of the actual surface.
Insert Actual This icon allows you to add an actual surface immediately before the highlighted surface.
Surface
Modify Actual This icon allows you to change the name of the highlighted actual surface.
Surface
Delete Actual This icon removes the highlighted surface from the list. All shots on all stations with this
CAD Settings This allows you to change CAD settings for any of the actual surfaces. Be sure to specify
For more information, refer to CAD Settings in the Getting Started manual.
Print This icon generates a printout of the original design and actual surfaces to an output
device (printer or ASCII file).
Example – Multiple Actual Surfaces

There are many potential uses for RoadCalc’s actual surfaces, but the most common use
is to track the placement and removal of material on a job site. RoadCalc uses cross-
section end areas to compute volumes for actual surfaces just like design surfaces, but
there is one important difference. The end areas computed for cut and fill on a design are
always computed to the topmost original surface, but the end areas for a given actual
surface are computed to the actual surface that appears directly above it in the Surface
Library. The exception to this rule is that the end area for the topmost actual surface will be
computed to the topmost original surface. This design allows RoadCalc to keep volumes
separate by date or by stage. For example, a contract may be written such that the
contractor is to be paid monthly for material movement and hauling. Assuming there is
already an original surface in RoadCalc, surveys are taken at the end of each month to
determine how much material has been moved, or cut or filled, and how it compares to
design. Below is an example section of an overpass fill section at the end of the first
month.
Figure 3-19 Overpass Fill Section
104 RoadCalc
At the end of the second month, the same section has had the surcharge removed and is
being cut down to subgrade as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3-20 Overpass Fill Section Cut to Subgrade
Edit Cross-Section Data

ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS EDIT CROSS-SECTION DATA
Chapter 3: Cross-
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcxsdata
Sections
ICON:
When the Edit Cross-Sections command is selected from RoadCalc’s Cross-Sections
menu, RoadCalc opens the Edit Cross-Section Data dialog box (Figure 3-21 on page
107). The upper list box contains a listing of all the cross-sections in the sub-project. The
lower list box shows offsets and elevations for the highlighted cross-section. The Material
field at the lower right of the dialog box graphically displays the surface to which the
displayed shots belong. If cross-section data has not been entered, the dialog box will
show no cross-sections.
Unless the Import or Extract Cross-Sections commands have been used to bring data into
RoadCalc, the Edit Cross-Sections routine will be used to enter and edit data for the
original surfaces. Data for the design surfaces will usually be generated by RoadCalc
when you process typical sections, but you may forgo the use of typical sections and enter
the design surfaces directly by translating them from an ASCII file or generating them from
a surface model. Actual surfaces must be entered directly with the Edit Cross-Sections
command, translated or generated from a surface model.
Added cross-sections are automatically sorted by their station values. Multiple stations
may be added at one time using the Build List option. In the case of station equations, a
prompt will ask if the station is before or after the equation.
Before entering data for original, design or actual surfaces, set up these surfaces in the
Surface Manager. For more information, refer to Manage Surfaces on page 97.

Status toggles for cross-sections are phantom, control, locked and no catch slope. You
can highlight multiple stations to modify using the Shift and/or Ctrl keys.
A Phantom cross-section is indicated with a P in the Status field at the specified station
value in the cross-sections station list box. RoadCalc allows phantom cross-sections to be
edited and plotted like any other cross-section, but it will not use the phantom cross-
section when calculating volumes. A cross-section that is used for informational purpose
only, is an example of a cross-section that would be flagged as phantom.
A Control cross-section is indicated with a C in the Status field at the specified station
value in the cross-sections station list box. Control stations are used in conjunction with
subsurface information such as boring logs. Designate control stations where subsurface
information is known, and then allow the Generate Subsurface command to calculate the
subsurface information between the control stations.
For more information on generating subsurfaces, refer to Generating Subsurfaces on
page 88.
A locked cross-section is indicated with an L in the status field at the specified station
value in the cross-sections station list box. Locked cross-sections mark stations that are
not to be changed. RoadCalc will not process or change stations with the locked toggle
on. This is for cross-sections that may have been hand entered or edited, and processing
of typical sections will not change them. The lock toggle can be used in conjunction with
both the phantom and the control toggles, making it valuable to retain boring log
information and even hand entered cross-sections.
A cross-section marked as no catch slope is indicated with an N in the status field at the
specified station value in the cross-section station list box. A station marked as no catch
slope will not have the final subgrade slope lines drawn from the typical section to original
ground. This toggle can be turned on using the Modify Station command or by having a
condition table processed through this station that uses the no catch slope type. If you
want a station that is currently a no catch slope station to have slopes processed, you
must turn this toggle off and reprocess your design. Be sure to change your design
locations so as not to use a condition table with a no catch slope option.
To enter cross-section data graphically, the cross-sections CAD graphic must be loaded. If
not, use the View Cross-Section Graphic command found in the Cross-Sections menu. A
vertical line representing the centerline and a station label indicating the station being
viewed should appear. From this point, the cross-section can be drawn. Use lines or
polylines to represent each surface.
Layers/levels: RoadCalc uses the layers/levels of the lines that are drawn to determine
the surface to which they belong. When a different surface is selected, RoadCalc
switches to the appropriate layer/level for that surface. To make sure the lines will be
drawn on the correct layers/levels, set the Surface drop list in the Edit Cross-Section Data
dialog box (Figure 3-21 on page 107) to the desired surface or manually switch layers/
levels with CAD commands.
106 RoadCalc
Coordinates: The X-coordinate in the cross-section CAD graphic corresponds to the
centerline offset. The Y-coordinate is the elevation if the vertical stretch factor is set to
one. Otherwise the Y-coordinate is the elevation multiplied by the vertical stretch factor
(see Cross-Section Settings on page 95 for details on the vertical stretch factor).
The extents of the original ground surface define the extents of the cross-section. For any
other surface, if an offset outside these limits is entered, RoadCalc does not accept the
value.
Unlike most other routines in RoadCalc, the cross-section routine does not save the CAD
graphic it uses. The CAD graphic here is merely a graphic environment for the cross-
section work. Once editing of a section is complete, RoadCalc saves the data in its own
files and discards the CAD graphic. Annotation or other extraneous information will be
lost.
Chapter 3: Cross-
Sections
Figure 3-21 Edit Cross-Section/Display Stations, Preview and Shots Data Dialog Box
Figure 3-22 Edit Cross-Section Data/Display Stations and Preview Dialog Box

Figure 3-23 Edit Cross-Section Data/Display Stations Dialog Box
Edit Cross-Section Data/Display Stations Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
# This column displays a number assigned to each cross-section listed.
Station This column displays the station value of a cross-section. Station values are displayed
according to system settings.
Skew This column displays the skew angle value for each station location. The skew angle
value is based on 0 degrees being at a right angle to the alignment and rotation counter
clockwise up to 360 degrees.
Status This column displays the status of each cross-section, denoting if it is phantom, control or
locked.
New Station Select this option to add a cross-section station and specify the skew angle and control
type for the cross-section, if applicable.
For more information, see New Station on page 110.
Modify Station Select this option to make changes to the station, skew angle or control type for the
highlighted station.
This is the same as New Station except that you highlight a station first. For more
information, see New Station on page 110.
Delete Station Use this option to delete the highlighted station. More than 1 station may be highlighted by
using the Shift or Ctrl keys in conjunction with mouse button clicks. Be sure to specify
CAD Settings This allows you to change the CAD settings for any of the surfaces.
Print Cross- This allows you to print out cross-section information to an output device (printer or ASCII
Sections file).
For more information, see Generate Cross-Section Reports on page 130.
Offset The Offset listing displays the offset distance from the centerline for the particular cross-
section shot.
Elevation The Elevation column indicates the elevation of the particular breakpoint in question.
Depth This displays the slope value in percent relative to the point before it. The slope is
calculated from the leftmost point of the cross-section and proceeds to the right side.
Slope This column displays the slope from the previous shot to the current shot. The slope is
displayed in % slope, H/V, V/H or Unit/Unit depending on what slope type is selected.
108 RoadCalc
Edit Cross-Section Data/Display Stations Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
IH This column indicates the height of the instrument used to collect information for that
particular cross-section. The value that is displayed is the elevation of the instrument, not
the instrument’s relative distance above ground.
RR This column displays the Rod Reading (RR) of the specified shot depending on the
display format.
PT Code This column displays the PT Code value for the particular cross-section shot.
Surfaces Choose the surface for which the cross-section is to display the cross-section shots.
Manage This icon provides access to the Surface Manager to add, modify or delete original, design
Surfaces or actual surfaces.
New Shot Click on the New icon to add a cross-section shot by specifying offset and elevation by
offset, rod reading, instrument height and elevation, or by percent slope and slope
distance.
For more information, see New Shot on page 113.
Modify Shot Click on the Modify button to make changes to the offset, rod reading, instrument height,
elevation, percent slope or slope distance for the highlighted cross-section shot.
This is the same as New Shot except that you highlight a cross-section shot first. For more
information, see New Shot on page 113.
Chapter 3: Cross-
Delete Shot Use this option to remove the highlighted shot from the current surface of the current
station. More than 1 shot can be highlighted by using the Shift and Ctrl keys while
Sections
selecting the shots to be deleted.
Slope Type Changes the display of the slope between breakpoints to show % slope, H/V, V/H or Unit/
Unit.
View Cross- This option loads the cross-section CAD graphic to display the highlighted station’s cross-
Section section data.
Graphics
Query Cross- This displays the query cross-section window to view individual stations and query
Section breakpoint information. For more information, see Query Cross-Section on page 116.
Pin Slope This option allows you to tie the lowest surface design to top original surface.
For more information, see Pin Slope on page 117.
Display Stations This option displays the Edit Cross-Section Data dialog box (Figure 3-23 on page 108)
Only showing only the station list.
Display Stations This option displays the Edit Cross-Section Data dialog box (Figure 3-22 on page 107),
and Preview showing the station list and the preview image of the highlighted cross-section.
Display Stations, This option displays the station list, preview image and shot information in the Edit Cross-
Preview and Section Data dialog box (Figure 3-21 on page 107).
Shots

New Station
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS EDIT CROSS-SECTION DATA NEW STATION
To add a new station to the cross-section listing, select the New Station icon in the Edit
Cross-Section Data dialog box (Figure 3-21 on page 107). The New Station dialog box
appears (below). A new station value may be typed in or selected from CAD using the PIC
button.
A cross-section may be skewed from the normal perpendicular by setting a skew angle
other than 0.
See Skewed Cross-Sections on page 93 for further explanation.
The toggles of Control, Phantom, Locked and No Catch Slopes are used for establishing
controlling cross-sections during generation of subsurfaces and for marking which cross-
sections may not be processed over with typical sections or catch slopes.
See Edit Cross-Section Data on page 105.
Figure 3-24 New Station Dialog Box
New Station Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Station Enter the station of the new cross-section to be added to the Edit Cross-Section Data
dialog box.
PIC This is used to pick a graphic point for a station when the method is set to Station.
For more information, see Pick in CAD (PIC) Button in the Getting Started manual.
Skew Enter the skew angle for the new cross-section to be added to the Edit Cross-Section
Data dialog box. The default is 0 degrees or perpendicular to the alignment.
For more information, see Skewed Cross-Sections on page 93.
LHF Set the drop list to the LHF option to use the Left Hand Forward method of skew angle
specification. By selecting LHF, angles can be entered from -90 degrees to 90 degrees to
be read from the second and third quadrants.
RHF Set the drop list to the RHF option to use the Right Hand Forward method of skew angle
specification. By selecting RHF, angles can be entered from -90 degrees to 90 degrees to
be read from the first and fourth quadrants.
110 RoadCalc
New Station Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
DR Setting the drop list to DR allows skew angles to be entered as an amount deflected to the
right from the forward tangent direction.
DL Setting the drop list to DL allows skew angles to be entered as an amount deflected to the
left from the forward tangent.
AZ When set to Azimuth, the skew angle is entered as a value from 0 to 360 degrees
clockwise.
Control Toggle the Control option on to give the station the status of control. This station is then
used during the generation of subsurfaces.
Locked Toggle on the Locked option to give the station the status of locked. A station that is
locked may not be reprocessed.
Phantom Toggle the Phantom option on to give the station the status of phantom. A Phantom
station does not have a typical section processed on it.
No Catch Slope Toggle on the No Catch Slope option to give the station a status of No Catch Slope. A No
Catch Slope station does not have the final catch slopes processed from the typical
section onto original ground.
Build List Click on the Build List button to add stations by range and interval.
For more information, see Build Station List, below.
Chapter 3: Cross-
Sections
Build Station List
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS EDIT CROSS-SECTION DATA NEW STATION BUILD LIST
The Build Station List command allows you to choose a new station interval and the range
for the cross-sections to be generated. You can specify the station intervals along a
tangent and along a horizontal curve. Curve and station equations can be included or not
as cross-section stations that are created. You can specify if you want a skew angle
applied to all of the cross-sections. Also, you can automatically mark the cross-sections

for extraction (when using the Extract Cross-Section command) and to delete any cross-
sections that already exist within the station range specified.
Figure 3-25 Build Station List Dialog Box
Build Station List Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Station Range Specify the linear distance at which the cross-section information will be generated.
Begin Station Specify the station for the cross-sections to begin.
End Station Enter the station for the cross-sections to end.
Stationing Toggle on this option to set the station interval along tangent sections of the horizontal
Interval alignment. Enter the desired station interval in the associated edit field.
Curve Stationing Toggle on this option to use a different station interval through horizontal curves. Enter the
Interval desired station interval in the associated edit field.
Curve Stations Toggle on this option to include PC and PT stations in between the start and end station
range values.
Equation Toggle on this option to include any equation station locations for cross-sections that will
Stations be created.
Skew Angle Specify a value for an angle of the cross-section. Otherwise, cross-sections are
perpendicular to the alignment.
Mark Stations Toggle on this option to automatically mark all stations for extraction.
for Extraction
Delete Existing Toggling on this option deletes all the stations in between the start and end station that will
Station be affected by the change in the station interval.
112 RoadCalc
New Shot
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS EDIT CROSS-SECTION DATA NEW SHOT
To add a shot, click on the New Shot button in the Edit Cross-Section Data dialog box
(Figure 3-21 on page 107). There are four different methods that can be used to add a
new shot onto a cross-section. Depending on the type of surface, there are different
combinations of the four methods available. The four methods are: Offset/Elevation,
Offset/Depth, Instrument Height/Rod Reading and Slope/Distance. Figure 3-26,
below, Figure 3-27 and Figure 3-28 on page 114 and Figure 3-29 on page 115 show how
to use the four different methods.
Chapter 3: Cross-
Sections
Figure 3-26 New Shot Offset/Elevation Dialog Box
New Shot Offset/Elevation Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Method This displays the different methods that you can enter cross-section shots with. The
available options are Offset/Elevation, Offset/Depth, Instrument Height/Rod Reading and
Slope/Distance.
PT Code Specify a point code for reference. You can also select the PT Code Library icon to add,
modify and delete PT codes from the library.
Offset Specify the offset distance from the centerline for the cross-section shot you are adding.
Elevation Specify the elevation of the shot being added.
Control If a shot is marked as control, that same shot offset is completed for all stations when
generating subsurfaces.

If the method of Offset/Depth is selected to add shots, the New Shot Offset/Depth dialog
box, below, displays.
Figure 3-27 New Shot Offset/Depth Dialog Box
New Shot Offset/Depth Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Slope Distance.
PT Code Specify a point code for reference. You can also select the PT Code Library icon to add
Offset Specify the offset distance from the centerline for the cross-section shot being added.
Depth Specify the depth of the shot being added. The depth is measured from the topmost
original surface.
If the method of Instrument Height/Rod Reading is selected to add shots, the New Shot
Instrument Height/Rod Reading dialog box, below, displays.
Figure 3-28 New Shot Instrument Height/Rod Reading Dialog Box
114 RoadCalc
New Shot Instrument Height/Rod Reading Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Slope Distance.
PT Code Specify a point code for reference. You can also select the PT Code Library icon to add,
modify and delete the PT codes from the library.
Offset Specify the offset distance from the centerline for the cross-section shot being added.
Elevation Specify the elevation of the shot being added.
IH Specify the instrument height. This is the elevation of the instrument, not the instrument’s
relative distance above ground.
RR Specify the rod reading.
The final method of entering shots is through slope and distance. This option displays the
New Shot Slope/Distance dialog box, shown below.
Chapter 3: Cross-
Sections
Figure 3-29 New Shot Slope/Distance Dialog Box
New Shot Slope/Distance Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Method This displays the different methods with which you can enter cross-section shots. The
Slope Distance.
PT Code Specify a PT Code for reference. You can also select the PT Code Library icon to add,
Slope The absolute slope from the center or 0 offset for the shot being added. Choose one of
four types of slope: % Slope, H/V, V/H or Unit/Unit.
Distance Specify the distance of the point being added from the center or 0 offset for the shot being
added. Set the drop list to either horizontal or slope distance entry.

Query Cross-Section
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS EDIT CROSS-SECTION DATA QUERY CROSS-SECTION
ICON:
The Query Cross-Section command allows you to display the cross-sections in the Query
Cross-Section dialog box (below). This dialog box shows the cross-section graphic and
shot information for each breakpoint on the cross-section. The arrow head moves
between shots on a cross-section by using the Next Shot and Previous Shot commands
and displays the offset, elevation and PT Code information for each. The slope between
the current shot and the previous shot is also displayed.
Any utilities defined in the project will also display in the cross-section window. By
changing the surface list to Utilities, you may use the Next and Previous Shot commands
to display the utility name, offset, elevation and station.
The cross-section graphic may be panned to the left, right, up or down using the scroll
bars. The Scale View command controls the “zoom” factor to display more or less of the
cross-section graphic in the display window.
Any cross-section may be viewed by using the Goto Station command or by using the
Previous and Next Cross-Section options.
Figure 3-30 Query Cross-Section Dialog Box
116 RoadCalc
Query Cross-Section Dialog Box
Option Function
Horizontal and These allow you to pan the cross-section to the left, right, up and down.
Vertical Scroll
Bars
Surface Select the current surface to Query using this drop list.
Next/Previous The query arrow may be moved to the left or right on the current surface to display the
Shot shot information. This will display the offset, elevation, slope and PT code for the shot.
Previous Cross- Use this option to display the cross-section that occurs before the current cross-section.
Section This will be disabled if you are viewing the first cross-section.
Next Cross- Use this option to display the cross-section that occurs after the current cross-section.
Section This will be disabled if you are viewing the last cross-section.
Goto Station Click on this to display the Goto Station dialog box. Highlight the station to view. The
display window now shows that cross-section information. This dialog box can remain
open to allow you to scroll through all cross-sections.
Scale View This provides access to the Scale View command to set the Horizontal and Vertical scales
at which to display the cross-section graphic. Use this command to set the “zoom” factor
for the display.
PT Code This displays the PT Code of the shot that the query arrow is on.
Chapter 3: Cross-
Offset This displays the offset value of the shot that the query arrow is on.
Elevation This displays the elevation value of the shot that the query arrow is on.
Sections
Slope This displays the slope of the line between the current shot and previous shot.
Slope Type This drop list allows you to change the slope display between % Slope, H/V, V/H or Unit/
Unit.
Pin Slope
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS EDIT DATA PIN SLOPE
ICON:
The Pin Slope command is used to draw a new slope line in the Cross-Section drawing/
design file for the purpose of redefining cross-section geometry. It provides a means to
draw a new slope from a specified point in the graphic using a known slope value or offset.
When the command is selected you are prompted to pick a point where you want the new
slope to be applied. This point must be on an existing surface. Once the point is selected
the Pin Slope dialog box (Figure 3-31 on page 118) appears. Enter the desired offset as
an absolute or relative amount or enter the desired slope. RoadCalc then constructs a
new line on the current surface, tying in to the surface specified.

Once the slope is placed, be sure to erase any previous geometry that is not desired and
use the Synchronize Graphics and Data command in the Cross-Section menu to update
the data.
Be sure to set the current layer/level to match the surface for which you are defining the
slope.
Figure 3-31 Pin Slope Dialog Box
Pin Slope Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Pin to Surface Specify the surface you want RoadCalc to tie the new slope into. The Method drop list
determines at what point along that surface RoadCalc will tie into.
118 RoadCalc
Pin Slope Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Method Change the method drop list to control how you want to calculate the ending point of the
slope line. Choose from the following methods:
Absolute Offset: Enter the offset value that you want the slope to pin to on the
specified surface. Enter positive offsets for those right of the centerline and
enter negative offsets for those left of the centerline.
Relative Offset: Enter the change in offset from the first point picked to pin the
slope on the specified surface. Enter a positive relative offset to pin the slope to
the right of the point picked or enter a negative relative offset to pin the slope to
the left of the point picked.
% Slope: Enter the slope of the new line as a percentage using this option. A
positive value will produce a line that slopes upward from the original point
picked and a negative value will produce a line that slopes downward from the
original point picked. The Slope Left and Slope Right radio buttons enable in
order to specify that the slope is to the left or right of the original point picked.
H/V: Enter the slope of the new line as a Horizontal over Vertical slope using
this option. A positive value will produce a line that slopes upward from the
original point picked and a negative value will produce a line that slopes
downward from the original point picked. The Slope Left and Slope Right radio
Chapter 3: Cross-
buttons enable in order to specify that the slope is to the left or right of the
original point picked.
Sections
V/H: Enter the slope of the new line as a Vertical over Horizontal slope using
this option. A positive value will produce a line that slopes upward from the
original point picked and a negative value will produce a line that slopes
downward from the original point picked. The Slope Left and Slope Right radio
buttons enable in order to specify that the slope is to the left or right of the
Unit/Unit: Enter the slope of the new line as a Unit per Unit slope using this
option. A positive value will produce a line that slopes upward from the original
point picked and a negative value will produce a line that slopes downward from
the original point picked. The Slope Left and Slope Right radio buttons enable in
order to specify that the slope is to the left or right of the original point picked.
Slope Left Toggle this radio button on when entering a slope that should be placed to the left of the
Slope Right Toggle this radio button on when entering a slope that should be placed to the left of the

Extract Cross-Sections
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS EXTRACT CROSS-SECTIONS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcxsfsm

When the Extract Cross-Sections command is selected from RoadCalc’s Cross-Section
pull-down menu, the Extract Cross-Sections dialog box (Figure 3-32 on page 121) opens.
If the sub-project has no cross-sections yet, the program will open the Build Station List
dialog box (Figure 3-25 on page 112), and allow you to set the desired station range and
station interval.
This routine allows cross-sections to be created from a surface model created previously
with the Eagle Point Surface Modeling product. The program routes the horizontal
alignment through the model, and at requested stations, slices the model with vertical
planes perpendicular to the alignment. Wherever a plane intersects a surface model
triangle line, a cross-section shot is generated.
Once the stations are marked appropriately, click on the OK button to initiate the cross-
section generation process.
If a design surface or an actual surface has been generated, RoadCalc calculates end
areas using the new data when the extraction process is finished.
After processing, RoadCalc may display an error dialog box. It indicates stations where it
was not able to generate data all the way out to the corridor edges, and stations where it
was not able to find any data at all. Also, if a design or actual surface has been generated,
RoadCalc indicates stations where the new surface didn’t tie properly or extended past
the top original surface.
Enter a horizontal alignment before generating cross-sections from a surface model.
Instead of specifying a surface model, choose the User-Defined option in the Surface
Model drop list to specify a drawing/design file that contains three-dimensional
information. RoadCalc will extract shot data from the three-dimensional elements it
intersects.
120 RoadCalc
The Mark button will place an X in the Mark for Extraction column. The Unmark button will
remove the X in the Mark for Extraction column. Multiple cross-section stations can be
highlighted by using the shift or Ctrl keys in conjunction with mouse button clicks.
Chapter 3: Cross-
Sections
Figure 3-32 Extract Cross-Sections Dialog Box
Extract Cross-Sections Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Surface Toggle on the surfaces for which you want to extract data. To generate original
subsurfaces, design surfaces or actual surfaces, you must already have data for the
original ground surface.
Surface Model The Surface Model drop list contains the list of surface models created for this project. Set
the list to the name of the model from which you want to extract cross-sections. You can
also click on the Browse (...) icon to access models created in other Eagle Point projects.
After selecting another project’s SM file, the available models can be selected for use. If
the Surface Model drop list is set to User-Defined, the program will extract cross-sections,
from three-dimensional objects. By default, the program will use the sub-project’s plan
CAD graphic. If you want to use a different CAD graphic, click on the Browse (...) icon to
select a different CAD graphic file.
For more information, see Global Surface Models on page 122.
Corridor Edge If generating data for the first original surface, this defines how wide the cross-sections
Left are to be. Enter the offsets for the left corridor edge in the field. Enter a negative value for
an offset left of centerline or a positive value for an offset right of the centerline.
Corridor Edge If generating data for the first original surface, this defines how wide the cross-sections
Right are to be. Enter the offsets for the right corridor edge in the field. Enter a negative value
for an offset left of centerline or a positive value for an offset right of centerline.
User-defined Toggle this option on to select a closed polyline or shape to be used to define the corridor
Corridor edges. After clicking on the OK button, you will be prompted to select the bounding object.

Extract Cross-Sections Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Stationing This column displays the list of stations that was generated from the Build Station List
dialog box (Figure 3-25 on page 112) or entered using the New Station option.
Skew Angle This column indicates the skew angle for each cross-section. The default value is 0
degrees.
Marked for The stations marked with an X are the station locations at which RoadCalc will generate
Extraction cross-section information.
New Station This icon places and sorts a station value to be extracted in the currently defined list.
Cross-sections cannot be added to the list if the station value is past the ending station of
the horizontal alignment.
For more information, see New Station on page 110.
Modify Station Change the station and skew angle values for the highlighted station. Modify the type of
skew angle and whether or not to extract it.
The functionality for this is the same as New Station except that you highlight an existing
station. For more information, see New Station on page 110.
Delete Station Click on this icon to remove the highlighted cross-section from the station list. More than
one station may be highlighted using the Shift or Ctrl keys in conjunction with mouse
button clicks.
Mark If RoadCalc is to regenerate data for sections already there (if the surface model has
changed, for instance), use the Mark command to mark the desired cross-sections or
double-click on a station to mark and unmark it. You may mark more than one station at a
time by highlighting the appropriate stations in the list.
Unmark If you don’t want RoadCalc to extract data for a given station, use the Unmark command
to unmark stations for extraction. You may unmark more than one station at a time by
highlighting the appropriate stations in the list.
Build List Use this command to build a list of stations to extract.
For more information, see Build Station List on page 111.
Settings Modify the horizontal and vertical tolerances for cross-section data to be used.
Global Surface Models

ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS EXTRACT CROSS-SECTIONS GLOBAL SURFACE MODELS
The Global Surface Models command, accessed by clicking on the Browse button (...) on
the Extract Cross-Sections dialog box (Figure 3-32 on page 121), is used to access
surface models created in other Eagle Point projects, or to establish a CAD graphic name
from which to extract cross-section data. When selected, the Global Surface Model
command opens a file selection window, filtering for AutoCAD/BricsCad drawings
(*.DWG), MicroStation design files (*.DGN) or Eagle Point surface models (*.SM). You
may select a CAD graphic that contains three-dimensional information from which to
extract cross-sectional data. If the Eagle Point surface models filter (*.SM) is used, you
may select a model that has been created in another Eagle Point project. The SM file for a
122 RoadCalc
project is located in the project’s data file location and it contains the listing of the surface
models created for that project. After selecting the SM file for a project, another dialog box
displays with the model names for that project. After choosing one, the select dialog box is
closed and the name of the selected CAD graphic or surface model is displayed in the
drop list, corresponding to the Global Surface Model button selected.
Preview Cross-Section from Surface Model

ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS PREVIEW FROM SURFACE MODEL
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcxs2pnt

When you select the Preview from Surface Model command from the Cross-Sections
menu in RoadCalc, the Preview Cross-Section from Surface Model dialog box (Figure 3-
33 on page 124) will display. The Preview Cross-Section from Surface Model dialog box
allows you to extract a cross-section from a single or multiple surface models. Before you
use this option, you must use the Surface Modeling product to create a surface model of
Chapter 3: Cross-
the surface(s). If you do not have any surface models created for the current project, you
will need to create them or click on the All Surface Models (globe) icon to select a surface
Sections
model from a different project.
You can create the cross-section from a complex object, single object or two selected
points. The cross-section will start closest to the endpoint of the object selected when
using the complex or single object options or the first point when using the two-point
option.
When you click on the OK button the Preview Cross-Section from Surface Model dialog
box will close. You will be prompted to select an object if you have set the Object Selection
drop list to Complex Object or Simple Object. Graphically select the desired object closest
to the endpoint from which you want the cross-section to start. If you have the Object
Selection set to 2 Points, you will be prompted to select two points. The first point will be
the starting point of the cross-section. Once you have selected the object or two points,
another Preview Cross-Section from Surface Model dialog box (Figure 3-34 on page 125)
will display with the preview of the cross-section.

The Preview and Place in CAD fields on the dialog box are never enabled in RoadCalc.
Figure 3-33 Preview Cross-Section from Surface Model Dialog Box
Preview Cross-Section from Surface Model Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Object Selection This allows you to choose if you are going to preview a complex object, single object or 2
points selected.
Complex Object: This option will create a preview of all segments of the object
that is selected. The starting location of the preview will be closest to the
endpoint of the complex object that is selected when picking the complex
object.
Single Object: This option will create a preview of the segment that is selected.
If a complex object is selected, only the selected segment is previewed, not the
entire complex object. The starting location of the preview will be closest to the
endpoint of the segment that is selected when picking the object.
2 Points: This option will allow you to graphically select two points to create the
preview of the cross-section. The starting location of the preview will be first
point that is selected.
Surface Models This displays all of the surface models for the project. Highlighted the surface model(s)
that you want to use when creating the preview of the cross-section.
All Surface Select this option if you want to use a surface model from a different project. When you
Models (globe select this button, a file select dialog box will display allowing you to select a surface
icon) model library from a different project. Once the surface model library is selected, you can
select the desired surface models from the list to use for the preview of the cross-section.
124 RoadCalc
Chapter 3: Cross-
Figure 3-34 Preview Cross-Section from Surface Model Dialog Box
Sections
Preview Cross-Section from Surface Model Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Surface Model This field will display a list of all of the surface models that were selected for the preview of
the cross-section. Selecting a different surface from the drop list will move the query arrow
to the appropriate surface that is displayed in the preview.
Shot cross-section information. This will display the station (relative to the object or two points
selected), elevation and slope from the previous shot.
Scale View This provides access to the scale the horizontal and vertical scales of the cross-section.
You can set the size of one grid square equal to so many feet or meters for both the
horizontal and vertical.
Station This displays the station along the cross-section at the location that the query arrow is
located in the preview. This is measured along the object that was selected or from the
first point to second point that was selected when using the 2 point option. This is not the
station along the centerline alignment.
Elevation This displays the elevation of the cross-section at the location that the query arrow is
located. This is the elevation of the surface that is selected in the surface drop list.
Slope This displays that slope of the line between the current shot and the previous shot.
Slope Type This allows you to change the slope display. You can choose between % slope, H/V, V/H
or Unit/Unit.

Generate Subsurfaces
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS GENERATE SUBSURFACES
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcxsgensub

When you select the Generate Subsurfaces command, RoadCalc uses the control
stations to make a surface model for the subsurfaces, then uses this model to interpolate
subsurface data from the intermediate sections.
See Generating Subsurfaces on page 88 for more information.
If there are subsurface data at cross-sections that are not marked as control when
subsurfaces are generated, all subsurface data will be deleted at that cross-section.
Figure 3-35 Generate Subsurfaces Dialog Box
Generate Subsurfaces Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Station This field displays the station value of a cross-section.
Control Toggle When toggled on, this option places a check mark next to the station. This tells the system
that these stations are the stations for which boring information has been entered. The
boring information at these stations will control the subsurface interpolations for the
remaining stations.
Normal Toggle When toggled on, RoadCalc generates the subsurface data for any parallel or absolute
original ground surface that contains control shot information.
Use Existing If an original surface with the type of existing pavement has been added to the Original
Pavement Surface Manager, toggling on this option enables you to enter the left, center and right
existing pavement offsets and depths.
For more information, see Existing Pavement Parameters on page 128.
126 RoadCalc
Generate Subsurfaces Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Parameters Select this button to enter the existing pavement parameters of left, center and right
offsets and depths. This is disabled if the Use Existing Pavement option is not toggled on.
For more information, see Existing Pavement Parameters on page 128.
Example
Your sub-project has three original surfaces – topsoil, unclassified and rock. A typical
cross-section has a thin layer of topsoil on top, unclassified below that and rock below
that. Since the topsoil layer has a relatively uniform depth, the unclassified surface is
defined as parallel. The rock surface is not likely to follow the contours of the ground
surface, so you should define it as an absolute surface. Assume that the only data you
have for the subsurfaces comes from two soil borings.
To enter data for this cross-section situation, begin by entering data for the ground surface
(topsoil). After that, switch to the unclassified surface in the Surface field on the Edit
Cross-Section Data dialog box (Figure 3-21 on page 107) and enter the boring data
(offset-depth) for the unclassified surface. Switch to the rock surface and again enter the
Chapter 3: Cross-
boring data for this surface. Following the same steps, enter the data at the next station
where a sample was taken and mark both cross-sections a Control sections. Then use the
Sections
Generate Subsurfaces command to have RoadCalc interpolate the subsurface data for
the cross-sections between the sample stations. Figure 3-36, below, illustrates how
RoadCalc generates the subsurfaces on a cross-section based on the data at the two
boring locations.
Figure 3-36 Generating Subsurfaces

Existing Pavement Parameters
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS GENERATE SUBSURFACES PARAMETERS
The Existing Pavement Parameters command is used to represent an existing roadbed. In

order to represent an existing roadbed, RoadCalc requires three offset/depth pairs to be
entered. The left, center and right positions are connected with straight lines to represent
the bottom surface of a roadbed. A vertical line is extended up from the left and right
positions to tie the road into the original ground. If existing roadbeds are to be generated
for a divided highway, multiple left, center and right positions may be entered for any
control station. You can also use alignments for the left, center and right offset locations.
The offsets will follow the alignment that has been defined.
With the existing pavement surface defined and the new typical section processed,
RoadCalc will quantify the existing pavement that is cut by the new design in the Design
Earthwork Volume report.
Figure 3-37 Existing Pavement Parameters Dialog Box
Existing Pavement Parameters Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Station This field indicates which station you are currently working on. You need to specify offsets
for at least one station in order to have RoadCalc generate the existing pavement
surface.
Position Three positions must be checked for each existing pavement sections you want
generated – the left edge of pavement, the centerline and the right edge of pavement.
Offset This column indicates the centerline offset where the existing pavement edges and
centerline are located. If you have selected an alignment to determine the offset, the
alignment name will display in this edit field.
Depth This column indicates the depth to which the existing pavement extends.
New Offsets Use this option to enter the left edge of pavement, centerline and right edge of pavement
offsets and depths for the current station. More than one set of existing pavement
parameters may exist for any control station.
Modify Offsets Edit the parameters of offset and depth for any of the three existing pavement positions.
128 RoadCalc
Existing Pavement Parameters Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Delete Offsets Click on this icon to delete the highlighted parameters and the other two corresponding
parameters from the list. Because you must always supply the parameters for all three
positions, if you delete parameters for one position, the other two positions will also be
deleted.
Example
Figure 3-38 Existing Pavement Parameters
Chapter 3: Cross-
New Offsets
Sections
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS GENERATE SUBSURFACES PARAMETERS NEW OFFSETS
The New Offsets command is used to add data that represents existing pavement data.
Three positions must be entered to represent what the existing pavement looks like on-
site. The offsets to the three positions may be entered by a constant offset value or by
using a RoadCalc alignment.
Figure 3-39 New Offsets (Alignment) Dialog Box

Figure 3-40 New Offsets (Offset) Dialog Box
New Offsets Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Method When set to Alignment, you can assign a RoadCalc alignment for each of the three
positions. RoadCalc then calculates the offsets to each position alignment at each cross-
section. The offset option allows you to enter a constant offset for each of the three
positions.
See Figure 3-39 on page 129 for the alignment option and Figure 3-40 for the offset
method.
Alignment This is the RoadCalc alignment that will be used to calculate the left, center and right
offset.
Offset These fields indicate the offset that will be used when generating the left, center and right
positions.
Depth These fields indicate the depth from the topmost original ground surface.
Generate Cross-Section Reports

ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS GENERATE REPORTS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcxsrep

The General Reports command prints a cross-section report of the project surfaces. The
report includes the station, offset and elevation information for any surface. You may also
130 RoadCalc
specify whether you want the instrument and rod reading values for every shot, and the
PT code on every shot.
Figure 3-41 Generate Cross-Section Reports Dialog Box
Generate Cross-Section Reports Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 3: Cross-
Option Function
Sections
Surface Name Specify which surfaces you wish to see in the printout. All of the highlighted surfaces will
be printed in the report.
Print Station Toggling on this option enables the Starting and Ending Station edit fields. Enter stations
Range where you want the report to begin and end. If this is toggled off, the report will be
generated for all cross-sections
Starting Station Enter the station value where you want the cross-section report to begin.
Ending Station Enter the station value where you want the cross-section report to end.
Include I.H./R.R. Toggling on this option will include the Instrument Height and Rod Reading values in the
cross-section report.
Include PT Code Toggling on this option will include the PT Code name in the cross-section report.
Import Cross-Sections
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS IMPORT
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcxsimp

The Import Cross-Sections command provides an interface between RoadCalc and
external sources of cross-section data. The translator reads cross-section information

from an ASCII file. The ASCII file may be in one of RoadCalc’s pre-defined formats, or
you may define a custom format for the data.
See Import/Export Data on page 96 for more information.
RoadCalc uses the horizontal alignment to translate coordinate format ASCII files. Enter
an alignment before translating a coordinate format ASCII file. This allows the stations to
be out of order and a shot is no longer needed on the centerline.
Since translation alters the binary cross-section files, it is a good idea to make copies of all
of the sub-project’s data files before translating additional data into RoadCalc.
Figure 3-42 Import Cross-Sections Dialog Box
Import Cross-Sections Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Import to Select the surface for which the information is to be translated into RoadCalc. If you want
Surface to add, modify or delete surfaces in the drop list, click on the Manage Surfaces button.
File Name Choose an ASCII file to import by typing its name in the field. Alternatively, you may click
on the Open File icon to display a listing of the files from which to choose.
Preview of This field shows the first two lines of the ASCII file that is going to be imported. ASCII
Selected File format or the file to read.
Format Select the format of the ASCII file that is going to be imported. Click on the Format Library
button to select a different data file format.
Format Example This field displays the format in description form, along with an example.
Edit File This option opens an ASCII text editor, displaying the contents of the file to import. For
setting on which editor will be used, see Transfer Settings on page 133 and Transfer
Settings – Editor Tab on page 136.
Settings Choose this option to set station tolerance, maximum distance between points, point
number or elevation filters.
For more information, see Transfer Settings on page 133 and Transfer Settings – Import
Tab on page 133.
132 RoadCalc
Transfer Settings
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS IMPORT SETTINGS
The Transfer Settings command allows you to control how information is transferred to
and from RoadCalc. You can also specify what type of editor you want to use to view the
file before importing to RoadCalc.
For more information on the specific settings for importing, exporting and editors, see
Transfer Settings – Import Tab, below, Transfer Settings – Export Tab on page 134 and
Transfer Settings – Editor Tab on page 136.
Transfer Settings – Import Tab

ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS IMPORT SETTINGS IMPORT TAB
The Import Tab on the Transfer Settings dialog box (below) is used to set different options
when importing cross-section data. The station tolerance toggle is used to associate shots
Chapter 3: Cross-
to the nearest cross-section station within the defined tolerance. The Maximum Distance
Sections
between points option is to used prevent erroneous data from being translated to a cross-
section. The Use Point Numbers and Use Elevation options can be used to filter or
exclude certain data ranges from being imported into the cross-section.
Figure 3-43 Transfer Settings Dialog Box – Import Tab
Transfer Settings Dialog Box – Import Tab Definitions

Option Function
Station Toggle this option on if you want to force points to fall on an exact station value. These
Tolerance points are assigned to an exact station value (determined by the station interval) when
they fall within the tolerance specified.

Transfer Settings Dialog Box – Import Tab Definitions
Option Function
Station Interval This option is available when the Station Tolerance option is toggled on. This is used to
determine what station values are available for which to assign points. This should be set
to the same interval that the points and cross-section interval are set at. The station
interval is used as follows: If the centerline alignment begins at station 10+42.33 and the
interval specified is 50, the first station is 10+42.33, the next station would be 10+50, then
11+00, and so on.
Max Distance Specify the maximum acceptable distance to be used when translating in the ASCII file.
Between Points This is useful in checking for errors in the data file being translated.
Use Point Specify the highest and lowest point numbers to be used when translating in the ASCII
Numbers file.
Use Elevations Specify the highest and lowest acceptable elevations to be used when translating in the
ASCII file. This is useful in checking for errors in the data file being translated.
Transfer Settings – Export Tab

ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS EXPORT SETTINGS EXPORT TAB
The transfer settings on the Export Tab of the Transfer Settings dialog box (below) are
used to set different options when exporting cross-section data. The add to point number
will add the specified value to the point numbers. The station point number allows you to
control the point number the cross-section shots start at. The Northing, Easting, Elevation,
station and offset precision values allow you to control the accuracy of the cross-section
shots when they are exported.
Figure 3-44 Transfer Settings Dialog Box – Export Tab
134 RoadCalc
Transfer Settings Dialog Box – Export Tab Definitions
Option Function
Point Number This allows you to add the specified value to all of the point numbers when they are
translated from RoadCalc to the specified ASCII file.
Starting Point This allows you to specify the starting point number that will be used for the cross-section
shots when they are translated from RoadCalc.
Northing This allows you to control the precision for the Northing when it is written to the ASCII file.
The precision values you can choose from are 0 (zero) decimal places to eight decimal
places.
Easting This allows you to control the precision for the Easting when it is written to the ASCII file.
places.
Elevation This allows you to control the precision for the elevation when it is written to the ASCII file.
places.
Station This allows you to control the precision for the station when it is written to the ASCII file.
places.
Offset This allows you to control the precision for the station when it is written to the ASCII file.
Chapter 3: Cross-
places.
Sections

Transfer Settings – Editor Tab
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS IMPORT SETTINGS EDITOR TAB
The transfer settings for the Editor tab allow you to select what type of editor you are using
when you select the Edit button on the Import dialog box. You can choose between
Notepad, Wordpad or a user-defined editor.
Figure 3-45 Transfer Settings Dialog Box – Editor Tab
Transfer Settings Dialog Box – Editor Tab Definitions

Option Function
Notepad Select this option if you want to use Notepad as your text editor when editing a file.
Wordpad Select this option if you want to use Wordpad as your text editor when editing a file
User-Defined Select this option if you want to select your own text editor to use. Type in the path to the
text editor you want to use. You can also click on the Open folder button to select the
desired text editor.
Assign Points to Station

The Assign Points to Station command allows you to decide what to do with all shots
outside of the station tolerance. Points can be discarded or assigned to existing or new
station values. To assign a point to a station value, highlight the rows that belong to the
same station and then use the Assign Station button to enter the station at which the shots
belong. As changes are made (i.e., a group of shots are assigned a station) the list of
points in the Assign Points to Station dialog box are updated by removing the shots that
136 RoadCalc
were in the highlighted group. If points are not assigned to a station value and the Assign
Points to Station dialog box is closed, the shots are discarded.
Figure 3-46 Assign Points to Station Dialog Box
Chapter 3: Cross-
Assign Points to Station Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Sections
Actual Station This column displays the calculated station value for the point along the centerline
alignment. The points listed do not fall within the station tolerance that is specified.
Offset This column displays the calculated offset to the point from the selected alignment. A
negative value is an offset to the left of the alignment looking up-station. A positive value
is an offset to the right of the alignment looking down-station.
Nearest Station This displays the nearest station value to the actual station value listed for the point. The
nearest station value uses the station interval setting to determine the closest station to
the point.
Assign Station This allows you to specify a station value for the highlighted items in the list control. When
selected, the Assign Station dialog box displays with the nearest station value displayed in
the Station edit field. Type in the desired station value and click on the OK button. The
highlighted item in the list control will be removed since a station value has been
assigned.
Export Cross-Sections
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS EXPORT
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcxsexp

Select the Export command on the Cross-Section pull-down menu to allow RoadCalc’s
binary data to be translated into an ASCII file, as represented in the Export Cross-Sections
dialog box (below).
Use the Export from Surface drop list to choose which RoadCalc surface to export. All
original, design and actual surfaces defined in the sub-project are listed along with a
surface called Merged Design. This surface represents the composite of the topmost
design and original surfaces on the cross-sections.
The points selected for the translation are determined in the following order:
1. First the highest elevated design surface point is chosen.
2. If a design surface is not at that point, the highest original surface is selected.
You may also choose which shots to export by the PT Codes that exist on the cross-
sections. Select which PT Codes to export by using the Settings button.
Use a Wildsoft ASCII file for translating out a file for Surface Modeling.
Figure 3-47 Export Cross-Sections Dialog Box
Export Cross-Sections Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Export from Select the surface from which the information is to be translated from RoadCalc. If you
Surface want to add, modify or delete surfaces in the drop list, click on the Manage Surface button.
File Name Choose the ASCII file to export by typing its name in the edit field. Alternatively, you may
click on the Open File icon to select a file to export to.
Format Select the format for the ASCII file that is going to be exported. Click on the Format
Library button to filter the list that is displayed in the drop list.
Format Example This Displays the format in description form, along with an example.
Settings This allows you to specify a number to add to the cross-section shots, the starting point
number and precision for Northings, Eastings, elevations, stations and offsets.
For more information, see Transfer Settings on page 133 and Transfer Settings – Export
Tab on page 134.
Select PT Codes This displays the PT Code Library for choosing specific PT codes to translate from
RoadCalc. All of the selected PT codes will be translated from RoadCalc cross-sections
to the specified ASCII file.
138 RoadCalc
Create User Formats
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS CREATE USER FORMATS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcxsuser

When the Create User Formats command is selected from the Cross-Section pull-down
menu, the Create User Formats dialog box, shown below, displays.
Use this command to create an ASCII format for the data translation that is not available in
RoadCalc’s predefined formats.
Chapter 3: Cross-
Sections
Figure 3-48 Create User Formats Dialog Box
Create User Formats Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Format Name This field displays the names of the custom formats that have been entered.
Type This column indicates the format of the file. The two types of formats are X-section and
coordinate.
New Format Click on the New icon to add a new user-defined format.
For more information, see New Format, below.
Modify Format Click on the Modify icon to change a user-defined format.
This is similar to New Format. For more information, see New Format, below.
Copy Format Click on the Copy icon to copy the highlighted format to a new format name.
Delete Format Click on the Delete icon to delete the highlighted format.
New Format
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS CREATE USER FORMAT NEW FORMAT
To add a new format, click on the New button on the Create User Formats dialog box
(Figure 3-48 on page 139). Existing formats can also be modified by clicking on the Modify

button. Each line in the ASCII file to be transferred can contain up to 255 characters. The
transfer format tells the program how the information for a point(s) is arranged on each
line.
After supplying a Format Name, enter the format by typing it directly into the Format edit
field or by using the P, N, E, L, D, S, O, I and R buttons. The number of characters entered
into the edit field when using one of these buttons depends on the Field Width specified.
For example, if 5 is set for the Field Width, five letter P’s will show up when the P button is
selected.
Figure 3-49 New User Format Dialog Box
New User Format Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Format Name Type in the name for the format being entered.
P Click on the P button to enter a character for point number.
N Click on the N button to enter a character for Northing.
E Click on the E button to enter a character for Easting.
L Click on the L button to enter a character for elevation.
D Click on the D button to enter a character for description.
S Click on the S button to enter a character for station.
O Click on the O button to enter a character for offset.
I Click on the I button to enter a character for instrument height.
R Click on the R button to enter a character for rod reading.
C Click on the C button to enter a character for comment.
Field Width Choose the Field Width to set a number for a character. The value in this edit field will
determine how many of the selected characters are placed.
Delimiter Select this button to place the delimeter specified in the type drop list. The available types
are <space>, comma (,), colon (:), semicolon (;), [,], {,}, \, /, ¦, ^ and !.
Character This field shows how many characters are behind the cursor.
Position
Field Width This field shows how many characters are in a particular field.
140 RoadCalc
View Cross-Section Graphics
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS VIEW CROSS-SECTION GRAPHICS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcxview
ICON:
The View Cross-Section Graphics command will load the CAD graphic to display the
Cross-Section Data. If the current CAD graphic that is being switched from has been
modified, you will be prompted to save changes to the CAD graphic.
Utilities that have been defined in the project also display in the Cross-Section CAD
graphic. They are displayed according to the options set for each utility.
Enter the desired station to view and click on the Apply button or use the arrow button to
view the next or previous cross-section.
Chapter 3: Cross-
When viewing cross-section graphics in AutoCAD/BricsCad layers to control entity
Sections
visibility. This will interfere with the normal process when moving between cross-
sections. Entities on frozen layers cannot be erased and additional graphical
information for the surface will be placed when a new cross-section is viewed. This
typically results in Graphic/Numeric errors. To control the visibility of cross-section
information, it is suggested that you use the On/Off feature of the layer control.
Cross-Section Settings
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS SETTINGS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcxsset

The Cross-Section Settings command allows you to set a vertical stretch factor for the
cross-sections, tolerances used for extracting cross-sections and precision for cross
slopes.
For more information about the vertical stretch factor and tolerance parameters, see
Cross-Section Settings – General, below. For more information on the precision settings,
see Cross-Section Settings – Precision Tab on page 143.

Cross-Section Settings – General Tab
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS SETTINGS GENERAL TAB
The Cross-Section Settings – General Tab (below) is used to set the vertical stretch factor
and the tolerance parameters for extracting cross-sections. The Vertical Stretch factor
applies a vertical exaggeration to the cross-section when viewing the CAD graphic. The
values for the horizontal and vertical tolerance are set to selectively remove shots from the
cross-section when reading the surface model data. Refer to Cross-Section Settings on
page 95 for more detail.
When extracting cross-sections from surface models that contain curb and gutter
geometry, set the Horizontal and Vertical Tolerances to 0. This prevents RoadCalc from
removing face of curb points from the extracted cross-sections.
Figure 3-50 Cross-Section Settings Dialog Box – General Tab
Cross-Section Settings Dialog Box – General Tab Definitions

Option Function
Vertical Stretch Set the vertical exaggeration when viewing the cross-section CAD graphic to an integer
Factor between 1 and 10. Type the value or use the slider control to set the vertical stretch factor.
Horizontal Enter the values for the horizontal tolerance to selectively remove points from the
Tolerance information being used to generate the cross-sections. This is useful when extracting
cross-sections from dense surface models to reduce the number of points used for each
section by removing redundant points.
Vertical Enter the values for the vertical tolerance to selectively remove points from the
Tolerance information being used to generate the cross-sections. This is useful when extracting
cross-sections from dense surface models to reduce the number of points used for each
section by removing redundant points.
142 RoadCalc
Cross-Section Settings – Precision Tab
ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS SETTINGS PRECISION TAB
The Cross-Section Settings – Precision Tab (below) sets the display precision for the
slope reported in the Edit Cross-Section Data dialog box. This value is for display
purposes only and is not used for any calculations. Type the slope precision values in the
edit fields or use the slider control to set the precision of %Slope and H/V (V/H).
Chapter 3: Cross-
Figure 3-51 Cross-Section Settings Dialog Box – Precision Tab
Sections
Cross-Section Settings Dialog Box – Precision Tab
Option Function
%Slope Set the %Slope precision factor to an integer between 0 and 8 by typing the value in the
edit field or using the slider control to set the precision factor.
H/V (V/H) Set the H/V (V/H) precision factor to an integer between 0 and 8 by typing the value in the
edit field or using the slider control to set the precision factor.
Synchronize Cross-Section Graphics and Data

ROADCALC CROSS-SECTIONS SYNCHRONIZE GRAPHICS AND DATA
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcxssync
ICON:
This command can be accessed to verify that the graphic representation of a RoadCalc
object matches the numeric information. If differences exist, you determine whether the
graphic or numeric information is correct. Selecting the Update Graphics button will write

the numeric information to the graphic. Selecting the Update Data button will write the
graphic information to the numeric.
This dialog box will also automatically display if RoadCalc finds any differences when
accessing a data set and corresponding graphic.
Figure 3-52 Synchronize Cross-Section Graphics and Data Dialog Box
Synchronize Cross-Section Graphics and Data Definitions

Option Function
Update Graphic Click on this button to update the cross-section graphics in CAD from the numeric data.
Update Data After graphically modifying a RoadCalc cross-section, use this command to update the
numeric data based on the graphic changes.
144 RoadCalc
PROFILES
In this chapter:
CHAPTER
Profile Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Vertical Curve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Edit Profile Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Manage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Convert Objects to Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4
Extract Profile from Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Original Ground Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Generate Profile Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
View Profile Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Profile Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Synchronize Profile Graphics and Data . . . . . . . 172
Chapter 4: Profiles 145

Profile Concepts
The commands in the Profiles menu define profiles and specify other design constraints
which RoadCalc uses to generate design cross-sections.
The design profiles control the elevations of points on the typical sections. The centerline
design profile is the centerline profile of the design material surfaces. RoadCalc uses the
centerline design profile to determine at what elevation to place the typical sections on the
original cross-sections.
RoadCalc represents design profiles by using lines for tangents and small segment lines
to approximate vertical curves. Original ground profiles are composed of lines. They are
generated from the original ground cross-sections at whatever offset you specify. An
original ground profile at an offset of 0.00 always exists by default.
The profile data can be entered graphically or numerically. RoadCalc automatically
supplies you with an original ground centerline profile based on cross-sections, so you
may sketch a design profile using CAD and then convert those objects into a profile that
can be modified using the Edit Profile Data command. If you know the station, elevations
and curve data, that information may be entered using the Edit Profile Data dialog boxes
(Figure 4-3 on page 149, and Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5 on page 150).
If utilities have been defined for the project, they will also appear in the RoadCalc Profile
Graphic. How the utilities appear depends on the annotation options set for each profile.
Refer to Utility Annotation Settings on page 76 for more information.
RoadCalc Profile Coordinate Systems

The RoadCalc profile graphic has a different coordinate system than the rest of the
project. By default, RoadCalc saves the profile graphic into its own CAD graphic and it
constructs the graphic with increasing stationing from left to right. This means that the
X-coordinate in the profile graphic corresponds to the station value along the alignment
(except when a station equation is encountered). The Y-coordinate does not directly
represent the elevation of the profile because it has a stretch factor associated with it. The
stretch factor is the ratio between the horizontal and vertical plot scales within a project.
(For more information about horizontal and vertical plot scales refer to the Plot Scales
command found in the Eagle Point Menu manual. In a project with a horizontal scale of 1"
= 50' and a vertical scale of 1" = 5', the stretch factor would be 10 (50/5 = 10). Therefore
the Y-coordinate in CAD at a given station would represent the elevation value times ten. If
your vertical scale was instead 1" = 10', then the Y-coordinate of some elevation will be 5
times (50/10 = 5) the elevation value.
You may change the direction that the profile runs by setting the Profile Orientation toggle
to Right to Left in the Profile Settings command. When RoadCalc constructs the Profile
graphic in CAD, it takes the negative value of the X-coordinate that it would have used if it
146 RoadCalc
were drawing the profile Left to Right. If the starting station of the profile is 10+00,
RoadCalc will draw the profile starting at an X-coordinate of -1000.00. In other words, the
profile now runs from the right side of the profile CAD graphic to the left. See the figure
below. Even though the X-coordinates may not reflect the station values of the profile,
RoadCalc translates the coordinates into station values using the profile coordinate
system definition.
You can also change the CAD graphic that RoadCalc draws the profile in by changing the
Draw Profile Graphic toggle in the Profile Settings command. This allows you to place
your RoadCalc profiles into your plan view at a specified reference point. Use the Define
Coordinate System command in the Profile Settings dialog box to establish this reference
point in your plan CAD graphic. The command requires input of some plan view X and Y
coordinate and the station and elevation that point represents. Even though the
X-coordinates may not reflect the station values of the profile, RoadCalc translates the
coordinates into station values using the profile coordinate system definition. The
Y-coordinate is also still a function of the elevation times the stretch factor, but it also is
using the profile coordinate system definition. The Profiles product can also utilize the
RoadCalc Profile Coordinate System to report stations and elevation instead of real world
X and Y coordinates.
For more information see Profile Settings – General Tab on page 168.
Chapter 4: Profiles
Figure 4-1 Profile Drawn in RoadCalc Profile Graphic

Vertical Curve Parameters
To define a vertical curve, only one curve parameter needs to be entered and RoadCalc
calculates and displays the rest. Choose from among L, K, E, sight distance or low/high
point. See the figure below for an illustration of these parameters.
RoadCalc also supports asymmetric vertical curves. When this is toggled on in the
Vertical Curve Data dialog box (Figure 4-7 on page 154), you may enter different values
for the Length In and Length Out options.
Figure 4-2 Vertical Curve Parameters
Edit Profile Data

ROADCALC PROFILES EDIT DATA
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcprdata
ICON:
The Edit Profile Data command provides the ability to enter and edit the profile, either in
dialog boxes or in the profile graphic. If the profile graphic is open at the same time as the
profile dialog boxes, the program automatically updates the CAD graphic. The graphic can
148 RoadCalc
be edited and data sent back to the text boxes using the Synchronize Profile Graphics and
Data command.
After constructing a new profile in CAD, transfer the data to the Profile Edit dialog box
(below). Using the Convert Objects to Profile command. RoadCalc displays the profile
data in the Edit Data dialog box and redraws the profile using the CAD settings for the
converted profile.
When graphically editing the profile, make sure that no annotation or extraneous
information is placed on the same layer/level as any design profile. For speed and
accuracy, RoadCalc reads information directly off the layer/level and updates the text
boxes. If annotation or other information needs to be placed in the profile graphic, place
this information on layers/levels other than the design profiles.
When closing the Edit Profile Data dialog box (below), RoadCalc checks to make sure the
profile graphic matches the numeric data. If you are not currently viewing the CAD graphic
that contains the profile, RoadCalc will prompt you that the graphic needs to be updated
when the Edit Profile Data dialog box is closed. If you choose to update the profile graphic
now, you will be prompted to save changes to your current CAD graphic; the profile CAD
graphic will then be opened, updated and saved and the previously loaded CAD graphic
displays again. If you do not update the graphic, the next time the profile graphic is
opened and the Edit Profile Data dialog box is opened, the Synchronize Graphics and
Data Dialog box (Figure 4-23 on page 173) will display.
Choose between updating the graphic information with the numeric or the numeric data
with the graphic representation. If you are unsure which to choose, close the dialog box
and determine which is correct. RoadCalc will continue to display the Synchronize
Graphics and Data dialog box until the discrepancy is remedied.
Chapter 4: Profiles
Figure 4-3 Edit Profile Data (Stations, Elevations, Grades, Distances) Dialog Box

Figure 4-4 Profile Data (Stations and Elevations) Dialog Box
Figure 4-5 Profile Data (Grades and Distances) Dialog Box
Profile Data Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Profile This is the name of the current profile. Click on the down arrow to highlight and display the
data for another profile.
Manage Profiles This icon allows you to accesses the Profile Manager so you may add, modify, copy or
delete profiles.
For more information, see Manage Profiles on page 161.
VPI This column indicates the vertical points of intersection (VPI) which include the BOP and
EOP stations.
Status The status displays an “F” when the VPI is fixed and a “U” when the VPI is unrestricted. A
fixed VPI indicates that if a VPI located before it is modified, it will remain at the station
and elevation assigned to it. If a VPI is unfixed, it may “float” its position when a VPI is
changed around it. A VPI that is unrestricted does not have the next segment of the profile
used when processing dynamic typical sections. The design centerline profile must be
continuous, therefore it cannot have unrestricted VPIs.
150 RoadCalc
Profile Data Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Station This reports the station value of the highlighted VPI in feet (or meters).
Elevation This reports the elevation of the highlighted VPI in feet (or meters).
% Grade This reports the grade between the active VPI and the following VPI as a percentage.
Distance This reports the horizontal distance between 2 sequential VPIs in feet (or meters).
New VPI This places a VPI by station and elevation or grade and distance into the VPI list.
RoadCalc adds the VPI to the list based on the station value entered. When entering by
grade and distance the VPI is placed into the list with respect to the highlighted VPI. The
New VPI is placed at a grade and distance from the highlighted VPI.
For more information, see New VPI on page 152.
Modify VPI Use this option to change the station, elevation, grade or distance of the highlighted VPI to
the next VPI. You can also specify whether the current VPI is fixed or if it marks an
unrestricted zone (only available for special profiles).
This is similar to the New VPI option. For more information, see New VPI on page 152.
Delete VPI Click on this icon to remove the highlighted VPI from the list and updates the graphic.
Profile CAD Click on this icon to change the CAD properties of the highlighted profile.
Settings
Generate Profile This generates profile reports according to the option set in the Print Setup command
Reports found in the File menu on the Eagle Point menu.
Curve Data Click on this button to view and modify the curve parameters of the highlighted VPI.
For more information, see Vertical Curve Data on page 153.
Spot Elevations This command allows you to check the elevation at a specific station along the active
profile. After entering a station value, press the Tab key to display the elevation at the
station. The spot elevation can be annotated on the profile by clicking on the Annotate
button.
For more information, see Spot Elevations on page 159.
Chapter 4: Profiles
Preview Profile This displays the profiles that are in the Profile Manager to a Windows dialog box. Using
Graphic this option does not require CAD to be loaded.
See Preview Objects in the Eagle Point Menu manual for more information.
View Profile Use this option to view the profile data in the profile CAD graphic. Depending on the
Graphic toggle in Profile Settings either the plan CAD graphic or RoadCalc Profile CAD graphic is
loaded.
For more information, see Profile Settings – General Tab on page 168.
Re-size Dialog Click on these icons to change the size and display of the VPI list as shown in Figure 4-3
on page 149, Figure 4-4 on page 150 and Figure 4-5 on page 150.

New VPI
ROADCALC PROFILES EDIT DATA NEW VPI
You may numerically define a new VPI by entering stations and elevations or by grade and
distance. Click on the New VPI button to add a new VPI to the current list (see Figure 4-6
on page 153). RoadCalc automatically sorts the VPIs that are added by station.
The first VPI must be entered by station and elevation. Station values must be entered in
order along the sub-project.
VPIs can be entered by percent grades and distances instead of stations and elevations.
When entering VPI data by grade and distance be sure to have the correct VPI
highlighted. To add a VPI to the end of the list, highlight the last VPI and select New VPI.
The grade and distance entered are used to calculate the station and elevation of the next
VPI. To insert a VPI by grade and distance, highlight the VPI you want to go a grade and
distance from and select the New VPI icon. RoadCalc adds the distance to the highlighted
VPI’s station value and places the VPI into the list according to the calculated station.
A toggle button allows the station and elevation value of any VPI to be fixed. A fixed VPI is
indicated with an “F” in the Status column of the Manage Profiles dialog box (Figure 4-13
on page 161). If you modify, add or delete VPIs, RoadCalc holds the station and elevation
of a fixed VPI and recalculates the percent grade and distance to it. On an unfixed VPI,
RoadCalc maintains the percent grade and distance from the prior VPI and recalculates
the station and elevation of the unfixed VPI.
The Parallel Original Ground at Depth option defines a profile that matches the original
ground or parallels it at a constant depth. You can have the whole profile match the
original ground, or only portions of it.
If the entire profile is to match or parallel the original ground, click on the New VPI button
to create a VPI at the beginning of the profile. For the elevation of the VPI, try to use a
value that matches the original ground at that station. Also be sure to turn on the Parallel
Original Ground (Parallel O.G.) toggle. If the profile is to parallel the original ground at a
depth, enter the depth in the field provided. Follow these same steps and add a VPI at the
end of the profile.
For non-centerline profiles, zones can be defined where the profile isn’t used, allowing the
typical section to define the elevation of a breakpoint. The unfixed button in the box
creates these zones. Unrestricted zones display as gaps in the graphic profile.
The Design Centerline Profile must be a continuous profile. Therefore, the unrestricted
toggle is not available when editing a VPI for the centerline profile.
To create an unrestricted zone, enter the entire profile placing a VPI at the beginning and
end of each unrestricted region. Then, turn on the Unrestricted toggle for the VPIs at the
152 RoadCalc
beginning of each unrestricted zone. A gap should display at the appropriate location in
the profile graphic.
Figure 4-6 New VPI Dialog Box
New VPI Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Method Select By Station/Elevation or By Grade/Distance to input a VPI by a station value and
elevation or by a percent grade and distance.
Station This is the centerline station at which the VPI will be placed. Stationing is always in
reference to the Centerline alignment.
Elevation This is the elevation at which the VPI will be placed.
Grade This is the percent grade used to place the VPI. The percent sign does not need to be
entered. Negative values may be entered to denote a negative slope.
Distance This is the horizontal distance in feet or (meters).
Fixed This indicates if a VPI and its station and elevation are fixed.
Unrestricted This indicates if the typical section will control the elevation through this VPI, ignoring the
special profile elevations.
Chapter 4: Profiles
Parallel Original Toggle this option on to specify if the profile will parallel original ground.
Ground
At Depth This indicates at what depth the profile will parallel original ground. A positive depth
indicates the profile will be lower than original ground.
Vertical Curve Data

ROADCALC PROFILES EDIT DATA CURVE DATA
In the Profile Edit box, highlight the VPI you want to enter curve data for and click on the
Curve Data button. The Vertical Curve Data dialog box displays (Figure 4-7 on page 154).
To define a vertical curve, only one curve parameter needs to be entered and RoadCalc
calculates and displays the rest. Choose from among the parameters L, K, E, sight
distances or low/high point.

A pass-through point may be entered when you know the location of a point that must be
at a certain station and elevation (i.e., where a road meets a bridge abutment). To use the
pass-through point, enter the station and elevation of the pass-through point into the edit
fields. RoadCalc calculates the remaining curve parameters.
See Vertical Curve Parameters on page 148.
The spread control edit fields behave differently than most other edit fields. Click once into
the edit field to give it focus. Where you click is where the blinking cursor will appear. Then
double click in the edit field to highlight the entire value. You may also click once on the
edit field where there are no numbers and then immediately start overwriting the number
currently there by typing new data.
If any curve overlaps with neighboring curves, RoadCalc displays text below the
Asymmetric toggle, indicating where the overlap is occurring. Adjust the VPI locations or
the curve lengths to eliminate any overlaps before exiting the command.
If Asymmetric Curves is toggled on, the curve will split in two in the curve data area,
labeled VPI In # and VPI Out #.
Grayed out curves cannot be changed. Only the middle curve shown below in the Profile
Curve Data dialog box may be edited. Use the Next and Previous buttons to modify other
curves.
Figure 4-7 Vertical Curve Data Dialog Box
154 RoadCalc
Vertical Curve Data Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
L This is the length of the curve.
K This represents the K factor.
E This displays the external distance.
Begin Curve This displays the station where the vertical curve begins (VPC).
End Curve This displays the station where the vertical curve ends (VPT).
Asymmetric Create an asymmetrical vertical curve by specifying the length in (Lin) and length out
Curve (Lout) parameters.
Previous PI Click on this button to view the data for the preceding VPI.
Next PI Click on this button to view the following VPI and its data.
Design Speed This indicates the design speed for the vertical curve based on the current vertical speed
table.
Sight Distance This is the available sight distance based on the vertical design data. The Headlight
distance is calculated and displayed for Sag vertical curves. The Stopping and Passing
sight distances are calculated and displayed for crest vertical curves.
Refer to Profile Settings – Sight Parameters Tab on page 171.
VPI Stationing This displays the stations and “on curve” elevations of the VPC, VPI and VPT. The VPI
also displays the elevation on tangent.
VPC This is the vertical point of curvature. This is the beginning point of the vertical curve.
VPI This is the vertical point of intersection. This is the intersection point of the incoming and
outgoing tangents.
VPT This is the vertical point of tangency. This is the end of the vertical curve where it ties back
into the tangent.
High/Low Point This is the station and elevation of the high or low point of the vertical curve.
Pass-through This option allows you to specify a station and elevation that the curve must pass through.
Point
Chapter 4: Profiles
Vertical Speed Access the Vertical Speed Table to add new parameters or to set the current speed table
Table using this command.
For more information, see Vertical Speed Table, below.
Vertical Speed Table

ROADCALC PROFILES EDIT DATA CURVE DATA VERTICAL SPEED TABLE
RoadCalc provides several Speed Tables for vertical curves as it does for horizontal
curves to help select curve parameters. These tables give AASHTO’s recommendations
for minimum curve lengths, K values and sight distances based on design speed.
The tables work in two ways. First, by choosing a design speed, you can have RoadCalc
create the curve data for any or all VPIs. Second, when viewing curve data, RoadCalc
checks the current curve parameters against the Speed Table and reports back the design

speed. If any curve parameters are changed, RoadCalc updates the design speed
accordingly.
Figure 4-8 Vertical Speed Table Dialog Box
Vertical Speed Table Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Speed Table This is the name of the highlighted speed table.
Vertical Speed Access the Vertical Speed Table Library to add new vertical speed tables.
Table Library For more information, see Vertical Speed Table Library on page 157.
Speed The design speed for the vertical curve.
Length The horizontal length of the vertical curve.
K (crest) The K factor for a crest vertical curve.
K (sag) The K factor for a sag vertical curve.
Stopping The minimum stopping sight distance for crest vertical curves.
Passing The minimum passing sight distance for crest vertical curves.
Headlight The minimum headlight sight distance in sag vertical curves.
New Vertical Add speed, curve length, KC, KS and stopping, passing and headlight distances to the
Speed current speed table using this option.
Parameters
Refer to New Vertical Speed Parameters on page 158.
Modify Vertical Modifies the vertical curve design parameters for the highlighted speed.
Speed
This is similar to New Vertical Speed Parameters. Refer to New Vertical Speed
Parameters Parameters on page 158.
Delete Vertical Removes the highlighted parameters from the current speed table.
Speed
Parameters
Print Speed Prints the speed table parameters for the current speed table according to the options set
Table in the Print Setup command.
156 RoadCalc
Vertical Speed Table Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Create Vertical This option allows you to create a vertical curve with the highlighted parameters.
Curve For more information, see Create Vertical Curve on page 159.
Vertical Speed Table Library

ROADCALC PROFILES EDIT DATA CURVE DATA VERTICAL SPEED TABLE SPEED TABLE
LIBRARY
The Vertical Speed Table Library (below) provides a means to add, modify, copy and
delete vertical speed tables. Up to 1000 Speed Tables can be maintained. RoadCalc
provides several from the AASHTO manual.
Like the libraries of PT Codes and Slopes, the Speed Table Library is independent of a
specific project – if changes are made to it in one project, the changes are seen in all
projects.
Figure 4-9 Vertical Speed Table Library Dialog Box
Chapter 4: Profiles
Vertical Speed Table Library Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Table Name This describes what the speed table represents.
New Vertical This icon allows you to enter a name for the new speed table.
Speed Table
Modify Vertical This icon allows you to modify the name of the highlighted speed table.
Speed Table
Copy Vertical Clicking on this icon copies all of the highlighted speed tables’ parameters into a new
Speed Table Speed Table.
Delete Vertical Clicking on this icon removes the speed table from the Speed Table Library and deletes
Speed Table the curve parameters associated with it.

New Vertical Speed Parameters
ROADCALC PROFILES EDIT DATA CURVE DATA VERTICAL SPEED TABLE NEW VERTICAL SPEED
PARAMETERS
The Curve parameters in the new vertical speed table correspond to the similarly labeled
parameters on the Vertical Speed Table dialog box (Figure 4-8 on page 156). A parameter
on the vertical speed table represents the minimum allowable value for that parameter.
For example, a 20 MPH design speed might have a 60-ft minimum curve length and a
125-ft minimum stopping sight distance. Depending on the grades going into and coming
out of a curve, either parameter could control the design.
Figure 4-10 New Vertical Speed Parameters Dialog Box
New Vertical Speed Parameters Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Design Speed Enter the Design Speed for a vertical curve.
Length Enter the horizontal length of a vertical curve.
K (crest) Enter the K factor for a crest vertical curve.
K (sag) Enter the K value for a sag vertical curve.
Stopping Enter the minimum Stopping Sight distance for a vertical curve.
Passing Enter the minimum Passing Sight distance for a vertical curve.
Headlight Enter the minimum Headlight distance for a vertical curve.
158 RoadCalc
Create Vertical Curve
ROADCALC PROFILES EDIT DATA CURVE DATA VERTICAL SPEED TABLE CREATE VERTICAL
CURVE
To use the current vertical speed table to generate curve data, select the Create Vertical
Curve button from the Vertical Speed Table dialog box (Figure 4-8 on page 156). When
this option is selected, RoadCalc opens the Create Vertical Curve dialog box (below). The
list of VPIs has multi-selection capabilities, therefore you can highlight the VPIs for which
you want to create the curve data. Use the Ctrl key in combination with a mouse click to
highlight more than one individual VPI or use the Shift key in combination with a mouse
click to highlight a range of VPIs. The text below the list indicates which Speed Table will
be used to create the curve and at what speed. After highlighting the appropriate VPIs and
clicking on the OK button, RoadCalc will design the curves and enter the data into the
Vertical Curve Data dialog box (Figure 4-7 on page 154). If data already exists for any of
the VPIs, a warning box will ask if you want to overwrite the data or cancel the creation.
Figure 4-11 Create Vertical Curve Dialog Box
Create Vertical Curve Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 4: Profiles
Option Function
VPI This field lists the VPIs for which you want RoadCalc to create curve data. Select more
than one to apply the curve parameter to multiple VPIs.
Table This indicates which speed table is being used.
Design Speed This indicates the highlighted design speed for which to create the vertical curves.
Spot Elevations
ROADCALC PROFILES EDIT DATA SPOT ELEVATIONS
To find the elevation of the profile at some station, open the Spot Elevations dialog box
(Figure 4-12 on page 160) by clicking on the Spot Elevation button. Enter a station value

and RoadCalc displays the elevation at that station for the current profile. You may also
use the PIC button to graphically select a point in CAD.
The profile drop list contains all of the profiles from the profile manager plus one more
choice for the generic profile coordinate system (see RoadCalc Profile Coordinate
Systems on page 146). The elevation is calculated at the station entered along the
selected profile when the Calculate button is selected. If you have set the profile to Profile
Coordinate System, you must use the PIC button in order to display the elevation of a
certain point. If you want that spot annotated with a Station/Elevation label, select the
Annotate button.
Figure 4-12 Spot Elevations Dialog Box
Spot Elevations Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Profile Select the profile in which to calculate the elevation of the entered station. If Profile
Coordinate System is chosen, you must pick a point in CAD to find the station and
elevation of any point.
Station This is the station where the spot elevation is desired. The PIC button may be used to
graphically select a point in CAD that represents the desired station location.
Elevation This indicates the elevation of the profile.
Calculate After the profile is selected and the station is entered, use the Calculate button to find the
elevation. If a station that is entered is not on the profile, the resulting elevation cannot be
reported.
Annotate Places elevation annotation on the profile at the specified station. Both the station and
spot elevation are annotated on the current profile layer/level.
Preview Profile Graphic

ROADCALC PROFILES EDIT DATA PREVIEW PROFILE GRAPHIC
The Preview Profile Graphic command is used to display the defined profiles graphically in
a window, rather than through CAD. No graphical modifications can be made, but the
graphics are updated when a numeric change is made.
Refer to Preview Objects in the Eagle Point Menu manual for more information.
160 RoadCalc
Manage Profiles
ROADCALC PROFILES MANAGE
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcprman

When the Manage command is selected from RoadCalc’s Profiles pull-down menu, the
Manage Profiles dialog box (below) displays. By default, RoadCalc creates an entry for
the centerline design profile, but up to 99 other design profiles can be defined. Each of
these profiles can control a breakpoint on the typical section.
The Centerline profile is the profile that the cross-hairs on the typical section follow. It may
truly be the centerline of the road, median, etc., or it may be one of the “traveled way”
profiles in a more complicated divided highway situation. You may create this profile by
entering stations and elevations or grade and distances for the VPIs, or by graphically
sketching in CAD what you want your design profile to be converting it to. Once the VPI
data is entered, then the vertical curve information may be entered through the Curve
Data button.
Figure 4-13 Manage Profiles Dialog Box
Chapter 4: Profiles
Manage Profiles Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
No. This column indicates the number RoadCalc assigns sequentially to profiles added to the
Profile Manager.
Name This column indicates the specified description of the profile.
New Profile This icon allows you to add a new profile to the Profile Manager. Use the Edit Data
command to enter VPI and curve information.
For more information, see New Profile on page 162.
Modify Profile This icon allows you to edit the name of the highlighted profile.
This is similar to the New Profile command. For more information, see New Profile on
page 162.
Copy Profile This icon allows you to copy the highlighted profile data and graphic to a new profile name
and adds it to the Profile Manager.

Manage Profiles Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Delete Profile This icon allows you to remove the highlighted profile data and graphic from RoadCalc.
All VPI information is deleted.
CAD Settings This option allows you to assign the CAD properties to the profile graphic.
Generate Profile This icon allows you to print the listing of Alignments, VPI Data, Vertical Curve Data and
Reports Speed Tables.
See Generate Profile Reports on page 166 for more information.
New Profile
ROADCALC PROFILES MANAGE NEW PROFILE
This command adds a special profile name to the list of profiles in the Profile Manager.
These additional profiles are used in conjunction with the alignments and typical sections
to control what the design cross-sections will look like.
Define a special profile, such as a drainage ditch or edge of traveled way, by clicking on
the New Profile button from the Profile Manager. The New Profile dialog box (below)
displays. In this dialog box, enter the profile name. Then use the Edit Profile Data
command or the Convert Objects to Profile command to define the profile geometry.
You no longer need to specify the side, PT code, control type or controlling PT code when
adding a new profile. These settings are defined with the Associate Alignments and
Profiles command found in the Process menu.
When adding profiles, keep in mind that one profile can start and stop intermittently
throughout the project, such as a special ditch profile. You cannot have multiple profiles
using the same PT code on the same side of the centerline. If you want a profile with
“gaps” in it (i.e., ditch profile, flowline, etc.), enter one profile and mark the beginning of
these “gaps” by placing an Unrestricted VPI there.
Figure 4-14 New Profile Dialog Box
New Profile Dialog Box Definition

Option Function
Profile This indicates the specified description of the profile.
162 RoadCalc
Convert Objects to Profile
ROADCALC PROFILES CONVERT OBJECTS TO PROFILE
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcprof

This command may be used to convert existing lines into a profile. These lines must be
drawn in the profile coordinate system specified in Profile Settings in order for RoadCalc
to convert the vertices into stations and elevations.
The command prompts you to select the objects that make up the profile data. You may
select line segments or polylines/linestrings (you cannot select arcs). Use the PIC button
to select more objects if any were missed. After selecting the Next button, supply the
profile name to add the data to by selecting it the profile drop list. Use the Manage Profiles
button to add another profile name to the Profile Manager if necessary. Then select the
Finish button. The profile graphic is then converted into numeric stations and elevations
according to your profile coordinate system and is re-placed into the graphic using the
profile’s CAD settings.
Figure 4-15 Convert Objects to Profile Dialog Box
Chapter 4: Profiles
Convert Objects to Profile Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Profile Select the profile to which you want the objects to be converted.
Manage Profiles This icon allows you to access the Profile Manager (Figure 4-13 on page 161) to add a
new profile name.
QuickSteps
1. In RoadCalc, select Profile Æ Convert Objects to Profile.
The Convert Objects to Profile dialog box (above) displays.
2. Select the objects you wish to convert. Select only lines or polylines/linestrings.
Click on Next.

3. Choose the profile name you wish to convert the graphic information to. Use the
Manage Profile button to add another profile name to the list.
4. Click on Finish.
The profile graphic is converted and the numeric information is updated to the Edit
Profile Data dialog box.
Extract Profile from Surface Model

ROADCALC PROFILES EXTRACT FROM SURFACE MODEL
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcprfsm

The Extract Profile from Surface Model command creates a profile of a line or polyline
based on a surface model. Wherever the element intersects with a triangle, a data point is
generated. All of the generated points are then used to create a profile. Stationing for the
profile is based on the main alignment for the project. Select the command from the
Profiles menu to display the Extract Profile from Surface Model dialog box (below).
The Extract Profile from Surface Model command is very useful for getting profiles of any
line or polyline in the plan CAD graphic. When using the command, keep the following in
mind:
The entity that is being profiled must have a definitive starting and ending point. For
example, a profile cannot be extracted from a circle.
The entity being profiled must lie completely within the specified surface model. If this
isn’t the case, only the portion of the entity that does lie within the surface model is
profiled.
Figure 4-16 Extract Profile from Surface Model Dialog Box
Extract Profile from Surface Model Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Profile Name Select the profile to which you want to write the data.
Manage Profiles This allows you to access the Profile Manager (Figure 4-13 on page 161) to add or modify
profiles.
164 RoadCalc
Extract Profile from Surface Model Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
From Surface Select the surface model from which to extract the profile. This drop list contains the
Model surface models created for this project.
All Surface This option provides access to surface models created in other projects. After selecting a
Models surface model from another project, the model name appears in the drop list with the
project name and “¦” as a prefix.
QuickSteps
1. In RoadCalc, select Profile Æ Extract Profile from Surface Model.
The Extract Profile from Surface Model dialog box (Figure 4-15 on page 164) displays.
2. Select the objects from which you wish to extract the profile. Select lines,
polylines/linestrings or alignments. Click on Next.
3. Choose the profile name you wish to convert the graphic information to. Use the
Manage Profile button to add another profile name to the list.
4. Click on Finish.
The profile graphic is converted and the numeric information is updated to the Edit
Profile Data dialog box (Figure 4-3 on page 149).
Original Ground Profile

ROADCALC PROFILES ORIGINAL GROUND PROFILE
Chapter 4: Profiles
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcprorig
Normally, the profile graphic shows only the original centerline profile along with the
design profiles. But more original ground profiles at specified offsets can be added. On the
graphic screen, RoadCalc extracts the original ground profiles from the original cross-
sections at the indicated offsets. If the original cross-section data changes, RoadCalc
updates the original profiles in the profile graphic to reflect the changes. A potential use of
this command would be for generating an existing edge of pavement profile for a
reconstruction project.

Select the command from the Profiles menu to display the Original Ground Profiles dialog
box (below).
Figure 4-17 Original Ground Profiles Dialog Box
Original Ground Profiles Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Offset This indicates the distance from the centerline that the original profile will be taken.
New Profile This icon adds an original profile to the end of the list. When this option is selected, a
Offset dialog box displays prompting for an offset. Type in the offset and click on the OK button.
Modify Profile This icon modifies the information of the highlighted profile. When this item is selected,
Offset enter an offset in the dialog box that displays and click on the OK button.
Delete Profile This icon removes the highlighted offset from the listing and deletes the numeric data and
Offset graphic representation of the profile.
CAD Settings Use this command to change the CAD properties of the highlighted profile.
Generate Profile Reports

ROADCALC PROFILES GENERATE REPORTS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcprrep

To print a profile report to a file or printer, select Generate Reports from the Profiles menu
or click on the Print button from the Profile Data dialog box (Figure 4-3 on page 149).
Many different reports can be generated from this command. By toggling on the different
options, the reports will be printed according to the setting in the Print Setup command.
The Profile Listing toggle produces a printout of the profiles contained in the Profile
Manager.
The VPI Data and Vertical Curve Data toggles print that information for the profile name
selected. The last choice in the Profile drop list is All Profiles, which prints out the toggled
information for every profile in the Manager. With the VPI Data toggle on, each VPI’s
166 RoadCalc
Station, Elevation, Grade and Distance values along with any Station Equations are
printed. If the Vertical Curve Data toggle is on, the vertical curve parameters are printed,
along with stations and elevations for key stations (VPC, VPI, VPT, High/Low Point, etc.) If
the Vertical Speed Tables option is toggled on, the speed table name in the drop list will be
printed with all of the vertical curve and speed parameters. The last choice in the Speed
Table drop list is All Speed Tables, which prints out the information for every vertical speed
table defined.
Figure 4-18 Generate Profile Reports Dialog Box
Generate Profile Reports Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Profile Listing Toggle this on to print every profile name in the Profile Manager.
Profile Name This denotes which profile will be printed if either the VPI Data or Vertical Curve Data
options are toggled on.
V.P.I. Data Toggle this on to print the Station, Elevation, Grade and Distance for each VPI.
Chapter 4: Profiles
Vertical Curve Toggle this on to print the Vertical Curve Data for each VPI.
Data
Vertical Speed This denotes which vertical speed tables will be printed if Vertical Speed Table is toggled
Tables Name on.
Vertical Speed Toggle this on to print the Speed Table information for the selected table.
Tables
View Profile Graphics

ROADCALC PROFILES VIEW PROFILE GRAPHICS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcprview

ICON:
Use the View Profile Graphics command to display the profile graphics placed in CAD.
Which drawing/design file is loaded depends on the Draw Profile Graphic toggle in the
Profile Settings command.
For more information, see Profile Settings – General Tab, below.
If numeric changes were made to the alignment while the Profile Graphic was not loaded,
RoadCalc will display the Synchronize Graphics and Data dialog box (Figure 4-23 on
page 173) asking which information is correct – the graphic representation or numeric.
See Synchronize Profile Graphics and Data on page 172.
Profile Settings
ROADCALC PROFILES SETTINGS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcprset

The Profile Settings command provides access to various settings that RoadCalc uses
when displaying profiles. You can set the Profile direction, the CAD graphic that the profile
will appear in, the percent grade precision that is used when viewing the profile data and
the Sight Parameters that are use for calculating Stopping and Passing sight distances.
For additional information see Profile Settings – General Tab, below, Profile Settings –
Sight Parameters Tab on page 171 and Profile Settings – Sewer Display Tab on page 171.
Profile Settings – General Tab

ROADCALC PROFILES SETTINGS GENERAL TAB

The parameters on the General Tab of the Profile Settings dialog box (Figure 4-19 on
page 169) are used to control the orientation and placement of the graphic representation
of the profile and the display of grade on various dialog boxes.
By default the profile orientation is set to Left to Right. This means that the profile graphic
is drawn with the stationing of the profile increases from left to right. This toggle not only
affects the display of the profile, but is also used when generating plan and profile sheets.
When the toggle is set to Right to Left, the profile is drawn with increasing stationing from
168 RoadCalc
right to left in the profile graphic and the plan and profile sheets are constructed and
annotated also in a right to left fashion.
You can also control where the profile graphic is constructed by using the Draw Profile
Graphic toggle. By default, RoadCalc places the profile graphic in its own drawing/design
file. You may choose to place the profile into your sub-project plan drawing by toggling the
In Plan Drawing option on and defining a profile coordinate system within that drawing.
For more information see Define Coordinate System on page 170.
These settings may be changed at any time even if you have profiles already defined.
RoadCalc erases previously drawn profiles and constructs the new ones according to the
settings changed here.
For more information see RoadCalc Profile Coordinate Systems on page 146.
The Grade precision is used to control how many places after the decimal point a grade is
shown with on various dialog boxes (i.e. Edit Profile Data, printouts, etc.). The precision
that you may annotate on the profile is controlled within the Profiles Module or within the
Plan and Profile Sheet Precision settings.
Chapter 4: Profiles
Figure 4-19 Profile Settings Dialog Box – General Tab
Profile Settings Dialog Box – General Tab Definitions

Option Function
Profile This option toggles between displaying the profile graphic with increasing stationing going
Orientation from left to right or vice versa.
Draw Profile This option allows you to choose the CAD graphic into which you place the profile graphic.
Graphic If you choose to draw the profile in the sub-project plan CAD graphic, you must define the
profile coordinate system in which the profile resides
For more information see Define Coordinate System on page 170.
Grade Precision This option sets the number of decimal places shown for tangent grades on the Profile
Data dialog boxes (Figure 4-3 on page 149, and Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5 on page 150).

Define Coordinate System
ROADCALC PROFILES SETTINGS GENERAL TAB DEFINE COORDINATE SYSTEM
By selecting this option, you can create a profile coordinate system in the sub-project plan
drawing/design file to display the profile graphic in. The elements that comprise the profile
coordinate system include the X and Y value of the reference point, station and elevation
of the reference point and the direction of the profile. When you select a reference point,
you are establishing that the point specified has a certain station and elevation. When you
place a profile or extract it, the profile is placed based on this reference point.
You can either enter the coordinates for the reference point, or graphically pick the point in
the CAD window using the PIC button.
Before adding a PCS, make sure the horizontal and vertical scales for the project are set
correctly. To set these values, select Plot Scales from the Tools menu on the Eagle Point
menu. Changing the Scales setting after you add a PCS will not update existing profiles.
These scales directly affect the Horizontal and Vertical scale of the profile.
Figure 4-20 Define Coordinate System Dialog Box
Define Coordinate System Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Location of You can directly enter the X, Y coordinate values for the reference point, or use the PIC
Reference Point button to graphically select the point in the CAD window. When you graphically select the
point, the coordinate values are displayed in the corresponding edit fields. Keep in mind
that this reference point may not be on the profile. You are just specifying that a particular
point in the CAD graphic is at a specific station and elevation.
PIC Use this button to graphically select the Reference X and Y values from the CAD graphic.
This button enables when focus is put in the X or Y edit fields.
Station Enter the station of the reference point.
Elevation Specify the elevation of the reference point.
170 RoadCalc
Profile Settings – Sight Parameters Tab
ROADCALC PROFILES SETTINGS SIGHT PARAMETERS TAB

When working with vertical curves, RoadCalc displays the stopping and passing sight
distances for crest curves and the headlight sight distance for sag curves. The parameters
required to calculate these numbers appear in the sight parameters box that displays in
the Profile Settings – Sight Parameters dialog box, shown below. The default values are
those specified by AASHTO (AASHTO 1990, 1994).
Figure 4-21 Profile Settings Dialog Box – Sight Parameters Tab
Profile Settings Dialog Box – Sight Parameters Tab Definitions

Option Function
Chapter 4: Profiles
Height of Eye This field indicates the height of the eye above the pavement.
Height of Object The fields in this group indicate the height of the object above the pavement for stopping
and passing distances.
Height This field indicates the height of the headlight above the pavement.
Beam Angle This field sets the angle of the headlight beam above or below a flat plane. A negative
number puts the beam above the plane. A positive number puts the beam below the
plane.
Profile Settings – Sewer Display Tab

ROADCALC PROFILES SETTINGS SEWER DISPLAY TAB

The Sewer Display Tab allows you to reference the Hydraulic Profile from the Storm
Sewers or Sanitary Sewers modules into your RoadCalc profile drawing/design file. This
displays any Hydraulic Profile reaches that have been defined using the centerline from
the current RoadCalc sub-project as the Reference Alignment. You can toggle on or off
any reaches to be displayed in the RoadCalc profile drawing. Since these Hydraulic
Profiles are referenced into your RoadCalc profile drawing/design file, they will also
display in the RoadCalc Plan and Profile sheets.
For more information about defining a reach to be displayed in the RoadCalc Profile
drawing, see New Hydraulic Profile in the Storm Sewers manual.
Figure 4-22 Profile Settings Dialog Box – Sewer Display Tab
Profile Settings Dialog Box – Sewer Display Tab Definitions

Option Function
Select the This displays any reaches that have been defined in the Storm Sewers or Sanitary
reach(es) to Sewers modules using the centerline alignment for the current RoadCalc sub-project as
reference a Reference Alignment. You can toggle on or off any reaches to be displayed in the
RoadCalc profile drawing.
Synchronize Profile Graphics and Data

ROADCALC PROFILES SYNCHRONIZE GRAPHICS AND DATA
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcprsync
ICON:
The Synchronize Profile Graphics and Data command can be accessed to verify that the
graphic representation of a RoadCalc object matches the numeric information. If
172 RoadCalc
differences exist, you determine whether the graphic or numeric information is correct.
Selecting the Update Graphics button writes the numeric information to the graphic.
Selecting the Update Data button writes the graphic information to the numeric.
The Synchronize Graphics and Data dialog box, shown below, also automatically displays
if RoadCalc finds any differences when accessing a data set and corresponding graphic.
Figure 4-23 Synchronize Profile Graphics and Data Dialog Box
Synchronize Profile Graphics and Data Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Update Graphic Updates the profile graphics in CAD from the numeric data.
Update Data After graphically modifying a RoadCalc profile, use this command to update the numeric
data based on the graphic changes.
Chapter 4: Profiles

174 RoadCalc
TYPICAL
SECTIONS CHAPTER
In this chapter:
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Edit Typical Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Typical Section Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Manage Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Construct Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
View Typical Section Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
5
Chapter 5: Typical Sections 175

Concepts
The commands on the Typical Sections pull-down menu define typical sections and
specify other design constraints which RoadCalc uses to generate design cross-sections.
If the design surfaces are being entered directly in cross-sections by hand and the typical
sections are not being used at all, the Typical Sections commands do not need to be used.
RoadCalc calculates the end areas of the cross-sections when the data has been entered
for them.
There are several different methods to create typical sections to be used for your sub-
project. First, typical sections can be constructed using the Construct Typical Section
command. This allows you to use precision input in the CAD graphic to enter absolute,
displacement and slope values. Second, you can construct the typical sections using the
Edit Typical Section command. This allows you to enter absolute, displacement and slope
values into a dialog box. Last, you can copy typical sections from the Typical Section
Library to use. This is a central location for typical sections that have been constructed
that you want to use in different sub-projects.
Constructing Typical Sections

By default, the CAD graphic will have two views open. The top one has layer FILL or Level
2 turned off. The bottom view has layer CUT or Level 1 turned off. As a result, the top view
shows the cut detail of the typical section and the bottom view shows the fill detail.
The default CAD graphic has a crosshair in it. This shows the (0,0) coordinates, which
corresponds to the Centerline alignment and the profile grade line.
At this point, the typical section can be drawn using CAD. Remember:
Keep cut and fill line work in the appropriate layers/levels (layer CUT/Level 1, layer
FILL/Level 2, layer CUT_FILL /Level 3 for both).
Only line work can be on the layer CUT/Level 1, layer FILL/Level 2 and layer
CUT_FILL/Level 3.
Don’t draw the cut slopes or the fill slopes since these are defined using the Slope
Library and condition tables.
Be sure all pavement regions are closed (no gaps).
Place PT codes wherever needed. Do not place PT codes on subsurfaces.
176 RoadCalc
The figure below shows an example of a typical section drawn correctly. Figure 5-2 shows
an incorrectly drawn typical section.
Figure 5-1 Typical Section Correctly Drawn
Figure 5-2 Typical Section Incorrectly Drawn
RoadCalc stores each typical section in its own CAD graphic file, which it creates when a
typical section is added.
A typical section CAD graphic contains both the cut and the fill versions of a typical
section. All line work that is part of the cut typical section only must be on the CUT layer/
Level 1. Line work that is fill only must be on the FILL layer/Level 2. Line work that is part
Chapter 5: Typical
of both cut and fill must be on the CUT_FILL layer/Level 3. RoadCalc ignores elements on
all other layers/levels, so they can be used for annotation, dimension lines, etc.
Sections
Do not annotate on the CUT, FILL or CUT_FILL layers or on levels 1, 2 or 3. These

layers/levels are only for typical section line work.

In the CAD graphic, X=0 corresponds to the centerline of the road, and Y=0 is the profile
grade line. X-coordinates are horizontal offsets from the Centerline alignment, and Y-
coordinates are vertical offsets from the profile grade line. RoadCalc factors all the Y-
coordinates by the vertical stretch factor.
Typical Section Level Mapping Considerations for

MicroStation V8
MicroStation V8 allows users to use a *.CSV file to map levels when converting a V7
drawing to the V8 format. This may be desireable when converting a plan drawing to a
new standard of levels; however, the same CSV file may not be appropriate for converting
other types of design files within a project.
To make sure typical section design files are converted properly, Eagle Point temporarily
suppresses any CSV file assigned in the current workspace. Original settings are restored
upon completion of loading the typical section.
If you are using a custom level-mapping CSV file for design file conversion, this mapping
file will continue to be used when opening all other design files.
Edit Typical Section Data

ROADCALC TYPICAL SECTIONS EDIT TYPICAL SECTION DATA
KEY-IN COMMAND: rctpdata

The Edit Typical Section Data command allows you to edit the data for typical sections
numerically. Within the Edit Typical Section Data dialog box, shown below, you can add,
178 RoadCalc
modify or delete a point or portion of the typical section. The numeric changes can be
made by changing a value under X, Y, dX, dY, Slope or SD.
Figure 5-3 Edit Typical Section Data Dialog Box
Edit Typical Section Data Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Typical Section This drop list displays all of the typical sections. The data in the Surface Data list box
corresponds to the typical section selected in the drop list. If you want to add, modify or
delete typical sections, click on the Manage Typical Sections button.
For more information on the Manage Typical Sections command, see Manage Typical
Sections on page 183.
Detail This determines which typical section condition is to be modified. The two conditions that
exist are Cut and Fill.
Surface Name This drop list displays the name of the surface being modified. All design surfaces that
have been entered in the Manage Surfaces command will be displayed. If you want to
add, modify or delete a design surface, click on the Manage Design Surfaces button.
For more information, see Manage Surfaces – Design Tab on page 101.
X This is the absolute horizontal distance from the typical section cross hair.
Y This is the absolute vertical distance from the typical section cross hair.
dX This is the relative horizontal distance from a point.
dY This is the relative vertical distance from a point.
Slope This displays the slope between two points. This value will be expressed in the format set
Chapter 5: Typical
in the Slope Type drop list.

Sections
PT Code This is the point code of the point. Point codes are used to control typical sections when
transitioning from one typical to another or when using dynamic alignments and profiles.
New Breakpoint This adds a point to the end of the Surface Data list as a breakpoint on typical section.
For more information, see New Breakpoint on page 180.

Edit Typical Section Data Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Insert This inserts a point on the typical section before the highlighted point.
Breakpoint This is similar to the New Breakpoint option. For more information, see New Breakpoint on
page 180.
Modify This allows you to change the data for the highlighted breakpoint.
Breakpoint
This is similar to the New Breakpoint option. For more information, see New Breakpoint on
page 180.
Delete This removes the highlighted breakpoint from the typical section.
Breakpoint
CAD Settings This allows you to change any of the CAD settings for any of the surfaces.
Slope Type This allows you to select the type of slope you want displaced between points in the
surface data list box. The options that you can choose from are % Slope, H/V, V/H and
Unit/Unit.
Print Typical Prints the numerical information about the typical section to your output device (printer or
Section ASCII file).
For more information, see Generate Typical Section Reports on page 182.
Settings Use this option to enter the vertical stretch factor and overbreak distance (if using an
overbreak type surface).
For more information, see Typical Section Settings on page 182.
View Typical Click on this button to view the typical section data in the CAD graphic.
Section Graphic
New Breakpoint
ROADCALC TYPICAL SECTIONS EDIT TYPICAL SECTION DATA NEW BREAKPOINT
The New Breakpoint command allows you to add a breakpoint to typical section for the
current surface. This will add the breakpoint to the end of the list of breakpoints. The Insert
Breakpoint command also allows you to add a new breakpoint, except it is added above
the highlighted breakpoint instead of at the end of the list. The Modify Breakpoint
command allows you to change the values of the breakpoint. The options that are
available to enter and modify breakpoints are Absolute X and Y, Delta X and Y , Delta X
and percent slope, Delta X and H/V, Delta X and V/H, Delta X and Unit/Unit, Delta Y and
180 RoadCalc
percent slope, Delta Y and H/V, Delta Y and Y/H and Delta Y and Unit/Unit. You can also
specify the PT code that is placed at the breakpoint.
Figure 5-4 New Breakpoint Dialog Box
New Breakpoint Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
PT Code This is the point code that is associated with the breakpoint. This displays all of the PT
codes in the drop list. If you want to add, modify or delete any of the PT codes, click on the
PT Code Library icon.
Input Type This options allows different ways to input the next break point. The available options to
select from are X, Y, Delta X, Delta Y, Delta X, Slope and Delta Y, Slope.
X, Y: Absolute X and Y. A break point will be placed using the absolute values of
X and Y. The X value is the centerline offset and the Y value is the vertical
distance from the profile grade line.
Delta X, Delta Y: A break point will be placed at a horizontal distance (X) and at
a vertical distance (Y) relative to the last point entered. A negative value for
delta X will place the break point to the left of the last point entered. A negative
value for delta Y will place the break point below the last point entered.
Delta X, Slope: A break point will be placed at a horizontal distance (X) and at a
slope (% Slope, H/V, V/H or Unit/Unit) relative to the last point entered. A
negative value for delta X will place the break point to the left of the last break
point entered. A negative value for a slope value will place the break point at an
elevation below the last break point entered.
Delta Y, Slope: Delta Y and Slope. A break point will be placed at a vertical
distance (Y) and at a slope (% Slope, H/V, V/H or Unit/Unit relative to the last
point entered. A negative value for delta Y will place the break point below the
last break point entered. A negative value for a slope value will place the break
point at an elevation below the last break point entered.
Chapter 5: Typical
Sections

Generate Typical Section Reports
ROADCALC TYPICAL SECTIONS EDIT TYPICAL SECTION DATA GENERATE TYPICAL SECTION REPORTS
The Generate Typical Section Reports command allows you to print the listing of all typical
sections. You can also print out the description and specify the two slope types for the
selected typical section.
Figure 5-5 Generate Typical Section Reports Dialog Box
Generate Typical Section Reports Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Typical Section Turn on this toggle to send a listing of the typical sections contained in the manager to
Listing your output device (printer or ASCII file).
Individual This option generates a report for the selected typical section.
Typical Sections
Name The name of the typical section for which the numeric information will be printed.
Description Toggle this option on to print out the additional text that further describes the typical
section.
Slope Type 1 This allows you to choose the format for one of the slopes that is printed.
Slope Type 2 This allows you to choose the format for the second slope that is printed.
Typical Section Settings

ROADCALC TYPICAL SECTIONS EDIT TYPICAL SECTIONS SETTINGS
The Typical Section Settings command allows you to set a vertical stretch factor and an
overbreak distance. The Vertical Stretch factor controls how the CAD graphic will display
the typical section data. Normally, the X-coordinate corresponds to the horizontal offset
182 RoadCalc
and the Y-coordinate corresponds to the relative elevation of the typical section. The
Vertical Stretch factor affects the display of the typical section in the Y-direction. By
default, the stretch factor is set to 1. Setting it to another value means that the Y-
coordinate will be multiplied by the stretch factor to exaggerate the relative elevation
difference.
The Overbreak Distance is only available if you have added an overbreak type design
surface. This type of surface is used as limits of design that a contractor will get paid for
when cutting material. Any material that is cut outside the overbreak line can be excluded
from volume reports.
For more information, see Design Surfaces on page 89.
Figure 5-6 Typical Section Settings Dialog Box
Typical Section Settings Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Vertical Stretch Set the vertical stretch factor for the current typical section by entering a value between 1
Factor and 10 in the edit field, or use the slider to set the factor.
Overbreak Set the overbreak distance that RoadCalc will use when computing actual volumes with
Distance an overbreak type design surface.
Manage Typical Sections

ROADCALC TYPICAL SECTIONS MANAGE TYPICAL SECTIONS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rctpman

Chapter 5: Typical
The Manage Typical Sections command displays all of the typical sections in the current
Sections
sub-project. A graphical picture of the typical section is also shown for any typical sections
that have been defined. You can add, modify, copy and delete typical sections from the
list.

It is necessary to redefine the typical sections if changes to the number of design surfaces
are made after defining typical sections. An error in processing will result if an attempt is
made to process typical sections without first correcting the disparity in surfaces between
the typical section and the number of design surfaces listed in the Surface Manager.
Figure 5-7 Manage Typical Sections Dialog Box
Manage Typical Sections Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Typical Section This displays a preview of the selected typical section if it has been defined.
Preview
Typical Section The alphanumeric name given to a typical section to better identify what information that
typical section may contain.
Description Enter additional text to further describe the typical section. Up to 512 characters may be
entered.
New Typical This adds a typical section within RoadCalc by specifying a typical section number and
Section name. This option places the typical section in the Typical Section Manager.
For more information, see New Typical Section, below.
Modify Typical This allows you to make changes to the highlighted typical section.
Section
For more information, see New Typical Section, below.
Copy Typical This makes a duplicate of the highlighted typical section using a new number and a new
Section name.
Delete Typical This deletes the typical section that is highlighted.
Section
CAD Settings This allows you to change the CAD properties for the different surfaces of the typical
section.
184 RoadCalc
Manage Typical Sections Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Print Typical This sends the typical section information to an output device (printer or ASCII file).
Sections For more information, see Generate Typical Section Reports on page 182.
Typical Section This allows you to save typical sections from your sub-project to a central location. It also
Library allows you to retrieve typical sections from the library to be used in the current sub-
project.
For more information, see Typical Section Library on page 186.
View Typical This will load the CAD graphic for the typical section that is displayed.
Section
New Typical Section

ROADCALC TYPICAL SECTIONS MANAGE TYPICAL SECTIONS NEW TYPICAL SECTION
The New Typical Section command allows you to add a new typical section to the Typical
Section Manager. You can then construct the geometry for this typical section and use it
for processing with the Run Design command.
For more information, see Run Design Process on page 232.
The name can be up to 32 characters. The Description field may be used to enter up to
512 characters to further describe what the typical section looks like or what it should be
used for.
Figure 5-8 New Typical Section Dialog Box
New Typical Section Dialog Box Definitions Chapter 5: Typical

Option Function
Name This is an alphanumeric description of the typical section. It may be up to 32 characters.
Sections
Description Enter additional text to further describe the typical section. Up to 512 characters may be
entered.

Typical Section Library
ROADCALC TYPICAL SECTIONS MANAGE TYPICAL SECTIONS TYPICAL SECTION LIBRARY
The Typical Section Library command is a central location for typical sections that allows
you to store and retrieve typical sections. Once you have a typical section created, you
can copy the typical section to the Typical Section Library. The typical sections listed in the
library can then be copied to the current sub-project that you are working in.
Figure 5-9 Typical Section Library Dialog Box
Typical Section Library Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Typical Section This displays a preview of the selected typical section. This displays both the cut and fill
Preview detail of the typical section.
Typical Section This displays a list of typical sections that have been added to the Typical Section Library.
Any of these typical sections listed can be copied from the library to the current sub-
project.
Description This is additional text that was entered for the typical section to further describe the typical
section. This allows up to 512 characters.
Modify Typical This allows you to modify the name or the description for the highlighted typical section in
Section the Typical Section Library.
Delete Typical This removes the highlighted typical section from the Typical Section Library.
Section
186 RoadCalc
Typical Section Library Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Copy To Library This allows you to copy a typical section from the current sub-project to the Typical
Section Library. Select the desired typical section from the drop list. Enter the desired
name and description for the typical section. This will be the name and the description that
is saved for the typical section in the Typical Section Library.
Copy From This allows you to copy a typical section from the Typical Section Library to the current
Library sub-project. The typical section that is going to be copied to the current sub-project will be
displayed in the Typical Section Selected from Library frame. The name and description
will be filled in with the name and description of the typical section in the Typical Section
Library. You can changed this name and description before it is copied to the current sub-
project.
Construct Typical Section

ROADCALC TYPICAL SECTIONS CONSTRUCT TYPICAL SECTION
ICON:
The Construct Typical Section command allows you to create a typical section to be used
for the sub-project. This construction will be done in the CAD graphic. With this command,
there is a tool bar at the top of the dialog box providing you with several options. The
options on the tool bar that allows you to construct the typical sections are to view the
CAD Graphics, precision input, and switching between the cut and fill detail, cut detail and
fill details for different geometry the typical section has in the different details. You can also
place PT codes and mirror from one side to the other if the typical sections are
symmetrical. Once the typical section is created, you can define, show and clean the
typical section.
The Precision Input command allows you to construct a typical sections using a set of
exact dimensions. This is a two-state icon on the tool bar in the Construct Typical Section
dialog box (below). When the icon is depressed, the command is running and the entry in
the command edit field is used for the precision input. If the command is not pressed, the
command is not running. Lines can be entered with absolute X and Y values,
displacement values and slopes to construct the typical section. The Cut and Fill Detail,
Chapter 5: Typical
Cut Detail and Fill Detail icons are also two state buttons that work together. If the Cut and
Fill Detail icon is depressed, then you will be constructing the typical section in both the cut
Sections
and fill details. The Cut Detail and Fill Detail icons will not be pressed.

When specifying values for precision input, a negative value for X and dX will place the
point to the left. A negative value for Y and dY will place the point at a lower elevation. A
negative value for S, H/V and V/H will place the point at a lower elevation.
Figure 5-10 Construct Typical Section Dialog Box
Construct Typical Section Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
View Typical This will load the CAD graphic for the typical section that is displayed in the Typical
Section Section drop list.
Precision Input This allows you to construct a typical sections using a set of exact dimensions. This is a
two state-button on the tool bar. When the button is depressed, the command is running
and the entry in the command edit field is used for the precision input. Lines can be
entered with absolute X and Y values, displacement values and slopes to construct the
typical section.
For more information, see Precision Input on page 192.
Cut and Fill Use this option to set the typical section graphic so that when constructing the typical
Detail section segments they are placed in the cut and fill details.
Cut Detail Use this option to set the typical section graphic so that when constructing the typical
section segments they are placed in the cut detail only.
Fill Detail Use this option to set the typical section graphic so that when constructing the typical
section segments they are place in the fill detail only.
Place PT Code This allows you to place a PT code onto the break point you select on the typical section
graphic. This may be used instead of assigning a PT code while you are constructing the
typical section with the precision input option. If you have placed an incorrect PT code at a
breakpoint, erase the PT code and place a new one at the same location.
Mirror Typical This mirrors the typical section geometry from the right side to the left side. Use this option
Section Left when the typical section you are constructing is symmetric about the centerline. Draw the
typical section on the right side and then mirror it to the left side.
Mirror Typical This mirrors the typical section geometry from the left side to the right side. Use this option
Section Right when the typical section you are constructing is symmetric about the centerline. Draw the
typical section on the left side and then mirror it to the right side.
Define Typical Use this option to assign the design material names to the different regions of the
Section constructed typical section. Pick internal points within the closed areas of different
materials to assign a design surface name to them.
For more information, see Define Typical Section on page 194.
188 RoadCalc
Option Function
Show Typical This hatches/shades the typical section graphic to show how the typical section was
Section defined. Each design material will be hatched/shaded with the color assigned to the
material.
Clean Typical This removes the hatching/shading of the typical section that was placed when the Show
Section Typical Section option was selected.
Typical Section This drop list displays all of the typical sections for the sub-project. The typical section that
is selected in the drop list is the typical section that is affected when any of the options are
selected. You can add, modify and delete typical sections by selecting the Manage Typical
Sections button.
For more information on the Manage Typical Sections command, see Manage Typical
Sections on page 183.
Chapter 5: Typical
Sections

Option Function
Absxy/dXdY/ These are the available options that can be used with the Precision Input command. To
dXS/dXH/dXV/ select an option to use, enter the capital letter(s) in the Command edit field and press the
dYS/dYH/dYV/ Enter key.
Reset pen/Undo
Absxy: To use this option, type A in the Command edit field and press the Enter
/eXit
key. This option allows you to place the breakpoint using the values for an
Absolute X and an Absolute Y.
dXdY: To use this option, type XY in the Command edit field and press the Enter
key. This option allows you to place the breakpoint using the values for a Delta
X and Delta Y.
dXS: To use this option, type XS in the Command edit field and press the Enter
X and % Slope.
dXH: To use this option, type XH in the Command edit field and press the Enter
X and H/V Slope.
dXV: To use this option, type XV in the Command edit field and press the Enter
X and V/H Slope.
dYS: To use this option, type YS in the Command edit field and press the Enter
Y and % Slope.
dYH: To use this option, type YH in the Command edit field and press the Enter
Y and H/V Slope.
dYV: To use this option, type YV in the Command edit field and press the Enter
Y and V/H Slope.
Reset pen: To use this option, type R in the Command edit field and press the
Enter key. Use this option to start the precision input command over. This will
leave segments that have just been drawn and allow you to start from a
different breakpoint.
Undo: To use this option, type U in the Command edit field and press the Enter
key. This option removes the previous segment added and positions the cursor
on the previous breakpoint. This option is only available after a segment has
been placed. It is not available in the middle of drawing a segment.
eXit: To use this option, type X in the Command edit field and press the Enter
key. This option stops the precision input command. The two state button for the
precision input command will be raised and the Command edit field will be
disabled. This option is only available after a segment has been placed. It is not
available in the middle of drawing a segment.
190 RoadCalc
Option Function
Command This field is used for the Precision Input command. The available options are listed
immediately above the field. The Start Point prompt is shown as an example, but the
command varies. When an option is selected, the static text of Command will be changed
according to the option that is selected. To select an option to use, enter the capital
letter(s) in the Command edit field and press the Enter key. The text in front of the edit
field will change to reflect the option that was selected. For instance, if you type in XY, the
Command static text will be replaced with Delta X. Enter in the Delta X value and press
the Enter key. The Delta X static text will be replaced with Delta Y. Enter in the Delta Y
value and press the Enter key. The Delta Y static text will be replaced with PT Code. Enter
in the PT Code and press the Enter key. The command will repeat, so XY will be placed in
the Command edit field.
Absolute X: This is the absolute X value for the breakpoint. The X value is the
offset from the centerline. A positive value is to the right of centerline while a
negative value is to the left of centerline. Enter the Absolute X value and press
the Enter key.
Absolute Y: This is the absolute Y value for the breakpoint. The Y value is the
vertical distance from the profile grade. A positive value is above the profile
grade while a negative value is below the profile grade. Enter the Absolute Y
value and press the Enter key.
Delta X: This is the displacement in the X value from the previous breakpoint. A
positive value is to the right of the previous breakpoint while a negative value is
to the left of the previous breakpoint. Enter the Delta X value and press the
Enter key.
Delta Y: This is the displacement in the Y value from the previous breakpoint. A
positive value is above the previous breakpoint while a negative value is below
the previous breakpoint. Enter the Delta Y value and press the Enter key.
% Slope: This is the slope from the previous breakpoint in a percentage. A
positive value is above the previous breakpoint while a negative value is below
the previous breakpoint. Enter the % Slope value and press the Enter key.
H/V: This is the slope from the previous breakpoint in a horizontal divided by
vertical measurement. A positive value is above the previous breakpoint while a
negative value is below the previous breakpoint. Enter the H/V Slope value and
press the Enter key.
V/H: This is the slope from the previous breakpoint in a vertical divided by
horizontal measurement. A positive value is above the previous breakpoint
while a negative value is below the previous breakpoint. Enter the V/H Slope
value and press the Enter key. Chapter 5: Typical
PT Code: This is the PT code that will be placed at the breakpoint just entered.
You can add, modify and delete any PT codes by clicking on the PT Code
Sections
Library button. Enter the PT code value and press the Enter key.
For more information, see PT Code Library on page 82.

Precision Input
ROADCALC TYPICAL SECTIONS CONSTRUCT TYPICAL SECTIONS PRECISION INPUT
ICON:
The Precision Input command allows you to construct a typical section using a set of exact
dimensions. This is a two-state icon on the tool bar of the Construct Typical Section dialog
box (see Figure 5-10 on page 188). When the icon is depressed, the command is running
and the entry in the command edit field is used for the precision input. If the command is
not pressed, the command is not running. Lines can be entered with absolute X and Y
values, displacement values and slopes to construct the typical section.
The precision input options are listed above the Command edit field. To select an option to
use, enter the capital letter(s) in the Command edit field and press the Enter key. When an
option is selected, the static text of Command will be changed according to the option that
is selected. The text in front of the edit field will change to reflect the option that was
selected. For instance, if you type in XY, the Command static text will be replaced with
Delta X. Enter the Delta X value and press the Enter key. The Delta X static text will be
replaced with Delta Y. Enter the Delta Y value and press the Enter key. The Delta Y static
text will be replaced with PT code. Enter the PT code and press the Enter key. The
command will repeat, so the PT code static text will be replaced with Command and XY
will be placed in the Command edit field.
QuickSteps
To use the Precision Input option to construct the pavement of a typical section on the right
side of centerline, complete the following steps:
1. Select Typical Sections Æ Construct Typical Section from the Typical Sections
menu.
The Construct Typical Section dialog box (Figure 5-10 on page 188) displays.
2. Select the desired typical section from the Typical Section drop list and select
the View Typical Section button.
The desired typical section is loaded in CAD.
3. Click on the Precision Input button.
This will enable the Command edit filed.
4. Type a in the Command edit field and press the Enter key.
This changes the static text of Command to Absolute X.
5. Type 0 in the Absolute X edit field and press the Enter key.
192 RoadCalc
This assigns the X value to 0. It also changes the Absolute X static text to Absolute Y.
6. Type 0 in the Absolute Y edit field and press the Enter key.
This assigns the Y value to 0. It also changes the Absolute Y static text to PT code.
7. Type 1 in the PT Code edit field and press the Enter key.
This assigns a PT Code of 1 at the 0,0 breakpoint location. It also changes the PT
Code static text to Command.
8. Type xs in the Command edit field and press the Enter key.
This changes the static text of Command to Delta X.
9. Type 12 in the Delta X edit field and press the Enter key.
This assigns the X value to be 12 units to the right of the previous breakpoint’s
location. It also changes the Delta X static text to % Slope.
10. Type —2 in the % Slope edit field and press the Enter key.
This assigns a slope of 2 percent down from the previous breakpoint’s location. It also
changes the % Slope static text to PT Code.
This assigns a PT Code of 2 at the 12,-0.24 breakpoint location. It also changes the
PT Code static text to Command.
12. Type xy in the Command edit field and press the Enter key.
13. Type 0 in the Delta X edit field and press the Enter key.
This assigns the X value to be 0 units to the right of the previous breakpoint’s location.
It also changes the Delta X static text to Delta Y.
14. Type -.75 in the Delta Y edit field and press the Enter key.
This assigns the Y value to be 0.75 units down from the previous breakpoint’s
location. It also changes the Delta Y static text to PT Code.
This assigns a PT Code of 0 a the 12,-0.99 breakpoint location. A PT Code of 0 is not
displayed on the typical section. It also changes the PT Code static text to Command.
16. Type xs in the Command edit field and press the Enter key.
Chapter 5: Typical

Sections
17. Type —12 in the Delta X edit field and press the Enter key.
This assigns the X value to be 12 units to the left of the previous breakpoint’s location.
It also changes the Delta X static text to % Slope.
18. Type 2 in the % Slope edit field and press the Enter key.

This assigns a slope of 2 percent up from the previous breakpoint’s location. It also
changes the % Slope static text to PT Code.
This assigns a PT Code of 0 a the 0,-0.75 breakpoint location. A PT Code of 0 is not
displayed on the typical section. It also changes the PT Code static text to Command.
20. If you want to reset the location of the of where to start drawing, click on the
Reset button. If you are done constructing the typical section, type x in the
Command edit field.
This will exit the precision input command. The resulting typical section is shown in
the figure below.
Figure 5-11 Using Precision Input for the Pavement on the Right Side
Define Typical Section

ROADCALC TYPICAL SECTIONS CONSTRUCT WITH CAD TYPICAL SECTION TOOL BAR DEFINE
TYPICAL SECTION
ICON:
In order for RoadCalc to use a drawn typical section (created with the Construct Typical
Section command), the typical section design materials must be defined. RoadCalc uses
this definition during processing to calculate the design typical section geometry and end
areas for volume computations.
If only one design surface exists in the Design Surface Manager, save the typical section
by clicking on the OK button.
Make sure the typical section details are set appropriately. If the cut and fill details are
similar, use the Edit Cut/Fill Details command before running the Define Typical Section
command. This allows you to define materials in either detail and RoadCalc will
automatically define the materials in the other material. If you are editing the Cut Detail
194 RoadCalc
only or the Fill Detail only, the definition is only valid for the current detail. When the
definition is saved, RoadCalc will warn you that the other detail has not been saved.
When assigning a material, and an internal point is selected and no boundary can be
determined, you will be prompted to Retry and pick another point or to Cancel the
definition and resolve any problems with the typical section graphic. When no boundary is
found it is due to gaps or overlaps between the typical section line segments.
See Constructing Typical Sections on page 176 for more information on proper usage of
design surfaces.
If a boundary is found, the region is hatched/shaded with the color assigned to the surface
in the Design Surface Manager (refer to Figure 3-15 on page 99, Figure 3-17 on page 102
and Figure 3-18 on page 103). After selecting all the desired regions, select the OK button
to finish the command and save the typical section definition. Clicking the Cancel button
during the defining process will not save any part of the definition.
Figure 5-12 Define Typical Section Dialog Box
Define Typical Section Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Design Material Highlight the design material you want to define. Use the Define button to select an
internal point of a typical section region to which you want to assign that material.
Manage This allows you to add, modify or delete any surfaces in the Surface Manager.
Surfaces For more information, see Manage Surfaces – Design Tab on page 101.
Define Use the Define button to select an internal point of a typical section region to which you
want to assign that material. Click on the Define button to define the internal point of the
highlighted material. After the material has been defined, highlight the next material and
select the internal point for that material.
Chapter 5: Typical
Sections
QuickSteps
To define a typical section, complete the following steps:
1. Select Typical Sections Æ Construct Typical Section.
This displays the Construct Typical Section dialog box (Figure 5-10 on page 188).

2. Click on the Define Typical Section icon.
This displays the Define Typical Section dialog box (Figure 5-12 on page 195).
3. Highlight the surface you wish to define and click on the Define button.
4. In the Typical Section CAD graphic, select an internal point within a closed
region on the typical section to define the area as the material highlighted.
5. If there is more than one region to define as a certain design material, select
another point in the typical section graphic.
6. To define the next material, highlight the desired material in the list.
You will automatically be prompted to select the internal point for that material.
7. Continue to define the surfaces following steps 5 and 6.
8. Once all the surfaces have been assigned, click on OK to complete the typical
section definition.
View Typical Section Graphics

ROADCALC TYPICAL SECTIONS VIEW TYPICAL SECTION GRAPHICS
ICON:
The View Typical Section Graphics command loads the typical section CAD graphic for
the typical section that is selected in the drop list. The CAD graphic displays a cut detail
and a fill detail for each typical section.
196 RoadCalc
PROCESS
In this chapter:
CHAPTER
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Associate Alignments and Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Slopes Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Manage Condition Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Edit Design Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
6
Run Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Chapter 6: Process 197

Concepts
Transition Typical Section Breakpoints

RoadCalc can transition between two typical sections over a distance, such that any
sections in between the two typical section locations will be straight-line interpolated.
For example, instead of entering a special alignment and a special profile to perform a
simple lane widening and edge of road raising, a second typical section can be
constructed to represent the wider, less cross-sloped geometry. By assigning the wider
typical section to a station later than the narrower typical section, RoadCalc will construct
the intermediate typical sections by performing a straight-line interpolation over the
distance between the typical section locations. See the figure below for an illustration of
how this transition can be achieved.
Figure 6-1 Result of Transitioning Between Two Typical Section Station Locations
If there is a conflicting number of breakpoints or PT codes, RoadCalc will transition

between an unequal number of breakpoints by starting from the centerline, working its way
out and transitioning between points that are on the same surface with the same PT
codes. If there is not a like PT code between typical sections, the software makes sure the
198 RoadCalc
unassigned breakpoint transitions to the next available breakpoint (away from the
centerline) on that same surface. See the figure below.
Chapter 6: Process
Figure 6-2 Transitioning Between Typical Sections With An Unequal Number of
Breakpoints
The typical section that is placed at station 1+00 is a composite of Typical Section 1 and
Typical Section 2 because of the locations that are specified. As stated before, RoadCalc
starts by isolating each surface to transition the breakpoints between. If there is not a PT
code on a breakpoint it transitions to the first available breakpoint on the next set typical
section location.
In Figure 6-2, above, it shows the first breakpoint (12-foot offset) has no PT code on it,
therefore it transitions to the first breakpoint on Typical Section 2 at station 2+00 (12-foot
offset). The resulting section at station 1+00 then has a breakpoint with no PT code on it at
a 12-foot offset. The pavement cross-slope needs to straight-line transition to a -1% slope
because of the different cross-slopes on Typical Section 1 and Typical Section 2.

The next point (24-foot offset) on Typical Section 1 has a PT code of 10 on it. Looking at
Typical Section 2, there is a 12-foot offset with a PT code of 10. RoadCalc will always
transition between identical PT codes on the same surfaces so that they “connect.” The
resulting section at station 1+00 has a PT code of 10 placed at an offset of 18 feet (the
result of straight-line interpolation between Typical Section 1 and 2). There is a PT code of
20 on typical section 2 that causes the PT code of 10 on Typical Section 1 to transition to
that point as well. That point is located on the station 1+00 section just to the right of PT
code 10 (it does not have a PT code on it because it has not reached station 2+00 where
that point has a PT code of 20).
The shoulder points straight-line interpolate to each other even though there are no PT
codes on them. The cross-slope is interpolated to be negative (-) because it’s transitioning
from a 0% slope to a -10% slope.
The toe of foreslope (PT code 3) exists on both typical sections, so it transitions between
Typical Sections 1 and 2, holding the breakpoint on the 1+00 section. The additional
breakpoint (2 feet from PT code 3 and 4) will transition to the next available breakpoint on
Typical Section 2. Therefore, an additional point is on the 1+00 section at a 3-foot offset
from PT code 3. Because the offset and elevation have been straight-line interpolated, the
slope of the line has changed. The additional breakpoint is 0.4 feet lower than PT codes 3
and 4 on Typical Section 1. When the section is placed at station 1+00 it has moved 1 foot
away from the centerline and 0.2 feet up, causing the slope to change from -20% to
-6.67%. Because PT code 4 exists on both typical sections, it transitions in a straight line
between them.
For more information on terminating typical sections, see Design Locations on page 229.
Superelevation
RoadCalc can automatically superelevate roadways that have superelevation criteria
designed. Using the Superelevation Limit PT codes, RoadCalc will superelevate the
drawn typical section through the various stages of superelevation until the maximum
Refer to Superelevation Concepts on page 22 for more information on how RoadCalc
superelevates roadways.
Dynamic Alignments and Profiles

Dynamic alignments and profiles are used to limit the number of typical sections you have
to construct for any one project. By assembling the typical sections to be just that, typical,
you can reduce the number of typical sections needed by using special alignments and
profiles to make those typical sections achieve many different configurations. Specify a
special horizontal alignment to control the offset of a point on the typical section. A special
profile controls the elevation of a point on the typical section. Specifying both a special
200 RoadCalc
horizontal alignment and special vertical profile allows the width and elevation of
breakpoints to be controlled.
Chapter 6: Process
Special alignments (those other than the design centerline) can be used to control the
typical section offsets by having the typical section “stretch” to meet the offsets as defined
by the special alignments.
Instead of drawing a typical section that is 12-feet wide and another that is 24-feet wide,
construct the 12-foot wide typical section and then “attach” a special alignment to the edge
of road that varies in its offsets from the centerline alignment. This is not just a straight-line
linear interpolation, since the typical section offsets will follow circular curves and spirals.
Not only can typical sections stretch to meet any offset, but if there is a design change, the
alignment is the only thing to modify. When a change is made to that special alignment,
the typical section only needs to be reprocessed, not redrawn or redefined.
Special profiles (again, those other than the design centerline) can be used to change the
elevations of typical section breakpoints. Controlling a ditch grade can be done through a
special profile that has grades independent from the centerline profile. Making profile
grade changes to many cross-sections is as easy as changing a grade on a special profile
and having RoadCalc re-process the data.
When a special alignment and profile are specified for the same point on the typical
section, that point may meet any offset and elevation you desire, providing tremendous
power and flexibility in the design.
The Associate Alignments and Profiles command provides the means to “link” alignments
and profiles to points on your typical sections. This is done through a PT code (PoinT
code). When you associate a PT code to use a certain alignment and/or profile you also
specify a control type and a controlling PT code. These PT codes must then exist on the
typical sections at the breakpoint(s) you wish to move.
Special Alignments
For example, let’s say you want to widen a road from its drawn configuration of 12 feet
wide to 24 feet wide for a few stations to form a passing lane. Refer to (A) in Figure 6-3 on
page 203. This shows the drawn typical section to be 12 feet wide and the portion of the
plan view that would result from using the typical section for the passing lane area.
Because the typical section has a constant 12-foot offset to its edge of pavement, the road
would be continuously 12 feet wide. To widen this typical section, an alignment will be
used to “stretch it out” to a 24-foot wide typical section. That 24-foot offset may be
achieved 3 different ways. The first two will be discussed in this section with the third being
discussed after explaining how a special profile can work.
One way the typical section may stretch to meet the 24-foot alignment offset is by
maintaining the drawn cross-slope (-2%) as the typical section widens. Refer to (B) in
Figure 6-3 on page 203. A special alignment is used to represent the desired offsets for
the typical section. It has an association to PT code 9 with a control PT code of 9 and a

control type of Slope. As the typical section stretches, the cross-slope remains the same
for the segment of the typical section that is drawn from the control PT code back towards
the centerline. In this case, the control PT code is the same as the PT code associated
with the alignment. This means that the segment drawn from the PT code of 9 back
towards the centerline is the segment that is slope controlled and is also the segment that
stretches to meet the 24-foot offset. Because the slope is maintained, the depth to the
edge of pavement (PT code 9) lowers (from 0.24 feet below centerline elevation to 0.48
feet below centerline elevation).
Another way the typical section may meet the 24-foot offset is to have the PT code of 9
maintain its relative elevation change to the centerline profile. Detail (C) in Figure 6-3 on
page 203, shows what happens when the alignment is associated to PT code 9 and the
control PT code is 9 and the control type is Elevation. As the typical section meets the
desired offsets, the depth to PT code 9 from the centerline is kept constant (0.24 feet
below the centerline elevation). Again, because the PT code associated with the
alignment and the control PT code are the same, the segment drawn back towards the
centerline is the segment that stretches to meet the offset. With the elevation difference
being held, the slope of the controlled segment must change. In this case, when the edge
of pavement is stretched to the 24-foot offset, the slope changes to a -1% cross-slope.
If different PT codes are used for the associated PT code and the control PT code, then
the segments that are drawn between the control PT code and the associated PT code are
held in their geometry. Referring to (B) in Figure 6-3 on page 203, changing the alignment
associated to PT code 10 and placing it on the back of curb would result in the curb
geometry being held constant. As PT code 10 met the alignment offsets, the segment
drawn from the Control PT code (9) back towards the centerline would stretch out and
202 RoadCalc
maintain the –2% cross-slope. The control PT code must be placed between the
associated PT code and the centerline.
Chapter 6: Process
Figure 6-3 Use of a Special Alignment for Dynamic Typical Sections
Another type of control is Extend Existing Slope. Extend Existing Slope control is available
only when you specify an alignment or a profile (not both) to stretch your typical section(s).
This control type will maintain the slope value of the segment controlled by the PT Code,
according to the slope value of the adjacent segment located towards the centerline.
RoadCalc will extend the line segment maintaining the drawn slope of the adjacent
segment. Adjustments will be made to the typical section raising or lowering the
breakpoint until the alignment offset or elevation is reached. To use this command you
need to add two associations: one for the PT Code controlling the slope and one for the
extended PT Code. Use this control type for overlays and widenings.
Establish the existing edge of pavement with an alignment and profile (EXISTEP). This is
the PT Code that will be controlling the slope. Then create an additional alignment that
defines the new widened edge of pavement (NEWEP). Draw a typical section with the
pavement at its minimum width and place a PT Code of 2 at that offset. This will define the
overlay portion. Then add another segment at minimum width that represents the new

construction of the widening including any sub pavement courses. Place a PT Code of 10
at the end of that segment. Then use the Associate Alignments and Profiles command to
establish PT Code associations of the following:
PT Code: 2 10
Side: Right Right
Alignment: EXISTEP NEWEP
Profile: EXISTEP <None>
Control Type: User-defined Extend Slope
Control PT 2 10
Code:
These associations will make the PT Code of 2 follow the EXISTEP alignment and profile
widening and varying according to the field conditions. As the first segment of the typical
varies in slope, the segment defined with a PT Code of 10 uses the varying slope of the
segment of the typical section before it as its own while widening to meet the NEWEP
alignment offset. See the figure below.
Figure 6-4 Extend Existing Slopes Example
Special Profiles
For this example, assume a typical section that looks like detail (A) in Figure 6-5 on page
206. The desired result is to make the flat-bottom ditch maintain a certain grade for
204 RoadCalc
drainage purposes. If the drawn typical section is applied throughout the project, the ditch
would parallel the centerline profile at a constant depth of 4 feet. Since the ditch needs to
Chapter 6: Process
maintain a certain grade so it drains to a culvert, you can use a special profile to achieve
this. Two methods of how the ditch will reach those special profile elevations will be
described using this example, while a third type of control will be explained in the next
example.
One way the ditch can be lowered to meet the special profile elevations is by entering the
profile for the ditch as an additional profile other than the centerline profile. By associating
this profile with a PT code of 4, a control PT code of 3 and a control type of Slope, detail
(B) in Figure 6-5 on page 206 shows the resulting typical section at the point where the
ditch is 6 feet lower than the centerline. As the PT code of 4 lowers to meet the special
profile elevations, the slope of the line drawn back from the control PT code of 3 is kept
constant. In order for the PT code 4 to reach its desired elevation and the 3:1 H/V slope to
remain the same, the offset to the control PT code 3 has to change. And because the
typical section geometry is held between the associated PT code and the control PT code,
the PT code of 4 has also changed in offset. Where PT code 3 was drawn 30 feet offset
from centerline, it is now moved out (along the drawn slope) to an offset of 36 feet.
Another way to have the ditch lowered is to have the drawn offsets to the control PT code
and associated PT code be held constant. Detail (C) in Figure 6-5 on page 206 shows the
result of the same special profile, described above, being used, but this time the control
type is changed to Offset. Still using 3 for the control PT code and 4 for the associated
profile PT code, the change in control type to Offset results in the slope of the line drawn
from the control PT code of 3 back towards the centerline being steepened to a 2:1 H/V

slope. This happens in order to keep the offsets to PT codes 3 and 4 constant as set by
the control type.
Figure 6-5 Use of a Special Profile for Dynamic Typical Sections
Special Alignments and Profiles

The third type of control for dynamic typical sections is necessary when you want to
control a typical section breakpoint with a special alignment and profile. The types
previously discussed are set when you use a special alignment or a special profile to
control the typical section. When an association is made to a PT code using both a special
alignment and profile, the Control Type drop list is disabled and it is set to User-defined.
This means that the segment drawn from the control PT code towards the centerline will
not adhere to its drawn slope, offset or elevation difference, but rather to the offsets and
elevations of the controlling alignment and profile.
206 RoadCalc
In this example, the goal is to take a simple two-lane standard typical section and widen
the pavement for a right turn lane as the centerline nears an intersection. In order to
Chapter 6: Process
produce smooth travel through the intersection, it is also necessary to raise the edge of
road. The typical section that will be used can be seen in detail (A) in Figure 6-6, below.
Details B and C show the special EOP profile and special EOP alignment geometry at the
specified stations. An association is made to PT code 9 that includes both the EOP
alignment and EOP profile. The control PT code is also set to 9 and the control type is
automatically set to User-defined. The resulting typical sections can be seen in Figure 6-7
on page 208.
These examples are straightforward in what the resulting typical section is to look like. Far
more complex designs may be done considering that 100 special alignments and 100
special profiles may be used for any one design centerline. This allows you to use
RoadCalc in many different design scenarios including rural highway design, divided
highways design, interchange design, urban corridor design, subdivision street design,
dam and berm design, and utility trench design, to name a few.
Dynamic Typical Sections using special alignments and profiles along with the condition
table logic that RoadCalc uses, provide you a tool that can handle even the most complex
design.
Figure 6-6 Use of a Special Alignment and Profile for Dynamic Typical Sections

Figure 6-7 Resulting Cross-Sections of Applying Both a Special Alignment and
Special Profile
The drawn typical section is applied at station 0+00 through 1+00 with no changes
because the special alignment and profile are held at constant offsets and elevations.
Station 1+50 is the first section that is changed. It widens out as the alignment specifies
and changes the cross-slope because the profile has remained at its constant elevation.
Station 2+00 shows where the typical section has reached its 24-foot offset and the slope
has changed again because the profile elevation is held constant. Station 2+50 shows
where the special profile has now started to raise the edge of road. The offset remains at
24 feet because the alignment is now at a constant 24-foot offset. Station 3+00 shows
where the edge of road profile has stopped varying from the centerline elevations and the
cross-slope is at 0%. The last station in Figure 6-7, above, is showing an alternative
typical section that can be used in the intersection area that does not include curb and
gutter.
Slope Types
The Slopes Library is a centrally located library of the different types of catch treatments
that are applied when RoadCalc processes the design. There are six types of slopes that
may be defined: Single, R.O.W. (right of way), Benching, Width, Clear Zone and No Slope.
208 RoadCalc
Since the slopes library is saved to the Eagle Point SUPPORT folder and the sub-projects
read from that location during processing, changes made to a slope within a sub-project
Chapter 6: Process
may affect other users in other sub-projects. Make sure that any changes made will not
adversely affect those users. If, for example, a design standard or practice changes, you
can modify an existing slope to the Slope Library incorporating those standards so that
every user gets these changes, or you can add an entirely new slope so that users must
consciously choose the new slope to have the change take effect.
Slopes are no longer saved with the typical section (template) as in previous releases of
RoadCalc. Separate, independent station locations may be used to assign where you
want the different slope treatments to be applied. Refer to Figure 6-41 on page 257.
Single Slope
Single Slope probably is the most common slope type used. By defining a 3:1 H/V slope,
for example, RoadCalc will use a positive 3:1 slope when this slope gets applied in a cut
situation and a negative 3:1 slope when it’s applied in a Fill situation. Figure 6-8 on page
210 is an example of a typical section in which RoadCalc applies a 3:1 slope. If you
specify a -3:1 H/V slope, RoadCalc will attempt to apply a 3:1 slope downward in a cut
situation and a 3:1 slope upward in a fill situation. This slope definition is most likely to
occur in an urban situation where the typical section doesn’t tie because of the drawn

geometry. Figure 6-9 on page 211 shows when you would need to apply a positive fill
slope or negative cut slope.
Figure 6-8 Single Slope Type
210 RoadCalc
Chapter 6: Process
Figure 6-9 Use of Negative Single Slope
Right of Way Correction Slope

The R.O.W. Correction Slope type may be used when there is at least one R.O.W.,
alignment defined. This slope type allows for a default slope to be input to attempt to tie
into the original ground within the R.O.W. corridor. If it cannot, RoadCalc allows for two
options to occur.
Type I R.O.W. applies the default slope. If the default slope ties within the R.O.W.
(including any buffer width) there are no more attempts. If the default slope ties outside of
the R.O.W. corridor, RoadCalc then attempts to tie the slope into the original ground using
a value between the default slope and the Maximum slope. Whatever slope value makes
the typical section tie into the R.O.W. alignment (including any buffer width) is used. If the
maximum slope can’t tie within the R.O.W. corridor, RoadCalc applies the maximum slope

and generates a warning during processing that states that. Figure 6-10, below, shows
this type of R.O.W. slope.
Figure 6-10 Type I R.O.W. Correction Slope
Type II R.O.W. is used in cut conditions. With this type of slope specified, RoadCalc
applies the default slope to the toe of cutslope PT code (4) and then widens the typical
section segment prior to the toe of cutslope PT code such that the default slope ties
directly into the R.O.W. alignment (including any buffer width). The fill condition goes
212 RoadCalc
through the same checks as the Type I R.O.W. slope, thus the need for entering the
maximum slope. The figure below shows Type II R.O.W. correction.
Chapter 6: Process
Figure 6-11 Type II R.O.W. Correction Slope
Benching Slope
The Benching Slope type can be used on projects where there are deep areas of cut
and/or fill. A bench can tie into the original ground sooner than a constant single slope
could and provides stability. An entire benching pattern may be defined or a simple pattern
can be entered and repeated as much as needed depending on the depth of cut or fill.
Figure 6-12 on page 214 shows what the design cross-section looks like when a repeated
benching pattern is used in cut and fill.
When defining a bench pattern, construct it to be “right sided,” as if the bench were getting
applied to the right side of the typical section. The reason for this is so that when the

Bench Slope is used, RoadCalc knows when to “mirror” it and apply it to the left side of a
typical section. A bench pattern needs to be constructed for both cut and fill situations.
Figure 6-12 Benching Slope Type
Width Slope
Width slopes are used when you want to have a slope that is a set amount wide from the
toe to the catchpoint. Define a minimum and maximum slope that should be used in order
to tie the slope into original ground within some specified width. The width is measured
from the toe of the slope to the catchpoint. When the Run Design command is executed,
RoadCalc attempts to achieve the desired slope width by varying the slope of the cut or fill
slope. It keeps the slope between the specified minimum and maximum slopes. The
214 RoadCalc
following figure is an attempt to maintain a 20-foot slope width. RoadCalc displays a
warning if it is unable to stay within the slope tolerances specified.
Chapter 6: Process
Figure 6-13 Width Control Slope Type
Clear Zone Slope

The Clear Zone slope type may be used as a safety element in the roadway design. It
provides a recovery area for stray vehicles and is only valid for fill conditions. The inputs
allow for a clear area to be added to the processed typical section if a certain depth of fill is
obtained (the depth of fill is input in the condition table). The Clear Zone slope type
requires a clear distance and slope to define the clear area. The final catchslope is also
input as a single slope value.
If the criteria for when to apply a condition that uses a Clear Zone slope is met, RoadCalc
measures the distance input and, from the PT code specified, connects a line at the given
slope to that offset. Then, from that offset, it attempts to tie the slope from clear offset into

original ground. If the slope cannot tie into the original ground within the corridor width, a
warning message will be generated stating so.
Figure 6-14 Clear Zone Slope Type
No Slope
This slope type allows your typical sections to be processed onto original ground without
catch slopes. This feature is beneficial to show bridge areas without catch slopes and
earthwork volumes. The No Slope category in the Slopes Library has a single entry
defaulted into it called “No Catch Slope”. You can modify the name and extended
description of the slope but you cannot delete it or add another one. The “No Catch Slope”
slope may be used in your condition tables as a slope to apply to your typical sections.
When that condition table is specified in your Design Locations and the Run Design
command is used, the typical sections processed in the region you used the “No Catch
Slope” option will “float” above your original ground without tieslopes. Design Earthwork
volumes will be zeroed out in that region as well. By processing the “No Catch Slope”
condition, your cross-section stations specified in that range will have a Status of N for No
Catch Slope. To remove that status, use the Edit Cross-Section Data Æ Modify Station
command and toggle the No Catch Slope option off. This toggle also affects the 3D Faces
command. In the no catch slope regions along your alignment, the original ground lying
216 RoadCalc
underneath the “floating” road will have 3D Faces generated along with the road itself.
There will not be any faces created that tie the road into original ground.
Chapter 6: Process
Figure 6-15 No Slope Type
Condition Tables
Condition Tables are what lie at the heart of the powerful processing and decision-making
capabilities in RoadCalc. These tables specify what slope treatments get applied when
the road in is a certain amount of cut or fill. They can be based purely on a depth of
material (cut or fill) or based on a depth within a material (i.e. if you’re in 10 or more feet of
rock place a bench pattern, otherwise place a 0.5 H/V slope). This combines the
functionality of the material and depth slopes in past releases with the added functionality
of “joining” different types of slopes through different materials. The Condition Tables are
also where you specify that the Slope Rounding, Slope Seeding and No Grade options
should be used. Use the Settings command on the Manage Condition Tables dialog box
(Figure 6-33 on page 246) to specify the parameters for these options.

Refer to the No Grade on page 226, Slope Seeding on page 227 and Slope Rounding on
page 228.
Because Condition Tables are generally specific to a project, they are stored on a per sub-
project basis, not to the Eagle Point SUPPORT folder.
By default, your sub-project is setup with a Condition Table that uses the default slopes
specified in the Settings command on the Manage Condition Tables dialog box. These
defaults are carried in the prototype so you may change what the defaults are by creating
a prototype of a completed sub-project. For more information refer to Condition Settings
on page 250 and Sub-project Prototype Settings on page 379.
You may modify this default table and/or add your own condition tables to be used
throughout the project. The default table specifies one slope that should be used in cut
and another slope that should be used in fill regardless of any depth or material criteria.
If you want to build a list of possible slopes to use when the typical section is in a certain
amount of cut or fill, you need to highlight the appropriate Material in the Materials list on
the New/Modify Condition Table dialog boxes (see Figure 6-34 on page 247) and add new
conditions.
Once your condition tables are defined, you then specify where you want RoadCalc to
use them with the Edit Design Locations command. Enter the stations at which you want
RoadCalc to use certain condition tables. You must specify what tables RoadCalc should
use in cut and what table it should use in fill.
Refer to Design Locations on page 229 for more information.
By establishing choices for RoadCalc (setting up multiple conditions within a condition
table) and specifying where those choices should be made, the software can apply the
appropriate geometry and catchslopes depending on depth criteria, Right of Way
constraints and other safety criteria.
A brief explanation of the decision making process and examples of different condition
tables are outlined below.
When RoadCalc processes the design, it looks at the design locations to determine which
condition tables get used. It then analyzes the condition tables from the bottom condition
up. In the first example (Condition Tables based on Depths Only), RoadCalc, in a cut
situation, will test the bench pattern slope first to see if it meets the depth criteria. If it does,
it chooses that condition and moves on to the next section. If it fails, it tries the next
condition above it (in this case, a 3:1 H/V slope). If that condition fails, RoadCalc
continues up the choices in the condition table until the depth criteria is satisfied. If you are
basing the depth measurements through multiple materials (like Example 2), you can
specify different slopes to use in those materials when RoadCalc is “cutting” through
them. It is important to note that every original ground sub-surface does not need to have
conditions defined for it. If any of the original ground sub-surfaces do not have any
conditions specified, RoadCalc will move to the conditions in the next material above it.
You cannot delete the first condition listed for the cut (or topmost original) surface because
218 RoadCalc
that is the default that RoadCalc will apply if all other conditions fail. You can however,
modify it to use a different slope treatment.
Chapter 6: Process
A similar process is followed for choosing the fill solution for the typical section. Starting at
the greatest depth of fill, RoadCalc applies the fill conditions and tests the depth criteria
until the condition is satisfied. You cannot delete the first condition listed for fill because
that is the default that RoadCalc will apply if all other conditions fail.
Example 1: Condition Table based on Depths Only (Cut and

Fill)
This example illustrates how to setup a condition table when you are primarily concerned
with absolute depths below and above the topmost original surface. RoadCalc does not
check original ground sub-surface depths using this option. It always measures the cut
depth from the typical section to the topmost original surface.
Table 1 Conditions Based on Depth Only
Material Depth Depth at PT Measured Apply at PT Slope

Code Vertically Code
Cut >= 0 3 From PT code Outermost point 4:1 H/V single
>= 5 3 From PT code Outermost point 3:1 H/V single
>= 15 3 To catchpoint Outermost point Bench pattern 1
Fill >= 0 Outermost point From outermost point Outermost point 4:1 H/V single
>= 5 Outermost point From outermost point Outermost point 3:1 H/V single
>= 10 Outermost point From outermost point Outermost point Clear zone slope 1
This table specifies that when a typical section is between 0 and 5 feet of cut, a 4:1 H/V
slope is applied to the outermost typical section point until it ties into the topmost original
surface. The depth measurement is made at PT code 3 and is measured to the topmost
original surface directly above that PT code. The same type of measurement is made to
see if the typical section is in 5 feet to 15 feet of cut. If the typical section falls within that
depth range of cut material, RoadCalc will process a 3:1 H/V slope at the outermost point
of the typical section until it ties into the topmost original surface. The other solution that
RoadCalc can choose is if the typical section is in more than 15 feet of cut. That solution
is to apply a bench pattern until it ties into the topmost original surface. This measurement
is made from the same PT code of 3 but instead of measuring vertically above it, the depth
is measured to the catchpoint of the bench pattern and the topmost original surface.
If RoadCalc encounters a fill situation, the above table specifies that if the typical section
is in 0 to 5 feet of fill, a 4:1 H/V slope should be applied at the outermost typical section
point until is ties into the topmost original surface. If the depth is measured between 5 and

10 feet, a 3:1 H/V slope is used at the outermost point. And if the depth is greater than 10
feet a clear zone slope (broken slope) is applied. The depth measurement for all of the fill
conditions are made from the same point (outermost typical section point) and are
measured vertically from that point to the topmost original ground.
The following figures show the typical sections and possible slope choices that RoadCalc
can process for the example outlined in this section. Figure 6-16 on page 221 shows the
cut typical section and slopes and Figure 6-17 on page 222 shows the fill typical section
and slopes. Detail (A) in the figures show the drawn typical section for the given situation
and the slope geometry that should be used when RoadCalc is processing the design.
220 RoadCalc
Details (B) through (D) show the design cross-sections at various locations that RoadCalc
created using the above condition table.
Chapter 6: Process
Figure 6-16 Cut Typical Section and Condition Table Results

Figure 6-17 Fill Typical Section and Condition Table Results
Example 2: Condition Table based on Materials (Cut and

Fill)
This example illustrates how to setup a condition table when you want to process different
slopes through different materials based on the depth of the typical section within that
material. Like Example 1: Condition Table based on Depths Only (Cut and Fill) on page
222 RoadCalc
219, the fill conditions use depths based on just the amount of fill material above the
topmost original surface. Unlike Example 1, the table specifies different slopes through the
Chapter 6: Process
different original ground materials based on the depth within each material.
Table 2 Conditions Based On Material Depths
Material Depth Depth at PT Measured Apply at PT Slope

Code Vertically Code
Topsoil >= 0 3 From PT code Outermost point 4:1 H/V single
Clay >= 0 3 From PT code Outermost point 4:1 H/V single
>= 5 3 From PT code Outermost point 3:1 H/V single
Rock >= 0 3 From PT code Outermost point 0.25:1 H/V single
>= 15 3 From PT code Outermost point Bench pattern 2
Fill >= 0 Outermost point From outermost point Outermost point 4:1 H/V single
>= 5 Outermost point From outermost point Outermost point 3:1 H/V single
>= 10 Outermost point From outermost point 10 Clear zone slope 1
This table specifies that whenever the catchslope is passing through the topsoil material, a
4:1 H/V slope is used to tie into the top of it. Two possible slopes would get used when the
catchslope is cutting through the clay material. The slope will be a 4:1 H/V slope when the
clay material is less than 5 feet thick and a 3:1 H/V slope when there is more than 5 feet of
clay. When the typical section is in the rock material two possible slopes will get applied.
When the rock is less than 15 feet deep, a 0.25:1 H/V slope will be placed at the
outermost point on the typical section. If the rock cut is more than 15 feet deep, bench
pattern 2 will be placed at the outermost point on the typical section.
The depths are all measured from PT code 3 to the top of the surface the condition is for.
But because RoadCalc processes from the bottom original surface up, the checks for the
amount of depth can possibly move. If the typical section is only into the clay material, the
depth check is performed at the point specified. However, if the typical section is cutting
into the rock material, RoadCalc will apply the slope that meets the depth criteria and
extend it until it reaches the surface above it. Then the depth check for the next material is
performed from that slope endpoint instead of from the point specified on the original
typical section.
If RoadCalc encounters a fill situation, Table 2 specifies that if the typical section is in 0 to
5 feet of fill, a 4:1 H/V slope should be applied at the outermost typical section point until is
ties into the topmost original surface. If the depth is measured between 5 and 10 feet, a
3:1 H/V slope is used at the outermost point. And if the depth is greater than 10 feet a
clear zone slope (broken slope) is applied at the PT code of 10. Setting up the last
condition this way means that RoadCalc will remove the geometry from the typical section
that is to the outside of PT code 10 and apply the clear zone slope at that point on the

typical section. The depth measurement for all of the fill conditions are made from the
same point (outermost typical section point) and are measured vertically from that point to
the topmost original ground.
The following figures show the typical sections and possible slope choices that RoadCalc
can process for Example 2. The figure below shows the cut typical section and slopes and
Figure 6-19 on page 225 shows the fill typical section and slopes. Detail (A) in the figures
show the drawn typical section for the given situation and the slope geometry that should
be used when RoadCalc is processing the design. Details (B) and (C) show the design
cross-sections at various locations that RoadCalc created using the condition table used
in Example 2.
Figure 6-18 Cut Typical Section and Condition Table Results
224 RoadCalc
Chapter 6: Process
Figure 6-19 Fill Typical Section and Condition Table Results
Fill Ditches
The Fill Ditches toggle can be set to accommodate situations where the original ground is
sloping upwards near the area where a fill slope would tie into. Without using fill ditches,
the typical section (shown in Figure 6-20 on page 226 in details (A) and (B)) will be applied
to the original ground as shown in detail (C). Ideally, the ditch that is designed for cut
situations should be applied for this fill situation so that water can flow into the ditch more
easily. By using the fill ditches option, RoadCalc can construct the cut condition ditch
geometry onto the fill slope. A PT code of 3 (Toe of Foreslope) needs to be placed onto the
typical section cut detail to denote where the ditch begins. PT code 4, toe of cutslope
denotes where the ditch ends. RoadCalc takes the geometry drawn between these two
PT codes and constructs the geometry onto the end of the fill slope such that the PT code

of 4 ties into the original ground and the ditch “slides” up the fill slope. The end result of
using fill ditches is shown in the figure below, detail D.
Figure 6-20 Using the Fill Ditches Option
No Grade
The No Grade option on the Condition Settings dialog box (Figure 6-36 on page 251)
dialog box allows you to keep the typical section from extracting or adding material that
isn’t required to be removed or added. This happens when the typical section extends
beneath or above the top original ground. You can specify that there should be no grading
done in this area. This will stop the design surface when it reaches the top original ground.
If the typical section starts again in another location, the program will parallel the top
original ground at a depth of zero until it reaches the other part of the typical section.
226 RoadCalc
The No Grade option is especially useful for divided roadway design where there is to be
no grading between the divided roadways. Each side of the divided roadway typical
Chapter 6: Process
section ties into original ground at the median if this option is used. The PT codes specify
which section of the typical section will tie into original ground.
Figure 6-21 on page 227 is an example of the design surface entering the top original
ground and then exiting the top original ground in the middle of the typical section. The no
grade is defined from PT code 14 (right edge of shoulder on the left of centerline) to PT
code 17 (left edge of shoulder on the right of centerline). The results show that the design
surface stops when it enters the top original surface between PT codes 14 and 17 and
continues when it exits the top original surface. The design surface parallels the top
original ground at a depth of zero until it reaches the other part of the typical section. See
the figure below.
Figure 6-21 No Grade Option on Divided Roadways
Slope Seeding
The Slope Seeding option allows you to obtain a quantity of seeding material that would
be needed for the new design. Specify the depth of the seeding and where the seeding is
to be applied, so RoadCalc can calculate the volume. The result is displayed in the
Pavement Volumes dialog box Figure 7-65 on page 347.

Below is an example of outside seeding. Specify the seeding to be placed beginning at PT
code 10. From PT code 10, the seeding depth is placed above the design surface until it
reaches the top original surface at the catchpoint.
Figure 6-22 Outside Slope Seeding
Slope Rounding
The Slope Rounding settings allow you to round a cut catchslope to the top original
ground surface. When you specify the total rounding length, it will be divided in two and
placed on both sides of the catchpoint. These offsets are placed where the slope rounding
starts and ends. RoadCalc connects the starting and ending location of the slope
rounding and uses that straight line as the chord of the arc. The arc is then divided into
equal deflection angles based on the number of segments requested. At the intersection
of the deflection angle and the arc, RoadCalc inserts a point. The slope rounding is
constructed as a series of line segments connecting all of the points that were determined
228 RoadCalc
from the intersection of the deflection angle and the arc. This is only available on the
outside catchline in a cut condition. See the figure below.
Figure 6-23 Slope Rounding Chapter 6: Process
Design Locations
Establishing which typical sections and condition tables you want applied to the stations
along your design alignment is done using the Edit Design Locations command. There are
two different inputs that are required when setting up the design locations. The first is
specifying where different typical sections will get applied and the second type of input is

where certain conditions will be checked based on how deep of cut or fill the typical
section is in. For both types of input, station locations are required to let RoadCalc know
where the typical sections and condition tables get applied.
Typical Section Locations

The typical section locations are independent from the condition locations so that few
typical sections are needed on any project. Every typical section location specified is
where that typical section will first get applied. What happens on the following stations
depends on which one of the three types of transitioning is set. The first type of
transitioning is to not transition the typical section to the next typical section location
specified. This means that all stations following a typical section location set as “Do not
transition” also get that same typical section applied to the original ground. The second
type of transitioning is to have RoadCalc perform a straight line transition over the
distance between two typical section locations. The last type of typical section
transitioning is to allow a single typical section station to interrupt what typical section is
getting applied over a range.
For more information on typical section transitioning refer to Transition Typical Section
Breakpoints on page 198.
The table below illustrates when to use the different types of typical section transitioning.
Table 3 Example Typical Section Locations
Station Typical Section Transition Type

0.00 2-Lane Rural Collector Do not transition to next station
2475.45 Driveway Right Side Single Occurrence
4520.00 2-Lane Rural Collector Transition to next station
4720.00 2-Lane w/Passing Do not transition to next station
6000.00 2-Lane w/Passing Transition to next station
6200.00 2-Lane Rural Collector Do not transition to next station
8594.28 2-Lane Urban Curb And Gutter Do not transition to next station
The above table specifies that the 2-Lane Rural Collector typical section gets applied at
the beginning station and continues to get applied on every cross-section station up until
station 2485.45 because of the transition type set. At this station, the Driveway right side
typical section gets applied. Then at the cross-section station 2500 and all the way to
station 4520, the 2-Lane Rural Collector typical section gets applied because the Single
Occurrence station interrupted this typical section from being applied continuously from
the beginning station. From station 4520 to 4720, RoadCalc will perform a straight line
interpolation of the 2-Lane Rural Collector and 2-Lane w/Passing typical sections.
230 RoadCalc
Because the transition type is set to Do not transition to next station at station 4720, the
2-Lane w/Passing gets applied to every station between 4720 and 6000. Then beginning
Chapter 6: Process
at station 6000 a transition back to the 2-Lane Rural Collector occurs. At station 8594.28
an abrupt change to a 2-Lane Urban Curb and Gutter typical section occurs. To ensure
proper end areas, it is recommended that cross-section stations exist at 8594.27 and at
8594.28. This way the 2-Lane Rural Collector gets applied at 8594.27 and immediately
after it, the 2-Lane Urban typical section begins. The remaining stations until the end of
project continue to have the 2-Lane Urban Curb and Gutter typical section applied to
them. The figure below illustrates what typical section gets applied at various locations
along the alignment. For the purposes of this example, the alignment is assumed to be a
straight line.
Figure 6-24 Applied Typical Sections
Condition Table Locations

The condition table locations specify what condition tables RoadCalc should look at
during processing. Each location requires a station value and the condition tables that
RoadCalc should look at for the left side and right side conditions of the typical sections.
At least one condition table location must exist in order to issue the Run Design command.

The locations are setup such that RoadCalc uses the condition tables specified at the
given location and on all stations following until the next location is encountered. The table
below shows an example of setting up condition table locations.
Table 4 Example Condition Table Locations
Station Left Condition Table Right Condition Table

0.00 Standard Rural Standard Rural
2475.45 Standard Rural Shear line
2476.00 Standard Rural Standard Rural
8594.28 Standard Urban Standard Urban
This example assumes that three condition tables have been already defined within the
sub-project and are called Shear line, Standard Rural and Standard Urban. The first
condition table location defines that RoadCalc should use the Standard Rural Condition
table to determine what type of slope treatments get applied on both sides of the typical
sections. In this case, all stations between 0.00 and 2475.45 (excluding station 2475.45)
have slope treatments chosen from the Standard Rural condition table. At station 2475.45
RoadCalc will use conditions from the Standard Rural table for processing the left side of
the typical section but will choose a condition from the Shear line condition table for the
ride side slope treatments. The Shear line table would contain a cut and a fill condition that
constructs a vertical slope from the end of the typical section to the topmost original
ground surface (i.e for the purpose of not designing any tie slopes on an intersecting
road). Then at station 2476, RoadCalc should go back to choosing conditions from the
Standard Rural condition table for the slopes on the left and right side of the processed
typical sections. This table continues to be used on all stations until station 8594.28 where
the Standard Urban condition table begins to be used. All stations that follow 8594.28
would also have conditions chosen from the Standard Urban condition table.
Run Design Process

The Run Design command is what RoadCalc uses to process the alignments, profiles and
typical sections onto the original ground cross-sections. How the typical sections tie into
the original ground are dependent on the condition tables specified.
When this command is selected, you may choose the station range you want to process,
as well as whether you want RoadCalc to process all stations in the range automatically
or if you want to “step through” the individual cross-sections (all or just the ones with
processing warnings).
The following is a brief outline of how RoadCalc processes the design.
1. Read design locations (Typical Sections and Condition locations).
232 RoadCalc
2. Read the data files for the specified typical sections and conditions.
Chapter 6: Process
3. Transition the different typical sections between locations.
4. Apply superelevation (if any).
5. Raise design cross-section geometry to design profile elevations.
6. Calculate offsets (horizontal and vertical) to special alignment and profiles (if
any).
7. Make typical sections achieve the horizontal and vertical offset from step 6.
8. Apply appropriate slopes determined from the condition tables.
9. Check what settings are specified for the applied condition (No Grade or Slope
Rounding).
10. Apply ditch staking (if any).
11. Process Overbreak and Undercut design surfaces (if any).
12. Process end-areas and slope seeding (if any). Write to file.
13. Write design cross-sections to file.
Associate Alignments and Profiles

ROADCALC PROCESS ASSOCIATE ALIGNMENTS AND PROFILES
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcproassoc

The Associate Alignments and Profiles command is used to establish which alignments
and/or profiles should control the typical sections that are going to be processed.
RoadCalc automatically uses the Centerline alignment and Centerline profile to control
the horizontal and vertical geometry of the “center” of the typical section. You may define
additional alignments and/or profiles to control other points and geometry on your typical
sections. Those “other” points are denoted with PT codes (PoinT codes) and the
Associate Alignments and Profiles command defines how the typical section will use those
additional alignments/profiles.
See Dynamic Alignments and Profiles on page 200 for more information.
The Associate Alignments and Profiles dialog box (Figure 6-25 on page 234) lists the PT
codes that have alignments and/or profiles controlling the typical section geometry. By
default the list is empty, however, one association is always made without you specifying
it. PT code 1 has alignment 1 (Centerline) and profile 1 (Centerline) as its association. Any
other alignments/profiles that you want to use must have an association created. Use the

New PT code Association button to define a PT code to use an alignment/profile for
controlling your typical sections. Also specify the side, control type and control PT code.
A PT code cannot be associated more than once on the same side of the centerline. For
example, PT code 2 can have one association to an alignment and/or profile on the left
side and one association defined on the right side.
An alignment or profile cannot be associated to more than one PT code. For example, an
alignment named “EOP Left” can only be associated to one PT code.
A PT code can be placed and processed on a typical section without having an

association defined for it. This would be the case if the PT code is there to refer to in other
“output” areas of the software such as in cross-section sheets, staking reports, etc.
An alignment cannot cross the centerline. You must define two alignments. For example,
enter one that is on the right side up until it intersects the Centerline. Then add another
alignment on the left side of the Centerline that represents the crossing alignment.
Figure 6-25 Associate Alignments and Profiles Dialog Box
Associate Alignments and Profiles Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
PT Code This is the PT code that is placed on the typical section(s) at the breakpoint at which the
associated alignment/profile should control the offsets/elevations of.
Side The side option is set to either Left or Right of the Centerline alignment. This corresponds
to the side that the alignment/profile is on with respect to the Centerline alignment.
Alignment This displays what alignment is being used as the controlling alignment for the PT code. If
an alignment is not being used for control, it is set to <None>.
Profile This displays what profile is being used as the controlling profile for the PT code. If a
profile is not being used for control, it is set to <None>.
Control Type The control type specifies how RoadCalc will manipulate the typical section in order to
meet the desired offsets/elevations of the special alignment/profile.
234 RoadCalc
Associate Alignments and Profiles Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 6: Process
Option Function
Control PT Code This is used to denote the segment on the typical section that will change when the PT
code meets the offset/elevation of the alignments/profile. In general, it is either the same
PT code in the PT Code drop list above or the next breakpoint on the typical section in
towards the Centerline.
New PT Code Create a PT code association using this command. Specify the side, alignment, profile,
Association control type and control PT code for the PT code.
Refer to New PT Code Association, below, for more information.
Modify PT Code Use this command to change the side, alignment, profile, control type or control PT code
Association of the association.
Refer to New PT Code Association, below, for more information.
Delete PT Code This command removes the highlighted association from the list. RoadCalc will not
Association “stretch” a PT code on the typical sections that do not have an association defined.
New PT Code Association

ROADCALC PROCESS ASSOCIATE ALIGNMENTS AND PROFILES NEW PT CODE ASSOCIATION
The New PT Code Association command is used to define what alignment/profile controls
a PT code that is placed on the typical section. The PT code that is specified should be
placed on the typical section at a breakpoint that you wish to “stretch” to meet the offset/
elevation of an alignment/profile. Either that PT code or another PT code placed in toward
the Centerline is used as the “control” point or the point that “gives” on the typical section
such that the alignment/profile can be met.
Refer to Associate Alignments and Profiles on page 233 and Dynamic Alignments and
Profiles on page 200 for more information.
Figure 6-26 New PT Code Association Dialog Box

New PT Code Association Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
PT Code This represents the breakpoint on the typical section that should be controlled by the
specified alignment/profile.
Side Set the side to either Left or Right. This corresponds to the side that the alignment/profile
is on with respect to the Centerline alignment.
Alignment Set the alignment drop list to the name of the alignment you want to control the PT code
specified. If an alignment is not being used with this PT code, set the drop list to <None>.
Profile Set the profile drop list to the name of the profile you want to control the PT code
specified. If a profile is not being used with this PT code, set the drop list to <None>.
Control Type This setting controls how the typical section will meet the offsets/elevations of the
alignment/profile specified. The choices in the drop list change according to whether you
are using an alignment, profile or both an alignment and a profile for controlling the typical
section.
Slope: Slope control is available only when you specify an alignment or a profile
(not both) to stretch your typical section(s). This control type maintains the
slope of the line segment drawn from the Control PT Code toward the
centerline. RoadCalc will extend the line segment maintaining the drawn slope
while raising or lowering the elevation of the breakpoint until the alignment
offset or profile elevation is reached.
Elevation: Elevation control is available only when you specify an alignment to
stretch your typical section(s) (profile is set to <None>). RoadCalc maintains
the elevation of the breakpoint assigned by the Control PT Code. Adjustments
to the slope of the typical section line segment where the Control PT Code is
specified are made in order to achieve the same elevation of the breakpoint as
drawn on the typical section.
Offset: Offset control is available only when you specify a profile to stretch your
typical section(s) (alignment is set to <None>). RoadCalc maintains the drawn
offset of the breakpoint assigned by the Control PT Code. Adjustments to the
slope of the typical section line segment where the Control PT Code is specified
are made in order to achieve the same offset of the breakpoint as drawn in the
design typical section.
Extend Existing Slope: Extend Existing Slope control is available only when you
specify an alignment or a profile (not both) to stretch your typical section(s).
This control type will maintain the slope value of the segment controlled by the
PT Code, according to the slope value of the adjacent segment located towards
the centerline. RoadCalc will extend the line segment maintaining the drawn
slope of the adjacent segment. Adjustments will be made to the typical section
raising or lowering the breakpoint until the alignment offset or elevation is
reached. To use this command you need to add two associations: one for the
PT Code controlling the slope and one for the extended PT Code. Use this
control type for overlays and widenings.
User-defined: This type of control is set automatically when you select an
alignment and a profile to stretch your typical section(s). RoadCalc adjusts the
offset and elevation of the typical section line segment where the Control PT
Code is specified in order to meet the offset and elevation of the specified
alignment and profile.
236 RoadCalc
New PT Code Association Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 6: Process
Option Function
Control PT Code This is used to denote the segment on the typical section that will change when the PT
Code meets the offset/elevation of the alignments/profile. In general, it is either the same
PT Code as above or the next breakpoint on the typical section in towards the Centerline.
Slopes Library
ROADCALC PROCESS SLOPES LIBRARY
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcproslope

The Slopes Library dialog box (below) is a global listing of all of the slopes that have been
created. Slopes are used in condition tables to specify what slope(s) is/are attached to the
end of a typical section during the processing of the Run Design command. The slope
types that are available are Single, Right of Way Correction, Benching, Width, Clear Zone
and No Slope.
See Slope Types on page 208 for more information. See Manage Condition Tables on
page 245 for more information.
You can create new, modify existing, copy, delete and print the slopes. You can also see a
user-defined description of what the slope is used for.
To create a new slope of some type, either highlight the desired slope type folder in the
tree view and select the New Slope button, or highlight a slope name within a folder of the
desired slope type and select the New Slope button.

The Slopes Library is saved globally for all projects. Modifying and deleting slopes may
affect other users. Be sure to verify that you are performing a valid change.
Figure 6-27 Slopes Library Dialog Box
Slopes Library Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Slopes Tree view This lists all of the slope types and slopes defined for that type. The slope types (Single,
Right of Way Correction, Benching, Width and Clear Zone) are the first level of the tree
view. The second level is all of the individual slopes defined for each type.
New Slope This allows you to create new slopes. The resulting dialog box that is displayed when the
New Slope button is selected is determined by what type of slope is highlighted in the tree
view. If Single Slope type or one of its individual slopes is highlighted when you click on
the New Slope button, the New Single Slope dialog box (below) will appear.
For additional information, refer to New Single Slope, below, New Right of Way Correction
Slope on page 239, New Benching Slope on page 241, New Width Slope on page 243
and New Clear Zone Slope on page 244.
Modify Slope This allows you to change any of the parameters for the slope that is highlighted in the
tree view.
Copy Slope This allows you to copy all of the parameters for the selected slope to a different name.
Delete Slope This allows you to remove the slope that is highlighted in the tree view.
New Single Slope

ROADCALC PROCESS SLOPES LIBRARY NEW SINGLE SLOPE
A Single Slope is the most common type of slope used. It is used when a constant slope is
desired to tie a typical section into an original ground surface.
238 RoadCalc
See Single Slope on page 209 for more information.
Chapter 6: Process
A positive slope value means RoadCalc will apply that slope upward in a cut condition
and downward in a fill condition. A negative slope may be used if you need a slope to
project downward in cut and upward in fill.
Figure 6-28 New Single Slope Dialog Box
New Single Slope Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Slope Type Static text that represents the slope type selected from the tree view in the Slopes Library
dialog box (Figure 6-27 on page 238).
Name The name entered in this field describes the slope. A maximum of 40 characters may be
used.
Slope Value The numeric value for the change in grade. Any numeric value can be entered in this field.
Slope Type Drop The type of slope that is displayed in a slope value field. The available options are %
List slope, H/V (horizontal divided by vertical), V/H (vertical divided by horizontal) and Unit/
Unit.
Extended Enter additional text that further describes the item being added. Up to 512 Characters
Description may be entered.
New Right of Way Correction Slope

ROADCALC PROCESS SLOPES LIBRARY NEW RIGHT OF WAY CORRECTION SLOPE
The Right of Way Correction Slope allows you to tie the catchslope into the top original
ground at the right of way. The Right of Way Correction Slope performs different functions
based on what type of right of way is being used and if the typical section is in cut or fill.
Right of Way Type 1 (cut condition): This type always attempts to tie the catchslope
into the right of way alignment. If the right of way alignment is outside of the catchline,
the default slope is applied. If the right of way alignment is inside the catchline, the
catchslope varies between the default and the maximum until the catchslope ties in

the right of way alignment. If the right of way is inside the maximum slope, a
processing error reports that the right of way has been exceeded.
Right of Way Type 1 (fill condition): This type works the same as the cut condition
explained above.
Right of Way Type 2 (cut condition): This type first applies the default slope. If the right
of way alignment is outside of the default slope, the default slope is maintained and
the ditch is stretched until the catchslope ties into the right of way alignment. If the
right of way alignment is inside the default slope, a processing error displays stating
that the right of way has been exceeded.
Right of Way Type 2 (fill condition): This type works the same as Right of Way Type 1
(fill condition) if the fill ditches toggle is off. If the fill ditches toggle is on, it works the
same as described for Right of Way Type 2 (cut condition).
See Right of Way Correction Slope on page 211 for more information.
Right of way alignments must be defined in the RoadCalc Alignment Manager to use this
slope option. When using right of way Type 2, you must have a PT code of 3 (toe of
foreslope) placed on your cut typical section so the ditch can be widened.
Figure 6-29 New Right of Way Correction Slope Dialog Box
New Right of Way Correction Slope Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Slope Type This is static text that represents the slope type selected from the tree view in the Slopes
Library dialog box (Figure 6-27 on page 238).
Name This field indicates the name entered in this field describes the slope. A maximum of 40
characters may be used.
Default Slope This field indicates the first slope that is applied to the typical section when attempting to
Value tie into a right of way alignment.
Default Slope This is the type of slope that is displayed in the Default Slope Value field. The available
Type Drop List options are % Slope, H/V (horizontal divided by vertical), V/H (vertical divided by
horizontal) and Unit/Unit.
240 RoadCalc
New Right of Way Correction Slope Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 6: Process
Option Function
Maximum Slope This is the allowable limit that the slope will steepen when attempting to tie into a right of
Value way alignment.
Maximum Slope This is the type of slope that is displayed in the maximum slope value field. The available
Buffer Width This is the distance inside the Right of Way alignment that is the desired location for the
catchslope to tie into. Enter a positive width to buffer inside the right of way.
ROW Type 1 This is an option that varies the catchslope from the default slope to the maximum slope in
an attempt to tie into the right of way alignment. This functions the same way in both cut
and fill conditions.
ROW Type 2 This is an option that widens the ditch holding the default slope in an attempt to tie in the
right of way alignment. This is only used in a cut condition or a fill condition when the fill
ditches toggle is set to on. If the typical section is in a fill condition and the fill ditches
toggle is set to off, this option will function the same as Right of Way Type 1.
Description Enter additional text that further describes the item being added. Up to 512 characters
may be entered.
New Benching Slope

ROADCALC PROCESS SLOPES LIBRARY NEW BENCHING SLOPE
The Benching Slope command is used when a typical section is in an area of deep cut or
fill. It allows you to define your own benching pattern that is applied. Typically, a benching
slope consists of a steep slope followed by a flat or gradual slope. This pattern can be
repeated until the benching slope ties into the surface specified in a condition table.

See Benching Slope on page 213 for more information.
Figure 6-30 New Benching Slope Dialog Box
New Benching Slope Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Name Enter a name to describe the slope. A maximum of 40 characters may be entered.
Extended Enter additional text that further describes the item being added. Up to 512 characters
X The absolute horizontal distance from the typical section cross hairs.
Y This is the absolute vertical distance from the typical section cross hairs.
dX This is the horizontal distance from the last point entered.
dY This is the vertical distance from the last point entered.
Slope This is the change in grade between two points.
PT Code This is the PT code that will be placed at the breakpoint when the benching slope is
processed.
New Breakpoint Enter breakpoint data using this option. When the New Breakpoint dialog box displays,
choose to enter the data by (X,Y), (dX, dY), (dX, s) or (dY,s).
Modify Use this icon to edit the data for the highlighted breakpoint.
Breakpoint
Delete Use this icon to remove the breakpoint from the bench pattern.
Breakpoint
Repeat Pattern Toggle this option on if you wish to have the benching pattern repeated until it ties in to the
specified surface in the condition tables. Toggling this option off will have RoadCalc only
place the defined bench geometry once to the typical section.
242 RoadCalc
New Width Slope
Chapter 6: Process
ROADCALC PROCESS SLOPES LIBRARY NEW WIDTH SLOPE
A Width Slope is used when you want the catchslope to tie into the top original surface at
a specified distance from the typical section. The slope will vary between the minimum
and maximum slope to tie to the original surface at the width specified.
See Width Slope on page 214 for more information.
Figure 6-31 New Width Slope Dialog Box
New Width Slope Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Slope Type Static text that represents the slope type selected from the tree view in the Slopes Library
dialog box (Figure 6-27 on page 238).
Minimum Slope This is the first slope that is applied to the typical section when attempting to tie into an
Value original surface at the width specified.
Minimum Slope This is the type of slope that is displayed in the minimum slope value field. The available
Maximum Slope This is the allowable limit that the slope will steepen when attempting to tie into an original
Value surface at the width specified.
Maximum Slope This is the type of slope that is displayed in the maximum slope value field. The available
Width This is the distance away from the typical section that the catchslope is desired to be tied
in at.

New Clear Zone Slope
ROADCALC PROCESS SLOPES LIBRARY NEW CLEAR ZONE SLOPE
The New Clear Zone Slope command is used when you want a grade break in the slope at
a distance from the typical section. This slope from the typical section to the grade break is
usually much flatter than the slope after the grade break. The flatter slope is designed as a
recovery area for a vehicle which has left the roadway. Because a guard rail is often
placed at the location of the grade break to prevent a vehicle from entering the steeper
slope, RoadCalc will place a guard rail PT code (1002 or 1003) at the break point.
See Clear Zone Slope on page 215 for more information.
Figure 6-32 New Clear Zone Slope Dialog Box
New Clear Zone Slope Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Clear Distance This is the distance from the typical section where the catchslope will change from the “To
Clear Offset Slope” to the “From Clear Offset Slope.”
From PT Code This is the PT code on the typical section that the clear distance is measured from (usually
the edge of traveled way).
PT Code Library This option displays the PT code Library dialog box.
To Clear Offset This is the numeric value for the change in grade. Any numeric value may be entered in
this field. This is the slope that is applied from the typical section to the offset calculated
from the value in the clear distance field.
To Clear Offset This is the type of slope that is displayed in the To Clear Offset edit field. The available
244 RoadCalc
New Clear Zone Slope Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 6: Process
Option Function
From Clear This is the numeric value for the change in grade. Any numeric value may be entered in
Offset this field. This is the slope that is applied from the offset calculated from the value in the
Clear Distance edit field until the slope ties into the top original surface.
From Clear This is the type of slope that is displayed in the From Clear Offset edit field. The available
Offset Type Drop options are % Slope, H/V (horizontal divided by vertical), V/H (vertical divided by
List horizontal) and Unit/Unit.
Manage Condition Tables

ROADCALC PROCESS MANAGE CONDITION TABLES
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcprocond

The Manage Condition Tables command displays the list of all of the Condition Tables that
can be used for the current sub-project. The tables get used during the Run Design
command in order to solve what slopes get applied to the typical sections. Each table
minimally contains data for RoadCalc to know what slope treatments get applied when the
typical section is in Cut or in Fill. The table can contain more specific slope information
pertaining to the different original ground materials but doesn’t have to.
By default, a Condition Table is created for the sub-project with the default slopes set in
the Condition Settings dialog box. The default slopes are carried in the sub-project
prototype so they can be set once and a sub-project prototype can be created so that
other sub-projects can use these default slopes. You can modify the default table to
contain other conditions or add new condition tables to provide more design choices to
RoadCalc during the Run Design process. Once your condition tables are defined, you
need to set station locations for which tables RoadCalc uses during processing by
entering them in the Edit Design Locations command.

For more information refer to Sub-project Prototype Settings on page 379.
Figure 6-33 Manage Condition Tables Dialog Box
Manage Condition Tables Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Condition Table This is a listing of all condition tables defined for the current sub-project.
Description This is additional text information further describing the condition table highlighted. This
text is entered using the Description button on the New/Modify Condition Table dialog
boxes.
New Condition This adds a new condition table to the Condition Tables list. You supply the name,
Table description and other material condition settings.
For more information refer to New Condition Table on page 247.
Modify This command allows you to change the Condition Table name, description and other
Condition Table material condition settings. You can also add new conditions to an existing table by using
this command.
This is nearly identical to New Condition Table. For more information refer to New
Condition Table on page 247.
Copy Condition This command copies the highlighted Condition Table and allows you to enter a new
Table name and description for it. You can then modify the necessary parameters using the
Modify Condition Table command.
Delete Condition This command removes the highlighted condition table from the list.
Table
Settings The Settings command is where you enter information about your default slopes, the
parameters for performing No Grade, Slope Seeding and Slope Rounding functions.
For more information see Condition Settings – General Tab on page 250.
246 RoadCalc
New Condition Table
Chapter 6: Process
ROADCALC PROCESS MANAGE CONDITION TABLES NEW CONDITION TABLE
When the New Condition Table button is chosen from the Manage Condition Tables dialog
box, the New Condition Table dialog box (below) appears. The condition table requires a
name, at least one condition specified for cut (or topmost original surface) and at least one
condition for fill. By default, a new table has the Based on Depth toggle turned on and the
Cut and Fill materials set with one condition each. Those conditions are setup to be
always using the default cut and fill slopes (as specified in the Condition Settings dialog
box) and cannot be deleted.
The dialog box lists the materials in the left side list box. What materials display in this list
depends on the “Based On” toggles. If the Based on Depth Only toggle is on, the material
list only displays Cut and Fill. If the Based on Material toggle is on, the material list
displays all original ground surfaces plus the fill material.
The list to the right of the material list displays what slopes should be applied at what point
on the typical section. If different slopes should be applied based on a certain amount of
depth within a material (Cut materials or Fill material) they should be added using the New
Condition button. Depending on the material highlighted (Cut, Fill or the individual surface
names) the New Condition button adds new choices for RoadCalc to choose from while
processing a typical section that is in that material.
For more information refer to Condition Tables on page 217.
The Fill Ditches option, when toggled on, has RoadCalc apply ditch geometry to the areas
of the design where a fill slope would intercept original ground at opposing grades. For
more information refer to Fill Ditches on page 225.
Figure 6-34 New Condition Table Dialog Box

New Condition Table Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Name Enter the name of the condition table. Up to 40 characters can be entered.
Description Enter additional text information further describing the Condition Table using the
Description button. Up to 512 character can be entered for the description.
Based on Depth This toggle controls the items that appear in the Materials list. When toggled on, only two
Only materials appear; Cut and Fill. Cut specifies all the original ground materials that the
typical section can be placed in. Based on the total depth of cut, the conditions list (when
Cut is highlighted) specifies what possible slopes RoadCalc should apply when a cut
situation is encountered. When the Fill material is highlighted, the conditions list specifies
what possible slopes RoadCalc should apply when a fill situation is encountered.
Based on This toggle controls the items that appear in the Materials list. When toggled on, the
Materials material list contains all of your original ground materials plus a material called Fill. This
allows you to enter multiple conditions to the conditions list for each material (similar to the
Material Slopes option in prior releases). Highlight the desired material and select the
New Condition button to enter different slopes to be applied to the typical section
depending on whether the typical section is “cutting” through the material.
Materials List The items in the list change according to the “Based on” toggles above it. It displays Cut
and Fill when the Based on Depth Only toggle is on or it displays all of your original
ground materials plus Fill if the Based on Materials toggle is on. The topmost original
ground material and the material called Cut share the same conditions. If you enter
conditions for the Cut material while the toggle is set to Based on Depth Only, those same
conditions appear when the toggle is changed to Based on Material and you highlight the
topmost original material. Minimally, the Cut (or topmost original material) and Fill
materials must have at least one condition each.
Conditions list This lists the possible slope choices for RoadCalc to choose from when processing the
design. The conditions in this list correspond to the material that is highlighted in the
material list. Minimally, the Cut (or topmost original material) and Fill materials must have
at least one condition each. One default condition is always placed for Cut and one for Fill
and they cannot be deleted.
Fill Ditches Toggle this option on to have RoadCalc apply ditch geometry to the areas of the design
where a fill slope would intercept original ground at opposing grades. For more
information refer to Fill Ditches on page 225.
New Condition Use this option to add a new condition for the highlighted material.
For more information refer to New Condition on page 249.
Modify Use this option to modify a condition for the highlighted material. Highlight the appropriate
Condition condition and select the Modify Condition button.
This is nearly identical to New Condition. For more information refer to New Condition on
page 249.
Delete Condition This command removes the highlighted condition from the condition list. You cannot
delete the first condition for Cut (or topmost original material) or the first condition for Fill.
248 RoadCalc
New Condition
Chapter 6: Process
ROADCALC PROCESS MANAGE CONDITION TABLES NEW CONDITION TABLE NEW CONDITION
Use this command to add new slopes for RoadCalc to choose from during processing.
The condition is added to the material that is currently highlighted. You enter the slope that
should be applied, where it should be applied and under what conditions it should be
applied. The Depth Check area of the dialog box requires input for when to apply the
slope. The Apply Slopes area of the dialog box is where you input the slope that should be
used when the depth check is satisfied.
Figure 6-35 New Condition Dialog Box
New Condition Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Depth Check These parameters tell RoadCalc how to check if a particular slope should be applied. If
the Measured Vertically from PT code toggle is on, RoadCalc measures the depth from
the “At PT Code” to a point on the surface specified. Then the slope in the Apply Slopes
frame gets applied to the typical section at the point specified.
Apply Slopes The items in this frame specify what slope gets applied to the typical section when the
depth check criteria is met. The Slope Type drop list is a filter for all of the slopes you have
created and the Slope Name drop list contains the names of the slope within the type
specified. The Apply Slope at PT code indicates where you want the slope to be applied.
The choice of “Outermost Point” allows you to specify the last breakpoint on the typical
section as the slope attachment point without having to place a PT code there.

Condition Settings
ROADCALC PROCESS MANAGE CONDITION TABLES SETTINGS
The Condition Settings dialog box allows you to set certain parameters for the current sub-
project that get used during the processing of the Run Design command. The General tab
(Figure 6-36 on page 251) is where you enter the default slopes that appear when a new
condition table is added. The No Grade tab (Figure 6-37 on page 253) allows you to
change the parameters for RoadCalc to not perform any grading when typical section
slopes intercept original ground. The Slope Seeding tab (Figure 6-39 on page 254) is
where you specify the seeding thickness that is applied to the catchslopes for the purpose
of getting seeding quantities. The Slope Rounding tab (Figure 6-40 on page 255) is where
you can specify for RoadCalc to perform slope rounding at the cut catchpoint.
For more information refer to: Condition Settings – General Tab, below; Condition Settings
– No Grade Tab on page 252; Condition Settings – Slope Seeding Tab on page 254 and
Condition Settings – Slope Rounding Tab on page 255.
Condition Settings – General Tab

ROADCALC PROCESS MANAGE CONDITION TABLES SETTINGS GENERAL TAB
The General tab on the Condition Settings dialog box (Figure 6-36 on page 251) allows
you to change the default cut and fill slopes that get added when a new condition table is
created. These settings are carried in the Sub-project prototype so changing the default
slopes here and then creating a sub-project prototype of the current sub-project allows
you to set the defaults for any new sub-projects.
250 RoadCalc
For more information, see Sub-project Prototype Settings on page 379.
Chapter 6: Process
Figure 6-36 Condition Settings Dialog Box – General Tab
Condition Settings Dialog Box – General Tab Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Cut Default This option filters the list of Slope Names depending on the type of slope defined. The five
Slope Type different types include Single, R.O.W. Correction, Benching, Width and Clear Zone.
For more information refer to Slopes Library on page 237.
Cut Default This is the name of the slope you want to use in the default condition for the Cut material
Slope Name in a new Condition Table.
Fill Default This option filters the list of Slope Names depending on the type of slope defined. The five
Slope Type different types include Single, R.O.W. Correction, Benching, Width and Clear Zone.
For more information refer to Slopes Library on page 237.
Fill Default This is the name of the slope you want to use in the default condition for the Fill material in
Slope Name a new Condition Table.

Condition Settings Dialog Box – General Tab Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Use Extend If this option is toggled on, RoadCalc will extend subsurfaces to the catchslope line after
Subsurfaces superelevation is calculated. Only the subsurfaces that have a breakpoint directly under
the point at which the slopes are attached will be extended. RoadCalc will determine how
to use this toggle in light of your conditions and how they are set up. You can have the
Extend Subsurfaces apply to just fill or cut and fill. In a fill situation you must draw the
typical section for the fill with subsurface lines ending at a vertical line at the point you
want your fill slope to start. In a cut and fill situation, you must draw both typical section
with the subsurfaces extending to a vertical line at the point at which you want to apply the
slopes (see the figure below). Cut benches must be used to vary the slope in cut
situations. The first segment of the bench will be the piece extending from the edge of the
typical section down to the bottom of the ditch. The Repeat Pattern should not be
checked. For more information about creating benching, refer to Slopes Library on page
237.
Condition Settings – No Grade Tab

ROADCALC PROCESS MANAGE CONDITION TABLES SETTINGS NO GRADE TAB
The No Grade settings allow you to specify a portion of a typical section where no
earthwork is disturbed. If the typical section, as placed on the cross-section, extends into
the top original surface or out of the top original surface, you can specify that no earthwork
is done in this area.
This is typically used in a divided highway where no new earthwork is required in the
median.
252 RoadCalc
For more information, refer to No Grade on page 226.
Chapter 6: Process
Figure 6-37 Condition Settings Dialog Box – No Grade Tab
Condition Settings Dialog Box – No Grade Tab Definitions

Option Function
Use No Grade If this option is toggled on, no grading will be performed between the PT codes that are
specified.
From PT Code This is the point that the no grade option will start checking to see if the lowest design
surface extends into or exits out of the top original surface.
To PT Code This is the point that the no grade option is checked to see if the lowest design surface
exits from or extends back into the top original surface.
New No Grade This option allows you to enter an area in which no grading is required by specifying a PT
Range code that exists on your typical section.
For more information, see New No Grade Range, below.
Modify No Grade This allows you to change the information for the highlighted no grade range.
Range This is similar to New No Grade Range. For more information, see New No Grade Range,
below.
Delete No Grade This allows you to remove the highlighted no grade range from the list. This prevents the
Range range from being used.
New No Grade Range

ROADCALC PROCESS MANAGE CONDITION TABLES SETTINGS NO GRADE TAB
NEW NO GRADE RANGE
The No Grade Range command allows you to create an area of your typical section in
which no grading of earthwork will be performed. You specify the location to start and stop
the no grade check.

See No Grade on page 226 for more information.
Figure 6-38 New No Grade Dialog Box
New No grade Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
From PT Code This is the point that the no grade option will start checking to see if the lowest design
surface extends into or exits out of the top original surface. All of the PT codes are
available to choose from.
To PT Code This is the point that the no grade option is checked to see if the lowest design surface
exits or extends back into the top original surface. All of the PT codes are available to
choose from, including the Catchline option in the To PT Code drop list.
Condition Settings – Slope Seeding Tab

ROADCALC PROCESS MANAGE CONDITION TABLES SETTINGS SLOPE SEEDING TAB
The Slope Seeding option allows you to obtain seeding quantities. You need to specify a
location to start the seeding from. The seeding is placed from the location specified until it
reaches the catchpoint.
See Slope Seeding on page 227 for more information.
Figure 6-39 Condition Settings Dialog Box – Slope Seeding Tab
254 RoadCalc
Condition Settings Dialog Box – Slope Seeding Tab Definitions
Chapter 6: Process
Option Function
Use Outside If this toggle is on, seeding quantities will be calculated from the PT code specified to the
Slope Seeding catchpoint at the depth specified.
PT Code This is the location that the seeding materials start to be placed at.
Depth This is how much material is placed on top of the design surface to determine the quantity
of seeding material. The depth is measured vertical to the surface it is applied on.
Condition Settings – Slope Rounding Tab

ROADCALC PROCESS MANAGE CONDITION TABLES SETTINGS SLOPE ROUNDING TAB
The Slope Rounding settings allow you to round the catchslope. A user-defined number of
segments will be added to the catchslope to approximate a circular curve. Different
lengths of rounding can be specified based on the slope of the original ground from the
catchpoint away from the centerline.
See Slope Rounding on page 228 for more information.
Slope Rounding is only used on the outside catchslopes. If there are catchslopes that are
inside, they will not be rounded.
Slope Rounding is only used in a cut condition.
Figure 6-40 Condition Settings Dialog Box – Slope Rounding Tab
Condition Settings Dialog Box – Slope Rounding Tab Definitions

Option Function
Use Slope If this option is toggled on, slope rounding will be performed on the outside catchslopes.
Rounding

Condition Settings Dialog Box – Slope Rounding Tab Definitions
Option Function
Flat or This slope is used to customize what you consider the minimum slope of the original
Descending ground when there is no change in grade or if the change in grade is negative. The slope
Minimum Cut of original ground is measured from the catchpoint out.
Slope
Flat or This is the type of slope that is displayed in the Flat or Descending Minimum Cut Slope
Descending edit field. The available options are % Slope, H/V (horizontal divided by vertical), V/H
Minimum Cut (vertical divided by horizontal) and Unit/Unit.
Slope Type
Flat or This is the horizontal length of the catchslope that gets rounded if the original ground cut
Descending slope is greater that the minimum value specified for flat or descending original ground.
Total Rounding
Length
Ascending This slope is used to customize what you consider the minimum slope of the original
Minimum Cut ground slope when the change in grade is positive. The slope of original ground is
Slope measured from the catchpoint out.
Ascending This is the type of slope that is displayed in the Ascending Minimum Cut Slope edit field.
Minimum Cut The available options are % Slope, H/V (horizontal divided by vertical), V/H (vertical
Slope Type divided by horizontal) and Unit/Unit.
Ascending Total This is the horizontal length of the catchslope that gets rounded if the original ground cut
Rounding slope is greater that the minimum value specified for ascending original ground.
Length
Cut Slope Less This is the horizontal length of the catchslope that gets rounded if the original ground cut
than Minimum slope is less that the minimum value specified for either flat or descending original ground
Total Rounding or ascending original ground.
Length
Number of This is the number of additional segments that are added to the catchslope to
Added approximate a circular curve for the rounding of the catchslope.
Segments
Edit Design Locations

ROADCALC PROCESS EDIT DESIGN LOCATIONS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcproloc

The Edit Design Locations dialog box (Figure 6-41 on page 257) is used to specify where
typical sections are to be used along the project and what slopes are applied to the typical
section.
The top half of the dialog box is where you specify the stations where you want RoadCalc
to process certain typical sections. At least one typical section location is required in order
for RoadCalc to process the design during the Run Design command. Use the New
256 RoadCalc
Typical Section Location button to add a station at which to apply a specified typical
section. The transition type specifies how RoadCalc will apply typical sections between
Chapter 6: Process
consecutive locations.
For more information refer to Typical Section Locations on page 230.
The lower half of the dialog box is where you specify what condition tables RoadCalc
should use when processing the design. Use the New Condition Table Location button to
enter the station and what condition table should be used for applying slopes to the left
and right sides of the typical section.
For more information refer to Condition Table Locations on page 231.
Projects from previous versions of RoadCalc store the slope treatments within the typical
section. When an old project is converted, the slopes are still saved within the typical
section. If you wish to use the slopes that were previously defined with the typical section
do not add condition table locations and RoadCalc will process the slopes from the old
typical sections. If any typical sections are added or redefined within this version of
RoadCalc you must define condition tables and specify condition table locations. Any new
sub-projects started within this version of RoadCalc must have condition tables and
condition table locations defined.
Figure 6-41 Edit Design Locations Dialog Box
Edit Design Locations Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Typical Section This lists the location along the Centerline alignment that the typical section is placed at.
Station
Typical Section This lists the typical section that gets placed at the station value specified.

Edit Design Locations Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Transition The transition type specifies how RoadCalc will transition typical sections between
consecutive locations. The types are specified as No, Yes and Single. “No” means that
RoadCalc will not transition the typical section to the next station location. “Yes” means
that RoadCalc will transition between this typical section and the following typical section
(excluding typical section locations with single occurrence transition specified). “Single”
means that the specified typical section will only get applied to the specified station.
New Typical Clicking on this icon allows you to add a new station location and a typical section to place
Section at that location.
Location
For more information, refer to New Typical Section Location on page 259.
Modify Typical Clicking on this icon allows you to change the station location, typical section or transition
Section type of the highlighted item.
Location
This is nearly identical to New Typical Section Location. For more information, see New
Typical Section Location on page 259.
Delete Typical Clicking on this icon allows you to remove the highlighted station location from the list.
Section
Location
Print Typical This option allows you to print all of the station locations and typical sections that are listed
Section according to the options in the Print Setup command.
Location
Condition Table This lists the location along the centerline alignment that the condition tables are used at
Station during processing.
Left Condition This is the condition table that RoadCalc uses to determine the slope treatment that gets
Table applied to the left side of the typical section.
Right Condition This is the condition table that RoadCalc uses to determine the slope treatment that gets
table applied to the right side of the typical section.
New Condition Allows you to enter a station and what condition tables should be used at that location
Table Location during processing.
For more information, refer to New Condition Table Location on page 260.
Modify Allows you to change the station, left condition table or right condition table of the location
Condition Table highlighted.
Location
For more information, refer to New Condition Table Location on page 260.
Delete Condition Allows you to remove the highlighted condition table location from the listing.
Table Location
Print Condition Allows you to print all of the station and condition tables that are listed according to the
Table Locations options in the Print Setup command.
258 RoadCalc
New Typical Section Location
Chapter 6: Process
ROADCALC PROCESS EDIT DESIGN LOCATIONS NEW TYPICAL SECTION LOCATION
The New Typical Section Location command allows you to enter a station value at which a
certain typical section should be used during the Run Design command. Use the reported
station data to help determine typical section station locations.
You also must specify what type of transitioning RoadCalc will perform between
consecutive typical section locations.
Refer to Typical Section Locations on page 230 for more information.

You must enter at least one typical section location for RoadCalc to be able to process the
design.
Figure 6-42 New Typical Section Location Dialog Box
New Typical Section Location Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Alignment This displays the starting station of the Centerline alignment.
Beginning
Station
Alignment This displays the ending station of the Centerline alignment.
Ending Station
Profile This displays the starting station of the Centerline profile.
Beginning
Station
Profile Ending This displays the ending station of the Centerline profile.
Station
Cross-Sections This displays the starting station of the cross-sections.
Beginning
Station

New Typical Section Location Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Cross-Sections This displays the ending station of the cross-sections.
Ending Station
Station Enter in the station value that you want a typical section to be placed at.
Typical Section Select the typical section from the drop list that you want placed at the station value
entered.
Transition Type Specify the transition type that RoadCalc should use during the processing of the Run
Design command. Choose from Do not transition to next station, Transition to next station
or Single Station Occurrence. For more information on transition types refer to Typical
Section Locations on page 230.
New Condition Table Location

ROADCALC PROCESS EDIT DESIGN LOCATIONS NEW CONDITION TABLE LOCATION
The New Condition Table Location command allows you to specify which condition tables
should be used by RoadCalc to determine what slope treatments get applied during
processing. Enter what table is evaluated on the left side and what table is evaluated on
the right side of the typical section at the given station. Use the reported station data to
determine the station for the condition tables.
For more information, refer to Condition Table Locations on page 231.
Figure 6-43 New Condition Table Location Dialog Box
New Condition Table Location Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Beginning
Station
260 RoadCalc
New Condition Table Location Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 6: Process
Option Function
Ending Station
Beginning
Station
Station
Beginning
Station
Ending Station
Station Enter the station value that you want RoadCalc to use the specified condition tables.
Left Condition This is the condition table that RoadCalc uses to determine the slope treatment that gets
Table applied to the left side of the typical section.
Right Condition This is the condition table that RoadCalc uses to determine the slope treatment that gets
Table applied to the right side of the typical section.
Run Design
ROADCALC PROCESS RUN DESIGN
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcprorun
ICON:
The Run Design command is used to “pull” the individual design elements together to
produce design cross-sections. When the command is executed the Run Design dialog
box (Figure 6-44 on page 262) displays. You may enter the station range over which you
want to process the design and whether you want to use the Design Locations (as entered
in the Edit Design Locations command) or to use your previous design modifications that
were made using the tools in the Step Through Cross-Sections editor. If you choose to use
your previous modifications, RoadCalc will use the typical sections and slopes at the
stations you modified when using the Step Trough Cross-Sections dialog box. Otherwise,
any typical section or slope changes you made will be overwritten when the Use Design
Locations option is toggled on. These toggles only affect the stations that are currently
being processed in the station range. Stations that have been locked (either in the Step
Through Cross-Sections dialog box or in the Edit Cross-Section Data dialog box) do not
get re-processed with new design elements.

You may choose to have RoadCalc automatically process all stations in the process
range and then view the designed cross-sections in the Edit Cross-Sections Data dialog
box. Or you may choose to “step through” all of the processed cross-sections one at a
time, or to “step through” the cross-sections that produce warning messages during
processing. Either “step through” method will display the cross-sections in a window for
quick viewing and editing.
See Run Design Process on page 232, Run Design – Automatic Method on page 263 and
Step Through Cross-Sections on page 263 for more information.
Figure 6-44 Run Design Dialog Box
Run Design Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Beginning
Station
Ending Station
Beginning
Station
Station
Beginning
Station
Ending Station
Starting Station This is the starting station that RoadCalc uses for processing.
Ending Station This is the ending station that RoadCalc uses for processing.
262 RoadCalc
Run Design Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 6: Process
Option Function
Use Design Toggling this option on will make RoadCalc use the typical sections and condition tables
Locations defined in the Edit Design Locations dialog box during processing. Only the stations in the
processing range will get re-processed with the information from the design locations.
Stations outside the range do not get re-processed.
Use Step Toggling this option on will make RoadCalc use the typical sections and slopes on the
Through stations that previously had been modified using the step through tools. Stations in the
Modifications process range that had no previous modifications made to them use the typical sections
and condition tables from the Edit Design Locations dialog box (Figure 6-41 on page 257).
Method This drop list contains the type of processing that can be performed. The available options
are Automatic, Step Through Warnings and Step Through All.
Run Design – Automatic Method

ROADCALC PROCESS RUN DESIGN AUTOMATIC METHOD
The Automatic option of processing is used when you want RoadCalc to process all of the
information without stopping at any typical section for input. If there are any errors that
occur during the processing, they will be reported at the end.
For more information, see Processing Warnings on page 267.
Step Through Cross-Sections

ROADCALC PROCESS RUN DESIGN STEP THROUGH ALL
or
ROADCALC PROCESS RUN DESIGN STEP THROUGH WARNINGS
The Step Through Cross-Sections command allows you to view your processed cross-
sections individually, making design decisions as to what typical sections and slopes get
applied at the viewed cross-section. There are two types of viewing options. The Step
Through All option allows you to view every cross-section in your sub-project to see what
decisions RoadCalc made during the Run Design process. The Step Through Warnings
option allows you to make design changes while only viewing the cross-sections that
produced warning messages during the Run Design process.
Based on the side of the Centerline, you can change what typical section gets processed,
whether you want the cut or fill detail of that typical section and how the typical section ties

into your original surfaces. If you want to prevent any further processing to occur at a
particular cross-section use the Lock Station toggle.
Using the Next and Previous Shot buttons, you can obtain offsets, elevations, slopes and
PT codes for the breakpoints along any of the surfaces. The arrow indicates which shot
you are displaying information for. The slope is calculated between the current shot and
the shot located to the left of it.
The cross-section graphic may be panned to the left, right, up or down using the scroll
bars. The Scale View button controls the “zoom” factor to display more or less of the
cross-section graphic in the display window. Any cross-section may be viewed using the
Goto Station command or by using the Previous and Next Cross-Section buttons.
Figure 6-45 Step Through Cross-Sections Dialog Box
Step Through Cross-Sections Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Surface Select the current surface to query using the Surface drop list.
Shot shot information. This will display the offset, elevation, slope and PT code for the shot.
Horizontal and These allow you to pan the cross-section to the left, right, up and down.
Vertical Scroll
Bars
Previous Cross- Use this option to display the cross-section that occurs before the current cross-section.
Section This will be disabled if you are viewing the first cross-section.
264 RoadCalc
Chapter 6: Process
Option Function
Next Cross- Use this option to display the cross-section that occurs after the current cross-section.
section This will be disabled if you are viewing the last cross-section.
Goto Station Click on this to display the Goto Station dialog box. Highlight the station to view. The
display window now shows that cross-section information. This dialog box can remain
open to allow you to scroll through all cross-sections.
Scale View This provides access to the Scale View command to set the horizontal and vertical scales
at which to display the cross-section graphic. Use this command to set the “zoom” factor
for the display.
Cut/Fill Detail These radio buttons display what detail of the typical section got applied during
processing. Changing the toggle between Cut to Fill will make RoadCalc process the
appropriate Detail of the typical section listed below it. There is a set of radio buttons for
the left side and a set for the right side.
Typical This drop list displays the typical section that got applied during the processing of the Run
Design command. If you change the typical section name, RoadCalc will immediately
reprocess the station with the specified typical and Tie Using option. If you are viewing a
cross-section that does not contain processed typical sections, the drop list will read
<None>. If you are viewing a cross-section that had a transitioned typical section applied
the drop list will read <Transition 3-4> indicating that the typical section is the transitioned
typical section between numbers 3 and 4. Each side of the typical section has the option
of using a different typical section than the one specified in the Edit Design Locations
dialog box.

Option Function
Tie Using The options in this drop list are used by RoadCalc to determine how the typical section
will tie into original ground. The choices include:
Condition Only: This option uses just the conditions from the condition table at
this location.
Condition and Slope: This option uses the conditions from the condition table at
this location plus allows the final slope to be entered below. This is the slope
that ties into the topmost original ground surface.
Slope Only: By setting this option, the condition tables for this location are
ignored and only the slope value entered is used to tie the typical section into
the topmost original surface.
Condition and Offset: This option uses the conditions from the condition table at
this location plus allows the final slope to be placed by knowing the offset at
which you want to tie into the topmost original surface. The offset value is the
absolute offset entered as a negative amount for left of centerline and a positive
amount for right of centerline.
Offset Only: By setting this option, the condition tables for this location are
ignored and the final slope is placed by knowing the offset at which you want to
tie into the topmost original surface. The offset value is the absolute offset
entered as a negative amount for left of centerline and a positive amount for
right of centerline.
Condition and R.O.W.: This option uses the conditions from the condition table
at this location plus ties the final slope into the R.O.W. alignment.
Tie to R.O.W.: By setting this option, the condition tables for this location are
ignored and the final slope is tied directly into the R.O.W. alignment from the
typical section.
Slope Option This field is enabled when you set the Tie Using option to Condition and Slope or Slope
Only. Enter a positive value to indicate a slope that is placed upwards from the typical
section (usually cut). Enter a negative value to indicate a slope that projects downward
from the typical section (usually fill).
Offset Option This field is enabled when you set the Tie Using option to Condition and Offset or Offset
Only. Enter a positive value to indicate the absolute offset to the right of the centerline that
you want the final slope to tie to. Enter a negative value to indicate the final slope offset to
the left of the centerline.
Offset This displays the offset value of the shot that the query arrow is on.
Elevation This displays the elevation value of the shot that the query arrow is on.
PT Code This displays the PT code of the shot that the query arrow is on.
Slope This displays the slope of the line between the current shot and previous shot.
Slope Type This allows you to change the slope display between % Slope, H/V, V/H or Unit/Unit.
Lock Station Toggle this option on to prevent RoadCalc from processing any typical sections,
conditions or slopes at the specified station. Use this option once you are satisfied with
the final design cross-section at a particular station. The Modify Station command on the
Edit Cross-Section Data dialog box also allows you to lock (or unlock) a station from being
processed over.
266 RoadCalc
Chapter 6: Process
Option Function
No Catch Slope Toggle this option on to have RoadCalc remove the catch slopes from the edge of the
typical section. When on, RoadCalc will not process the catch slope and you may not
modify the Tie Using option or the Slope/Offset values. Toggling the option off will make
RoadCalc reprocess the section using a 0.1 H/V catch slope and allow you to reset the
Tie Using option and the Slope/Offset values.
Processing Warnings
The Process Warnings command displays any warnings that have occurred after the Run
Design command was executed. It displays which station has the processing warning,
which side it occurred on and what the warning is based on. If this dialog box is open
when you are using the Step Through Cross-Section dialog box (Figure 6-45 on page 264)
and you correct a station at which a warning occurred, the list updates the status on that
station.
Figure 6-46 Processing Warnings Dialog Box
Processing Warnings Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Stations This is the list of all of the stations at which a processing warning occurred.
Left Side This indicates that the processing warning for the station listed occurred at the left side of
the centerline.
Right Side This indicates that the processing warning for the station listed occurred at the right side
of the centerline.
Describe This allows you to view a detailed description of the processing warnings that have
occurred on the project.
Print This allows you to print all of the processing warnings for the stations.

Describe Processing Warnings
This is a detailed description of what the processing warning means. This allows you to fix
any problems with your design cross-sections from these warnings.
To fix any of these problems, either modify the appropriate design elements and run
design again, use the Step Through Cross-Sections command to re-place typical sections
and conditions or go to Edit Cross-Section Data on the Cross-Section pull-down menu and
modify the design surfaces directly.
Possible Errors
1. No Catch Point Found. The original ground surface does not extend out far
enough, the design elements need modification. The end areas for this station
will be unreliable until the error is corrected.
2. Invalid Profile Elevation. A design profile using slope control has an
unattainable elevation.
3. Invalid Alignment Offset. An alignment using slope control has an unattainable
offset.
4. PT Code Impossible. There is no PT code on the typical section corresponding
to an associated PT code.
5. Right-Of-Way Exceeded. The catchpoint falls outside the R.O.W. line.
6. Superelevation Impossible. The superelevation limit on the typical section does
not have a superelevation limit PT code.
7. Invalid Control Type. An alignment and a profile control have the same PT code
but do not have the User-defined control type set.
8. Maximum Roll-Over Exceeded. A special profile or alignment has caused the
maximum roll-over to be exceeded.
9. Slope rounding was not possible. The tangent length specified may be greater
than the slope line length.
10. The left and right typical section details do not have matching elevations at the
centerline.
11. Rollover PT code not found on the typical section.
268 RoadCalc
OUTPUT
In this chapter:
CHAPTER
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Cross-Section Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Plan and Profile Sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Mass Diagram Sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Breaklines from PT Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
7
Profiles from PT Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Catchlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
3-D Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Inherit Elevation From Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Volume Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Volume Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Station and Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Catchpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Elevation/Depth at Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Cross-Section Staking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Sub-project Prototype Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Chapter 7: Output 269

Concepts
The Output menu provides access to various commands to produce plots and printouts of
RoadCalc data. Cross-Section Sheets, Plan and Profile Sheets and Mass Diagrams can
be created automatically by RoadCalc using commands found in the Output menu. For
each type of sheet created, numerous parameters controlling sizes, CAD settings and
other text annotation may be set and saved to prototypes that can be used in other
RoadCalc sub-projects.
Other graphic commands in the Output menu draw information into the plan CAD graphic
and profile CAD graphic.
Printouts of information that has been input and calculated is also available in the Output
menu. Volume reports, as well as station-offset and coordinate information may be printed
to your Windows printing device.
Cross-Section Sheets
ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcxssheet
ICON:
The Cross-Section Sheets command allows you to create cross-section sheets based on
predefined settings and places the sheets in the CAD graphic window so that they can be
further edited if needed. There are several options when formatting cross-section sheets.
Specify the sheet size and orientation of the plot.
Specify the CAD parameters for each element of the plot including borders, grid lines,
text and line work for the cross-section.
Have any number of columns of cross-sections.
Reduce or enlarge the entire plot.
Save the format settings to a central library to be used by any RoadCalc sub-project.
Specify which surfaces to display in the cross-section sheet.
When you create the sheets, you can create them using Imperial or metric units. There are
reasonable defaults for each unit.
270 RoadCalc
RoadCalc does not transfer data from plot sheets back to the RoadCalc database. Thus,
if part of a cross-section on a cross-section plot is edited, the cross-section database will
not be affected. To edit cross-sections, use the Edit Cross-Section command. Use
commands in the Alignments menu to edit the plan drawing, commands in the Profiles
menu to edit the profile drawing and the Volumes command to adjust the mass diagram.
To plot a sheet, make sure the current sheet is the one to be plotted, then use the CAD
program’s plotting routine to create a plot file (see your CAD engine’s manual for details).
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-1 Cross-Section Sheets Dialog Box
Cross-Section Sheets Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Number This is a numerical value assigned by RoadCalc to keep track of the currently defined
cross-section sheets.
Description This is the starting station value of each cross-section sheet.
New Cross- This allows one or multiple sheets to be created. The cross-section sheet settings and the
Section Sheet starting and ending stations will determine how many sheets will be created. The new
sheet(s) is placed at the end of the currently defined cross-section sheet listing.
For more information, see New Cross-Section Sheets on page 273.
Delete Cross- This allows the currently highlighted sheet to be deleted. More than one sheet may be
Section Sheet highlighted by pressing the Shift or Ctrl keys while selecting the sheets. The drawing file is
deleted as well when this option is selected.
View Cross- This generates the actual CAD drawing and loads the drawing for viewing. Only one
Section Sheet drawing can be loaded at one time for viewing.

Cross-Section Sheets Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Edit This allows you to adjust any of the settings for the cross-section sheets. You can adjust
the following items by selecting the item from the drop list and clicking on the Edit button:
Sheet Settings: This allows you to specify the parameters for the scale, grid
lines, height, length and orientation for the cross-section plot.
For more information, see Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings on page 274.
CAD settings: This allows you to specify what layer/level, linetype/linestyle,
color and text style to use for the various pieces of annotation.
For more information, see Edit Cross-Section CAD Settings on page 277.
Precision: This allows you to select the precision for the various annotated
values to be placed on the cross-section sheet.
For more information, see Edit Cross-Section Precision on page 278.

Offsets and Elevations: This allows you to annotate selected offsets and
elevations on the cross-section sheet.
See Edit Cross-Section Offsets and Elevations on page 279 for more
information.
Slope Annotation: This allows you to select the slopes to be annotated on the
cross-section sheet.
For more information, see Edit Cross-Section Slope Annotation on page 282.
Reference Lines: This allows you to place and label reference lines on the
cross-section sheet.
For more information, Edit Cross-Section Reference Lines on page 285.

Text Setting: This allows you to modify the placement and visibility of different
text annotations placed on the cross-section sheet.
See Edit Cross-Section Text Settings on page 287.

Format Library When creating cross-section sheets, use this option to define and set custom formats for
system-wide use.
For more information, Format Library on page 289.
Stations to Plot This displays a list of all the currently defined cross-sections. Choose the specific cross-
sections to display on the cross-section sheets.
For more information, see Stations to Plot on page 291.
272 RoadCalc
Example
The figure below is an example of a cross-section sheet.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-2 Cross-Section Sheet
New Cross-Section Sheets

ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS NEW CROSS-SECTION SHEETS
Cross-section sheets can be added to the RoadCalc sub-project by clicking on the New
button on the Cross-Section Sheets dialog box (Figure 7-1 on page 271). The New option
displays the New Cross-Section Sheets dialog box, which prompts for a starting and
ending station (see Figure 7-3 on page 274). RoadCalc adds sheets based on the starting
and ending stations and the sheet settings.

If a drawing/design file that is not a cross-section sheet is loaded, click on the View button
in the Cross-Sections Sheets dialog box to view the highlighted cross-section sheet.
Figure 7-3 New Cross-Section Sheets Dialog Box
New Cross-Section Sheets Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Alignment This lists the beginning and ending stations of the alignment for information purposes.
Profile This lists the beginning and ending design centerline profile stations for informational
purposes.
Cross-Section This lists the beginning and ending cross-section stations for informational purposes.
Starting Station The starting station value defines where the cross-section sheet will start.
Ending Station The ending station value defines where the cross-section sheet will end. Multiple sheets
could be created if the ending station is sufficiently greater than the beginning station.
Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings

ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS SHEET SETTINGS OPTION EDIT SHEET
DIMENSIONS TAB
To edit the cross-section sheet settings, select Sheet Settings from the Format drop list on
the Cross-Section Sheets dialog box (Figure 7-1 on page 271) and click on the Edit
button. This allows you to specify the sheet size and orientation of the sheet, specify the
274 RoadCalc
grid spacing, specify the prototype drawing/design file to be used for the sheets, have any
number of columns of cross-sections and reduce or enlarge the entire plot
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-4 Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Sheet Dimensions Tab
Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Sheet Dimensions Tab Definitions
Option Function
Orientation This allows you to specify how you want your cross-section plots orientated. You can
choose between landscape and portrait.
Length This allows you to specify the plotted limits of the cross-section sheet length (not the
overall paper length). The value should reflect the plotter’s “dead zone” where no
information is plotted. A typical dead zone length is 1/2 inch per side.
Height This allows you to specify the plotted limits of the cross-section sheet height (not the
overall paper height).
Lower Left X This allows you to specify the lower left X coordinate of the sheet. The sheet length value
Coord will update based on the value entered.
Lower Left Y This allows you to specify the lower left Y coordinate of the sheet. The sheet height value
Coord will update based on the value entered.
Upper Right X This allows you to specify the upper right X coordinate of the sheet. The sheet length
Coord value will update based on the value entered.
Upper Right Y This allows you to specify the upper right Y coordinate of the sheet. The sheet height
Coord value will update based on the value entered.
Top Margin This allows you to specify the vertical distance from the top horizontal grid line and the top
of the topmost cross-sections.
Offset Interval Enter the interval value for the offset annotation shown at the top and bottom of the cross-
section sheet.
Offset Area Enter the height of area where the offset distances are displayed along the top and bottom
Height of the cross-section sheet.
Datum Elevation Enter the interval value for the datum elevation annotation shown along the sides of each
Interval cross-section on the cross-section sheet.
Number of Enter the number of columns of cross-sections RoadCalc is to put on a cross-section
Columns sheet. The number of columns will depend on the sheet length and horizontal scale.

Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Sheet Dimensions Tab Definitions
Option Function
Column Spacing This allows you to specify the distance between the columns of cross-sections when
plotting more than one column on a sheet.
Minimum X-Sec This allows you to specify the distance between two sequential cross-sections. This value
Spacing is from highest point on the previous cross-section and the lowest point on the current
cross-section. Text annotation and utilities are taken into account when determining
highest and lowest points on cross-sections.
Centerline Shift Use this option to show one side of a cross-section more prominently than another. For
example, show the new cross-section of a two-lane to four-lane widening.
Sheet Prototype This allows you to select the prototype drawing or design file that will be used when
creating the cross-section sheets. If you wish to create prototype drawings/design files,
start by making a copy of the RoadCalc default prototypes. Then make additions to the
copies to ensure that linetypes and textstyles that are necessary are included.
ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS SHEET SETTINGS OPTION EDIT GRID SPACING
TAB
Figure 7-5 Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Grid Spacing Tab
Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Grid Spacing Tab Definitions
Option Function
Horizontal Scale This allows you to specify the horizontal scale with which the cross-sections are created.
Vertical Scale This allows you to specify the vertical scale with which the cross-sections are created.
Grid Units This toggle will specify that the grid spacing is being entered in terms of drawing units or
paper units. If drawing units is toggled on, then enter the grid spacing in terms distances
based on the horizontal and vertical plot scale. If paper units is toggled on, then enter in
the grid spacing in terms of inches/millimeters on paper.
276 RoadCalc
Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Grid Spacing Tab Definitions
Option Function
Heavy This allows you to specify the vertical distance between the heavy horizontal grid lines per
Horizontal Grid foot/meter or per inch/millimeter for the cross-section sheet.
Line Spacing
Heavy Vertical This allows you to specify the horizontal distance between the heavy vertical grid lines per
Grid Line foot/meter or per inch/millimeter for the cross-section sheet.
Spacing
Fine Horizontal This allows you to specify the vertical distance between the fine or intermediate horizontal
Grid Line grid lines per foot/meter or per inch/millimeter for the cross-section sheet.
Spacing
Chapter 7: Output
Fine Vertical This allows you to specify the horizontal distance between the fine or intermediate vertical
Grid Line grid lines per foot/meter or per inch/millimeter for the cross-section sheet.
Spacing
Edit Cross-Section CAD Settings

ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS CAD SETTINGS OPTION EDIT
The Edit Cross-Section CAD Settings command allows you to specify whether an element
of the cross-section is plotted, as well as what layer/level, color, linetype/linestyle, text size
and text rotation is used. Select CAD Settings from the Format drop list on the Cross-
Section Sheets dialog box (Figure 7-1 on page 271) and click on the Edit button. This
displays the Edit Cross-Section CAD Settings dialog box (below). When you highlight an
object to edit, the parameters that can be modified are displayed below the listing. Make
any desired changes and click on the Apply button to accept the modifications.
Figure 7-6 Edit Cross-Section CAD Settings Dialog Box

Edit Cross-Section CAD Settings Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Item This displays all of the items that can be annotated on a cross-section sheet. The
available options for which you can control the CAD settings are Surfaces (original, design
and actual), Heavy Grid Lines, Fine Grid Lines, Centerline, Circles, Circle Stations,
Elevations, Offsets, Centerline Station, Centerline Design Elevation, Centerline Original
Elevation, Design Earthwork, Actual Earthwork, R.O.W., R.O.W. Dimensions, Slope
Annotation, Offsets And Elevations, Reference Lines and Surface Labels.
Plot If you have this toggle on, the item will be plotted on the cross-section sheet. If the toggle
is off, the item is not plotted.
Layer/Level This is the layer/level the object is placed on.
Color This is the color of the item placed on the cross-section sheet. If the CAD system used is
AutoCAD or BricsCad, you can have this set to BYLAYER to use the layer’s color.
Linetype/ If the item is a line, you can specify the linetype/linestyle. If the CAD system used is
Linestyle AutoCAD or BricsCad, you need to have the linetype defined in the prototype drawing
used.
Line Width/ This is the width/weight that is used for lines or text.
Weight
Text Style/Font If the item is text, you can specify the text style/font. If the CAD system is AutoCAD or
BricsCad, you need to have the text style defined in the prototype drawing used.
Text Size If the item is text, you can specify the text size for the text. The text size is in inches or
millimeters.
Text Rotation If the item is text, you can specify the text rotation for the text. The rotation angle is in
degrees with a positive value measured in a counterclockwise direction from the east
(right).
Edit Cross-Section Precision

ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS PRECISION OPTION EDIT
This allows you to specify the different degrees of precision to be used by the various
annotation routines on the cross-section sheet. The range of precision is from no decimal
place to as many as eight places past the decimal point. Select the Precision option from
278 RoadCalc
the Format drop list on the Cross-Section Sheets dialog box Figure 7-1 on page 271 and
click on the Edit button to display the Edit Cross-Section Precision dialog box (below).
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-7 Edit Cross-Section Precision Dialog Box
Edit Cross-Section Precision Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Datum Elevation This is the display precision used for the datum elevation located on both sides of the
cross-section denoting elevation values for the grid lines.
Volumes This is the precision for the average end area volume computed for each cross-section.
Areas This is the display precision for the end area of each cross-section.
Original This is the display precision used for the elevation labeled on the original surfaces of the
Elevations cross-section.
Design This is the precision used for the elevation labeled on the design surfaces of the cross-
Elevations section.
Actual This is the precision used for the elevation labeled on the actual surfaces of the cross-
Elevations section.
Offset Distances This is the precision used for all the offset annotation along the bottom and top of the
cross-section plot.
Offset and This is the display precision used for the offset/elevation annotation.
Elevation
For more information about offsets and elevations, see Edit Cross-Section Offsets and
Elevations, below.
Slope This is the precision used for the slope Annotations that have been defined.
Annotation
For more information, see Edit Cross-Section Slope Annotation on page 282.
Edit Cross-Section Offsets and Elevations

ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS OFFSETS AND ELEVATIONS OPTION EDIT
This allows you to specify offsets for the cross-section plot routine to annotate elevations
and labels. Select Offsets and Elevations from the Format drop list on the Cross Section

Sheets dialog box and click on the Edit button to display the Edit Cross-Section Offsets
and Elevations dialog box (below).
By default, RoadCalc places 1000 and 1001 PT codes as points that should have their
offsets and elevations annotated.
Figure 7-8 Edit Cross-Section Offsets and Elevations Dialog Box
Edit Cross-Section Offsets and Elevations Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Label This displays the text that describes the specific offset and elevation.
PT Code This displays the PT Code designated as the offset location for the elevation annotation to
be placed.
Side This displays the location that the elevation at an offset will be placed at in relation to the
centerline. The available sides are left, right and both.
Placement This displays the placement of the annotation relative to the location of the PT code. The
available options are above, middle and below.
Rotation This displays the rotation of the text as placed in relation to the PT code point.
Offset Distance This is the distance the offset and elevation are placed away from the PT code in the
placement direction.
New Offset/ This allows you to enter locations at which offsets/elevations will be placed.
Elevation For more information, see New Offset/Elevation on page 281.
Modify Offset/ This option modifies the highlighted offset/elevation.
Elevation
For more information, see New Offset/Elevation on page 281.
Delete Offset/ This option will delete the highlighted offset/elevation from the listing.
Elevation
280 RoadCalc
New Offset/Elevation
ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS OFFSETS AND ELEVATIONS OPTION EDIT NEW
OFFSET/ELEVATION
The New Offset/Elevation command allows you to specify the PT code for the location of
the offset to be annotated as well as the method of placement of the annotation. Click on
the New button on the Edit Cross-Section Offsets and Elevations dialog box Figure 7-8 on
page 280 to create additional locations for offsets and elevations to be annotated. The
New Offset/Elevation dialog box (below) will display.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-9 New Offset/Elevation Dialog Box
New Offset/Elevation Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Label Enter the text to be used to describe the specific offset and elevation. This can be any
alphanumeric value that describes the point.
PT Code Specify the PT code that is the location for the offset and elevation to be annotated. The
offset and elevation are calculated from the PT code on the cross-section.
Side Select the side of the centerline for the offset and elevation to be annotated. Choose from
Both, Left or Right.
Place As This is the format of the annotation. Four formats are available: Offset, Elevation, Offset
and Elevation and Elevation and Offset. There is a stacked option available as well. This
stack toggle is only available for Offset and Elevation and Elevation and Offset options.
Placement Select the method of placement for the annotation relative to the PT Code location.
Choose from Above, Below or Middle. When Above is used, the offset and elevation is
placed above the PT code using the offset distance referenced to the lower left corner of
the text. When Below is used, the offset and elevation is placed below the PT code
referenced to the upper left corner of the text. When Middle is used, the text is centered
on the Pt code referenced to the middle left of the text.
Rotation Angle This is the rotation of the offset and elevation text as placed. A positive value rotates the
text about the insertion point of the text counterclockwise.

New Offset/Elevation Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Offset Distance This is the vertical distance from the Pt code to the offset and elevation text. See the
Placement definition on page 281.
Example
The following is an example of the Offset/Elevation parameters.
Figure 7-10 Offset/Elevation Example
Edit Cross-Section Slope Annotation

ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS SLOPE ANNOTATION OPTION EDIT
The Edit Cross-Section Slope Annotation command allows you to specify the format for
the grade annotation of slopes on the cross-section sheets. Select Slope Annotation from
the Format drop list on the Cross-Section Sheets dialog box (Figure 7-1 on page 271) and
282 RoadCalc
click on the Edit button to display the Edit Cross-Section Slope Annotation dialog box
(below).
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-11 Edit Cross-Section Slope Annotation Dialog Box
Edit Cross-Section Slope Annotation Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
PT Code This displays the beginning and ending PT code of the line that is to be annotated with a
slope.
Annotation This displays the method of annotation being used. You can place the annotation using
numeric values as well as using slope arrows and slope signs.
Side This displays the location in relation to the centerline that the slopes will be placed. You
can place the annotation on the left, right or both sides.
Placement This specifies how the slope annotation is placed on the slope line. The available options
are Above, Middle and Below.
Text Offset This displays the distance the annotation will be placed from the line being annotated.
New Slope Annotation

ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS SLOPE ANNOTATION OPTION EDIT NEW SLOPE
ANNOTATION
This New Slope Annotation command allows you to specify the location, offset distance of
the text, type of annotation, side of placement and the method of placement for the slopes
to be annotated.
To add a new slope annotation to the list, select the starting and ending PT codes from the
drop lists in the New Slope Annotation dialog box (New Slope Annotation Dialog Box284).
specify what side of the centerline you want the slope annotated. The rest of the slope
annotation is how you want the annotation placed. Choose from Above, Middle and Below
for the placement. Specify whether the format will be numeric, slope arrow or slope sign
and whether it will be reported as a percent slope, H/V, V/H or unit/unit slope value. Enter

the text offset for the annotation and select a symbol to use if you have selected the slope
arrow format.
Figure 7-12 New Slope Annotation Dialog Box
New Slope Annotation Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Starting PT Specify the PT code at the beginning of the slope line to be annotated.
Code
Ending PT Code Specify the PT code at the end of the slope line to be annotated.
Side Select the side for the slope to be annotated based on the Centerline. Choose from Both,
Left or Right.
Place As Specify the format of placement to be used in relation to the line being annotated. Select
from Above, Middle and Below.
Slope Direction Specify the type of slope indicator to be used. Choose from Numeric, Slope Arrow and
Format Slope Sign. If you select Slope Arrow, select the symbol that you want to have placed with
the slope annotation.
Annotation You can choose from H/V, V/H,%S and Unit/Unit for the annotation format.
Format
Text Offset Specify the offset distance for the text to be placed in relation to the reference line location
in inches (or millimeters).
Block Name Specify the symbol you wish to use for the arrowhead.
284 RoadCalc
Example
The following is an example of slope annotation parameters.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-13 Slope Annotation Parameters
Edit Cross-Section Reference Lines

ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS REFERENCE LINES OPTION EDIT
The Edit Cross-Section Reference Lines command allows you to place vertical line
segments along the cross-section with descriptions at specified locations. The lines can
then be used as points of reference such as utility line locations or other underground
obstructions. Select Reference Lines from the Format drop list in the Cross-Section
Sheets dialog box Figure 7-1 on page 271 and click on the Edit button to display the Edit
Cross-Section Reference Lines dialog box (below).
Figure 7-14 Edit Cross-Section Reference Lines Dialog Box
Edit Cross-Section Reference Lines Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Label This displays the text that is placed on the reference line.

Edit Cross-Section Reference Lines Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
PT Code/ This displays the PT code or alignment where the reference line is located.
Alignment
Side This displays the location of the reference line as either Both, Left or Right of the
centerline.
Line Length This displays the length of the reference line.
Percent Above This displays what percent of the line is above the PT code. When a 100% is used, the
line is completely above the PT code.
Text Offset This allows you to specify the vertical distance the text is placed above the reference line.
New Reference This allows you to add a new reference line at a specified location.
Line
For more information, see New Reference Line, below.
Modify This allows you to modify the parameters for the currently highlighted reference line in the
Reference Line listing.
For more information, see New Reference Line, below.
Delete This allows you to delete the currently highlighted reference line in the list box.
Reference Line
New Reference Lines

ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS REFERENCE LINES OPTION EDIT NEW
REFERENCE LINES
The New Reference Lines command allows you to specify a new location for a reference
line. You can set the parameters for the label, specify whether it will use a PT code or
alignment, and indicate what side of the centerline the reference line is on. You can also
set the annotation of length of reference line, percent above the line for the label, offset for
the label and the rotation of the label.
Figure 7-15 New Reference Lines Dialog Box
286 RoadCalc
New Reference Lines Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Label Enter the text to be used to describe the reference line. This can be any alphanumeric
value that describes the reference line.
PT Code radio This radio button allows you to place the reference line at the PT code specified.
button
Alignment radio This radio button allows you to place the reference line at the alignment offset. When this
button option is used, the PT Code drop list changes to the Alignment drop list.
PT Code drop When the PT Code radio button is selected, this drop list contains a list of the PT codes in
list the PT Code Library. The PT Code Library icon launches the PT Code Library, allowing
you to make any necessary changes to the library. RoadCalc will locate the reference line
Chapter 7: Output
at the PT code specified.
Alignment When the Alignment radio button is selected, this droplist contains a list of the alignments
listed in Manage Alignments. RoadCalc will locate the offset from centerline to the
alignment and place the reference line at that offset location.
Side Select the side for the reference line to be placed in relation to the centerline. Choose
between Both, Left and Right.
Line Length This is the length of the reference line, measured in inches or millimeters.
Percent Above This allows you to specify what percent of the line is above the PT code. When a 100% is
used, the line is completely above the PT code.
Text Offset This allows you to specify the vertical distance the text is placed above the reference line.
Text Rotation This allows you to specify the rotation angle of the label text placed above the reference
line. The rotation is taken about the middle of the text. A positive value rotates the text
counterclockwise.
Edit Cross-Section Text Settings

ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS TEXT SETTINGS OPTION EDIT
The Edit Cross-Section Text Settings command allows you to control what is annotated,
how it is annotated and where it is annotated. You can also select what surfaces will have
surface labels you want and where you want surface labels placed. Select Text Settings
from the Format drop list on the Cross-Section Sheets dialog box Figure 7-1 on page 271

and click on the Edit button to display the Edit Cross-Section Text Settings dialog box
(below).
Figure 7-16 Edit Cross-Section Text Settings Dialog Box
Edit Cross-Section Text Settings Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Item This displays all of the text items that can be annotated on a cross-section sheet. The
available items are listed below:
Station: This places the station value text at every cross-section.
Fill Area: This places fill area annotation at every cross-section.
Cut Area: This places cut area annotation at every cross-section.

Fill Volume: This places fill volumes at every cross-section.
Cut Volume: This option places cut volumes at every cross-section.

Modify Text Item This allows you to change the label and X and Y locations for the selected item.
For more information, see Modify Text Settings, below.
Plot Item This will change the state of the Plot column for the item highlighted. If the item is set to be
plotted, clicking on this button will change the item to be not plotted.
Design Centerline Elevation: This places the design centerline elevation to be
placed at every cross-section.
Original Centerline Elevation: This places the original centerline elevation at
every cross-section.
Surface Labels This allows you to specify how the labels for each surface are to be placed. Choose from
Both Sides, Right Side, Left Side or by a Legend.
Modify Text Settings

ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS TEXT SETTINGS OPTION MODIFY
The Modify Text Settings command allows you to change the labels and locations where
the annotation is placed on the cross-section sheets. The label is set as a prefix. By
288 RoadCalc
entering <>, the label can act as a prefix, suffix, or both. For example, if the label is STA =
<>, it would appear STA = 1+00. However, if the label is <> STA, it would appear 1+00
STA. The X and Y values are set to Default, meaning RoadCalc will place the annotation
in a default location. You can set the location that the annotation is placed by entering a
value in the X or Y edit fields.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-17 Modify Text Item Settings Dialog Box
Modify Text Item Settings Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Text Item This displays the item for which you are modifying the label or X and Y locations.
Label This is the text that is placed along with the value for the item. This is a prefix unless the
symbols <> are entered in the edit field. If you enter a label of STA = <>, you will get STA
= 1+00. If you enter a label of <> STA, you will get 1+ 00 STA.
X This is the location in the X direction at which the annotation is placed. This is measured
in inches (or millimeters) from the centerline of the cross-section. If the value is Default,
RoadCalc places the annotation at the default X location.
Y This is the location in the Y direction at which the annotation is placed. This is measured
in inches (or millimeters) from the centerline cross-hairs. If the value is Default, RoadCalc
places the annotation at the default Y location.
Default X and Y This allows you to set the X and Y edit fields back to the default locations. When you click
on this button, “Default” will be placed in both the X and Y edit fields.
Format Library
ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS FORMAT LIBRARY
The Format Library command allows you to save the settings for cross-section sheets,
plan and profile sheets and mass diagram sheets to a library. This allows the settings to be
used for another sub-project by loading the format from the library into the current sub-
project.
These settings for the cross-sections, plan and profiles and mass diagram can be saved
to a sub-project prototype.

For more information on sub-project prototypes, see Sub-project Prototype Settings on
page 379.
Figure 7-18 Format Library Dialog Box
Format Library Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Format This is a description of the settings being stored in the library. This may be a name of a
project or sheet size such as “24 x 36 Johnson County.”
New Format This allows you to add a new format to the Format Library.
Modify Format Click on the Modify button to change the name of the highlighted format in the Format
Library.
Delete Format This will remove the highlighted format from the library.
Save To This allows current changes to the cross-section, plan and profile or mass diagram sheet
settings to be saved to the highlighted format.
Load Format This copies all of the cross-section, plan and profile or mass diagram sheet settings from
the Format Library to the current sub-project settings.
QuickSteps
The following steps give an overview of how to set up format defaults for cross-sections.
1. Select Output Æ Cross-Section Sheets.
The Cross-Section Sheets dialog box (Figure 7-1 on page 271) displays.
2. Customize the settings for the cross-section sheet by modifying the settings in
the Format drop list.
3. Click on the Format Library button.
The Format Library dialog box (above) displays.
4. Click on New. Type in a name to be used as a reference to the format options
entered in the Cross-Section Sheet dialog box. Click on OK.
The new default displays in the Format Library dialog box.
290 RoadCalc
Stations to Plot
ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION SHEETS STATIONS TO PLOT
The Stations to Plot button on the Cross-Section Sheet dialog box (Figure 7-1 on page
271) opens a listing of all the cross-sections that are able to be plotted (below). Indicate
which cross-sections are to display on the cross-section sheets. This command is typically
used if you want to eliminate a cross-section from being plotted because it is a cross-
section that is not an even interval. It might have been a cross-section that was at a
culvert.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-19 Stations to Plot Dialog Box
Stations to Plot Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Station This displays all of the cross-section stations that are available to be plotted.
Plotted Stations marked with an X will be plotted.
Mark On This toggles on the currently highlighted cross-sections on. If a cross-section has been
toggled off, clicking on the Mark On button will toggle it on so it is plotted. Multiple stations
can be highlighted by using the Shift or Ctrl keys in conjunction with a mouse button click.
Mark Off This toggles the highlighted cross-sections off. If a cross-section has been toggled off,
clicking on the Mark Off button will toggle it off so it is not plotted. Multiple stations can be
highlighted by using the Shift or Ctrl keys in conjunction with a mouse button click.
Plan and Profile Sheets

ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN & PROFILE SHEETS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcppsheet

ICON:
This routine creates plan and profile sheets in drawings/design files. As with cross-
sections, the size and format of the plan and profile sheet can be specified, as well as the
CAD settings and size of the annotation and other items on the sheet. When making
sheets, the program divides the project onto separate sheets. After making the sheets, the
position of the plan and profile on each sheet can be fine tuned. If you referenced a
Hydraulic Profile reach from the Storm Sewers or Sanitary Sewers modules to the
RoadCalc Profile drawing/design file, these will automatically be displayed in the Profile
portion of the Plan and Profile sheet.
To plot a sheet, make sure that the sheet displayed is the one to be plotted, then use the
CAD system’s plotting routine to create a plot.
Each of the plot sheets created can be plotted using the CAD system’s plotting routines.
See the CAD system’s documentation for the procedure needed to plot out the drawings.
Figure 7-20 Plan and Profile Sheets Dialog Box
Plan and Profile Sheets Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Number This is a numerical value that RoadCalc uses to keep track of the currently defined plan
and profile sheets.
Description This is the beginning and ending station values of each plan and profile sheet.
New This plan and profile sheet allows you to create plan and profile sheets starting at a
specified station location. RoadCalc continues making sheets until the specified ending
station location is reached. The new sheets are placed at the end of the currently defined
plan and profile sheet listing.
For more information, see New Plan and Profile Sheets on page 295.
Delete Plan and This removes the currently highlighted sheet in the listing. More than one sheet may be
Profile Sheet highlighted by pressing the Shift or Ctrl keys while selecting the sheets.
292 RoadCalc
Option Function
View Plan and This icon displays the currently highlighted sheet in the CAD window.
Profile Sheet
View All This will automatically view all of the plan and profile sheets that are in the list that have
not previously been viewed. Since the plan and profile sheets are not built until they are
viewed, this option will view all sheets and automatically save them for you.
Edit This allows you to adjust any of the settings for the plan and profile sheets. You can adjust
the following items by selecting the item from the drop list and clicking on the Edit button.
Sheet Settings: This allows you to specify parameters for grid lines, height,
Chapter 7: Output
length and format for the plan and profile on the sheet. For more information,
see Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings on page 297.
CAD Settings: This allows you to specify what layer/level, linetype/linestyle,
color and text style/font to use for the various pieces of annotation. For more
information, see Edit Plan and Profile CAD Settings on page 302.
Precision: This allows you to select the precision for the various annotated
values to be placed on the plan and profile sheets. For more information, see
Edit Plan and Profile Precision on page 303.
Station/Elevation Intervals: This allows you to specify stationing intervals for the
plan view and the profile view. For more information, see Edit Station/Elevation
Intervals on page 304.
Alignment Annotation: This allows you to specify if you want stations, directions,
distances and curves annotated on any of the alignments. For more
information, see Edit Alignment Annotation on page 307.
Horizontal Station Labels: This allows you to specify what station labels you
want annotated on the alignments. This includes the key points such as BOP,
EOP, PC, PT and coordinates at those locations. For more information, see Edit
Horizontal Station Labels on page 308.
Direction and Distance: This allows you to specify how you want directions and
distances annotated for tangent lines of the alignment. For more information,
see Edit Direction and Distance on page 310.
Circular Curve Labels: This allows you to specify how you want the circular
curves of your alignment annotated and the order the annotation is placed in.
For more information, see Edit Circular Curve Labels on page 311.
Spiral Curve Labels: This allows you to specify how you want the spiral curves
of your alignment annotated and the order the annotation is placed in. For more
information, see Edit Spiral Curve Labels on page 312.
Profile Annotation: This allows you to specify if you want labels, curves and
elevations annotated on any of the profiles and the location of the annotation.
For more information, see Edit Profile Annotation on page 314.
Vertical Station/Elevation Labels: This allows you to specify what station and
elevation labels you want annotated on the profiles. This includes the key points
such as BOP, EOP, VPC, and VPT. For more information, see Edit Vertical
Station/Elevation Labels on page 315.

Option Function
Edit Vertical Curve Labels: This allows you to specify the annotation that is placed
on a vertical curve. This includes the grades in and out, curve length, K and E.
For more information, see Edit Vertical Curve Labels on page 316.
Custom Symbols: This allows you to specify custom symbols to be used on the
plan and profile sheets. You can select custom symbols for the north arrow,
major and minor tick marks, leader location and direction arrow. For more
information, see Edit Custom Symbols on page 318.
Format Library When creating plan and profile sheets, use this option to define and set custom formats
for system-wide use.
For more information, see Format Library on page 289.
Show Ports This shows the locations of the viewport for the current RoadCalc project in the plan
drawing. Clicking on the Show Ports option opens the plan drawing and displays the
viewport used to create the plan and profile sheet. This can be used to graphically view
the sheet borders so that text size can be adjusted to make sure it is not cut off.
Example
The following is an example of a plan and profile sheet.
Figure 7-21 Plan and Profile Sheet
294 RoadCalc
QuickSteps
To create a plan and profile sheet with stationing from right to left, complete the following
steps:
1. Select Profiles Æ Settings.
The Profile Settings dialog box (Figure 4-19 on page 169) displays.
2. On the General Tab Page, select the Profile Orientation of Right to Left.
3. Click on OK.
The CAD graphic for the profile is loaded and the direction of the profile is drawn from
Chapter 7: Output
right to left.
All other objects that are not defined as a RoadCalc profile will still be drawn in a left
to right direction. Redraw the objects with the correct orientation or use the CAD mirror
command to mirror the objects. The Objects will need to be mirrored about the Profile
Coordinate System (PCS) location. When the profile is drawn in the profile CAD
graphic, the location is 0,0. When the profile is drawn in the plan CAD graphic, the
location is 0,0 unless otherwise specified using the Define Coordinate System option.
4. Select Output Æ Plan and Profile Sheets.
The Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box (Figure 7-21 on page 294) displays.
5. Change any of the formatting for the plan and profile sheets by selecting an
item in the drop list and clicking on the Edit button.
6. Click on the New icon to create a plan and profile sheet.
The New Plan and Profile Sheet dialog box (Figure 7-22 on page 296) displays.
7. Enter the Starting and Ending station values and click on OK.
8. Highlight the sheet in the Plan and Profile Sheet dialog box and click on the
View Sheet icon.
The plan and profile sheet is created in a right to left direction.
New Plan and Profile Sheets

ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS NEW PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET
Plan and profile sheets can be added to the RoadCalc sub-project by clicking on the New
button on the Plan and Profile sheets dialog box. The New option displays the New Plan
and Profile Sheets dialog box which prompts for the starting and ending stations for
making sheets (below). The first sheet starts at the starting station. RoadCalc makes
sheets until it finds one that contains the ending station.

A separate CAD graphic file is made for each sheet, with borders and annotation, the plan
and profile CAD graphic files are attached as reference files, clipping them at the borders
of the sheet. If the ending station falls inside of the specified sheet overlap, an extra sheet
will be created.
RoadCalc doesn’t copy portions of the plan and profile into the sheet CAD graphic files,
but references them. This means that if either the plan or the profile CAD graphic is edited,
the changes made will automatically display on the plan and profile sheets. However, if
changes are made to the plan and profile sheets, those changes will not display in the plan
or profile CAD graphic files.
In MicroStation V8, the plan and profile sheets are generated by referencing the model in
which the centerline alignment resides for the plan and likewise the model where the
centerline profile resides for the profile. When you create the centerline alignment in
RoadCalc, the model where the alignment is created is written to the alignment database.
The model in which your profiles are drawn is also saved within the subproject data files.
When entering the plan and profile creation routine, click on the View button to view the
highlighted plan and profile sheet if it is not displayed.
The plan and profile CAD graphic files must be viewed before you can plot the sheet using
CAD.
Figure 7-22 New Plan and Profile Sheets Dialog Box
New Plan and Profile Sheets Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Alignment This lists the beginning and ending stations of the Centerline alignment for information
purposes.
Profile This lists the beginning and ending design Centerline profile stations for informational
purposes.
Cross-Section This lists the beginning and ending cross-section stations for informational purposes.
296 RoadCalc
New Plan and Profile Sheets Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Starting Station Enter the station where RoadCalc is to begin making plan and profile sheets.
Ending Station Enter the station where RoadCalc is to stop making plan and profile sheets. Multiple
sheets will be created if the ending station does not fall on the sheet created.
View Sheets Toggle this option on if you want the sheets to be viewed automatically. With this option
Upon Creation toggled on, the plan and profile sheets will be created in the same fashion as previous
releases of RoadCalc. If this is toggle off, the sheets will not be viewed. The Sheets will
be added to the Plan and Profile sheet dialog box. You will need to use the View or View
All options to build the sheets.
Chapter 7: Output
Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings
ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS SHEET SETTINGS OPTION EDIT SHEET/PLAN TAB
To edit the plan and profile sheet settings, select sheet settings from the Format drop list
on the Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box (Figure 7-20 on page 292) and click on the Edit
button. This allows you to specify parameters for grid lines, height, length and format for
the plan and profile on the sheet.
Figure 7-23 Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Sheet/Plan Tab

Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Sheet/Plan Tab Definitions
Option Function
Orientation This allows you to choose how the plan and profile are orientated on the sheet. You can
choose from plan over profile, profile over plan, plan only and profile only.
Sheet Overlap This allows you to specify the distance that the information is to be shared between
sequential plan and profile sheets. A sheet overlap value of zero tells RoadCalc to begin
Sheet 2 exactly where Sheet 1 stopped.
Sheet Length This allows you to the plotted limits of the plan and profile sheet length (not the overall
paper length). The Sheet Length value should reflect the plotter’s “dead zone” where no
information is plotted. Typical dead zone width is 1/2 an inch per side.
Sheet Height This allows you to specify the plotted limits of the plan and profile sheet height (not the
overall paper height). The Sheet Height value should reflect the plotter’s “dead zone”
where no information is plotted. Typical dead zone width is 1/2 an inch per side.
Sheet This allows you to specify the lower left and upper right coordinates in the x and y fields to
Coordinates determine the outer border of the sheet. This determines the sheet’s overall size. The
sheet length and height fields will update based on these changes.
Plan This allows you to specify the lower left and the upper right coordinates in the x and y
Coordinates fields to determine the outer border of the plan portion of the plan and profile sheet. This
determines the plan portion’s overall size within the sheet’s border.
Sheet Prototype This allows you to select the prototype drawing or design file that will be used when
creating plan and profile sheets. If you wish to create multiple prototype drawings/design
files, start by making a copy of the RoadCalc default prototypes. Then make additions to
the copies to ensure that linetypes and textstyles that are necessary are included.
ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS SHEET SETTINGS OPTION EDIT PROFILE TAB
298 RoadCalc
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-24 Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Profile Tab
Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Profile Tab Definitions
Option Function
Orientation This allows you to choose how the plan and profile are orientated on the sheet. You can
choose from plan over profile, profile over plan, plan only and profile only.
Grid Area This is the internal length of the profile grid. This will be updated based on the profile
Length coordinates.
Grid Area Height This is the internal height of the profile grid. This will be updated based on the profile
coordinates.
Profile This allows you to specify the lower left and the upper right coordinates in the x and y
Coordinates fields to determine the outer border of the profile portion of the plan and profile sheet. This
determines the profile portion’s overall size within the sheet’s border.
Grid Units This toggle will specify that the grid spacing is being entered in terms of drawing units or
paper units. If drawing units is toggled on, then enter the grid spacing in terms distances
based on the horizontal and vertical plot scale. If paper units is toggled on, then enter in
the grid spacing in terms of inches/millimeters on paper.
Datum Elevation This sets the width of the area where the datum elevations are placed in the profile portion
Width of the plan and profile sheet.
Datum Elevation This sets the incremental distance for the profile datum elevations located at both ends of
Interval the profile portion of the plan and profile sheet.
Station Area This sets the distance between the bottom of the sheet and the bottom of the profile grid
Height for the station labels.

Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Profile Tab Definitions
Option Function
Heavy This is the vertical distance between the heavy horizontal grid lines in the profile portion of
Horizontal Line the plan and profile sheet. The distance is either in feet/meters or inches/millimeters
Spacing depending on if the values are entered using drawing units or paper units.
(Elevation
Interval)
Heavy Vertical This is the horizontal distance between the vertical grid lines in the profile portion of the
Line Spacing plan and profile sheet. The distance is either in feet/meters or inches/millimeters
(Station Interval) depending on if the values are entered using drawing units or paper units.
Fine Horizontal This is the vertical distance between the fine horizontal grid lines in the profile portion of
Line Spacing the plan and profile sheet. The distance is either in feet/meters or inches/millimeters
(Elevation depending on if the values are entered using drawing units or paper units.
Interval)
Fine Vertical This is the horizontal distance between the fine vertical grid lines in the profile portion of
Line Spacing the plan and profile sheet. The distance is either in feet/meters or inches/millimeters
(Station Interval) depending on if the values are entered using drawing units or paper units.
Examples
The following examples show the various sheet parameters.
Figure 7-25 Plan and Profile Sheet – Example 1
300 RoadCalc
Chapter 7: Output

Edit Plan and Profile CAD Settings

ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS CAD SETTINGS OPTION EDIT
The Edit Plan and Profile CAD settings command allows you to specify the CAD settings
for the various sheet parameters on the plan and profile sheet. You can also use a toggle
to indicate that certain sheet parameters are not plotted when the sheet is created. The
CAD settings of layer/level, color, linetype/linestyle, text style/font, text size and text
rotation are displayed below the listing of items for the highlighted item. Make any desired
changes and click on the Apply button to accept the modifications.
Figure 7-29 Edit Plan and Profile CAD Settings Dialog Box
302 RoadCalc
Edit Plan and Profile CAD Settings Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Item This displays all of the items that can be annotated on a plan and profile sheet. The
available options that you can control the CAD settings for are Catchpoints, Tangents and
Radii, North Arrow, Sheet, Tangents, Heavy Grid Lines, Fine Grid Lines, Plan Show Parts,
Plan Stations, Horizontal Curves, Percent Grades, Vertical Curves, Profile Stations,
Datum Elevations, Original Profile Elevations, Design Profile Elevations, Scales, Pipe
Annotation, Manhole Annotation, Pipe Invert Elevations, Pipes, Manholes, Direction and
Distance and Surface Labels.
Plot If you have this toggle on, the item will be plotted on the plan and profile sheet. If the
toggle is off, the item is not plotted.
Chapter 7: Output
Layer/Level This the layer/level on which that the accompanying sheet parameter is to be placed.
Color This is the color the sheet parameter will be when the sheet is created. A color palette is
available when the color button is selected.
Linetype/ This the linetype/linestyle for the accompanying sheet parameter. This option is only
Linestyle available for parameters which are lines. AutoCAD/BricsCad users: The linetype needs to
be defined in the prototype drawing in order to be used.
Weight This is the weight of the accompanying sheet parameter. This option is only available in
MicroStation.
Text Style/Font This is the text style/font of the accompanying sheet parameter. This option is only
available for parameters that are text. AutoCAD/BricsCad users: The text style needs to
be defined in the prototype drawing in order to be used.
Text Size This is the text size for the accompanying sheet parameter. This option is only available
for parameters that are text.
Text Rotation This is the rotation angle of the text as placed. A positive value entered will place the text
rotated counterclockwise. A value of zero will place the text horizontal on the screen.
Edit Plan and Profile Precision

ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS PRECISION OPTION EDIT
The Edit Plan and Profile Precision command allows you to specify the display precision
for each type of annotation used in the plan and profile sheet. The settings can go from
nothing after the decimal point to as many as eight places past the decimal. Select the
Precision option from the Format drop list on the Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box

(Figure 7-20 on page 292) and click on the Edit button to display the Edit Plan and Profile
Precision dialog box (below).
Figure 7-30 Edit Plan and Profile Precision Dialog Box
Edit Plan and Profile Precision Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Distances This is the precision used for any linear values that are annotated in the plan and profile
sheets.
Coordinates This is the precision used for the Northing and Easting values for items such as BOP, EOP
and PI stations in the plan and profile sheets.
Horizontal Curve This is the precision used at the curve stations of the horizontal alignment.
Station
Vertical Curve This is the precision used at the vertical curve stations for the profile.
Station
Grades This is the precision with which the grade in and grade out of a vertical curve will be
annotated.
Original This is the precision for the original ground at the centerline.
Elevations
Design This is the precision for the design elevations placed along the profiles.
Elevations
Datum This is the precision of the elevations that are placed along the side of the sheets for the
Elevations profile grid.
Edit Station/Elevation Intervals

ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS STATION/ELEVATION INTERVALS OPTION EDIT
The Edit Station/Elevation Intervals command allows you specify stationing intervals for
the plan view and the profile view. In the Plan view, you can set the major and minor
304 RoadCalc
intervals, placement and offset. In the Profile view, you can set the major and minor station
interval, minor format, elevation interval on curve and elevation interval on curve.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-31 Edit Station/Elevation Intervals Dialog Box
Edit Station/Elevation Intervals Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Plan View This is the interval that the station values will be placed along the alignment in the plan
Station Major portion of the plan and profile sheet. A major tick symbol will be placed at this location
Interval along with the station value.
For more information, see Edit Custom Symbols on page 318.
Plan View This is the interval that a minor tick symbol will be placed. There will not be a station value
Station Minor placed at this location if it is different from the major interval.
Interval
Placement This allows you to set how the station values are going to be placed along the alignment.
The available options are Parallel and Perpendicular to the alignment.
Offset This is the perpendicular distance from the alignment that the text is placed. If a value of 1
inch is entered, the text is placed one inch above the alignment.
Profile View This allows you to specify the distance for how often the station text is placed for the
Stationing Major profile portion of the plan and profile sheet.
Interval
Profile View This allows you to specify the distance for how often the intermediate station values will be
Stationing Minor placed in the profile portion of the plan and profile sheet.
Interval
Profile View This allows you to choose the format of the station annotation at the intermediate or minor
Stationing Minor locations. Select either full or partial for the format.
Format
Interval on This is the interval that the profile elevations are placed in the tangent areas of the profile
Tangent portion of the plan and profile sheets.

Edit Station/Elevation Intervals Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Interval on This is the interval that the profile elevations are placed in the curve areas of the profile
Curve portion of the plan and profile sheets.
See the five examples below for how the options affect the minor stations.
Examples
Figure 7-32 Example 1 – Profile Station Options
The figure above shows profile stationing using intermediate format of full or partial and
profile interval value of 50 and intermediate interval value of 50.
The figure above shows profile stationing using intermediate format of full and profile
interval value of 100 and intermediate interval value of 50.
Figure 7-34 Example 3 – Profile Stationing Options
The figure above shows profile stationing using intermediate format of partial and profile
Figure 7-35 Example 4 – Profile Stationing Options
306 RoadCalc
Figure 7-35 on page 306 shows profile stationing using intermediate format of full and
profile interval value of 500 and intermediate interval value of 100.
The figure above shows profile stationing using intermediate format of partial and profile
Chapter 7: Output
Edit Alignment Annotation

ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS ALIGNMENT ANNOTATION OPTION EDIT
The Edit Alignment Annotation command allows you to specify if you want stations,
directions, distances and curves annotated on any of the alignments. There will always be
three alignments listed (Centerline, ROW Left and ROW Right). If you have entered any
additional alignments, those alignments will also be displayed in the Edit Alignment
Annotation dialog box (below).
If you want to annotate the station values, Direction and Distances or Curve parameters
for any of the alignments, click on the Modify button. Select Yes for any of the items you
want annotated and No for any of the items you do not wanted annotated. Once you have
made the changes, click on the OK button to accept your changes.
Figure 7-37 Edit Alignment Annotation Dialog Box

Edit Alignment Annotation Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Alignment This displays all of the alignments that are added for the sub-project. The list will always
contain Centerline, ROW Left and ROW Right. Any additional alignments that have been
added to the sub-project will display below these three alignments.
Station This displays whether the station value will be annotated or not. If Yes displays in this
column, the station value will be annotated for the corresponding alignment. If No displays
in this column, the station value will not be annotated for the corresponding alignment.
Direction and This displays whether the direction and distance values for tangents will be annotated or
Distance not. If Yes displays in this column, the direction and distance values will be annotated for
the corresponding alignment. If No displays in this column, the direction and distance
values will not be annotated for the corresponding alignment.
Curves This displays whether the curve parameters will be annotated or not. If Yes displays in this
column, the curve parameters will be annotated for the corresponding alignment. If No
displays in this column, the curve parameters will not be annotated for the corresponding
alignment.
Modify This allows you to change what will be annotated for the selected alignments. Select Yes
for any of the items you want annotated and No for any of the items you do not wanted
annotated. Once you have made the changes, click on the OK button to accept your
changes.
Edit Horizontal Station Labels

ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS HORIZONTAL STATION LABELS OPTION EDIT
The Edit Horizontal Station Labels command allows you to specify what station labels you
want annotated on the alignments. This includes the Key points such as BOP, EOP, PC,
PT and coordinates at those locations.
To choose whether you want to annotate the item or not, click on the Plot Item button. If
there is a Yes in the Plot column, the item will be annotated. If there is a No in the Plot
column, the item will not be annotated.
If you want to change the Annotation or the Order (only available for Northing and Easting
Coordinates and Deflection Angle), you need to click on the Modify button. This allows you
to change the annotation or the order. The annotation can be set to be a prefix, suffix or
both depending on where the <> symbols are. If the annotation is set to BOP = <>, the
annotation will be BOP = 0+00. If the annotation is set to BOP <> STA, the annotation will
308 RoadCalc
be BOP 0+00 STA. If the annotation is <> BOP STA, the annotation will be 0+00 BOP
STA.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-38 Edit Horizontal Station Labels Dialog Box
Edit Horizontal Station Labels Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Item This indicates all of the items that can be annotated on a plan and profile sheet. The
available horizontal station label options that you can control are BOP Station, EOP
Station, PC Station, PI Station, PT Station, PCC Station, PRC Station, TS Station, SC
Station, CS Station, ST Station, PSS Station, Northing, Easting and Deflection Angle.
Plot This columns specifies if the corresponding item in the list will be annotated on a plan and
profile sheet or not. If Yes is displayed in the column, then the corresponding item will be
annotated. If no is displayed, then the corresponding item will not be annotated. To
change the annotation state, highlight the desired item and click on the Plot Item button.
Annotation This displays how the annotation is going to appear for the corresponding item. The <>
symbols represent the value that will be placed. Anything before the <> is considered to
be a prefix and anything after the <> is considered to be a suffix. For example, if the
annotation is set to BOP = <>, the annotation will be BOP = 0+00. If the annotation is set
to BOP <> STA, the annotation will be BOP 0+00 STA. If the annotation is <> BOP STA,
the annotation will be 0+00 BOP STA.
Order This is used to determine how the Northing and Easting coordinates and Deflection Angle
are located. An order of 1 will place that value closest to the item such as BOP being
annotated. This is only available for the Northing and Easing coordinates and Deflection
Angle.
Modify This allows you to change any of the annotation for the items listed. You can also change
the order for the Northing and Easting coordinate items. To modify the annotation or order
of an item, highlight the desired item and click on the Modify button. Make the necessary
changes and click on the OK button to accept the changes.
Plot Item This allows you to select whether or not the highlighted item will be annotated or not.
Highlight the desired item and click on the Plot Item button to change the state of the Plot
column. If the column was Yes when you clicked on the Plot Item button, it will be changed
to No.

Edit Direction and Distance
ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS DIRECTION AND DISTANCE OPTION EDIT
The Edit Direction and Distance command allows you to specify how you want directions
and distances annotated for tangent lines of the alignment. You can specify the direction
type, define the label for the distance, placement, order, whether the annotation should be
staked and if you want to place a direction arrow.
Figure 7-39 Edit Direction and Distance Dialog Box
Edit Direction and Distance Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Direction Toggle this option on if you want to the direction of the tangent lines to be annotated. You
can choose between Bearing, North Azimuth, South Azimuth and Geometric for the
formats of the direction.
Distance Toggle this option on if you want the distance of the tangent lines to be annotated.
Label Enter the prefix, suffix or prefix and suffix associated with the distance. A maximum of 20
characters, including the less than and greater than brackets, may be entered. Information
entered before the less than bracket is considered a prefix. Information entered after the
greater than bracket (<>FT) is considered a suffix. In order to place the distance of the
tangent line, you must enter the less than and greater than brackets in the field. If the
brackets are not entered, the system places the prefix listed in the edit field and not the
value of the annotation.
Placement This defines where the annotation is placed in relation to the tangent line. Annotation may
be placed above or below. When Above is selected, the annotation is placed above the
tangent line. When Below is selected, the annotation is placed below the tangent line.
Order This defines how the direction and distance are placed along the tangent line. Assign a
different number to the direction and distance order. The lowest order number will be
placed closest to the tangent line or first when they are both placed on the same side of
the tangent line.
Stack Toggle this option on if you want the direction and distance to be stacked on top of each
Annotation other when the tangent line is annotated. The order that they are stacked on the tangent
line depends on the value in the order edit field. The lowest value will be nearest to the
tangent line and the highest value will be farthest from the tangent line.
310 RoadCalc
Edit Direction and Distance Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Direction Arrow Toggle this on if you want a direction arrow to be placed above the annotation. The arrow
that is placed can be set in the Edit Custom Symbol command.
Edit Circular Curve Labels

ROADCALC PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS CIRCULAR CURVE LABELS OPTIONS EDIT
Chapter 7: Output
The Edit Circular Curve Labels command allows you to specify how you want the circular
curves of your alignment annotated and the order in which the annotation is placed.
If you want to change the Annotation or the Order, you need to click on the Modify button.
This allows you to change the annotation or the order. The annotation can be set to be a
prefix, suffix or both depending on where the <> symbols are. If the annotation is set to T =
<>, the annotation will be T = 100.00. If the annotation is set to T = <> FT, the annotation
will be T = 100.00 FT. If the annotation is <> = T, the annotation will be 100.00 = T.
Figure 7-40 Edit Circular Curve Labels Dialog Box
Edit Circular Curve Labels Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Item This displays all of the items that can be annotated for circular curves on a plan and profile
sheet. The available circular curve labels that you can control are Deflection Angle,
Degree of Arc, Degree of Chord, Chord Direction, Tangent, Radius, Arc Length, Chord
Length, External Ordinate and Middle Ordinate.

Edit Circular Curve Labels Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Plot This columns displays if the corresponding item in the list will be annotated on a plan and
change the annotation state, highlight and click on the Plot Item button.
annotation is set to T = <>, the annotation will be T = 100.00. If the annotation is set to T =
<> FT, the annotation will be T = 100.00 FT. If the annotation is <> = T, the annotation will
be 100.00 = T.
Order This is used to determine how the Circular Curve Labels are located. An order of 1 will
place that value closest to the curve being annotated.
Modify This allows you to change any of the annotation or the order for the items listed. To modify
the annotation or order of an item, highlight the desired item and click on the Modify
button. Make the necessary changes and click on the OK button to accept the changes.
to No.
Edit Spiral Curve Labels

ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS SPIRAL CURVE LABELS OPTIONS EDIT
The Edit Spiral Curve Labels command allows you to specify how you want the spiral
curves of your alignment annotated and the order the annotation is placed in.
To choose whether you want to annotate the item or not, click on the Plot Item button in
the Edit Spiral Curve Labels dialog box (Figure 7-41 on page 313). If there is a Yes in the
Plot column, the item will be annotated. If there is a No in the Plot column, the item will not
be annotated.
If you want to change the Annotation or the Order, you need to click on the Modify button.
This allows you to change the annotation or the order. The annotation can be set to be a
prefix, suffix or both depending on where the <> symbols are. If the annotation is set to T =
312 RoadCalc
<>, the annotation will be T = 100.00. If the annotation is set to T = <> FT, the annotation
will be T = 100.00 FT. If the annotation is <> = T, the annotation will be 100.00 = T.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-41 Edit Spiral Curve Labels Dialog Box
Edit Spiral Curve Labels Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Item This displays all of the items that can be annotated for circular curves on a plan and profile
sheet. The available spiral curve labels that you can control are Delta Angle, Length, X, Y,
P, K, Long Tangent, Short Tangent, Total Tangent.
change the annotation state, highlight the item and click on the Plot Item button.
annotation is set to L = <>, the annotation will be L = 100.00. If the annotation is set to L =
<> FT, the annotation will be L = 100.00 FT. If the annotation is <> = L, the annotation will
be 100.00 = L.
Order This is used to determine how the spiral curve labels are located. An order of 1 will place
that value closest to the spiral being annotated.
Modify This allows you to change any of the annotation or the order for the items listed. To modify
the annotation or order of an item, highlight the desired item and click on the Modify
button. Make the necessary changes and click on the OK button to accept the changes.
Plot Item This allows you to specify whether or not the highlighted item will be annotated. Highlight
the desired item and click on the Plot Item button to change the state of the Plot column. If
the column was Yes when you clicked on the Plot Item button, it will be changed to No.

Edit Profile Annotation
ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS PROFILE ANNOTATION OPTION EDIT
The Edit Profile Annotation command allows you to specify if you want labels, curves and
elevations annotated on any of the profiles and the location of the annotation. The Design
Centerline and Original Ground Centerline will always be displayed in the list to be
annotated. Also, any additional profiles that were created will be displayed in the list
allowing you to annotate them.
If you want to annotate the labels, curves or elevations for any of the profiles, click on the
Modify button. Select Yes for any of the items you want annotated and No for any of the
items you do not wanted annotated. Select the desired location for the placement of the
elevations. Once you have made the changes, click on the OK button to accept your
changes.
Figure 7-42 Edit Profile Annotation Dialog Box
Edit Profile Annotation Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Profiles This displays all of the profiles that are added for the sub-project. The list will always
contain Centerline and Original 0.00. Any additional profiles that have been added to the
sub-project will display below these two profiles.
Labels This indicates whether the profiles will be labeled with the name of the profile. If Yes
displays in this column, the profile will be labeled with its name. If No displays in this
column, the profile will not be labeled with its name.
Curves This specifies whether the vertical curve parameters will be annotated for the
corresponding profile. If Yes displays in this column, the vertical curve parameters will be
annotated. If No displays in this column, the vertical curve parameters will not be
annotated.
Elevations This specifies whether the elevations will be annotate for the corresponding profile. If Yes
displays in this column, the profile elevations will be annotated. If No displays in this
column, the profile elevations will not be annotated.
Locations This displays where the elevations will be annotated for the corresponding profile. The
available options are bottom left, bottom right, upper left, upper right, above profile and
below profile.
314 RoadCalc
Edit Profile Annotation Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Text Rotation This displays the rotation angle for the profile elevation when the location is set to above
profile or below profile. A positive value entered will place the text rotated
counterclockwise. A value of zero will place the text horizontal on the screen.
Modify This allows you to change what will be annotated for the selected profiles. Select Yes for
any of the items you want annotated and No for any of the items you do not wanted
annotated. Once you have made the changes, click on the OK button to accept your
changes.
Chapter 7: Output
Edit Vertical Station/Elevation Labels
ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS VERTICAL STATION/ELEVATION LABELS OPTION
EDIT
The Edit Vertical Station/Elevation Labels command allows you to specify what station and
elevation labels you want annotated on the profiles. This includes the key points such as
BOP, EOP, VPC, and VPT.
If you want to change the annotation, you need to click on the Modify button. The
annotation can be set to be a prefix, suffix or both depending on where the <> symbols
are. If the annotation is set to BOP STA = <>, the annotation will be BOP STA = 0+00. If
the annotation is set to BOP <> STA, the annotation will be BOP 0+00 STA. If the
annotation is <> BOP STA, the annotation will be 0+00 BOP STA.
Figure 7-43 Edit Vertical Station/Elevation Labels Dialog Box

Edit Vertical Station/Elevation Labels Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Item This displays all of the items that can be annotated for the profile on a plan and profile
sheet. The available vertical station/elevation label options that you can control are BOP
Station, BOP Elevation, EOP Station, EOP Elevation, VPC Station, VPC Elevation, VPI
Station, VPI Elevation, VPT Station, VPT Elevation, High Point Station, High Point
Elevation, Low Point Station and Low Point Elevation.
change the annotation state, click on the Plot Item button.
annotation is set to BOP STA = <>, the annotation will be BOP STA = 0+00. If the
annotation is set to BOP <> STA, the annotation will be BOP 0+00 STA. If the annotation
is <> BOP STA, the annotation will be 0+00 BOP STA.
Modify This allows you to change any of the annotation for the items listed. To modify the
annotation of an item, highlight the desired item and click on the Modify button. Make the
necessary changes and click on the OK button to accept the changes.
to No.
Edit Vertical Curve Labels

ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS VERTICAL CURVE LABELS OPTION EDIT
The Edit Vertical Curve Labels command allows you to specify the annotation that is
placed on a vertical curve. This includes the grades in and out, curve length, K and E.
To choose whether you want to annotate the item or not, click on the Plot Item button on
the Edit Vertical Curve Labels dialog box (Figure 7-44 on page 317). If there is a Yes in the
Plot column, the item will be annotated. If there is a No in the Plot column, the item will not
be annotated.
If you want to change the annotation, you need to click on the Modify button. The
annotation can be set to be a prefix, suffix or both depending on where the <> symbols
are. If the annotation is set to BOP STA = <>, the annotation will be BOP STA = 0+00. If
316 RoadCalc
the annotation is set to BOP <> STA, the annotation will be BOP 0+00 STA. If the
annotation is <> BOP STA, the annotation will be 0+00 BOP STA.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-44 Edit Vertical Curve Labels Dialog Box
Edit Vertical Curve Labels Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Item This displays all of the items that can be annotated for the vertical curve on the plan and
profile sheet. The available vertical curve label options that you can control are Grade In,
Grade Out, Curve Length, Curve Length In, Curve Length Out, K, K In, K Out and E.
Plot This columns indicates if the corresponding item in the list will be annotated on a plan and
change the annotation state, highlight an item and click on the Plot Item button.
annotation is set to Curve Length = <>, the annotation will be Curve Length = 125. If the
annotation is set to Curve Length = <> FT, the annotation will be Curve Length = 125 FT. If
the annotation is <> Curve Length, the annotation will be 125 Curve Length.
Modify This allows you to change any of the annotation for the items listed. To modify the
annotation of an item, highlight the desired item and click on the Modify button. Make the
necessary changes and click on the OK button to accept the changes.
to No.
Dimension Lines Toggle this option on if you want a dimension line from the VPC of the curve to the VPT of
the curve. If this is toggled on, the dimension lines will be placed. If this is toggled off, no
dimension lines will be placed.

Edit Custom Symbols
ROADCALC OUTPUT CUSTOM SYMBOLS OPTION EDIT
The Edit Custom Symbols command allows you to specify custom symbols to be used on
the plan and profile sheets. You can select custom symbols for the North arrow, major and
minor tick marks, leader location and direction arrow.
AutoCAD/BricsCad
To change the symbol that is used, click on the Modify button with the desired item highlighted. Enter
the path and block name for the desired symbol. You can also click on the Open folder next to the
symbol edit field to select the symbol. Click on the OK button to accept the changes.
MicroStation
To change the symbol that is used, click on the Modify button with the desired item highlighted. Enter
the path to the cell library that you want to use. You can also click on the Open folder next to the Cell
Library edit field to select the cell library. Select the desired cell from the Cell drop list. Click on the OK
button to accept the changes.
Figure 7-45 Edit Custom Symbols Dialog Box
Edit Custom Symbols Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Item This displays all of the items for which you can place a custom symbol. The available
items that you can place a custom symbol for are North Arrow, Major Station Tick, Minor
Station Tick, Plan Curve Leader, Plan Tangent Leader, Profile Curve Leader, Profile
Tangent Leader and Direction Arrow.
Symbol This column specifies the symbol you wish to have placed for the specified item.
Scale This column specifies the scale factor for the symbol you wish to have placed for the
specified item.
Modify This allows you to change any symbols that will be used. To modify the symbol of an item,
highlight the desired item and click on the Modify button. Make the necessary changes
and click on the OK button to accept the changes.
318 RoadCalc
Show Ports
ROADCALC OUTPUT PLAN AND PROFILE SHEETS SHOW PORTS
The Show Ports command will place a rectangle into the plan CAD graphic representing
the clipping plane used for referencing the plan portion of the highlighted plan and profile
sheet. This allows you to orientate text in the plan CAD graphic so that text is not clipped
off when viewing the plan portion of the plan and profile sheet. Because the plan and
profile portions of the plan and profile sheet are referenced in, any changes to the plan
CAD graphic will automatically be updated in the plan and profile sheet.
Chapter 7: Output
The CAD settings for the ports can be set also. You can set the layer/level, color, linetype/
linestyle and width/weight. To change any of the CAD settings, set the format drop list to
CAD Settings and click on the Edit button. Highlight the item labeled Plan Show Ports and
make any necessary changes.
For more information, see Edit Plan and Profile CAD Settings on page 302.
Adjust Plan and Profile Sheet

ROADCALC OUTPUT ADJUST PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET
The Adjust Plan and Profile Sheet command will allow you to adjust the plan and profile
sheets after the sheets have been created. You are able to shift the plan and profile areas
up and down as well as left and right. The plan portion of the sheet can also be rotated to
better fit the plan on the sheet.
Select the appropriate arrow in the upper portion of the dialog box make sheet
adjustments.

A plan and profile sheet needs to be loaded in the CAD graphic to use this command.
Figure 7-46 Adjust Plan and Profile Sheet Dialog Box
Adjust Plan and Profile Sheet Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Plan Up/Down Enter the value that you want to move the plan portion of the plan and profile sheet. This
Distance adjustment distance works with the Move Plan Up and Move Plan Down buttons. The
annotation for the plan will be adjusted accordingly. This will only adjust the current sheet
being viewed.
Profile Up/Down Enter the value that you want to move the profile portion of the plan and profile sheet. This
Distance adjustment distance works with the Move Profile Up and Move Profile down buttons. The
annotation for the profile will be adjusted accordingly. This will only adjust the current
sheet being viewed.
Sheet Left/Right Enter the value that you want to move the plan and profile portions of the sheet. This
Distance adjustment distance works with the Move Sheet Left and Move Sheet Right buttons. The
annotation for the plan and profile will adjust accordingly. This will only adjust the current
sheet being viewed.
Rotation Angle Enter the value that you want to rotate the plan portion of the plan and profile sheet. This
angle works with the Rotate Plan Clockwise and Rotate Plan Counterclockwise buttons.
This will only adjust the current sheet being viewed.
320 RoadCalc
Mass Diagram Sheets
ROADCALC OUTPUT MASS DIAGRAM SHEETS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcmdsheet

This routine creates drawings/design files from the mass ordinates in Volumes and allows
them to be edited and plotted. Specify the size of the mass diagram sheets, horizontal and
vertical scales and grid line spacing. When making sheets, RoadCalc breaks the mass
Chapter 7: Output
diagram into separate sheets if necessary.
The Mass Diagram Sheets option on RoadCalc’s Output pull-down menu plots a mass
diagram for either design or actual surfaces. When a design mass diagram is created, the
program uses the volumes between the lowest design surface and the top most original
ground. When a actual mass diagram is created, the program uses the volumes between
the actual surface and the top most original ground. The mass diagrams plotted with this
routine use the latest Adjustment Volumes and Volumes Settings specified in volumes.
To plot a sheet, make sure the visible sheet is the one to be plotted, then use the CAD
system’s Plotting Routine to create a plot file.
Figure 7-47 Mass Diagram Sheets Dialog Box
Mass Diagram Sheets Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Surfaces You can select the surface for which to create the mass diagram. You have the choice of
Design Earthwork or Actual Earthwork. For the Actual Surfaces you can choose which
actual surface to use.
Number The numerical value that RoadCalc uses to keep track of the currently defined design
mass diagram sheets.

Mass Diagram Sheets Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Description The starting and ending station values of each design mass diagram sheet.
New Mass Click on this icon to display the New Mass Diagram Sheet dialog box. Create one or more
Diagram Sheet mass diagram sheets. The number of sheets that are created depends on the overlap
distance and sheet size specified in sheet settings and the starting and ending station.
The CAD graphic files are not actually created until a sheet is highlighted and the View
button is selected.
For more information, see New Mass Diagram Sheets on page 323.
Delete Mass Click on this icon to delete the currently highlighted sheet. More than one sheet may be
Diagram Sheet highlighted by pressing the Shift or Ctrl keys while selecting the sheets. When a sheet is
deleted, the corresponding CAD graphic is deleted as well.
View Mass Click on this icon to select this to view the currently highlighted mass diagram sheet in the
Diagram Sheet manager.
Edit This allows you to adjust any of the settings for the mass diagram sheets. You can adjust
the following items by selecting the item from the drop list and clicking on the Edit button.
Sheet Settings: This allows you to specify the parameters for scale, gridlines,
height, length and grid line spacing.
For more information, see Edit Mass Diagram Sheet Settings on page 325.
CAD Settings: This allows you to specify what layer/level, linetype/linestyle,
color and text style/font to use for the various pieces of annotation.
For more information, see Edit Mass Diagram CAD Settings on page 326.
Precision: This allows you to specify what precision you want for volume
datums, cumulative volumes and balance stations.
For more information, see Edit Mass Diagram Precision on page 328.
Volume Settings: This allows you to specify the settings used to calculate the
mass volumes. Settings that can be set are horizontal curve correction, free
haul distance and ending percent compaction. The different original/actual
materials may be toggled on to be included in the mass volumes. Since the
mass volumes are affected, the mass diagram is affected as well.
For more information, see Edit Mass Diagram Volume Settings on page 328.
Format Library When creating mass diagram sheets, use this option to define and set custom formats for
system-wide use.
For more information, see Format Library on page 289.
322 RoadCalc
Example
The figure below is an example of a mass diagram sheet.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-48 Mass Diagram Sheets Example
New Mass Diagram Sheets

ROADCALC OUTPUT MASS DIAGRAM SHEETS NEW MASS DIAGRAM SHEETS
As different sheets in the Mass Diagram Sheets dialog box (Figure 7-49 on page 324) are
highlighted, click on the View button to view the selected mass diagram sheet.
In mass diagrams, if a drawing is loaded that is not the currently highlighted design mass
diagram sheet, click on the View button on the Mass Diagram Sheets dialog box (Figure 7-
47 on page 321) to view the highlighted mass diagram sheet.

Mass diagram sheets can be added to the RoadCalc sub-project by clicking on the New
button on the Mass Diagram Sheets dialog box. The New option displays the New Mass
Diagram Sheets dialog box (below) which prompts you for a starting and ending station.
Figure 7-49 New Mass Diagram Sheets Dialog Box
New Mass Diagram Sheets Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Alignment The beginning and ending stations of the alignment are displayed here for informational
Stationing purposes.
Profile The beginning and ending stations of the profile are displayed here for informational
Stationing purposes.
Cross-Section The beginning and ending stations of the cross-sections are displayed here for
Stationing informational purposes.
Starting Station Enter the numerical value for the beginning station to start the mass diagram sheet.
Ending Station Enter the numerical value for the ending station to end the mass diagram sheet. Multiple
sheets may be created depending on the sheet settings and the ending station.
324 RoadCalc
Edit Mass Diagram Sheet Settings
ROADCALC OUTPUT MASS DIAGRAM SHEETS SHEET SETTINGS OPTION EDIT
To edit the mass diagram sheet settings, select Sheet Settings from the drop list and click
on the Edit button. This allows you to specify the sheet size, scales and grid spacing.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-50 Edit Mass Diagram Sheet Settings Dialog Box
Edit Mass Dialog Sheet Settings Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Sheet Overlap The sheet overlap distance tells RoadCalc how much to overlap the stationing from one
sheet to the next when creating a new sheet. For example, a sheet overlap value of zero
tells RoadCalc to begin Sheet 2 exactly where Sheet 1 left off.
Horizontal Scale Specify the horizontal scale for the mass diagram in feet/meters. Any part of the sheet that
lies outside the sheet size is truncated.
Vertical Scale Specify the vertical scale of the mass diagram in cubic yards/cubic meters. Any part of the
sheet that lies outside the sheet size is truncated.
Sheet Direction This field indicates the direction that the mass diagram stationing runs on the sheet. For
example, if stationing runs to the right, RoadCalc starts the mass diagram along the left
edge of the sheet and creates the sheet to the right.
Sheet Length This allows you to specify the plotted limits of the design mass diagram sheet length (not
the overall paper length). The sheet length value should reflect the plotter’s “dead zone”
Sheet Height This allows you to specify the plotted limits of the design mass diagram sheet height (not
the overall paper height). The sheet height value should reflect the plotter’s “dead zone”

Edit Mass Dialog Sheet Settings Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Heavy This is the horizontal distance between the heavy vertical grid lines per feet or meters.
Horizontal Grid
Line Spacing
Heavy Vertical This is the vertical distance between the heavy horizontal grid lines per cubic yards or
Grid Line cubic meters.
Spacing
Fine Horizontal This is the horizontal distance between the fine vertical grid lines per feet or meters.
Grid Line
Spacing
Fine Vertical This is the vertical distance between the fine horizontal grid lines per cubic yards or cubic
Grid Line meters.
Spacing
Edit Mass Diagram CAD Settings

ROADCALC OUTPUT MASS DIAGRAM SHEETS CAD SETTINGS OPTION EDIT
The Edit Mass Diagram CAD Settings command allows you to specify the layer/level,
color, linetype/linestyle, text style, text size and text rotation for the different plot
parameters of the mass diagram sheet. You are also able to specify which plot parameters
are annotated on the sheet.
326 RoadCalc
The CAD settings for a particular parameter are modified by highlighting the parameter in
the listing and changing the corresponding parameters at the bottom of the dialog box.
Make any desired changes and click on the Apply button to accept the modifications.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-51 Mass Diagram CAD Settings Dialog Box
Mass Diagram CAD Settings Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Item This displays all of the items that can be annotated on a mass diagram sheet. The
available options that you can control the settings for are Mass Diagram, Balance Line,
Sheet, Grid Lines, stations, Reference Ordinate, Mass Ordinates, Balance Points, Status
Table, Adjustment Table, Balance Table and Scales.
Plot If you have this toggled on, the item will be plotted on the mass diagram sheet. If the
toggle is off, the item will not be plotted.
Layer/Level This is the layer/level for the selected item to be placed on when creating the design mass
diagram sheet.
Color This is the color of the item placed on the mass diagram sheet. If the CAD system used is
AutoCAD/BricsCad, you can have this set to BYLAYER to use the layer’s color.
Linetype/ Choose the linetype/linestyle for the parameter by entering the desired linetype/linestyle.
Linestyle If the CAD system you are using is AutoCAD or BricsCad, you must have the linetype
defined in the prototype drawing used. This option will not be available if the parameter
highlighted is a text parameter.
Weight This is the weight that is used for lines or text. This option is only available in MicroStation.
Text Style/Font This allows you to specify the desired text style/font for the parameter. This option will be
disabled if the selected parameter is a line parameter.
Text Size Specify the Text Size for the selected parameter.
Text Rotation Specify the text rotation for the selected parameter. This option is only available for text
parameters. When a positive value is entered, the text will rotate counterclockwise.

Edit Mass Diagram Precision
ROADCALC OUTPUT MASS DIAGRAM SHEETS PRECISION OPTIONS EDIT
The Edit Mass Diagram Precision command allows you to specify the different diagrams
of precision to be used by the various annotation routines on the Mass Diagram sheets.
The range of precision is from no decimal place to as many as eight places after the
decimal point. Select the Precision option from the Format drop list on the Mass Diagram
Sheets dialog box (Figure 7-47 on page 321) and click on the Edit button to display the
Edit Mass Diagram Precision dialog box (below).
The precision settings only affect the display of the values. They are not used in
calculations.
Figure 7-52 Edit Mass Diagram Precision Dialog Box
Edit Mass Diagram Precision Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Volume Datum This indicates the volumes that display on the left and right edges of the mass diagram
sheets. The volume datums display precision can be set by entering the number of places
after the decimal point to display. The slider control can be used, too. The precision can
have a value of 0 to 8.
Cumulative The Cumulative Volumes display precision can be set by entering the number places after
Volumes the decimal point to display. The slider control can be used too. The precision can have a
value of 0 to 8.
Balance Station The Balance Stations precisions are the locations the mass ordinate equal zero as well as
the beginning and ending locations. The Balance Stations display precision can be set by
entering the number places after the decimal point to display. The slider control can be
used too. The precision can have a value of 0 to 8.
Edit Mass Diagram Volume Settings

Volumes allows you to specify the settings used to calculate the mass volumes. The
Settings that can be set are horizontal curve correction, free haul distance and ending
percent compaction. The different original/actual materials may be toggled on to be
included in mass volumes. Since the mass volumes are affected, the mass diagram sheet
is affected as well.
328 RoadCalc
For more information see Volume Settings on page 356.
Breaklines from PT Codes

ROADCALC OUTPUT BREAKLINES FROM PT CODES
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcbrkpt
Chapter 7: Output
The Breaklines From PT Codes command allows you to create a graphic element in the
plan CAD graphic by connecting the same numbered PT Code between every cross-
section with a line segment. These line segments drawn are three dimensional so that
they may be used by Surface Modeling as breaklines. An option of Place at Elevation
Zero allows you to place the breaklines at a zero elevation. Placing the breaklines at a
zero elevation allows you to apply custom linetypes and have them display in the CAD
graphic correctly.
When the Create Breaklines From PT codes dialog box appears (shown below), you can
specify which surface, PT code and side to extract from. You can specify CAD settings for
the breaklines extracted as well.
Figure 7-53 Breaklines from PT Codes Dialog Box
Breaklines from PT Codes Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
PT Code The code placed on the typical section break point or cross-section from
which a breakline can be created.

Breaklines from PT Codes Dialog Box Definitions
Surface This is the surface on which the PT code was placed. This drop list will
display all surfaces and an option of All. If All is selected, all surfaces will be
evaluated to locate the specified PT code.
Side This allows you to specify whether the PT Code is defined in the cross-
sections on the left, right or both sides of the centerline.
Extract Toggle If you turn the toggle on, a breakline will be extracted from the specified PT
Code.
CAD Settings This allows you to specify the layer/level, color, linetype/linestyle for the
breakline.
Use Station Toggle this option on if you want to specify a station range to create the
Range breaklines. When this is toggled on, you will need to specify a beginning and
ending station. When this option is toggled off, the breakline will be created
for the entire length of the sub-project.
Beginning Enter the beginning station to extract the breakline. The stationing is in
Station reference to Centerline. This is only available if the Use Station Range
option is toggled on.
Ending Station Enter the ending station to extract the breakline. The stationing is in
reference to Centerline. This is only available if the Use Station Range
Place at Toggle this option on if you want the breaklines to be placed at an elevation
Elevation of zero instead of their three-dimensional elevation. Placing the breaklines
at an elevation of zero allows you to apply custom linetypes and have them
display in the CAD graphic correctly.
Profiles from PT Codes

ROADCALC OUTPUT PROFILES FROM PT CODES
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcprofpt

The Profile from PT Code command allows you to will generate profiles from the PT
Codes on the typical sections. After the typical sections have been processed through the
project once, profiles can be extracted from the PT Codes. The profile will consist of a
polyline/line string with line segments. At every station a typical section is applied; the
elevation of the selected PT Code is used on the profile. For example, a profile may be
needed of the proposed edge of pavement on the right side of the centerline. Assume the
PT Code used for the edge of pavement on the typical section is 9. This number is entered
in the Profile from PT Code dialog box (below). The surface selected is Des-Pavement
and the side is right. After the layer/level, linetype/linestyle and color settings are made,
330 RoadCalc
click on the Apply button. The result is a profile that is displayed in the profile CAD graphic
corresponding to the proposed edge of pavement.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-54 Profiles from PT Codes Dialog Box
Profiles from PT Codes Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
PT Code The code placed on the typical section or cross-section break point from which a profile is
to be created.
Surface This is the surface on which the PT code was placed. This drop list will display all surfaces
and an option of All. If All is selected, all surfaces will be evaluated to locate the specified
PT code.
Side This allows you to specify whether the PT code is defined in the cross-sections on the left,
right or both sides.
Extract If you turn this toggle on, a profile will be extracted from the specified PT code.
CAD Settings This allows you to specify the layer/level color and linetype/linestyle for the profile.
Use Station Toggle this option on if you want to specify a station range to create a profile from the PT
Range codes specified. When this is toggled on, you will need to specify a beginning and ending
station. When this option is toggled off, the profile will be created for the entire length of
the sub-project.
Beginning Enter the beginning station to extract the profile. The stationing is in reference to
Station Centerline. This is only available if the Use Station Range option is toggled on.
Ending Station Enter the ending station to extract the profile. The stationing is in reference to the
Centerline. This is only available if the Use Station Range option is toggled on.

Catchlines
ROADCALC OUTPUT CATCHLINES
KEY-IN COMMAND: rccatchl

The Catchlines command allows you to draw the catchlines (construction limits) in the
plan view. You can extract the catchlines in cut, fill or both. You can generate the
catchlines for the entire length of the project or over a specified station range. The
catchlines are created as three-dimensional polylines/complex chains so they may be
used by Surface Modeling as breaklines. An option of Place at Elevation Zero allows you
to place the catchlines at a zero elevation. Placing the catchlines at a zero elevation
allows you to apply custom linetypes and have them display in the CAD graphic correctly.
Also, you can specify the CAD settings, such as layer/level, color, and linetype/linestyle for
the catchlines.
Figure 7-55 Catchlines Dialog Box
Catchlines Dialog Box Definitions

Cut Toggle this on if you want to generate the catchlines for the cut condition.
Fill Toggle this on if you want to generate the catchlines for the fill condition.
Range catchlines. When this is toggled on, you will need to specify a beginning and
ending station. When this option is toggled off, the catchlines will be created
for the entire length of the sub-project.
Beginning Enter the beginning station to extract the catchline. The stationing is in
Station reference to the Centerline. This is only available if the Use Station Range
Ending Station Enter the ending station to extract the catchline. The stationing is in reference
to the Centerline. This is only available if the Use Station Range option is
toggled on.
332 RoadCalc
Catchlines Dialog Box Definitions
Place at Toggle this option on if you want the catchlines to be placed at an elevation of
Elevation Zero zero instead of their three-dimensional elevation. Placing the catchlines at an
elevation of zero allows you to apply custom linetypes and have them display
in the CAD graphic correctly.
CAD Settings This icon allows you to specify the layer/level, linetype/linestyle and color of
the catchlines.
Chapter 7: Output
3-D Faces
ROADCALC OUTPUT 3D FACES
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcface

The 3-D Faces command creates 3-D faces/shapes of design and original ground cross-
sections along the length of the RoadCalc project. Once placed into the CAD graphic,
these faces/shapes can be “shaded” using the render commands in the CAD package.
This allows graphical representations to be made of RoadCalc design surfaces for use in
alignment inspection and presentation.
The 3-D Faces command merges design-ground cross-sections with original-ground
cross-sections similar to the Export Cross-Sections command.
For more information, see Export Cross-Sections on page 137.
If cross-section stations exist that have the No Catch Slopes option toggled on, the
resulting faces at those stations will show the merged design surfaces minus the catch
slopes faces. The entire original ground surface will also be generated in addition to the
merged design.
Once the cross-section break points are merged together, the system reads the break
points at the beginning cross-section station and then does the same for the next station
location. Once these cross-section “shots” have been read, 3-D faces are created
between the cross-section shots.
RoadCalc’s 3-D faces command allows the 3-D faces/slopes to be placed into a user-
defined CAD graphic and on a user-defined layer/level. By default RoadCalc places the
3-D faces into the plan CAD graphic for the sub-project. You can specify the settings for
the 3-D faces or inherit the CAD settings from the original and design surface CAD
settings.

It is recommended that the RoadCalc 3-D faces be put on their own layer/level. This
safeguards against losing CAD graphic information that may be needed for a CAD
graphic.
Figure 7-56 3-D Faces Dialog Box
3-D Faces Dialog Box Definitions

Use Plan CAD Toggle this option on if you want to place the 3-D faces/shapes in the plan
Graphic CAD graphic. Otherwise the 3-D faces/shapes are placed in the CAD graphic
that is specified.
Use External Toggle this option on if you want to place the 3-D faces/shapes in a CAD
CAD Graphic graphic file that you specify. This will enable the File Name option, allowing
you to specify the desired CAD graphic file.
File Name Enter the path and name of the CAD graphic file in which the 3-D faces/
shapes will be placed. Clicking on the Open button opens a dialog box where
an existing CAD graphic file can be selected to place the 3-D faces/shapes in.
Use Station Toggle this option on if you want to specify a station range to create the 3-D
Range faces/shapes. When this is toggled on, you will need to specify a beginning
and ending station. When this option is toggled off, the 3-D faces/shapes will
be created for the entire length of the sub-project.
Beginning Enter the beginning station to create the 3-D faces/shapes. The stationing is
Station in reference to the Centerline. This is only available if the Use Station Range
Ending Station Enter the ending station to create the 3-D faces/shapes. The stationing is in
reference to the Centerline. This is only available if the Use Station Range
Vertical Stretch This allows you to stretch the 3-D faces vertically to show more relief. A
Factor vertical stretch factor of 1 will create the 3-D faces at their true elevation.
Create 3-D Toggle this on if you want to place the cross-section 3-D faces/shapes into a
Faces CAD graphic and onto a specified layer/level.
334 RoadCalc
3-D Faces Dialog Box Definitions
Erase 3-D Faces Toggle this option on to erase all the existing 3-D faces/shapes. Use this
command to clear the 3-D faces from the CAD graphic if your cross-section
data has changed.
Shade Faces This shades the 3-D faces/shapes using the render capabilities of the CAD
program.
CAD Settings This allows you to specify the layer/level and color for each of the surfaces for
which 3-D faces/shapes are created.
Chapter 7: Output
Inherit CAD Select this option to set all of the CAD Settings for the 3-D faces to be the
Settings same as the surface settings. The CAD Settings for all original and design
surfaces are used for the same 3-D face surface.
Inherit Elevation From Design

Running this command allows you to select certain nodes and have their elevation raised
or lowered according to the design in RoadCalc. The command first asks you to select the
nodes to raise or lower. Once the selection set is built and the OK button is clicked on, the
next dialog box displays asking you to specify where the original ground data should be
obtained when processing the design. An optional toggle allows you to display and print a
Station/Offset report after the Nodes have been raised or lowered. This report is similar to
the Report Station/Offset dialog box in COGO.
The command calculates the elevations of the nodes based on the locations they fall at
along your design corridor. Figure 7-57 on page 336 shows an alignment and seven nodes
placed at lot corners and other key locations. RoadCalc is being used for the preliminary
grading of these lots and the elevations of these nodes should be calculated by the design
profile and typical sections that RoadCalc processes. Because these nodes do not fall at
even stations, RoadCalc calculates the exact station and offsets of these points and then
processes them as temporary stations similar to the Run Design command (see Figure 7-
58 on page 337). This ensures that the calculated elevations follow your design inputs (i.e.
vertical curves, lane widenings, superelevation, etc.). If a node happens to fall at an
existing station in the cross-section list, RoadCalc will use the data contained on that
cross-section rather than reprocessing it. Figure 7-59 on page 337 shows the merged
design surface that the Inherit Elevation command uses to determine the finish grade
elevations. When a node falls outside of the typical section design, the elevation is

interpolated from the original ground cross-sections according to the setting for original
ground data.
Figure 7-57 Plan View of Nodes to Raise
336 RoadCalc
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-58 Node Stations to be Processed
Figure 7-59 Merged Design Surface Used for Elevation

Figure 7-60 Inherit Elevation from Design Dialog Box
Inherit Elevation from Design Dialog Box

Option Function
Selection Mode This option allows you to choose whether you are adding Nodes to the selection set or if
you are removing them from the selection set. If the selection mode is set to Select when
the Apply button is clicked, the Nodes will be added to the selection set. If the selection
mode is not selected, the Nodes will be removed from the selection set when the Apply
button is clicked.
Selection This option allows you to choose the method that will be used to select or deselect Nodes.
Method The available options are Single, Range, All, Name, AutoCAD/BricsCad/Fence, Proximity,
Description, Block/Cell, Field Code and Elevation Range.
For more information about these options, see COGO Report Station/Offset in the COGO
manual.
Total number of This value represents the number of Nodes that you have selected to raise or lower.
Nodes selected
Figure 7-61 Inherit Elevation from Design Dialog Box
338 RoadCalc
Inherit Elevation from Design Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Use Surface Toggle this option on to have RoadCalc use a surface model when calculating original
Model for ground data. Specify the surface model to use and the left and right corridor edges to
Original Ground define the extents of original ground data.
Data
Surface Model Specify the Surface Model name you wish to use when interpolating original ground data.
Use the All Surface Models button to select a surface model from a project other than the
current one.
Left Corridor Enter the offsets for the left corridor edge in the edit field to define how wide the cross-
Edge sections are to be. Enter a negative value for an offset left of centerline or a positive value
Chapter 7: Output
for an offset right of the centerline.
Right Corridor Enter the offsets for the right corridor edge in the field to define how wide the cross-
Edge sections are to be. Enter a negative value for an offset left of centerline or a positive value
for an offset right of the centerline.
Interpolate Toggle this option on to have RoadCalc perform a straight line interpolation of the original
Original Ground ground cross-section data by using the station data already defined in the sub-project.
Data from
Cross-Sections
Show Report Toggle this option on to display a Station/Offset report of the nodes you selected. You may
when Finished optionally print this information according to the options in the Print Setup command.
Information contained in the report includes Node ID, Station, Offset, Northing, Easting,
Elevation and Description.
Create Surface Model From Road

ROADCALC OUTPUT CREATE SURFACE MODEL FROM ROAD
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcroadmodel

The Create Surface Model From Road command allows you to create a surface model of
your road design. A surface model can be created from the “topmost” or “daylight” design
surfaces or only from the sub-grade surface. You specify what station range over which
the model is created and RoadCalc uses the cross-section data to build the model. All
original and actual surfaces are excluded from the surface model. A boundary for the
surface model is internally created and used for the surface model by slightly offsetting the
outermost points (catchpoints) at each station. The first and last stations are also offset so
all design data is enclosed. This boundary can be placed in the CAD graphic as a 2-D
polyline/complex chain using the Place Road Boundary option. Once placed in the CAD
graphic, the boundary can be manipulated and used as a user-defined boundary when
merging in additional models.
With the Merge Additional Models option toggled on, you can select models to merge with
the Road Surface Model created. The surface models are merged in the order they are

listed. Typical models to merge would be other roads and intersection models. When all
roads and intersection models are merged together, you can use the Merge Surface
Model command in Surface Modeling to merge to the existing ground surface model. You
can then create proposed contours using any of contour commands in Surface Modeling.
Figure 7-62 Create Surface Model From Road Dialog Box
Create Surface Model From Road Dialog Box Definitions

Road Surface This is the surface model that is used to create the Road Surface. Select the
Model desired surface model from the drop list or select the Manage Surface
Models icon to add a new model.
Manage Surface This allows you to display the Manage Surface Models dialog box so you can
Models add, modify, copy or delete a surface model. For more information, see
Manage Surface Models in the Surface Modeling manual.
Use Sub-grade Toggle this option on if you only want the sub-grade design surface model to
Design Surface be used when creating the road surface model. The sub-grade design
Only surface is the lowest design surface excluding undercut and overbreak.
Use Station Toggle this option on if you want to specify a station range to create the road
Range surface model between. When this is toggled on, you will need to specify a
beginning and ending station. When this option is toggled off, the road
surface model will be created for the entire length of the sub-project.
Beginning Enter the beginning station for the road surface model. The stationing is in
Station reference to the centerline alignment. This is only available when the Use
Station Range option is toggled on.
Reset BOP Select this icon if you want the station value in the Beginning Station edit field
Station to be reset back to the BOP station of the centerline alignment. This option is
only available when the Use Station Range option is toggled on.
Ending Station Enter the ending station for the road surface model. The stationing is in
reference to the centerline alignment. This is only available when the Use
Station Range option is toggled on.
340 RoadCalc
Create Surface Model From Road Dialog Box Definitions
Reset EOP Select this icon if you want the station value in the Ending Station edit field to
Station be reset back to the EOP station of the centerline alignment. This option is
only available when the Use Station Range option is toggled on.
CAD Settings This allows you to specify the CAD properties for the Road Surface Model
boundary such as layer/level, color, linetype/linestyle, and width/weight.
Place Road Select this option to place the boundary used to create the road surface
Boundary model in the CAD graphic as a 2-D polyline/complex chain. The boundary is
created by slightly offsetting the outermost points (catchpoints) at each
Chapter 7: Output
station. The first and last stations are also offset so all design data is
enclosed.
Merge Toggle this option on if you want to merge additional surface models to the
Additional road surface model. When using this option, the road surface model will be
Models created first. Once the road surface model is created, the additional surface
models selected are merged to the road surface model. Using this option
allows you to merge the road surface model with any intersection surface
models created.
Select Models This is used to select the surface models to merge to the road surface model.
When surface models are selected to merge to the road surface model,
“Multiple Models Selected” will display next to the Select Models button. This
option is only available when the Merge Additional Models option is toggled
on.
User-Defined This option allows you to specify an area that you want the merged surface
Boundary model to be restricted to. The merged surface model will be confined by the
user-defined boundary. If you want to merge the entire surface model to the
road surface model, you do not need to use this option.
Select Multiple Models to Merge

With the Merge Additional Models option toggled on, you can select models to merge with
the Road Surface Model created. In the Models to Merge list, the Road Surface Model will
be listed first. Use the Add button to add any of the Available Models to the Models to
Merge list or the Remove button to remove any of the models from the Models to Merge
list. Any surface models listed in the Models to Merge list will be merged to the road
surface model in the order they are listed. You can use the Move Model Up and Move
Model Down arrows to establish the order to merge the surface models.
When merging multiple models to the road surface model, the road surface model is
created first. Once the road surface model is created, the remaining models in the Models
to Merge list will be merged to the road surface model one by one. Typical models to
merge to the road surface model would be other roads and intersection models. When all
roads and intersection models are merged together, you can use the Merge Surface

Model command in Surface Modeling to merge to the existing ground surface model. You
can then create proposed contours using any of contour commands in Surface Modeling.
Figure 7-63 Select Multiple Models to Merge Dialog Box
Select Multiple Models to Merge Dialog Box Definitions

Models to Merge This list displays all of the surface models that will be merged to the Road
Surface Model. The Road Surface Model is always the first surface model
listed. All other surface models listed will be merged to the road surface
model in the order they are listed. You can add any of the Available Models to
this list using the Add button or remove any from the list using the Remove
button. Using the Move Models Up or Move Models Down icons allows you to
change the order the Models to Merge are listed.
Move Model Up Use this icon to change the order of the surface models in the Models to
Merge list. The highlighted surface model in the list will be moved up one
position in the list with each click on the icon. The surface model being
moved cannot be moved above the Road Surface Model (first surface model
in the list).
Move Model Use this icon to change the order of the surface models in the Models to
Down Merge list. The highlighted surface model in the list will be moved down one
position in the list with each click on the icon. The Road Surface Model (first
surface model in the list) cannot be moved down in the list.
Add This adds the highlighted surface models in the Available Models list to the
Models to Merge list. The surface models are then removed from the
Available Models list. These surface models will be added to the bottom of
the Models to Merge list. If you need to change the order the surface models
are merged to the road surface model, use the Move Model Up and Move
Model Down commands.
Remove This removes the highlighted surface models in the Models to Merge list and
places them in the Available Models list. The Road Surface Model cannot be
removed from the Models to Merge list.
Available This displays all of the surface models in the project that have not been
Models added to the Models to Merge list. Highlight the models to merge to the road
surface model and click on the Add button.
342 RoadCalc
Volume Concepts
The Volumes routines calculate and display pavement and earthwork volumes. They also
allow any waste, borrow, extra cut or extra fill to be entered and compaction factors to be
taken into account.
RoadCalc provides three basic categories of earthwork volumes. Which categories are
available depends on the surfaces defined in the sub-projects Surface Manager.
Pavement Volumes. If the project contains more than one design surface, RoadCalc
considers the upper design surfaces to be pavement surfaces. This routine displays
Chapter 7: Output
the end areas and volumes for each pavement layer.
Design Earthwork Volumes. These are the cut and fill volumes obtained when
RoadCalc applies the lowest design surface to the original materials.
Actual Earthwork Volumes. These are the cut and fill volumes obtained when
RoadCalc applies an actual surface to the original surfaces or other actual surfaces.
The cut and fill can be viewed based on one actual surface only, or view the combined
cuts and fills for several actual surfaces.
Raw Volumes
Cut and fill areas and volumes are “raw volumes” before compaction factors are applied.
RoadCalc calculates the end areas either when the design is run or after entering and
editing cross-section data. The cut area is the region bounded below by the lowest design
surface and above by the highest original surface. If there is more than one original
surface, RoadCalc shows the cut area for each of the original materials defined. The fill
area is bounded above by the lowest design and below by the highest original. If a layer is
a strip layer, then fill is taken down to the bottom of the strip layer, and the entire strip layer

between the catchpoints is taken as cut. The figure below shows cut and fill areas when
the top layer is and is not a strip layer.
Figure 7-64 End Areas
RoadCalc computes volumes only when volumes are viewed or printed. It does not store
the volumes in a data file. RoadCalc computes the volumes by averaging the end areas at
adjacent stations and multiplying this average by the distance between the stations. The
cut and fill volumes come from the cut and fill end areas, respectively. The volume shown
for a particular station is the volume between that station and the prior station. As with
pavement volumes, RoadCalc corrects the volumes for horizontal curvature if a horizontal
alignment with a curve was entered.
Mass Volumes
Once compaction factors are applied to cut and fill volumes they can be considered “mass
volumes.” If one original material exists, RoadCalc applies its compaction factor to the fill
(or cut) throughout the job. If there is more than one original material, RoadCalc averages
the compaction factors of the various materials and uses the average factor on the fill
volumes (or cut volumes). The program weights the averages by the quantity of cut or fill
of each original material in each balance zone.
Weighted Compaction Factor:
[ A1 × C1 + A2 × C2 + A3 × C3 ]
C w = --------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
A1 + A2 + A3 + …
7.1
where:
344 RoadCalc
A1 = Area of original material 1
C1 = Compaction factor of material 1
Cw = Weighted compaction factor
The following table provides an overview of the compaction factor and its effect on the
compacted volume.
Compaction Factors
Chapter 7: Output
SHRINK (Negative) SWELL (Positive)
Applied to Cut Result: The material cut is excavated and Result: The material cut is excavated and
occupies less volume than was computed occupies more volume than was computed
by the system. by the system.
Applied to Fill Result: The material of a larger volume is Result: The material of a lesser volume is
brought in and compacted to occupy the full brought in and swelled to occupy the fill
volume computed by the system. volume computed by the system.
Volume Reports
ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES REPORTS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcvols
ICON:
The Volume Reports command provides access to the reports of Pavement Volumes,
Design Earthwork Volumes and Actual Earthwork Volumes. These reports quantify the
amount of material that is placed or removed from the site. Additional commands on this
dialog box provide a means to calculate balance points in your mass haul report,
customize pay amounts for the different materials, adjust volumes station by station
adding "spot" amounts of material, establish borrow pits for needed fill, apply a
compaction factor over a range of stations and to setup zones where volumes should
taper to zero.
For more information refer to:
Volume Concepts on page 343; Pavement Volumes on page 346; Design Earthwork
Volumes on page 348; Actual Earthwork Volumes on page 350; Balance Points on page
354; Volume Settings on page 356, Volume Pay Units on page 360, Adjustment Volumes

on page 361, Borrow Pits on page 364, Compaction Zones on page 365 and Zero
Volumes on page 368.
Pavement Volumes
ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES PAVEMENT OPTION
It is desirable to know the volumes for each of the surfaces which have been generated
using the RoadCalc Typical Sections. The reports generated by Pavements allow
volumes and also weighted costs to be determined, saving you valuable time when
estimating costs and materials on projects. The Pavement option opens design surface
reports for the sub-project.
RoadCalc computes volumes using the average end area method. For each station,
RoadCalc displays the total pavement end area in the End Area column and the total
pavement volume in the Volume column. After the last station, the program shows the
totals for the entire sub-project.
For your convenience, the selected Volume Type and the column widths for each volume
type can be sized according to your needs or desires. The volume type and column widths
are saved for the current sub-project. This allows you to return to the Volume Reports
dialog box with the previous volume type and column widths set accordingly.
To size a column, move you cursor to the column separator in the heading. These are the
vertical lines that separate Station, Material, End Area, Volume, Pay Units, and Cost.
When your cursor changes to a vertical line and arrows pointing to the left and right, click
and hold your primary button on your pointing device. Move your cursor in the direction in
which you want the column to be sized. For example, if you want to column to be
346 RoadCalc
increased in width, move your cursor to the right. To stop sizing the column, release your
primary button on your pointing device.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-65 Pavement Volumes Dialog Box
Pavement Volumes Dialog Box Definitions

Station This column gives the current list of all the cross-sections that have been
specified in the project.
Material This column identifies the pavement surfaces used.
End Area This field shows the end area of each pavement surface at each station.
Volume The volume between this station and the prior station is listed in this field.
Pay Units This column indicates the unit of measure used for pay. For example, type SY
for asphalt if it is to be measured in square yards.
Cost This column indicates the cost of the material per station.
Settings Click on this button to specify how RoadCalc computes volumes and what
materials are displayed in the Volume Reports dialog box.
For more information, see Volume Settings on page 356.
Pay Units Click on this button to set parameters to determine the cost of the materials.
For more information, see Volume Pay Units on page 360.
Print Click on this icon to send the dialog box information to an output device (printer
or ASCII file).

Design Earthwork Volumes
ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES DESIGN EARTHWORK OPTION
Design Earthwork Volumes are the volumes that RoadCalc obtains when it applies the
lowest design surface (except undercut and overbreak) to the top original surface. The
Design Earthwork option calculates earthwork reports for the sub-project.
Both areas and volumes are generated for the Design Earthwork surfaces, including
separate sections where compaction is taken into account. Zones of different compaction
are easily added, as well as areas of zero volumes. This way you can see and compare
the effect of the compaction and accurate cost estimating can be accomplished.
Settings provides a means to control what factors you wish to take into account when the
volumes are calculated. Balance points are reported and Adjustments can be made to
account for excess cut and fill material. All of these factors are taken into account to
accurately estimate quantities and costs of projects.
vertical lines that separate Station, Material, Cut Area, Cut Volume, Fill Area, Fill Volume,
Compacted Cut, Compacted Fill, and Mass Ordinate. When your cursor changes to a
vertical line and arrows pointing to the left and right, click and hold your primary button on
your pointing device. Move your cursor in the direction in which you want the column to be
sized. For example, if you want to column to be increased in width, move your cursor to
the right. To stop sizing the column, release your primary button on your pointing device.
348 RoadCalc
The Station and Material columns are locked so that when you scroll horizontally they stay
in place.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-66 Design Earthwork Volumes Dialog Box
Design Earthworks Volumes Dialog Box Definitions

Material This column identifies the original surfaces used.
Cut Area This column indicates the cut area in square feet or square meters of each
surface at this station.
Cut Volume This column indicates the cut volume in cubic yards or cubic meters of each
surface between this station and the one prior.
Fill Area This column indicates the fill area in square feet or square meters of each
Fill Volume This column indicates the fill volume in cubic yards or cubic meters of each
Compacted Cut This column indicates the cut volume in cubic yards or cubic meters with the
compaction factor applied to it.
Compacted Fill This column indicates the fill volume in cubic yards or cubic meters with the
Mass Ordinate The mass ordinate is the sum of the cumulated cut (positive) and cumulated fill
(negative) volumes at each station. A positive mass ordinate indicates an
excess of material at the station; a negative ordinate, a shortage. A zero
ordinate indicates a balance of cut and fill at that station.

Design Earthworks Volumes Dialog Box Definitions
Balance Points Click on this button to display the station value where the amount of cut
material is equal to the amount of fill material taking the compaction factors into
account.
For more information, see Balance Points on page 354.
Settings Click on this button for options to specify how RoadCalc computes volumes
and what materials are displayed in the Volumes Reports dialog box.
Pay Units Click on this button to set the parameters to determine the cost of materials.
Adjustments Any additional cut or fill material can be placed into RoadCalc through the
Adjustment Volumes dialog box, which can be accessed by clicking on this
button.
For more information, see Adjustment Volumes on page 361.
Borrow Pits Click on this button for options to specify where borrow material will come from
and over what station range the material should be used from a borrow pit.
For more information, see Borrow Pits on page 364.
Compaction This option allows you to specify compaction zones for specific materials.
Zones
For more information, see Compaction Zones on page 365.
Zero Volumes Click on this button to allow areas of no volume to be specified. An example of
this would be at a bridge location.
For more information, see Zero Volumes on page 368.
or ASCII file).
Actual Earthwork Volumes

ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES ACTUAL EARTHWORK OPTION
RoadCalc calculates actual end areas after actual surfaces are entered and edited in
cross-sections. With actual surfaces, end areas and volumes can be viewed between an
actual surface and an original surface, or between an actual surface and another actual
surface. For example, if there were actual surfaces for JULY and AUGUST, and AUGUST
volumes were selected to be viewed, end areas and volumes could be seen for the work
done in August, or for all the work done on the sub-project through August, including July.
To select the desired mode, open the Volume Settings dialog box and on the Calculation
Tab use the toggle button labeled Include Volumes from Prior Actuals.
For more information, see Volume Settings – Calculation Tab on page 358.
Original strip layers are treated the same way for actual surfaces as for design.
350 RoadCalc
vertical lines that separate Station, Material, Cut Area, Cut Volume, Fill Area, Fill Volume,
Compacted Cut, Compacted Fill, and Mass Ordinate. When your cursor changes to a
vertical line and arrows pointing to the left and right, click and hold your primary button on
your pointing device. Move your cursor in the direction in which you want the column to be
sized. For example, if you want to column to be increased in width, move your cursor to
Chapter 7: Output
the right. To stop sizing the column, release your primary button on your pointing device.
Because Actual Earthwork is used to track the progress of a project, information for
Borrow Pits, Compaction Zones, and Zero Volumes are not considered. These buttons are
inactive on the dialog box.
Since Actual Earthwork Volumes are generally mid-project, they can be effectively used
for adjusting timelines and for contractors with terms to be paid as they go.
The Station and Material columns are locked so that when you scroll horizontally they stay
in place.
Figure 7-67 Actual Earthwork Volumes Dialog Box

Actual Earthwork Volumes Dialog Box Definitions
Material This column identifies the actual surfaces used.
Cut Area This column indicates the cut area in square feet or square meters of each
Cut Volume This column indicates the cut volume in cubic yards or cubic meters of each
Fill Area This column indicates the fill area in square feet or square meters of each
Fill Volume This column indicates the fill volume in cubic yards or cubic meters of each
Compacted Cut This column indicates the cut volume in cubic yards or cubic meters with the
Compacted Fill This column indicates the fill volume in cubic yards or cubic meters with the
Mass Ordinate The mass ordinate is the sum of the cumulated cut (positive) and cumulated fill
(negative) volumes at each station. A positive mass ordinate indicates an
excess of material at the station; a negative ordinate, a shortage. A zero
ordinate indicates a balance of cut and fill at that station.
Balance Points Click on this button to display the station value where the amount of cut
material is equal to the amount of fill material taking the compaction factors into
account.
For more information, see Balance Points on page 354.
Settings Click on this button to access options to specify how RoadCalc computes
volumes and what materials are displayed in the Volumes Reports dialog box.
Pay Units Click on this button to set the parameters to determine the cost of materials.
Adjustments Any additional cut or fill material can be placed into RoadCalc through the
Adjustment Volumes dialog box, which is accessed by clicking on this button.
For more information, see Adjustment Volumes on page 361.
Borrow Pits Click on this button for options to specify where borrow material will come from
and over what station range the material should be used from a borrow pit.
For more information, see Borrow Pits on page 364.
Compaction This option allows you to specify compaction zones for specific materials.
Zones
For more information, see Compaction Zones on page 365.
Zero Volumes Click on this button to allow areas of no volume to be specified. An example of
this would be at a bridge location.
For more information, see Zero Volumes on page 368.
352 RoadCalc
Actual Earthwork Volumes Dialog Box Definitions
or ASCII file).
Example
There are many potential uses for RoadCalc’s Actual Surfaces, but the most common
use is to track the placement and removal of material on a job site. RoadCalc uses cross-
section end areas to compute volumes for Actual Surfaces just like design surfaces, but
Chapter 7: Output
there is one important difference. The end areas computed for cut and fill on a design are
always computed to the top-most Original Surface, but the end areas for a given Actual
Surface are computed to the Actual Surface that appears directly above it in the Surface
Manager. The exception to this rule is that the end area for the top-most Actual Surface
will be computed to the top-most Original Surface. This design allows RoadCalc to keep
volumes separate by date or by stage. For example, a contract may be written such that
the contractor is to be paid monthly for material movement and hauling. Assuming there is
already an Original Surface in RoadCalc, surveys are taken at the end of each month to
determine how much material has been moved or cut or filled and how it compares to
design. Below is an example section of an overpass fill section at the end of the first
month.
Figure 7-68 Actual Surface – Example 1

At the end of the second month, the same section has the surcharge removed and is
being cut down to subgrade as shown in the example below.
Figure 7-69 Actual Surface – Example 2
Balance Points
ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES BALANCE POINTS
The Balance Points dialog box (Figure 7-71 on page 355) lists the stations of the balance
points. A balance point is a point where the mass ordinate is zero. For each balance zone
(the region between two balance points), it lists the total cut and fill, the average
compaction factor, and the overhaul in station-yards (station-meters).
Overhaul is any material hauled a distance greater than the freehaul distance. The
overhaul quantity is the volume hauled multiplied by the distance hauled minus the
freehaul distance. Distances are measured in stations.
To calculate the overhaul quantity in a balance zone, RoadCalc must assume a particular
haul pattern. Starting at the beginning of the balance zone, if there is an excess of
material, RoadCalc assumes it is hauled to the next station where there is a shortage. If
there is a shortage, the program assumes it is hauled from the next station where there is
an excess. RoadCalc moves through the balance zone in this way until it reaches the
balance station at the end of the zone.
The figure below illustrates the haul pattern for a small balance zone. In this example, the
overhaul would be
V 1 × ( D 1 – 100 ) + V 2 × ( D 2 – 1000 ) + V 3 × ( D 3 – 1000 )
7.2
354 RoadCalc
assuming a freehaul distance of 1000. If any of the D-1000 terms are negative, they are
ignored.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-70 Balance Points Haul Pattern
Figure 7-71 Balance Points Dialog Box
Balance Points Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Index This column displays the Balance Point number including the beginning and end of
project.
Station This column displays the station at BOP, EOP and each balance point.
Cut This is the cut volume including extra cut but not including waste. The waste not included
is what was entered in adjustment volumes.
Fill This is the fill volume including extra fill but not including borrow. The borrow not included
is what was entered in adjustment volumes.
Average% Comp Displays the average compaction. If there is extra fill needed for the project (a shortage),
the fill required beyond what is available will be assumed to have a compaction factor of 0.
The Ending% Compaction in settings specifies what the borrow compaction should be if
fill is required from off site.
Overhaul The material hauled in excess of the freehaul distance. This is displayed in station-yards
(station-meters).

Balance Points Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Settings Contains options that control how RoadCalc will calculate and report volumes.
For more information, see Volume Settings, below.
Print Sends the dialog box information to an output device (printer or ASCII file).
Volume Settings
ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES SETTINGS
The Volume Settings command has options that control how RoadCalc displays and
computes the earthwork volumes. For display, you can select the materials shown, the
range of stations to report the volumes and the precision of the end areas and volumes.
For calculations, you can control adjustments for horizontal curves, inclusion of undercut
volumes, use of zonal compaction, inclusion of volumes for prior actuals, inclusion of
material outside overbreak lines, free haul distance, use of the compaction factor to be
applied to cut or fill, and the end percent compaction factor.
For more information, see Volume Settings – Display Tab on page 356 and Volume
Settings – Calculation Tab on page 358.
Setting information which does not have an effect on volume calculations for a specific
volume type selected will be disabled.
Volume Settings – Display Tab

ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES SETTINGS DISPLAY TAB
The Volume Settings – Display Tab has options that control how RoadCalc volumes are
reported. You determine which surfaces are included in calculations by toggling on the
Include toggle for each surface.
Options are also included to limit the volume report to only a portion of the project length
and to set the precision for displaying the calculated volumes and areas.
356 RoadCalc
For each Volume Type (Pavement, Design Earthwork, or Actual Earthwork), the
corresponding surfaces will be displayed in the listing of materials. The volumes will only
be included if the individual toggles are set to Include.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-72 Volume Settings Dialog Box – Display Tab
Volume Settings Dialog Box – Display Tab Definitions

Option Function
Volume Type This displays the setting for either pavement, design earthwork, or actual earthwork.
Include This toggle determines whether or not the surface is to be included in volumes.
Material The surface names for each specified volume type (Pavement, Design Earthwork, Actual
Earthwork).
Use Station Toggle this option on if you want to specify a station range to display the volumes. When
Range this is toggled on, you will need to specify a beginning and ending station. When this
option is toggled off, the volumes will be displayed for the entire length of the sub-project.
Station Range When Use Station Range is toggled on, the Beginning field becomes active. Type in the
Beginning station that is to begin the report. This allows the reporting of only volumes within a certain
range.
Station Range When the Use Station Range is toggled on, the Report End field becomes active. Type the
Ending station that is to end the report.
Precision This controls the precision for the volumes and end areas. For example, if the precision is
set to 0.01, the quantities will be displayed to the hundredths place. The calculations are
still carried out to full precision.

Volume Settings – Calculation Tab
ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES SETTINGS CALCULATION TAB
The Volume Settings – Calculation tab has options that control how RoadCalc computes
the Earthwork volumes. You can control adjustments for horizontal curves, include
undercut volumes, use zonal compaction, include volumes for prior actuals, include
material outside overbreak lines, specify a free haul distance, specify if the compaction
factor is applied to the cut or fill and specify the ending compaction factor.
Horizontal Curve Correction
If a horizontal alignment has been entered, RoadCalc adjusts the volumes to account for
horizontal curvature. It does this by using the centroid of the end areas to adjust the
distance between cross-sections in curve zones, as the following figure illustrates. This
adjustment is made not only to pavement volumes, but design earthwork and actual
earthwork volumes as well.
Figure 7-73 Volume Corrections for Curves
358 RoadCalc
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-74 Volume Settings Dialog Box – Calculation Tab
Volume Settings Dialog Box – Calculation Tab Definitions

Option Function
Volume Type Displays settings for either Pavement, Design Earthwork, or Actual Earthwork.
Adjust for If a horizontal alignment has been entered, RoadCalc adjusts the volumes to account for
Horizontal horizontal curvature. It does this by using the centroid of the end areas to adjust the
Curves distance between cross-sections in curve zones.
Include Toggle this option on to include undercut volumes for Design Earthwork calculations.
Undercut
Volumes
Use Zonal Toggle on this option to use compaction zones instead of compaction factors that may
Compaction have been applied to the original materials under Manage Surfaces in the Cross-Section
menu.
Include Volume If there is more than one actual surface, the option exists to include the volumes for only
from Prior the indicated actual surface or from all of the surfaces listed before the indicated surface.
Actuals For example, if you had actual surfaces for July and August and chose to view August
volumes, you could see volumes included for the work in August or for all of the work done
in the sub-project through August, including the work done in July. Toggle this option to
include volumes for prior Actual Earthwork.
Include Material Toggle this option on to include material outside a defined overbreak line in the Actual
Outside Earthwork Volumes.
Overbreak Lines
Freehaul Set the freehaul distance used to calculate overhaul on the Balance Point dialog box for
Distance either Design or Actual Earthwork. This is the distance that material can be hauled without
incurring hauling charges.

Volume Settings Dialog Box – Calculation Tab Definitions
Option Function
Compaction Apply the compaction factor to cut volumes or fill volumes of Design or Actual Earthwork.
Applied To
Ending% Specify a compaction factor for any fill that will be included as borrow due to the lack of cut
Compaction material for either Design or Actual Earthwork.
Volume Pay Units

ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES PAY UNITS
The Pay Units option is a feature in RoadCalc that can be used to set up the volume
reports so that any type of volume and cost can be reported. The conversion factor can be
used to convert cubic yards (cubic meters) into any other volume quantity. For example, a
conversion factor of 27 might be used to convert cubic yards to cubic feet. The pay unit
label is the label used to designate the units of the of the converted volumes.
Figure 7-75 Volume Pay Units Dialog Box
Volume Pay Units Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Material This displays a list of the pavement surfaces used in the sub-project.
Conversion This allows conversion from cubic yards (meters) to another unit of measure.
Factor
Pay Unit Label This displays the label for the units for pay.
Unit Cost This displays the cost per unit of measure.
Cost Label This displays the label for cost. For example: U.S. Dollars.
360 RoadCalc
Example
The Pay Units option allows for flexibility in getting the desired volume information. Here is
an example of how Pay Units can be used.
We want to get a quantity of asphalt (in tons) and the total cost for the material. Assume
that the unit weight of asphalt is 140 lbs/cubic foot. A conversion factor needs to be
calculated to convert cubic yards to tons. This is the formula used to arrive at the
conversion factor:
Chapter 7: Output
27cubic feet 140lbs 1ton
1cubic yard × -------------------------------- × -------------------------- × -------------------- = 1.89
1cubic yard cubic feet 2000lbs
7.3
From the calculation above, 1.89 would be entered for the conversion factor for asphalt.
Adjustment Volumes
ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES ADJUSTMENTS
Enter extra cut, extra fill, waste or borrow at specified stations in the Adjustment Volumes
dialog box (Figure 7-76 on page 362). RoadCalc will combine the raw volumes and the
adjustment volumes in the Mass Volume columns and Balance Points dialog box (Figure
7-71 on page 355), and on the mass diagram.
Extra cut is any cut not represented on the cross-sections that will be available for fill. If
removing a field entrance, for example, account for the extra material by entering it as
extra cut. If more than one original layer exists, indicate how much of each material is
being cut. Extra cut volumes are volumes in place before cutting. In place means the
program will use the compaction factors for each of the original materials for cut quantities
if the compaction factor is applied to cut.
Extra fill is any fill not represented on the cross-sections that must be filled with material
cut on-site. For example, if building a field entrance, the required volume of material could
be entered as extra fill. Extra fill volumes are in place quantities. Enter the value before a
compaction factor is applied. The compaction factor for fill will be applied in mass volumes
if a compaction factor is specified for each original material in Manage Surfaces.
Waste is any material cut and hauled off the construction site. Waste volumes are volumes
of material in place before cutting. If there is more than one original material, the amount
of each material being wasted can be specified. To facilitate overhaul calculations, enter
the distance each material will be hauled.

For overhaul calculations, enter the distance the material will be hauled and the materials
compaction factor using a negative percentage for shrinkage and a positive percentage for
swell.
The Station and Material columns are locked so that when you scroll they stay in place.
Figure 7-76 Adjustment Volumes Dialog Box
Adjustment Volumes Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Station This column specifies at which station the volume adjustment will occur.
Material This column designates what material is being adjusted.
Extra Cut This column specifies the volume of extra cut in cubic yards (meters) available.
Waste This column specifies the volume of waste material to be removed from the site in cubic
yards (meters).
Haul Distance This column designates the haul distance for each material using extra cut or waste.
Extra Fill This column specifies the volume of extra fill required in cubic yards (meters).
Borrow This column specifies the volume of material to be brought from offsite in cubic yards
(meters).
Haul Distance This column designates the haul distance in feet (meters) for each material using extra fill
or borrow.
% Compaction This is the percent compaction used for the borrow quantity.
Pit Name This column specifies which predefined borrow pit is used for the borrow material.
Comment Place to add any additional comments you would like included about the adjustment.
New Adjustment This allows you to add an adjustment at a specific station.
Volume
For more information, see New Adjustment Volume on page 363.
Modify This allows you to change adjustment values for the currently highlighted station.
Adjustment
For more information, see New Adjustment Volume on page 363.
Volume
Delete Click on this icon to delete the adjustment at the highlighted station.
Print Click on this icon to send the dialog box information to an output device (printer or ASCII
file).
362 RoadCalc
New Adjustment Volume
The New Adjustment Volume command allows you to add an adjustment to the volumes
at a specified station. In the Station field, enter the station at which the adjustment occurs.
Enter numbers for more than one field if there is more than one type of adjustment
occurring at this station. You can enter adjustments of extra cut, waste and the haul
distance. You can also enter any extra fill, borrow quantity, haul distance, borrow pit, and
any comments. The New and Modify Adjustment Volume dialog boxes are identical. The
following figure shows the New Adjustment Volume dialog box as an example.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-77 New Adjustment Volume Dialog Box
New Adjustment Volume Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Station Specify the station at which the volume adjustment will occur.
Material Designate what material is being adjusted.
Extra Cut Specify the volume of extra cut available in cubic yards (meters).
Waste Specify the volume of waste material to be removed from the site in cubic yards (meters).
Haul Distance This designates the haul distance for each material using extra cut or wasting.
Extra Fill Specify the volume of extra fill required in cubic yards (meters).
Borrow Quantity This specifies the volume of material to be brought from offsite in cubic yards (meters).
Haul Distance Designates the haul distance in feet (meters) for each material using extra fill or borrow.
Borrow Pit Specifies which predefined borrow pit to use when borrowing material.
Comment This is where a comment can be entered that describes the adjustment being made.

Borrow Pits
ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES BORROW PITS
The Borrow Pits command allows one or more borrow pits to be defined for use by
RoadCalc. Each borrow pit has its own description of what the borrow pit represents.
Starting and ending stations are entered to delineate where the borrow material may be
used on the project. The stationing is in reference to the Centerline stationing. A percent
compaction factor for the borrow material is entered for each borrow pit. If you have
borrow pits defined, the compaction factor specified for the borrow pit will be used for any
borrow that is specified in Adjustment Volumes that occurs within the station range of the
borrow pit.
Figure 7-78 Borrow Pits Dialog Box
Borrow Pits Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Pit Name This is the description of the borrow pit.
Start Station This is the starting station of the zone where the borrow may be used.
End Station This is the ending station of the zone where the borrow may be used.
% Compaction This is the percent compaction to be used for the borrow pit. A positive number indicates
swell; negative numbers indicate shrinkage.
Compacted This specifies whether or not compaction was applied.
New Borrow Pit This allows you to add a new borrow pit by defining the stations, percent compaction, and
whether it has been compacted or not.
For more information, see New Borrow Pit on page 365.
Modify Borrow This option allows the currently highlighted borrow pit parameters to be modified.
Pit This is nearly identical to New Borrow Pit. For more information, see New Borrow Pit on
page 365.
Delete Borrow Click on this icon to remove the highlighted borrow pit from the listing.
Pit
Print Sends the dialog box information to an output device (printer or ASCII file).
364 RoadCalc
New Borrow Pit
The New Borrow Pit command allows you to add a borrow pit to the sub-project. You need
to add the starting and ending station for the limits the borrow pit can be used. Also, you
can enter a percent compaction for the borrow pit material and whether it is compacted or
not. The New and Modify Borrow Pit dialog boxes are identical. The following figure shows
the New Borrow Pit dialog box as an example.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-79 New Borrow Pit Dialog Box
New Borrow Pit Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Pit Name This is a description of the borrow pit.
Starting Station This is the starting station of the zone where the borrow may be used.
Ending Station This is the ending station of the zone where the borrow may be used.
% Compaction This is the percent compaction to be used for the borrow pit. A positive number indicates
swell; negative numbers indicate shrinkage.
Compacted Select the Yes radio button to indicate that the borrow material is already compacted
when brought on site. Toggle this option to No to indicate that the borrow material is not
compacted when brought on site. The borrow % compaction factor will be used to
compact the material.
Compaction Zones
ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES COMPACTION ZONES
The Compaction Zones command allows you to enter zones or stations to which you can
apply different compaction factors. If you use zonal compaction factors, RoadCalc ignores
any compaction factors that may have been assigned to the original materials in the
Manage Surfaces portion of the Cross-Sections menu. The following figure gives an
example of how a compaction zone can be used.

To use Compaction Zones in volumes calculations, the option must be toggled on in the
Volume Settings – Calculations tab (Figure 7-74 on page 359).
Figure 7-80 Compaction Zones
Figure 7-81 Compaction Zones Dialog Box
Compaction Zones Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Material This drop list specifies the material to which the compaction zone is being applied.
Station This is a list of stations that indicate the start and end of each compaction zone.
% Compaction This is the percent compaction to be used for the zone. The compaction factor for the
zone displays with the begin station.
366 RoadCalc
Compaction Zones Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
New This allows you to enter a new zone station and percent compaction to be used.
Compaction For more information, see New Compaction Zone, below..
Zone
Modify This allows you to modify the zone station and zone percent compaction for the currently
Compaction highlighted station.
Zone
For more information, see New Compaction Zone, below.
Delete Click on this icon to remove the highlighted compaction zone from the listing.
Compaction
Zone
Chapter 7: Output
file).
Settings Click on this button for options that control how RoadCalc will calculate and report
volumes.
New Compaction Zone

ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES COMPACTION ZONES NEW COMPACTION ZONE
The New Compaction Zone command allows you to add a zone at which you apply a
compaction factor. Enter the station at the beginning of a compaction zone, and the
compaction factor for that zone. Enter compaction factors as percentages, using negative
numbers for shrinkages and positive numbers for swells. Any regions on the sub-project
that are outside the defined compaction zones will have a compaction factor of zero. The
New and Modify dialog boxes are identical. The figure below shows the New Compaction
Zone dialog box as an example.
To make RoadCalc use the defined compaction zones, open the Volumes Settings box
and toggle on Use Zonal Compaction. RoadCalc then recalculates volumes, mass
ordinates, balance zones and overhaul quantities with the zonal compaction factors
instead of the factors assigned to the original materials.
Figure 7-82 New Compaction Zone Dialog Box

New Compaction Zone Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Station This indicates beginning station of the compaction zone.
Percent This indicates the percent compaction used in the zone. This percent compaction will be
Compaction used from the beginning station of the compaction zone to the next beginning station.
Zero Volumes
ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES ZERO VOLUMES
Zero volume areas are zones where RoadCalc is not to calculate volumes. An example
where this may occur is at a bridge. To enter a zero volume, enter the starting and ending
stations. To transition into and out of the zero volumes area, a starting and ending
transition value is also entered. See the figure below for a diagram of how Zero Volumes
works.
Figure 7-83 Zero Volumes Diagram
368 RoadCalc
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-84 Zero Volumes Dialog Box
Zero Volumes Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Starting Station This is the station at which volumes should begin to go to zero.
Ending Station This is the station at which Volumes should resume normal calculations.
Transition After This is the distance from the starting station to the station where the volumes will be zero.
Before This is the distance from the last station where the volumes are zero to the ending station.
Transition
Add Zero This allows you to enter the stations and transition lengths for zero volumes.
Volume For more information, see Add Zero Volume, below.
Modify Zero This modifies the zero volume data for the currently highlighted zone.
Volume
This is nearly identical to Add Zero Volume. For more information, see Add Zero Volume,
below.
Delete This removes the zero volume data for the highlighted zone.
file).
Add Zero Volume

ROADCALC OUTPUT VOLUMES ZERO VOLUMES ADD ZERO VOLUME
The Add Zero Volume command allows you to enter ranges for which volumes will not be
calculated. Enter the stations at the beginning and end of the zero volume zone and the
transition distances to the area of zero volume. At the beginning and ending stations full
end areas are calculated. The transitions are linear and volumes are calculated in these
areas accordingly.
The Add and Modify Zero Volume dialog boxes are identical. The following figure shows
the Add Zero Volume dialog box as an example.

Any regions on the sub-project that are outside the defined zero volume zones will have
volumes calculated for them.
Figure 7-85 Add Zero Volume Dialog Box
Add Zero Volume Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Starting Station This indicates the station where the zero volume zone begins.
Ending Station This indicates the station where the zero volume zone ends.
Transition This is the distance in feet (meters) from the starting station for zero volumes to the station
Distance Before where the volumes will be zero.
Transition This is the distance in feet (meters) from the last station where volumes are zero to the
Distance After ending station where normal volumes resume.
Station and Coordinates

ROADCALC OUTPUTS STATIONS AND COORDINATES
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcstacoord

The Stations and Coordinates command allows you to generate the coordinate and
elevation information from the selected alignment and profile. In addition to getting the
coordinates at the specified interval along the centerline alignment, you are able to get the
coordinates at key stations along circular, spiral, and vertical curves.
You may add any station to the list control using the New Station button. The Offset,
Northing, Easting, and Elevation values are calculated at the entered station. You may
also modify and delete any stations in the list.
The station value displayed in the list control is measured along the centerline alignment.
The offset value is calculated from the centerline alignment to the alignment selected in
the drop list. Once this offset value is calculated, the Horizontal Offset specified in the
Additional Constant Offsets dialog box is added to the calculated offset. The Offset value
with the horizontal offset applied is used to calculate the Northing and Easting
Coordinates. The Elevation value is calculated from the selected profile at the stations
370 RoadCalc
listed. Once this elevation is calculated, the Vertical Offset specified in the Additional
Constant Offsets dialog box is added to the calculated elevation. The Elevation value with
the vertical offset applied is displayed in the Elevation column.
The Station and Coordinate data can be printed or an object can be drawn for all of the
coordinates listed. Once you have finished viewing the data for the selected Alignment
and Profile, you can select the Clear List option, select a new Alignment or Profile, and
click on the Calculate button. New Station and Coordinate values are calculated (including
stations added manually) with the new settings specified. Use the Delete Station button to
permanently remove user-added stations.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-86 Station and Coordinates Dialog Box
Station and Coordinates Dialog Box Definitions

Alignment Select the alignment desired to calculate the offset and coordinate values from
the centerline alignment at each station. Once the offset is calculated, the
additional horizontal constant offset is added and coordinates are calculated.
Profile Select the profile desired to calculate the elevation values at each station.
Once the elevation is calculated, the additional vertical constant offset is added
to the elevation.
Station Interval Specify the station interval to use along the centerline alignment. After you
enter a value in the field, use the Calculate button to update the station/
coordinate listing.
Additional This option allows you to specify a horizontal and vertical offset to apply to the
Constant Offsets station and coordinate listing. The horizontal offset is added to the offsets listed
at each station. The vertical offset is added to the elevations listed at each
station. This option can be used to create a coordinate list at a constant offset
from a back of curb for staking.
Include Curve When this toggle is on, the stations at the key points of the circular and spiral
Stations curves are included in the station/coordinate listing.
Include Vertical When this toggle is on, the stations at the key points of the vertical curves are
Curve Stations included in the station/coordinate listing.

Station and Coordinates Dialog Box Definitions
Label Description text is placed at key stations automatically. This text includes BOP,
EOP, PC, PI, PT, etc. This text can be modified by using the Modify Station
command or added to a station value.
Station This is the station value based on the centerline alignment. The station values
are generated from the Station interval or any station values added using the
New Station option.
Offset This is the perpendicular distance from the centerline alignment to the selected
alignment measured at each listed station. Once the offset is calculated from
the centerline, the additional horizontal offset is applied to the calculated offset.
The offset with the additional horizontal constant offset applied is displayed in
the Offset column.
Northing This is the Northing (Y) coordinate that corresponds to the station and offset in
the list control for the selected alignment.
Easting This is the Easting (X) coordinate that corresponds to the station and offset in
the list control for the selected alignment.
Elevation This is the Elevation (Z) on the selected profile at the station specified. Once
the elevation is calculated from the profile, the additional vertical offset is
applied to the calculated elevation. The elevation with the additional vertical
constant offset applied is displayed in the Elevation column.
New Station When you click on this icon, you are able to add a new station to the station/
coordinate listing. You can also specify a label for the entered station. The
entered station is automatically sorted in the list of stations. The entered station
values are stored for the sub-project. These stations will automatically display
when the command is run subsequent times. To remove any of the stations,
use the Delete Station command.
Modify Station This icon allows you to change the label or station value for the item
highlighted. After the station is modified, the Offset, Northing, Easting, and
Elevation will be updated.
Delete Station Click on this to remove the highlighted station from the station/coordinate
listing. When you delete an interval station, the station is only removed for the
current session of the command. When you delete a station that added to the
list using the New Station command, the station will be removed from the list
permanently.
Print Station Click on this icon to print the stations and coordinates to an output device
(printer or ASCII file).
Clear List When you select this option, the station and coordinate listing is cleared so you
can rebuild the list if desired. Use the Calculate button after changing
information to display the station and coordinates. All stations at the interval
specified are displayed as well as any stations entered using the New Station
command.
Draw Object This allows you to place a 2- or 3-dimensional object in the CAD graphic that
connects all of the station and coordinate points together. The object can then
be used for staking purposes.
For more information, see Draw Station/Coordinate Object on page 373.
372 RoadCalc
Draw Station/Coordinate Object
The coordinate listed in the Station and Coordinates dialog box (Figure 7-86 on page 371)
can be drawn in the CAD graphic. The object can be drawn the entire length of the sub-
project or within a specified station range. The station/coordinate object is created as a
three-dimensional object. An option of Place at Elevation Zero allows you to place the
station/coordinate object at a zero elevation. Placing the station/coordinate object at a
zero elevation allows you to apply custom linetypes and have them display in the CAD
graphic correctly. Also, you can specify the CAD settings such as layer/level, color, and
linetype/linestyle for the station/coordinate object.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-87 Draw Station/Coordinate Object Dialog Box
Draw Station/Coordinate Object Dialog Box Definitions

Range station/coordinate object. When this is toggled on, you will need to specify a
beginning and ending station. When this option is toggled off, the station/
coordinate object will be created for the entire length of the sub-project
provided all stations have coordinates values.
Beginning Enter the beginning station for the station/coordinate object. The stationing is
Station in reference to the Centerline. This is only available if the Use Station Range
Ending Station Enter the ending station for the station/coordinate object. The stationing is in
reference to the Centerline. This is only available if the Use Station Range
Place at Toggle this option on if you want the station/coordinate object to be placed at
Elevation Zero an elevation of zero instead of its three-dimensional elevation. Placing the
station/coordinate object at an elevation of zero allows you to apply custom
linetypes and have them display in the CAD graphic correctly.
CAD Settings This icon allows you to specify the layer/level, linetype/linestyle, and color for
the station/coordinate object.

Catchpoints
ROADCALC OUTPUT CATCHPOINTS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rccatchp

The Catchpoints command will generate a report of the offsets and elevations of the
catchpoints along the centerline alignment. You can look at the catchpoint offset and
elevation at any specified station. The stations that are displayed are the cross-section
stations. You are also able to generate the instrument height and rod reading values for
each station if that information was entered in cross-sections.
If you specify a range beyond the end of the cross-sections, only the cross-sections that
exist in that range will be displayed.
Figure 7-88 Catchpoints Dialog Box
Catchpoints Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Use Station When this toggle is on, you can display the stations by range in the listing. You are able to
Range enter a starting and ending station value.
Starting Station This edit field is enabled if the Use Station Range toggle is on. This is the starting station
in the range.
Ending Station This edit field is enabled if the Use Station Range toggle is on. This is the ending station in
the range.
Include If the cross-sections were entered using instrument height and rod reading, this toggle will
Instrument allow you to view the instrument height and rod reading for the catchpoints.
Height and Rod
Reading
374 RoadCalc
Catchpoints Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Station This lists the station values of the cross-sections that have catchpoints.
Offset This is the offset distance from the Centerline alignment to the catchpoint at the
corresponding station.
Elevation This is the elevation at the catchpoint.
IH This is the instrument height for the corresponding station. This is displayed if the Include
Instrument Height/Rod Reading toggle is on.
RR This is the rod reading for the corresponding station. This is displayed if the Include
Instrument Height/Rod Reading toggle is on.
Chapter 7: Output
Print Click on this icon to print catchpoints in the list to an output device (printer or ASCII file).
Clear List This command removes the currently displayed items from the list so that you can specify
a different range of stations in the list.
Elevation/Depth at Offsets
ROADCALC OUTPUT ELEVATION/DEPTH AT OFFSETS
KEY-IN COMMAND: rcelevoff

The Elevation/Depth at Offsets command allows you to print the elevation at any offset
from any particular surface. You are also able to print out the depth between any two
surfaces at any specified offset. RoadCalc interpolates the elevations/depths from the
surfaces based on the known breakpoints in the cross-section information. If any particular
surface does not extend to an offset, RoadCalc will place an asterisk (*) in place of the
elevation. If a surface was entered using instrument height/rod readings, that information
can also be displayed in the printout.
Figure 7-89 Elevation/Depth at Offsets Dialog Box

Elevation/Depth at Offsets Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Elevation When you toggle this option, you can create a report of elevations at specified offsets. The
bottom surface field would be disabled in this case.
Depth When you toggle this option, you can create a report of depths at specified offsets. You
can select the top and bottom surface to calculate the depth between.
Top Surface This is the top surface to calculate the elevation or depth from at the specified offset.
Bottom Surface This is the bottom surface to calculate the depth to at the specified offset.
Station This lists the station values of all your cross-sections. Multiple offsets appear for every
station when a new offset is added.
Offset This is the offset distance from the Centerline alignment at which the Elevation(s) and/or
depths are desired.
Elevation (Top) This is the elevation of the offset selected from the Top Surface drop list.
Elevation If the Depth toggle is on, this is the elevation of the offset selected from the Bottom
(Bottom) Surface drop list.
Depth This appears if the Depth toggle is on. It is the elevation difference between the surfaces
specified in the Top Surface and Bottom Surface drop lists.
New Offset When you select this option, you can add a new offset to get elevation/depth information
at. If the offset entered is beyond the selected surfaces, an asterisk (*) will be displayed
for the elevation/depth. A New Offset is added at every station.
Modify Offset You can modify the selected offset value by selecting this option.
Delete Offset Deletes the currently highlighted offset from the listing.
Print Click on this icon to print the elevation/depth at offset report to an output device (printer or
ASCII file).
Cross-Section Staking
ROADCALC OUTPUT CROSS-SECTION STAKING
KEY-IN COMMAND: rccxsstake

The Cross-Section Staking command allows you to create a report of the cut and fill
depths needed at specified offsets from the catchpoint and centerline. Other information
that is generated is the toe of backslope offset/elevation, catchpoint offset/elevation, toe
distance from stake, stake offset from centerline and the stake coordinates. You are able
376 RoadCalc
to select which information to display in the report as well as the order to display the
information.
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-90 Cross-Section Staking Dialog Box
Cross-Section Staking Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Stake Distance Specify the distance the stake is to be offset from the catchpoint.
from Catch Point
Display Slope Select the format for how the slopes will be printed; % Slope, H/V, V/H, Unit/Unit.
Using
Display Select the precision to be used. Reported values can be selected to display from one
Precision decimal place to eight decimal places.
Use Station Toggle this option on if you want to specify a station range to print the cross-section
Range staking report. When this is toggled on, you will need to specify a beginning and ending
station. When this option is toggled off, the cross-section staking report will be created for
the entire length of the sub-project.
Starting Station Enter the beginning station to start the cross-section staking report. The stationing is in
reference to the Centerline. This is only available if the Use Station Range option is
toggled on.
Ending Station Enter the ending station to end the cross-section staking report. The stationing is in
reference to the Centerline. This is only available if the Use Station Range option is
toggled on.

Cross-Section Staking Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Item This displays all of the items that can be printed. The available options are Point Number,
Station, Side, Cut and Fill, Toe Depth, Toe Offset, Toe Elevation, Catchpoint Offset,
Catchpoint Elevation, Catch Slope, Toe Distance, Stake Offset from Centerline, Stake
Northing and Stake Easting. You may change the column header and order of those items
to suit your needs.
Point Number: This labels the point number of the stake.
Station: This is the Station that the stake information pertains to.
Side: This indicates which side of the typical section that the stake information
pertains to.
Cut and Fill: This column indicates whether the Catchslope is a Cut or Fill slope.
Toe Depth: This is the depth between the original ground and the Toe of
Backslope at the Toe of Backslope Offset.
Toe Offset: This is the offset from the Centerline of the Toe of Backslope.
Toe Elevation: This is the elevation of the Toe of Backslope.

Catchpoint Offset: This is the offset from the Centerline of the Catchpoint.
Catchpoint Elevation: This is the elevation of the Catchpoint.
Catch Slope: This is the slope of the backslope measured according to the
slope type specified in the Display Slope Using drop list.
Toe Distance: This is the horizontal distance the Toe of Backslope is away from
the stake.
Stake Offset from Centerline: This is the offset from the Centerline of the Stake.
Stake Northing: This column reports the Northing (y coordinate) of the stake.
Stake Easting: This column reports the Easting (x coordinate) of the stake.
Print Click on this icon to send the cross-section staking report to an output device (printer or
ASCII file).
Clear List This command removes the currently displayed items from the list so that you can specify
a different range of stations in the list.
378 RoadCalc
Example
Chapter 7: Output
Figure 7-91 Cross-Section Staking Parameters
Sub-project Prototype Settings

ROADCALC OUTPUT SUB-PROJECT PROTOTYPE SETTINGS
The Sub-Project Prototype Settings command allows you to save settings that can be
used for all of your RoadCalc sub-projects that are created. The settings that are saved
with the prototype are general settings, Cross-Section Sheet settings, Plan and Profile
Sheet Settings and Mass Diagram Sheet settings. The general settings are all alignment
names and CAD Settings; all surface names, properties and CAD Settings; all design
profile names and CAD Settings; all original ground profile offsets and CAD Settings;
profile settings for profile orientation and which CAD graphic the profiles are drawn in;
default slopes for the default condition tables. These settings are saved to a central
location, so when you create a new sub-project, you can specify the desired prototype to

use. This allows you to establish settings that are commonly used so you don’t have to
change settings for every sub-project that is created.
Figure 7-92 Sub-project Prototype Settings Dialog Box
Sub-project Prototype Settings Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
New This allows you to create a prototype for sub-projects. General settings as well as Cross-
Section Sheet, Plan and Profile Sheet and Mass Diagram Sheet settings are saved to a
central location.
For more information, see New Sub-project Prototype, below.
Delete This allows you to remove the highlighted sub-project prototype from the listing. You can
not remove the top two Default sub-project prototypes.
New Sub-project Prototype

ROADCALC OUTPUT SUB-PROJECT PROTOTYPE SETTINGS NEW
The New Sub-project Prototype command allows you to create a prototype for sub-
projects. General settings as well as Cross-Section Sheet, Plan and Profile Sheet and
Mass Diagram Sheet settings are saved to a central location. The general settings are all
alignment names and CAD settings; all surface names, properties and CAD settings; all
design profile names and CAD settings; all original ground profile offsets and CAD
Settings; profile settings for profile orientation and which CAD graphic the profiles are
drawn in; default slopes for the default condition tables. The Cross-Section Sheet
Formats, Plan and Profile Sheet Formats and Mass Diagram Sheet Formats drop list will
display all of the settings for sheets that have been defined.
380 RoadCalc
For more information on creating a Cross-Section, Plan and Profile or Mass Diagram
Sheet Format, see Format Library on page 289.
Figure 7-93 New Sub-project Prototype Dialog Box
Chapter 7: Output
New Sub-project Prototype Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Prototype This is the name of the sub-project prototype. This name will display in the Sub-project
Description Prototype Settings dialog box (Figure 7-92 on page 380) and when adding in a New sub-
project with the New command found in the File menu on the Eagle Point main menu.
Cross-Section This displays all of the formats that have been defined for Cross-Section Sheets. Select
Sheet Formats the desired format settings to be used for the sub-project prototype. For more information,
see Format Library on page 289.
Plan and Profile This displays all of the formats that have been defined for Plan and Profile Sheets. Select
Mass Diagram This displays all of the formats that have been defined for Mass Diagram Sheets. Select

382 RoadCalc
ROADCALC
GLOSSARY
OF
TE R M S
Absolute Boundary Type
This is the boundary type can be set for each original
surface except the top. It determines how a
subsurface will behave when adding subsurface
points or using the generate subsurfaces feature. The
absolute boundary type tells RoadCalc to use only the
points given at control stations to create a subsurface.
For the generate subsurfaces function, RoadCalc will
interpolate the elevations of the subsurface points
between control stations to create the subsurface for
all cross sections.
Actual Surface
A RoadCalc surface used to represent material that
has actually been placed is known as actual surface.
An actual surface may be thought of as an “as-built” or
“as constructed” surface. RoadCalc computes a
volume for each actual surface between it and the top
original surface or any previous actual surfaces.
Adjustment Volume
This refers to extra cut, extra fill, waste or borrow
volume that is known, but not represented on the
cross-sections. Adjustment volumes are combined
with raw volumes for mass volumes and balance
volumes.
Alignment
This is theoretical horizontal line-work that establishes
a baseline of position for construction or existing
features. An alignment delineates directions and
Glossary of Terms 383

distances for a structure such as a roadway, channel, pipeline, etc. Alignments can
contain, horizontal curves and spiral curves.
Alignment from PT Code

See Break-line from PT Code.
Average End Area Method

This method is used for computing volumes based on cross-sections whereby the
areas of two adjacent cross-sections are averaged, then multiplied by the distance
between the cross-sections to obtain a volume. RoadCalc will compute volumes for
any surfaces present.
Back-slope
See Catch-Slope.
Benching
This is a type of slope that may be used on a typical section. Instead of one constant
grade catch-slope, the slope may be broken into separate pieces. It is also referred to
as Terracing.
BOP
BOP is an acronym for “Beginning of Project.” This designates the beginning point of
an alignment.
Borrow Pit
This is an area from which material needed for fill is to be excavated. RoadCalc
assigns a name and other parameters to a borrow pit to help compute volumes and
costs for a sub-project.
Break-line from PT Code

Break-line from PT Codes will generate a 3-D polyline/linestring in the plan CAD
graphic by plotting the position of a given PT code taken from the cross-sections.
Break-point
A break-point is any vertex that is on a typical section surface. RoadCalc keeps track
of the number of vertices when processing typical sections so that transitioning may
occur without the need of PT codes.
384 RoadCalc
Catchlines
The catchlines are 3-D in the plan CAD graphic. These are the locations of the
catchpoints as taken from the cross-sections. They are sometimes referred to as
daylight lines. These are also displayed as 2-D lines in the plan and profile sheets.
Catchpoints
Often referred to as “limits of construction” or “slope intercepts,” catchpoints indicate
where the lowest design surface meets the top original surface on the cross-sections.
Catch-slope
This is a slope that is projected from the outermost edges of a typical section onto the
original ground material. This produces a closed area from which earthwork volumes
may be calculated.
Centerline
This is the alignment or base-line on which an entire RoadCalc sub-project is based. It
is not necessarily in the center of the typical section or cross-section.
Clear Zone
A clear zone is a user-specified distance that a slope must maintain before being
applied. Usually a certain distance from the edge of a road shoulder to where the
catch-slope starts. RoadCalc uses a type of slope called Clear Zone to accommodate
this design criteria.
Combining Spiral
This refers to a spiral curve fitting between two curves that comprise a compound
curve. Combining spirals provide a smooth transition from a curve of one radius to a
curve of a different radius.
Compaction Factor
A compaction factor is a multiplier, usually in percentage, used to compensate for the
consolidation or expansion of a material when computing a volume.
Compound Curve
This is a horizontal curve that consists of two curves of different radii with the PT (end)
of the first curve meeting the PC (beginning) of the second curve. Both curves have the
same direction, to the left or to the right, along the alignment.

Condition
A condition specifies the criteria for RoadCalc to follow when processing slopes onto
the typical section during the Run Design command. Each condition has measurement
criteria that when satisfied tells RoadCalc what slope treatment(s) to apply to the
typical section. Each original material and the fill material can have multiple conditions
specified based on the depth within each material. For more information see Condition
Table.
Condition Table
A condition table lists the possible slope treatments that RoadCalc can apply to the
typical sections during the processing of the Run Design command. Every original
ground material and the fill material can have multiple solutions available so that when
RoadCalc uses a condition table during processing, it can choose which solution
meets the specified criteria.
Control Section
A cross-section setting that RoadCalc uses for the generate subsurfaces command is
known as a control section. RoadCalc interpolates between control sections in order to
create the subsurfaces for all cross-sections.
Cross-section
Cross-sections are horizontal and vertical (i.e. Offset, Elevation) measurements taken
perpendicular to an alignment at a particular station. RoadCalc uses cross-sections as
a tool to represent surfaces and to compute volumes by average end area.
Cross-Section Graphic
A cross-section graphic is the CAD graphic that displays the cross section data. In the
cross-section graphic, the X axis is the offset from the centerline and the Y axis is the
elevation. If any utilities are defined within the project they will also appear in the cross-
section graphic.
Cut
Cut refers to material that is to be removed to accommodate a design.
Cut Detail
The cut detail is the graphic representation of what the typical section should look like
when it is processed in a cut location of the design. This may be different from typical
section to typical section as well as different from the fill detail.
386 RoadCalc
Depth
This is the distance below a specified surface. Typically this would be the distance
below the topmost original surface.
Design Speed
This is the reported speed of the designed alignment or profile according to the active
or current speed table.
Design Surface
A RoadCalc surface used to represent material to be placed during construction.
Design surfaces are usually represented on a typical section. RoadCalc computes a
volume for each design surface. RoadCalc computes cut and fill earthwork volumes
from the lowest design surface.
Dynamic Typical Sections

This is a variation on how to use typical sections. RoadCalc links an alignment, profile
or both to a point on the typical section (PT code) so that point will follow the alignment
and/or profile instead of being placed on the cross-section strictly as it was defined.
Many different design scenarios can be achieved with a minimal amount of typical
sections being defined.
EOP
This is an acronym for “End of Project.” This designates the ending of an alignment.
Existing Pavement Type

This is a type assigned to an original surface that can be used to represent existing
roadbeds. The roadbed geometry is entered when generating subsurfaces either by
defined alignments and depths or by offsets and depths. Only one original surface may
have the type of existing pavement.
Fill
This is material that is to be added to accommodate a design.
Fill Detail
This is the graphic representation of what the typical section should look like when it is
processed in a fill location of the design. This may be different from typical section to
typical section as well as different from the cut detail.

Format Library
The Format Library is made of default settings for RoadCalc plots. Up to 99 formats
may be entered into the Format Libraries so that different plot settings may be saved
and used from project to project. You may specify which plot formats to use on a
project by creating sub-project prototypes.
Freehaul
Freehaul refers to a distance, usually indicated in project specifications, within which
the contractor will not charge for hauling material. This helps RoadCalc generate an
overhaul value which helps determine the cost of moving material on a sub-project.
Guardrail
A guardrail is a barrier used to prevent cars from straying into a ravine. RoadCalc
places a guard rail PT code (1002 or 1003) at the breakpoint of a clear zone slope.
This is also known as a Guiderail.
Generate Subsurfaces
This is a function whereby RoadCalc uses the subsurface at control sections as a
basis for interpolating the subsurface for all of the cross sections. When generating
subsurface information, the program will linearly interpolate the subsurface information
between control stations for all non-control stations. The subsurface information for the
control stations themselves will not change.
H/V Slope
See Slopes.
Height of Instrument
This value indicates the height of the ocular of an instrument from the ground.
Horizontal Curves
Horizontal curves are simply circular arc segments between tangents on an alignment.
Curves are stored by RoadCalc as part of the alignment data. Some common related
terms are PC (point of curvature), which is the beginning of the curve along direction of
the alignment, PT (point of tangency) which is the end of the curve and PI (point of
intersection) which indicates the point where the tangents would intersect if extended.
IH/HI
This stands for “Instrument height” or “height of instrument.” See Height of Instrument.
388 RoadCalc
LHF
This stands for Left Hand Forward. This indicates which side of the cross-section is
skewed forward out of perpendicular. The direction is taken from looking in the
direction of increasing stationing on the alignment.
Locked Cross-Section
A cross-section that is locked can not be overwritten when processing typical sections.
Even if processing occurs through an area containing cross-sections that are locked,
those locked cross-sections will be unaffected.
MSE
This stands for Maximum Superelevation Rate. Usually in a percentage, the maximum
slope that the roadway “banks” to assist the centripetal force acting on a traveling
vehicle. See Superelevation.
Mass Diagram
This is a plot of the accumulated mass volumes against the stations (cross-sections) of
the centerline alignment.
Mass Volume
This is a volume report that combines raw volumes and adjustment volumes and
applies compaction factors according the volumes settings. Mass Volumes also
indicates the mass ordinate value for a mass diagram.
Mass Ordinate
This is the sum of the cumulative cut or fill at each station.
Material/Layer
These are the individual materials that make up a cross-section. For example, topsoil,
grass, rock, concrete, crushed stone. A material has a thickness associated to it
whereas a surface defines one side of a material. This means at least two surfaces are
needed to define a material.
Normal Removal Method

This applies to original surfaces/materials and affects how volumes are computed.
With the normal removal method, volumes are computed normally as opposed to
volumes computed using strip removal method.

Offset
This is the horizontal distance to a point as measured perpendicular from an alignment.
Generally speaking, the shortest distance between an alignment and a point that is not
on that alignment.
Original Ground Profile

This is a profile line that is automatically generated by RoadCalc by connecting the
elevations of constant offsets of each cross section in the profile CAD graphic
RoadCalc automatically produces an original ground profile of the 0 offset shots from
each cross-section.
Original Surface
This is a RoadCalc surface used to represent existing material. RoadCalc can store
multiple original surfaces.
Overbreak
This refers to an option provided to help compare design volumes to actual volumes.
The overbreak distance specifies the tolerance from the lowest design surface for
which the contractor will be paid. In other words, the contractor will not be paid for
material that has been cut or filled if it is outside of the overbreak distance. Using an
overbreak type design surface on a typical section will allow a designer to generate a
volume for this quantity.
Overhaul
The overhaul is any material hauled farther than the freehaul distance on a sub-project.
The quantity computed by RoadCalc is the volume of material moved multiplied by the
haul distance over and above the freehaul.
PT Codes (PoinT Codes)

A PT code is a tag that identifies a point or shot on the cross-section with a unique
label. This label must be numeric. Alignments, profiles, and typical sections can use
this identifier to modify the location of a shot on a surface horizontally or vertically. They
may also be used to annotate or query certain typical section break-points or original
ground shots.
Parallel Boundary Type

The boundary type can be set for each original surface except the first. It determines
how a subsurface will behave when adding subsurface points or using the generate
subsurfaces feature. The parallel boundary type tells RoadCalc to copy the overlying
original surface at the depth of an added shot for that section. For the generate
390 RoadCalc
subsurfaces function, RoadCalc will interpolate the depth of the subsurface between
control stations to create the subsurface for all cross-sections.
Pass through Point

This is the station and elevation of a point on a vertical curve in which you want the
curve to pass through. Specify a pass through point to ensure road/bridge clearances
and connections.
Phantom Cross-Section
This is a cross-section that is used for display only. The end area of this cross-section
is not used for volume calculations.
Plan CAD Graphic

This is a CAD graphic (drawing/design file), in plan view, looking down from the top,
that shows project information. There is typically one plan CAD graphic associated with
each Eagle Point Project with multiple RoadCalc sub-projects contained in it. You may
however, have more than one plan CAD graphic to show each sub-project in its own
drawing/design file.
Preview Objects
This is a command found in various locations within RoadCalc to display graphic
information to a Windows dialog box without the need for a CAD engine. Graphic
modifications cannot be made in a preview window.
Profile
This is a vertical section of the surface of the ground and/or underlying surfaces along
any fixed line, usually an alignment. Also the vertical orientation of a design alignment.
Profile CAD Graphic

This is the CAD graphic (drawing/design file) showing the profile data. For RoadCalc,
the X axis is in terms of stations, and the Y axis is in terms of elevation, but with an
exaggeration because of horizontal and vertical scale factors.
Profile from PT Code

Profile from PT Code will generate a profile line in the profile CAD graphic by plotting
the position of a given PT Code taken from the cross-sections.
Profile from Surface Model

This refers to a profile as extracted by RoadCalc from an Eagle Point surface model
that shows the surface features and elevations of the chosen surface model along the
chosen line.

Prototype Drawing/Design File
A prototype is an AutoCAD/BricsCad drawing or MicroStation design file that has been
saved with certain CAD properties defined or even graphic information that can be
used when creating a RoadCalc plot sheet.
RHF
This stands for “right hand forward.” This indicates which side of the cross-section is
skewed forward out of perpendicular. The direction is taken from looking in the
direction of increasing stationing on the alignment.
RR
See Rod Reading.
Raw Volume
This is the volume computed using the average end area method with RoadCalc’s
cross-sections. Raw volume does not consider compaction factors.
Reverse Curve
This is a configuration where two adjacent horizontal curves have opposing directions;
i.e. one goes to the right, the other to the left.
Rollover
This is a special situation that arises in superelevated curves. With high-side rollover
you specify a slope value that indicates the maximum change in grade between the
shoulder and the pavement. In a normal crown of 2%, with a shoulder slope of 4%, for
example, the change in grade is 2%. When the pavement goes into superelevation, the
change in grade between the shoulder and the pavement increases. A limit can be set
for this change in grade, which RoadCalc will adhere to anytime the limit might
otherwise be exceeded because of the superelevation. Low-side rollover is used to
match the shoulder cross-slope with the road cross-slope as it increases past the
original shoulder slope.
R.O.W.
This stands for right-of-way. RoadCalc starts with ROW Left and ROW Right in the
Alignment Manager. They do not have to be used, but if there is data for these two
alignments, and R.O.W. type slopes are being used, RoadCalc will check to see if the
catchpoints are within the right-of-way alignments.
392 RoadCalc
Rod Reading
This is typically used with a level, the rod reading represents the height on a level rod
that the instrument sights in on. The rod reading is used to compute the elevation of a
surveyed point and is one of the input parameters for hand entering cross-section data.
Run Design
This is the RoadCalc command that processes the typical sections onto the original
ground cross-sections by following horizontal alignments and vertical profiles. This
command also makes the design decisions for what slopes get applied to tie the typical
section into the original ground.
%Slope
See Slopes.
Shots
A shot is a point on a cross-section with a certain offset from centerline and an
elevation. A surface is made up of multiple shots.
Sight Parameters
These are the parameters such as headlight height and beam angle, that RoadCalc
uses to compute stopping and passing sight distances on vertical curves. They can be
adjusted by the user, but default to the AASHTO standard values.
Skew Angle
A skew angle can be specified if a cross-section is needed at something other than
perpendicular to the centerline alignment. An example being the need to show the
“cover” above a culvert that runs 30 degrees skewed from the centerline. The angle
can be measured as an angle right from the tangent direction of the alignment at that
station, as a left hand forward (LHF), right hand forward (RHF) value, deflection left
(DL) or deflection right (DR). Left and right hand forward angles will always be less
than 90 degrees. Left hand forward for example, is the angle as measured forward
from perpendicular from the left side of the alignment. Skewed cross sections are not
used for volume calculations in RoadCalc.
Slopes: %, Slope, H/V, V/H, Unit/Unit

Slopes in RoadCalc may be shown or entered in either % Slope, H/V, V/H or in a Unit/
Unit format. Percent (%) slope is computed by the change in elevation divided by the
horizontal distance between points multiplied by 100. A V/H slope is that same
computation except that it is not multiplied by 100. The reciprocal of that, the H/V
format is computed by the horizontal distance between points divided by the vertical
distance (or change in elevation) between points. A Unit/Unit format is the same as the

V/H format but is usually not denoted as a ratio of some value to 1, but rather a decimal
format of a V/H slope.
Soil Boring
This is a sample of soil taken with a drilling rig. Soil borings are commonly used to
identify soil types, indicate stability, load bearing capacity and compaction factors. The
depths found to each type of soil are also used to generate RoadCalc subsurfaces.
Speed Tables
These are user-definable tables that contain horizontal or vertical curve parameters
that are used to create horizontal or vertical curves from known design standards.
RoadCalc comes supplied with AASHTO horizontal and vertical tables that may be
used to design alignments and profiles.
Spiral Curves
This is a special kind of curve with a constantly changing radius. Spirals can be used at
the beginning and ending of horizontal curves, where their radius changes from an
infinite radius to the radius of the horizontal curve and between compound curves
where the radius changes from the radius of the first curve to the radius of the second
curve.
Spot Elevation
This is the elevation of a user-specified station along a design profile. You may query
or annotate the station and elevation of a specific spot location.
Station/Stationing
On a survey traverse or an alignment, a length of 100 feet measured along that
traverse or alignment is referred to as a station. The metric equivalent can vary, but
typically a metric station is 1000 or 100 meters. Stationing is usually denoted as 10+00
for 1000 feet or 1+000 or 10+00 for 1000 meters.
Station Equation
Station equations provide a tool for adjusting the stationing along an alignment when a
change has been made to the length of that alignment. It is often desirable to have the
stationing at the beginning and ending of a sub-project remain consistent for the sake
of adjacent sub-projects.
Strip Removal Method

This applies to original surfaces/materials and affects how volumes are computed. If an
original surface is marked as strip, RoadCalc will compute volumes as if that surface
394 RoadCalc
has already been removed from within the catchpoints. That quantity of material will
appear as cut, and also as fill where appropriate.
Sub-project
A sub-project is a portion of an Eagle Point project that is used specifically for
RoadCalc. RoadCalc uses sub-projects to keep separate the data from different
alignments and profiles or different alternatives of the same alignment or roadway
corridor. RoadCalc can have 999 sub-projects in a project.
Sub-project Prototype
Sub-project prototypes get used when a new sub-project is added. The prototype
carries default settings for alignments, surfaces, profiles and plot sheets. When you
create a sub-project prototype the current sub-project information is saved to the
prototype in your Eagle Point SUPPORT\RC folder.
Subsurface
Subsurfaces represent existing material layers that are not visible from above the
ground. Subsurfaces are usually generated by RoadCalc based on soil boring
samples taken at intermittent cross-sections.
Superelevation
Superelevation is the gradual adjustment of the transverse slopes of the driving lanes
on a roadway or tops of rails on a railway to make them slope towards the inside of a
horizontal curve. This slope serves to assist the centripetal force acting on a traveling
vehicle.
Superelevation Transition
Used during the superelevation process, a transition length is specified by the user and
applied by the user to any area where one superelevated typical section cannot return
to normal crown before starting another. RoadCalc will transition over the specified
length, going from the full superelevation of the first curve to the full superelevation of
the second curve.
Surface
For RoadCalc, surfaces are used to represent materials such as existing earth,
pavement, gravel, etc. A surface defines the top of a material. Materials may also be
referred to as layers.

Surface Model
This is a 3-D representation of the top of any material. Eagle Point’s Surface Modeling
product produces these 3-D files for RoadCalc to use in extracting cross-sections or
profiles from. Contour maps may be produced from surface models.
Synchronize Graphics and Data

This command is found in the Alignments, Cross-Sections, and Profiles menus within
RoadCalc and is used to update graphic and numeric information between the CAD
graphics and numeric data files RoadCalc creates. Checks between the graphic
representation and numeric information happen automatically and when there exists a
conflict or difference between them, RoadCalc displays the Synchronize Graphics and
Data dialog box. A choice needs to be made to update the numeric information with the
graphic representation or vice versa so the discrepancies are gone.
Tangents
Tangents are the straight line sections between horizontal curves and vertical curves.
They are named so because on roadway alignments and profiles, the ends of the
straight sections are always tangent to the horizontal curve, spiral curve or vertical
curve.
Typical Section Transitions

A transition occurs between any two specified typical section locations that use a
different typical section. RoadCalc will “transition” from one typical section to another
by interpolating between the two typical sections for any cross sections that exist
between the two typical section locations.
Template
See Typical Section.
Typical Section
The geometry that the user defines to apply onto an original ground material. It may
consist of many materials and follows the design centerline to determine where it is
placed on the original ground cross-section. In previous Eagle Point releases this was
known as a Template. It may also referred to as a design section.
Undercut
Undercut is a special process in RoadCalc whereby some existing material is first
removed, and then replaced as the typical section gets applied to the cross-sections. A
design surface type, undercut’s volumes are added to the cut quantity where
appropriate and the re-added to the fill quantity also. It is intended to represent the
removal and replacement of unsuitable soil.
396 RoadCalc
Unit/Unit Slope
See Slopes.
Utilities
Utilities can be displayed in RoadCalc when viewing your cross-sections or profile of
your road. After defining the three-dimensional geometry in your plan view that
represents a utility (water main, sewer reach, culvert, underground cable, etc.) convert
that object into a utility so that RoadCalc can display the utility section or profile in the
different RoadCalc views.
V/H Slopes
See Slopes.
Vertical Curves
Vertical curves are parabolic in shape and lie between tangents on a design profile.
Vertical curves are stored by RoadCalc as part of the profile data. Some common
related terms are VPC (vertical point of curvature), which is the beginning of the curve
along direction of the alignment, VPT (point of tangency) which is the end of the curve
and VPI (point of intersection) which indicates the point where the tangents would
intersect if extended.
Vertical Stretch Factor

This is a user-specified exaggeration to see more detail in a cross-section. This factor
is only applied in the vertical direction.
Zero Volumes
Zero volumes cause RoadCalc to ignore, or zero out, the volumes between given
stations. You may also put in a transition distance that will cause RoadCalc to average
the zero end area with the full end area over the given distance.

398 RoadCalc
INDEX
Symbols Add Zero Volume Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Added Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Additional Constant Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
# of Lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Adjust for Horizontal Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
% Compaction . . . . . . . . . . . . 362, 364, 365, 366 Adjust Plan and Profile Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
% Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Adjust Plan and Profile Sheet Dialog
%Cmp Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
%Compaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Adjust Plan and Profile Sheet Dialog Box . . . 320
%Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Adjustment Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Adjustment Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Numerics Adjustment Volumes Dialog Box . . . . . . 362
360 Degree Method for Measuring Skew Adjustment Volumes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 362
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350, 352
3-D Design Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Alignment 34, 67, 69, 70, 71, 130, 234, 236, 274,
3-D Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 287, 296, 308, 371
3-D Faces Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Alignment Annotation, edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
3-D Faces Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Alignment Beginning Station . . . . . 259, 260, 262
Alignment Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
A Horizontal Angle Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Horizontal Circular curve and Spiral
Absolute surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 88 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Absxy/dXdY/ dXS/dXH/dXV/dYS/dYH/ Right-of-Way Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
dYV/Reset pen/Undo /eXit . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Station Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Actual Earthwork Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Superelevation Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Actual Earthwork Volumes Dialog Box . . 351 Superelevation Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Actual Surface – Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . 353 Alignment Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Actual Surface – Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . 354 Alignment Ending Station . . . . . . . 259, 261, 262
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Alignment Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Actual Earthwork Volumes Dialog Box . . . . . 351 Alignment Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Actual Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Alignment Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Actual Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Alignment radio button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Actual Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Alignment Stationing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Actual Surface – Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Alignment to Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Actual Surface – Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 71
Actual Surface Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Alignment Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Actual Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Associate Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Actual Surfaces Tying Together . . . . . . . . 93 Convert Objects to Alignment . . . . . . . . . 71
Actual Surfaces Tying Together . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Edit Alignment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Actual Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Generate Alignment Reports . . . . . . . . . . 79
Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Manage Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Add Zero Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Manage Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Add Zero Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Index 399
Offset Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 azimuth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
PT Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Synchronize Graphics and Data . . . . . . . 81 B
View Alignment Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Balance Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350, 352, 354
Alignments and Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Balance Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .355
Alignments and Profiles, special . . . . . . . . . . 206
Balance Points Haul Pattern . . . . . . . . . .355
Alignments list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Balance Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Alignments, Dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Balance Points Haul Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Alignments, special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Balance Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
All PIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 52
Based on Depth Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
All Surface Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Based on Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
All Surface Models (globe icon) . . . . . . . . . . 124
BC (Begin Curve) Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Beam Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Angle, skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 122
Before Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Angle/Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 39
Begin Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Annotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Begin Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Annotation . . . . 77, 283, 309, 312, 313, 316, 317
Beginning Station 64, 71, 259, 261, 262, 330, 331,
Annotation Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
332, 334, 340, 373
Annotation Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Benching Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213, 241
Annotation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Benching Slope Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Applied to Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Width Control Slope Type . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Applied to Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Benching Slope Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Applied Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Block Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Apply Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Borrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Borrow Pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363, 364
Ascending Minimum Cut Slope . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Borrow Pits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350, 352, 364
Ascending Minimum Cut Slope Type . . . . . . 256
Borrow Pits Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Ascending Total Rounding Length . . . . . . . . 256
Borrow Pits Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Assign Points to Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Borrow Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Assign Points to Station Dialog Box . . . 137
Bottom Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Assign Points to Station Dialog Box . . . . . . . 137
Breaklines from PT Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Assign Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Breaklines from PT Codes Dialog Box . .329
Associate Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69
Breaklines from PT Codes Dialog Box . . . . . .329
Associate Alignment Dialog Box . . . . . . . 70
Breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179, 180, 242
Associate Alignment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Breakpoints, Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Associate Alignments and Profiles . . . . . . . . 233
BS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Associate Alignments and Profiles
Buffer Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Build List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 122
New PT Code Association . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Build Station List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Associate Alignments and Profiles Dialog
Build Station List Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .112
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Build Station List Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Asymmetric Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
asymmetric vertical curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
At Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 C
Automatic Run Design Method . . . . . . . . . . . 263 C (chord length) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Available Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 C button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Average% Comp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 CAD Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
AZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 CAD Settings 35, 67, 73, 100, 102, 104, 108, 162,
Azimuth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 166, 180, 184, 330, 331, 333, 335, 341, 373
400 RoadCalc
Calculate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 160 Run Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Calculation Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Slope Rounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Slope Seeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Catchlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Slope Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Catchlines Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Special Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Catchlines Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Special Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Catchpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Superelevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Catchpoints Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Transition Typical Section Breakpoints . 198
Catchpoints Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Typical Section Level Mapping
centerline design profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Considerations for MicroStation V8 178
Centerline Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 249
character for comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Condition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
character for description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Condition Settings – General Tab . . . . . . . . . 250
Character Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Condition Settings Dialog Box –
Circular Curve Labels, edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Clean Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Condition Settings – No Grade Tab . . . . . . . 252
Clear Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Condition Settings Dialog Box – No
Clear List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372, 375, 378 Grade Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Clear Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Condition Settings – Slope Rounding Tab . . 255
Clear Offset Type Drop List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Condition Settings – Slope Seeding Tab . . . 254
Clear Zone Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215, 244 Condition Settings Dialog Box – Slope
Clear Zone Slope Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Seeding Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Clear Zone Slope Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Condition Settings Dialog Box – General
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 303, 327 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Column Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Condition Settings Dialog Box – No Grade
Combining Spirals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 61, 62 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Combining Spirals Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 63 Condition Settings Dialog Box – Slope
Combining Spirals Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Rounding Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Condition Settings Dialog Box – Slope
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362, 363 Seeding Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Compacted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364, 365 Condition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Compacted Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 352 Condition Table Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Compacted Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 352 Condition Table Locations . . . . . . . 231, 232, 258
Compaction Applied To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Condition Table Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Compaction Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Condition Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 217
Compaction Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Cut Typical Section and Condition
Compaction Zones . . . . . . . . 350, 352, 365, 366 Table Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 224
Compaction Zones Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 366 Example 1: Condition Table based
Compaction Zones Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 366 on Depths Only (Cut and Fill) . . . . . 219
Compaction Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Example 2: Condition Table Based
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 176, 198, 270 on Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Condition Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Fill Typical Section and Condition
Constructing Typical Sections . . . . . . . . 176 Table Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 225
Design Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Conditions Based on Depth Only . . . . . . . . . 219
Dynamic Alignments and Profiles . . . . . . 200 Conditions Based On Material Depths . . . . . 223
Fill Ditches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Conditions list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
No Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Construct Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Previous RoadCalc Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Define Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
RoadCalc Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Precision Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Index 401
Constructing Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Create Vertical Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 159
Typical Section Correctly Drawn . . . . . . 177 Create Vertical Curve Dialog Box . . . . . .159
Typical Section Incorrectly Drawn . . . . . 177 Create Vertical Curve Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .159
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 113, 114, 115 Cross Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Control PT Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 237 Cross-Section . . . . . . . . . . . . .117, 264, 274, 296
Control Toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Cross-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Control Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234, 236 Cross-Section Angle from parallel tolerance . .78
Conversion Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Cross-Section Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Convert Objects to Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Cross-Section Display Distance . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Convert Objects to Alignment Dialog Cross-Section Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Cross-Section Reference lines, edit . . . . . . . .285
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Cross-Section Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 141
Convert Objects to Alignment Dialog Box . . . . 71 Cross-Section Settings – General
Convert Objects to Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Convert Objects to Profile Dialog Box . . 163 Cross-Section Settings – Precision
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Convert Objects to Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . 163 Horizontal and Vertical Curve Tolerance .96
Convert Objects to Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Cross-Section Settings – General Tab . . . . . .142
Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Cross-Section Settings Dialog Box –
Copy Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 General Tab Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .142
Copy Condition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Cross-Section Settings – Precision Tab . . . . .143
Copy Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Cross-Section Settings Dialog Box –
Copy From Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Precision Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Copy Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Cross-Section Settings Dialog Box –
Copy Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 General Tab Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Copy Speed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Cross-Section Settings Dialog Box –
Copy To Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Precision Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Copy Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Cross-Section Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271, 273
Copy Vertical Speed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Cross-Section Sheet Formats . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Correction Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Cross-Section Sheet Settings, edit . . . . . . . . .274
Correction Slope, Right of Way . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Cross-Section Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Corridor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Cross-Section Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Corridor Edge Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Cross-Section Sheets Dialog Box . . . . . .271
Corridor Edge Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Edit Cross-Section CAD Settings . . . . . .277
Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Edit Cross-Section Offsets
Cost Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 and Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Create 3-D Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Edit Cross-Section Precision . . . . . . . . . .278
Create Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 56, 58 Edit Cross-Section Reference Lines . . . .285
Create Curve Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings . . . . .274
Create Curve Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Edit Cross-Section Slope Annotation . . .282
Create Surface Model From Road . . . . . . . . 339 Edit Cross-Section Text Settings . . . . . .287
Create Surface Model From Road Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Format Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Select Multiple Models to Merge . . . . . . 341 Modify Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Create Surface Model From Road Dialog New Cross-Section Sheets . . . . . . . . . . .273
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 New Offset/Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Create User Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 New Reference Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Create User Formats Dialog Box . . . . . . 139 New Slope Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Create User Formats Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 139 Stations to Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
402 RoadCalc
Cross-Section Sheets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 271 Cut Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Cross-Section Slope Annotation, edit . . . . . . 282 Cut Slope Less than Minimum Total
Cross-Section Staking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Rounding Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Cross-Section Staking Dialog Box . . . . . 377 Cut Typical Section and Condition Table
Cross-Section Staking Parameters . . . . 379 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 224
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Cut Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 352
Cross-Section Staking Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 377 Cut/Fill Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Cross-Section Staking Parameters . . . . . . . . 379
Cross-Section Stationing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 D
Cross-Section Text Settings, edit . . . . . . . . . 287
D button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Da . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 54, 56, 58, 60, 63
Create User Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Data, update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 144, 173
Cross-Section Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Datum Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Cross-Sections Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Datum Elevation Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 299
Edit Cross-Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Datum Elevation Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Export Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Datum Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Extract Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Generate Cross-Section Reports . . . . . . 130
Default Slope Type Drop List . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Generate Subsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Default Slope Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Import Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Default X and Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Preview Cross-Section from Surface
Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Define Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Synchronize Cross-Section Graphics
Define Coordinate System Dialog Box . . 170
and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Define Coordinate System Dialog Box . . . . . 170
View Cross-Section Graphics . . . . . . . . . 141
Define Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 194
Cross-Sections Beginning Station . 259, 261, 262
Define Typical Section Dialog Box . . . . . 195
Cross-Sections Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Actual Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Define Typical Section Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 195
Cross-Section Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Design Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Defined Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Generating Subsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Deflection Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Import/Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Deflection Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Skewed Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362, 369, 380
Cross-Sections Ending Station . . . 260, 261, 262
Delete Actual Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Crowned Divided Highway (Type II
Delete Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Superelevation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Delete Borrow Pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Cumulative Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Delete Breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 242
Current PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 52
Delete Compaction Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 151
Delete Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Curve Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Delete Condition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Curve Stationing Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Delete Condition Table Location . . . . . . . . . . 258
Curve Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Delete Cross-Section Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 314
Delete Design Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Custom Symbols, edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Delete Design Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332, 355
Delete Existing Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Cut and Fill Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Delete Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 290
Cut Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 352
Delete Horizontal Speed Parameters . . . . . . . 58
Cut Default Slope Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Delete Mass Diagram Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Cut Default Slope Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Index 403
Delete MRS Multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 159
Delete No Grade Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Design Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Delete Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Design Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Delete Offset/Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Design Surfaces Tying Together . . . . . . . .91
Delete Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Matching Two Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Delete Original Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Overbreak Type Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Delete PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Tie-ins on a Curb and Gutter . . . . . . . . . . .92
Delete Plan and Profile Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Undercut Type Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Delete Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Design Surfaces Tying Together . . . . . . . . . . .91
Delete Profile Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Design Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 102
Delete PT Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Delete PT Code Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 76
Delete Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Dimension Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Delete Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Delete Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Direction and Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Delete Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Direction and Distance, edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Delete Speed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Direction Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Delete Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 122, 372 Display Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Delete Station Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Display Slope Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Delete Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 186 Display Stations and Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Delete Typical Section Location . . . . . . . . . . 258 Display Stations Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Delete Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Display Stations, Preview and Shots . . . . . . .109
Delete Vertical Speed Parameters . . . . . . . . 156 Distance . . . . .35, 38, 39, 44, 115, 151, 153, 310
Delete Vertical Speed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Distance and Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Delete VPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Depth . . . . . . . . . . 108, 114, 128, 130, 255, 376 DL and DR for Measuring Skew Angles . . . . . .94
Depth Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Describe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Draw Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Describe Processing Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Draw Profile Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Possible Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Draw Station/Coordinate Object . . . . . . . . . . .373
Description 84, 182, 184, 185, 186, 241, 246, 248, Draw Station/Coordinate Object
271, 292, 322 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
description, character for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Draw Station/Coordinate Object Dialog
Design Earthwork Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Design Earthwork Volumes Dialog Drawing/Design File Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 dX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179, 242
Design Earthwork Volumes Dialog Box . . . . 349 dXH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Design Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 304 dXS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Design File Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 dXV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Design Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 dY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179, 242
Design Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229, 263 dYH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Applied Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Dynamic Alignments and Profiles . . . . . . . . . .200
Condition Table Locations . . . . . . . . . . . 231 dYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Typical Section Locations . . . . . . . . . . . 230 dYV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Design Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Design Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 E
design profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
E (external distance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Design Speed . . 42, 54, 55, 56, 60, 61, 155, 158,
404 RoadCalc
E (external ordinate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Preview and Shots Data Dialog
E button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Earthwork Volumes, actual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 New Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Earthwork Volumes, design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 New Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Easting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 38, 39, 65, 135, 372 Query Cross-Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Easting, character for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Edit Cross-Section Data/Display Stations
EC (End Curve) Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 and Preview Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272, 293, 294, 322 Edit Cross-Section Data/Display Stations
Edit Alignment Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Edit Alignment Annotation Dialog Box . . . . . . 307 Edit Cross-Section Offsets and Elevations . . 279
Edit Alignment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Edit Cross-Section Offsets
Combining Spirals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 and Elevations Dialog Box . . . . . . . 280
Create Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Edit Cross-Section Offsets and Elevations
Edit Alignment Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 34 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Horizontal Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Edit Cross-Section Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Horizontal Speed Table Library . . . . . . . . 59 Edit Cross-Section Precision Dialog
Horizontal Speed Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Modify PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Edit Cross-Section Precision Dialog Box . . . 279
MRS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Edit Cross-Section Reference Lines . . . . . . . 285
New Horizontal Speed Parameters . . . . . 60 Edit Cross-Section Reference Lines
New PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Preview Alignment Graphics . . . . . . . . . . 65 Edit Cross-Section Reference Lines
Reference Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Rollover Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings . . . . . . . . 274
Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings
Superelevate Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Dialog Box – Grid Spacing Tab . . . 276
Superelevation Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings
Superelevation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Dialog Box – Sheet Dimensions Tab 275
Superelevation Transition Parameters . . . 45 Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings Dialog
Edit Alignment Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Box – Grid Spacing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Edit Alignment Dialog Box (Display Angles/ Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings Dialog
Distances) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Box – Sheet Dimensions Tab . . . . . . . . 275
Edit Alignment Dialog Box (Display Edit Cross-Section Slope Annotation . . . . . . 282
Coordinates) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Edit Cross-Section Slope Annotation
Edit Circular Curve Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Edit Circular Curve Labels Dialog Box . . 311 Edit Cross-Section Slope Annotation
Edit Circular Curve Labels Dialog Box . . . . . . 311 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Edit Cross-Section CAD Settings . . . . . . . . . 277 Edit Cross-Section Text Settings . . . . . . . . . 287
Edit Cross-Section CAD Settings Edit Cross-Section Text Settings
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Edit Cross-Section CAD Settings Dialog Edit Cross-Section Text Settings Dialog
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Edit Cross-Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Edit Cross-Section/Display Stations,
Build Station List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Preview and Shots Data Dialog Box . . . 107
Edit Cross-Section Data/Display Edit Custom Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Stations and Preview Dialog Box . . 107 Edit Custom Symbols Dialog Box . . . . . 318
Edit Cross-Section Data/Display Edit Custom Symbols Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 318
Stations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Edit Design Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Edit Cross-Section/Display Stations, Edit Design Locations Dialog Box . . . . . 257
Index 405
New Condition Table Location . . . . . . . . 260 Edit Profile Annotation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .314
New Typical Section Location . . . . . . . . 259 Edit Profile Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Edit Design Locations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 257 Create Vertical Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Edit Direction and Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Edit Profile Data (Grades and Distances)
Edit Direction and Distance Dialog Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Edit Profile Data (Stations, Elevations,
Edit Direction and Distance Dialog Box . . . . 310 Grades, Distances) Dialog Box . . . .149
Edit File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 New Vertical Speed Parameters . . . . . . .158
Edit Horizontal Station Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 New VPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Edit Horizontal Station Labels Dialog Preview Profile Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Spot Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Edit Horizontal Station Labels Dialog Box . . 309 Vertical Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Edit Mass Diagram CAD Settings . . . . . . . . . 326 Vertical Speed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Mass Diagram CAD Settings Dialog Vertical Speed Table Library . . . . . . . . . .157
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Edit Profile Data (Grades and Distances)
Edit Mass Diagram Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Edit Mass Diagram Precision Dialog Edit Profile Data (Stations and Elevations)
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Edit Mass Diagram Precision Dialog Box . . . 328 Edit Profile Data (Stations, Elevations,
Edit Mass Diagram Sheet Settings . . . . . . . . 325 Grades, Distances) Dialog Box . . . . . . . .149
Edit Mass Diagram Sheet Dialog Box . . 325 Edit Profile Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .149, 150
Edit Mass Diagram Sheet Settings Dialog Edit Spiral Curve Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Edit Alignment Annotation Dialog Box . .307
Edit Mass Diagram Volume Settings . . . . . . 328 Edit Spiral Curve Labels Dialog Box . . . .313
Edit Plan and Profile CAD Settings . . . . . . . . 302 Edit Spiral Curve Labels Dialog Box . . . . . . .313
Edit Plan and Profile CAD Settings Edit Station/Elevation Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Edit Station/Elevation Intervals Dialog
Edit Plan and Profile CAD Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Example 1– Profile Station Options . . . .306
Edit Plan and Profile Precision . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Example 2 – Profile Station Options . . . .306
Edit Plan and Profile Precision Dialog Example 3 – Profile Stationing Options . .306
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Example 4– Profile Stationing Options . .306
Edit Plan and Profile Precision Dialog Box . . 304 Example 5 – Profile Station Options . . . .307
Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings . . . . . . . 297 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings Edit Station/Elevation Intervals Dialog Box . .305
Dialog Box – Profile Tab . . . . . . . . . 299 Edit Typical Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings Dialog Edit Typical Section Data Dialog Box . . .179
Box – Sheet/Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . 297 New Breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 182
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Edit Typical Section Data Dialog Box . . . . . . .179
Plan and Profile Sheet – Example 1 . . . 300 Edit Vertical Curve Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Plan and Profile Sheet – Example 2 . . . 301 Edit Vertical Curve Labels Dialog Box . .317
Plan and Profile Sheet – Example 3 . . . 301 Edit Vertical Curve Labels Dialog Box . . . . . .317
Plan and Profile Sheet – Example 4 . . . 302 Edit Vertical Station/Elevation Labels . . . . . . .315
Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings Dialog Edit Vertical Station/Elevation Labels
Box – Profile Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings Dialog Edit Vertical Station/Elevation Labels
Box – Sheet/Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Edit Profile Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Editor Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Edit Profile Annotation Dialog Box . . . . . 314 Elevation 108, 113, 115, 117, 125, 135, 151, 153,
406 RoadCalc
160, 170, 266, 372, 375, 376 Extra Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362, 363
Elevation (Bottom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Elevation (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Extract Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Elevation Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 76 Extract Cross-Sections Dialog Box . . . . 121
elevation, character for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Global Surface Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Elevation/Depth at Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Extract Cross-Sections Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 121
Elevation/Depth at Offsets Dialog Box . . 375 Extract Profile from Surface Model . . . . . . . . 164
Elevation/Depth at Offsets Dialog Box . . . . . . 375 Extract Profile from Surface Model
Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
End Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
End Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Extract Profile from Surface Model Dialog
End Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
End Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 364 Extract Toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Ending PT Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 122
Ending Station 131, 259, 261, 262, 274, 297, 324,
330, 331, 332, 334, 340, 365, 369, 370, 373, F
374, 377
Field Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Ending% Compaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 138, 334
Equation Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
File, preview selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Erase 3-D Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 332, 355
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Fill Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 352
ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fill Default Slope Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Example 1 – Profile Station Options . . . . . . . 306
Fill Default Slope Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Fill Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
on Depths Only (Cut and Fill) . . . . . . . . . 219
Fill Ditches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 248
Using the Fill Ditches Option . . . . . . . . . 226
Example 2:Condition Table Based
Fill Typical Section and Condition Table
on Materials (Cut and Fill) . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 225
Example 3 – Profile Stationing Options . . . . . 306
Fill Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 352
Example 4 – Profile Stationing Options . . . . . 306
Fine Horizontal Grid Line Spacing . . . . 277, 326
Fine Horizontal Line Spacing (Elevation
Example Condition Table Locations . . . . . . . 232
Interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Example Typical Section Locations . . . . . . . . 230
Fine Vertical Grid Line Spacing . . . . . . . 277, 326
existing pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 88
Fine Vertical Line Spacing (Station Interval) . 300
Existing Pavement Parameters . . . . . . . 128, 129
first actual surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 39
Existing Pavement Parameters Dialog
Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Flat or Descending Minimum Cut Slope . . . . 256
Existing Pavement Parameters Dialog Box . . 128
Flat or Descending Minimum Cut Slope
Existing Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
eXit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Flat or Descending Total Rounding Length . . 256
Explanation of RHF Convention . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Follow Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Export Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 138, 139, 290
Export from Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Format Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 138
Export Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Format Library . . . . . . . . . . . . 272, 289, 294, 322
Extend Existing Slopes Example . . . . . . . . . . 204
Format Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Extended Description . . . . . . 239, 242, 243, 245
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
External CAD Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Format Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Extra Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362, 363
Index 407
Format Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 140 Grid Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276, 299
Freehaul Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
From Clear Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 H
From Clear Offset Type Drop List . . . . . . . . . 245
H/V (V/H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
From Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Haul Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362, 363
From PT Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 253, 254
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156, 158
From Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Heavy Horizontal Grid Line Spacing . . .277, 326
From Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Heavy Horizontal Line Spacing (Elevation
Interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
G Heavy Vertical Grid Line Spacing . . . . . .277, 326
Gap Equation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Heavy Vertical Line Spacing (Station
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 250, 251 Interval) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Generate Alignment Reports . . . . . . . . . . 67, 79 Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 275
Generate Alignment Reports Dialog Box . 80 Height of Eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Generate Alignment Reports Dialog Box . . . . 80 Height of Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Generate Cross-Section Reports . . . . . . . . . 130 High Side PT Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Generate Cross-Section Reports High/Low Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 highest surface number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Generate Cross-Section Reports Dialog Highside Use Rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Horizontal and Vertical Curve Tolerance . . . . .96
Generate Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Horizontal and Vertical Scroll Bars . . . . .117, 264
Generate Profile Reports . . . . . . . 151, 162, 166 Horizontal Angle Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18, 19
Generate Profile Reports Dialog Box . . . 167 Transition Spiral Parameters . . . . . . . . . . .20
Generate Profile Reports Dialog Box . . . . . . 167 Horizontal Circular Curve and Spiral
Generate Subsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 126 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Horizontal Circular Curve Parameters . . .20
Existing Pavement Parameters . . . . . . . 128 Horizontal Circular Curve Parameters . . . . . . .20
Generate Subsurfaces Dialog Box . . . . 126 Horizontal Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 80
Generating Subsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Horizontal Curve Data Dialog Box . . . . . .41
New Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Horizontal Curve Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .41
Generate Subsurfaces Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 126 Horizontal Curve Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Generate Typical Section Reports . . . . . . . . 182 Horizontal Grid Line Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Generate Typical Section Reports Horizontal Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276, 325
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Horizontal Speed Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Generate Typical Section Reports Dialog Box . . Horizontal Speed Table Library . . . . . . . . . . . .59
182 Horizontal Speed Tables . . . . . . . . . . .42, 57, 81
Generating Subsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89, 127 Horizontal Speed Tables Dialog Box . . . .57
Generating Subsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Horizontal Speed Tables Dialog Box . . . . . . . .57
Modified Subsurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Horizontal Speed Tables Library . . . . . . . . . . .58
Global Surface Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Horizontal Speed Tables Name . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Goto Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 265 Horizontal Station Labels, edit . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Horizontal Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Grade Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 horizontal tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Graphic, update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 144, 173 I
Grid Area Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
I (internal or delta angle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Grid Area Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
I button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Grid Spacing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Ic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
408 RoadCalc
IH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 115, 375 K
Import Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Assign Points to Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 K (crest) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 158
Import Cross-Sections Dialog Box . . . . . 132 K (K factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Transfer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 K (sag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 158
Transfer Settings – Editor Tab . . . . . . . . 136
Transfer Settings – Export Tab . . . . . . . 134 L
Transfer Settings – Import Tab . . . . . . . . 133 L (length of curve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 155
Import Cross-Sections Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 132 L button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Import Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Label . . . . . . . 280, 281, 285, 287, 289, 310, 372
Import to Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Import/Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Lane Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Lane Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Include Curve Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Layer/Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 303, 327
Include I.H./R.R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Layout of Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Include Instrument Height and Rod Left Condition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 261
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Left Corridor Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Include Material Outside Overbreak Lines . . . 359 Left Hand Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Include PT Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Include Undercut Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 158, 275
Include Vertical Curve Stations . . . . . . . . . . . 371 LHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Include Volume from Prior Actuals . . . . . . . . 359 LHF and RHF for Measuring Skew Angle . . . . 94
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Library vs. Manage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Individual Alignments Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Line Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286, 287
Individual Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Line Width/Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Inherit CAD Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Linetype/Linestyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 303, 327
Inherit Elevation From Design . . . . . . . . 335, 337 Load Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Inherit Elevation from Design Dialog Location of Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Inherit Elevation from Design Dialog Box . . . 338 Lock Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Insert Actual Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Low Side PT Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Insert Breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 lower design surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Insert Design Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Lower Left X Coord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Insert Original Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Lower Left Y Coord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Insert PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 lowest design surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Insert Station Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Lowside Use Rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Instrument Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
instrument height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 115 M
instrument height, character for . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Interpolate Original Ground Data M (middle ordinate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
from Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Manage Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 66, 71
interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Manage Alignments Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 67
Interval on Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 New Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Interval on Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Manage Alignments Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Item 278, 288, 303, 309, 311, 313, 316, 317, 318, Manage Condition Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
327, 378 Condition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Condition Settings – General Tab . . . . . 250
Condition Settings – No Grade Tab . . . . 252
Index 409
Condition Settings – Slope Rounding Mark Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Mark On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Condition Settings – Slope Seeding Mark Stations for Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Marked for Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Manage Condition Tables Dialog Box . . 246 Mass Diagram CAD Settings Dialog Box . . . .327
New Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Mass Diagram Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
New Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Mass Diagram Sheet Formats . . . . . . . . . . . .381
New Condition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Mass Diagram Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
New No Grade Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Edit Mass Diagram CAD Settings . . . . . .326
Manage Condition Tables Dialog Box . . . . . . 246 Edit Mass Diagram Precision . . . . . . . . .328
Manage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . 150, 161, 163, 164 Edit Mass Diagram Sheet Settings . . . . .325
Manage Profiles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 161 Edit Mass Diagram Volume Settings . . . .328
New Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Manage Profiles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Mass Diagram Sheets Dialog Box . . . . .321
Manage Surface Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 New Mass Diagram Sheets . . . . . . . . . . .323
Manage Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 195 Mass Diagram Sheets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .321
Manage Surfaces – Actual Tab . . . . . . . 103 Mass Diagram Sheets Example . . . . . . . . . . .323
Manage Surfaces – Design Tab . . . . . . 101 Mass Ordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349, 352
Manage Surfaces – Original Tab . . . . . . . 98 Mass Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Manage Surfaces – Actual Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Matching Two Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Example – Multiple Actual Surfaces . . . 104 Material . .347, 349, 352, 357, 360, 362, 363, 366
Manage Surfaces Dialog Box – Actual Materials List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Max Distance Between Points . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Overpass Fill Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Maximum Slope Type Drop List . . . . . . .241, 243
Overpass Fill Section Cut to Subgrade . 105 Maximum Slope Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 243
Manage Surfaces – Design Tab . . . . . . . . . . 101 Menu Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Manage Surfaces Dialog Box – Design Merge Additional Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Method 38, 39, 113, 114, 115, 119, 130, 153, 263
New Design Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Minimum Length to Perform Transition . . . . . .48
Manage Surfaces – Original Tab . . . . . . . . . . 98 Minimum Slope Type Drop List . . . . . . . . . . .243
Manage Surfaces Dialog Box – Original Minimum Slope Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Minimum X-Sec Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
New Original Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Mirror Typical Section Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Manage Surfaces Dialog Box – Actual Tab . 103 Mirror Typical Section Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Manage Surfaces Dialog Box – Design Tab . 102 Models to Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Manage Surfaces Dialog Box – Original Modified Subsurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modify . . .308, 309, 312, 313, 315, 316, 317, 318
Manage Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Modify Actual Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Manage Typical Sections Dialog Box . . 184 Modify Adjustment Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
New Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Modify Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Manage Typical Sections Dialog Box . . . . . . 184 Modify Borrow Pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Manage Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Modify Breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 242
Manage Utilities Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Modify Compaction Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
New Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Modify Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Utility Annotation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Modify Condition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Manage Utilities Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Modify Condition Table Location . . . . . . . . . .258
Manage vs. Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Modify Design Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Modify Design Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Modify Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 290
410 RoadCalc
Modify Horizontal Speed Parameters . . . . . . . 58 Name . . 74, 75, 99, 100, 102, 104, 161, 182, 185,
Modify MRS Multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 239, 240, 242, 243, 244, 248
Modify No Grade Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Nearest Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Modify Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 292, 380
Modify Offset/Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 New Actual Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Modify Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 New Adjustment Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 362, 363
Modify Original Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 New Adjustment Volume Dialog Box . . . 363
Modify PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 39 New Adjustment Volume Dialog Box . . . . . . 363
Modify PI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 New Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
Modify PI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 New Alignment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Modify Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 New Alignment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Modify Profile Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 New Benching Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Modify PT Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 New Benching Slope Dialog Box . . . . . . 242
Modify PT Code Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 New Benching Slope Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 242
Modify Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 New Borrow Pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364, 365
Modify Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 New Borrow Pit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 365
Modify Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 New Borrow Pit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Modify Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 New Breakpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 180, 242
Modify Speed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 New Breakpoint Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 181
Modify Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 122, 372 New Breakpoint Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Modify Station Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 New Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Modify Text Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 New Clear Zone Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Modify Text Item Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . 289 New Clear Zone Slope Dialog Box . . . . 244
Modify Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 New Clear Zone Slope Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 244
Modify Text Item Settings Dialog Box . . . 289 New Compaction Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Modify Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 186 New Compaction Zone Dialog Box . . . . 367
Modify Typical Section Location . . . . . . . . . . 258 New Compaction Zone Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 367
Modify Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 New Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 249
Modify Vertical Speed Parameters . . . . . . . . 156 New Condition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Modify Vertical Speed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 New Condition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Modify VPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 New Condition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 247
Modify Zero Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 New Condition Table Dialog Box . . . . . . 247
Move Model Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 New Condition Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 247
Move Model Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 New Condition Table Location . . . . . . . 258, 260
MRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 New Condition Table Location Dialog
MRS Multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
MRS Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 New Condition Table Location Dialog Box . . 260
MRS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 New Cross-Section Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
MRS Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 55 New Cross-Section Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
MRS Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 New Cross-Section Sheets Dialog Box . 274
MRS Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 New Cross-Section Sheets Dialog Box . . . . . 274
MS In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 New Design Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
MS Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 New Design Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103
MSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 54, 58, 60 New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 290
MSE Slope Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 New User Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 140
New Horizontal Speed Parameters . . . . . . 58, 60
N New Horizontal Speed Table
Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 60
N button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
New Horizontal Speed Table Parameters
Index 411
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 New Right of Way Correction Slope . . . . . . . .239
New Mass Diagram Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 New Right of Way Correction Slope
New Mass Diagram Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
New Mass Diagram Sheets Dialog New Right of Way Correction Slope
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
New Mass Diagram Sheets Dialog Box . . . . 324 New Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 113
New MRS Multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 New Shot Instrument Height/Rod
New No Grade Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Reading Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
New No Grade Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 New Shot Offset/Depth Dialog Box . . . . .114
New No Grade Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 254 New Shot Offset/Elevation Dialog Box . .113
New Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 New Shot Slope/Distance Dialog Box . . .115
New Offset/Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 281 New Shot Instrument Height/Rod Reading
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
New Offset/Elevation Dialog Box . . . . . . 281 New Shot Offset/Depth Dialog Box . . . . . . . .114
New Offset/Elevation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 281 New Shot Offset/Elevation Dialog Box . . . . . .113
New Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129 New Shot Slope/Distance Dialog Box . . . . . .115
New Offsets (Alignment) Dialog Box . . . 129 New Single Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
New Offsets (Offset) Dialog Box . . . . . . 130 New Single Slope Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .239
New Offsets (Alignment) Dialog Box . . . . . . . 129 New Single Slope Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
New Offsets (Offset) Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 130 New Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
New Offsets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 130 New Slope Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
New Original Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 100 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
New Original Surface Dialog Box . . . . . 100 New Slope Annotation Dialog Box . . . . .284
New Original Surface Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 100 New Slope Annotation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .284
New PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 36 New Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
New PI Dialog Box Using Angular New Speed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 New Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108, 110, 122, 372
New PI Dialog Box Using Coordinates New Station Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 New Station Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
New PI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 New Station Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
New PI Dialog Box Using Angular Methods . . 38 New Sub-project Prototype . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
New PI Dialog Box Using Coordinates New Sub-project Prototype Dialog Box . .381
Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 New Sub-project Prototype Dialog Box . . . . .381
New Plan and Profile Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 New Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184, 185
New Plan and Profile Sheets Dialog New Typical Section Dialog Box . . . . . . .185
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 New Typical Section Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .185
New Plan and Profile Sheets Dialog Box . . . 296 New Typical Section Location . . . . . . . .258, 259
New Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161, 162 New Typical Section Location Dialog
New Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
New Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 New Typical Section Location Dialog Box . . .259
New Profile Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 New User Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
New PT Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
New PT Code Association Dialog Box . . 235 New Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 75
New PT Code Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 New Utility Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
New PT Code Association Dialog Box . . . . . 235 New Utility Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
New Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 New Vertical Speed Parameters . . . . . .156, 158
New Reference Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 New Vertical Speed Parameters
New Reference Lines Dialog Box . . . . . 286 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
New Reference Lines Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 286 New Vertical Speed Parameters Dialog
412 RoadCalc
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Offset Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
New Vertical Speed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Offset Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
New VPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 152 offset, character for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
New VPI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Offset/Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
New VPI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Offset/Elevation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
New Width Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129
New Width Slope Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 243 Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309, 310, 312, 313
New Width Slope Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 298, 299
Next Cross-Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Original Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 304
Next Cross-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Original Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Next PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 155 original ground centerline profile . . . . . . . . . . 146
Next/Previous Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 125, 264 Original Ground Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
No Catch Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 267 Original Ground Profiles Dialog Box . . . 166
No Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 253 original ground profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
No Grade Option on Divided Roadways . 227 Original Ground Profiles Dialog Box . . . . . . . 166
No Grade Option on Divided Roadways . . . . 227 original ground surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
No Grade Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Original Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 100
No Grade Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 253 Original Surface Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
No Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Original Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
No Slope Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Strip Material in a Fill Situation . . . . . . . . 87
No Slope Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Original Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 99
No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Node ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 39, 65 3-D Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Node Stations to be Processed . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Breaklines from PT Codes . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Non-Crowned Divided Highway (Type II Catchlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Superelevation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Catchpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Normal removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Normal Toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Create Surface Model From Road . . . . . 339
Northing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 38, 39, 65, 135, 372 Cross-Section Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Northing, character for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Cross-Section Staking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Notepad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Elevation/Depth at Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 271, 292, 321 Inherit Elevation From Design . . . . . . . . 335
Number of Added Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Mass Diagram Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Number of Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Plan and Profile Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Number of Lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Profiles from PT Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Station and Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
O Sub-project Prototype Settings . . . . . . . 379
Volume Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
O button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Volume Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Object Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Outside Slope Seeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 255
Offset 73, 108, 113, 114, 115, 117, 128, 130, 135,
Overbreak Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
137, 166, 266, 305, 372, 375, 376
overbreak line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Offset Alignment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Overbreak Type Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Offset Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
overbreak type surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Offset Alignment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 73
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Offset and Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Overlap Equation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Offset Area Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Overpass Fill Section Cut to Subgrade . . . . . 105
Offset Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 282
Offset Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Index 413
P Edit Custom Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Edit Direction and Distance . . . . . . . . . . .310
P button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Edit Horizontal Station Labels . . . . . . . . .308
Parallel Original Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Edit Plan and Profile CAD Settings . . . . .302
Parallel surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Edit Plan and Profile Precision . . . . . . . .303
parallel surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Edit Profile Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Edit Spiral Curve Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 158 Edit Station/Elevation Intervals . . . . . . . .304
Pass-through Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Edit Vertical Curve Labels . . . . . . . . . . . .316
pavement surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Edit Vertical Station/Elevation Labels . . .315
Pavement Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Pavement Volumes Dialog Box . . . . . . . 347 New Plan and Profile Sheets . . . . . . . . .295
Pavement Volumes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 347 Plan and Profile Sheets Dialog Box . . . .292
Pay Unit Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Show Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Pay Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347, 350, 352 Plan and Profile Sheets Dialog Box . . . . . . . .292
Percent Above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286, 287 Plan and Profile Sheets in MicroStation V8 . .296
Percent Compaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Plan CAD Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Plan Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 155 Plan Up/Down Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
PI Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Plan View Station Major Interval . . . . . . . . . .305
PI List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 61 Plan View Station Minor Interval . . . . . . . . . .305
PI Stationing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Plot . . . . .278, 303, 309, 312, 313, 316, 317, 327
PI# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Plot Item . . . . . . . . .288, 309, 312, 313, 316, 317
PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 170 Plotted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
PIC button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Point Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Pick in CAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 65 Point Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Pin Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 point number, character for . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Pin Slope Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Point Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Pin Slope Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Point, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Pin to Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Pit Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362, 364, 365 Possible Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Place As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281, 284 Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Place at Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Precision Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188, 192
Place at Elevation Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333, 373 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Place PT Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Using Precision Input for the Pavement
Place Road Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 on the Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Placement . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 281, 283, 305, 310 Precision Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Plan and Profile Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Preview Alignment Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Plan and Profile Sheet . . . . . . . . . 292, 293, 294 Preview Alignment Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Plan and Profile Sheet – Example 1 . . . . . . . 300 Preview Cross-Section from Surface Model . .123
Plan and Profile Sheet – Example 2 . . . . . . . 301 Preview Cross-Section from Surface
Plan and Profile Sheet – Example 3 . . . . . . . 301 Model Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .124, 125
Plan and Profile Sheet – Example 4 . . . . . . . 302 Preview Cross-Section from Surface Model
Plan and Profile Sheet Formats . . . . . . . . . . 381 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124, 125
Plan and Profile Sheet, adjust . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Preview of Selected File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Plan and Profile Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Preview Profile Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . .151, 160
Adjust Plan and Profile Sheet . . . . . . . . 319 previous actual surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Edit Alignment Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Previous Cross-Section . . . . . . . . . . . . .117, 264
Edit Circular Curve Labels . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Previous PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 155
414 RoadCalc
Previous RoadCalc Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 9 Profile Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Alignment Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Profile Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 167
CAD Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Profile Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Condition Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Profile Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Library vs. Manage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Profile Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 162, 166
Menu Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Profile Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Define Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Special Alignments and Profiles . . . . . . . . 10 Profile Settings – Sight Parameters
Template – Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Previous Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Profile Settings General Tab . . . . . . . . . 168
Previous/Next Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 125 Profile Settings – General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Print 100, 102, 104, 267, 347, 350, 353, 356, 362, Profile Settings Dialog Box – General
364, 367, 369, 375, 376, 378 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Print Condition Table Locations . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Profile Settings – Sight Parameters Tab . . . . 171
Print Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Profile Settings Dialog Box – Sight
Print Lanes Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Parameters Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Print MRS Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Profile Settings Dialog Box – General Tab . . 169
Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Profile Settings Dialog Box – Sight
Print PT Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Parameters Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Print Speed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 59, 156 Profile Stationing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Print Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Profile Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Print Station Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Profile Up/Down Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Print Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Profile View Stationing Major Interval . . . . . . 305
Print Typical Section Location . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Profile View Stationing Minor Format . . . . . . 305
Print Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Profile View Stationing Minor Interval . . . . . . 305
Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Profile, new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Associate Alignments and Profiles . . . . . 233 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 314
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Convert Objects to Profile . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Edit Design Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Edit Profile Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Manage Condition Tables . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Extract Profile from Surface Model . . . . 164
Run Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Generate Profile Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Slopes Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Manage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Processing Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Original Ground Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Processing Warnings Dialog Box . . . . . . 267 Profile Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Processing Warnings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 267 Profile Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Profile . .150, 160, 161, 162, 163, 234, 236, 274, Synchronize Profile Graphics and Data . 172
296, 371 Vertical Curve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Profile Angle from parallel tolerance . . . . . . . . 78 View Profile Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Profile Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Profiles and Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Profile Annotation, edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Profiles and Alignments, special . . . . . . . . . . 206
Profile Beginning Station . . . . . . . . 259, 261, 262 Profiles from PT Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Profile CAD Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Profiles from PT Codes Dialog Box . . . . 331
Profile Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Profiles from PT Codes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 331
RoadCalc Profile Coordinate Systems . . 146 Profiles, special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Profile Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Project Alignments list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Profile Display Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Prototype Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Profile Drawn in RoadCalc Profile Graphic . . 147 PT Code . 84, 109, 113, 114, 115, 117, 179, 181,
Profile Ending Station . . . . . . . . . . 259, 261, 262 234, 236, 242, 253, 254, 255, 266, 280, 281,
Profile Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 169 283, 329, 331
Index 415
PT Code Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Type I R.O.W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
PT Code drop list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Type II R.O.W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
PT Code Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 82, 84, 244 Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
PT Code radio button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Right-of-Way Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
PT Code/Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Type I Right of Way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
PT Codes on Divided Highways . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Type II Right of Way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
PX In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Right-of-Way restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
PX Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Road Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
PY In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 RoadCalc 3-D Design Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
PY Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 RoadCalc Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
RoadCalc Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Q RoadCalc 3-D Design Module . . . . . . . . . . .7
RoadCalc Design Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Query Cross-Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 116
Sub-project Design Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Query Cross-Section Dialog Box . . . . . . 116
RoadCalc Design Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Query Cross-Section Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 116
RoadCalc Profile Coordinate Systems . . . . . .146
Profile Drawn in RoadCalc Profile
R Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
R (radius) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Rod Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
R button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 rod reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 115, 375
Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 56, 58, 60, 63 rod reading, character for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Raw Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Rollover Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Rollover Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . .52
reference point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Rollover Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .52
Reference Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Rollover, highside use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Reference Station Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 65 Rollover, lowside use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Reference Station Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Removal Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 101 Rotation Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281, 320
removal method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Rounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 ROW Type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Remove Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 ROW Type 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Repeat Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 RR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 115, 375
Reset BOP Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Run Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Reset EOP Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Describe Processing Warnings . . . . . . . .268
Reset pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Processing Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Re-size Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Run Design – Automatic Method . . . . . .263
Re-size Dialog Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Run Design Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Result of Transitioning Between Two Step Through Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . .263
Typical Section Station Locations . . . . . 198 Run Design – Automatic Method . . . . . . . . . .263
Resulting Cross-Sections of Applying Run Design Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Both a Special Alignment and Special Run Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
RHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 S
Right Condition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
S button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Right Condition table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Save To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Right Corridor Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Right Hand Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Scale View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117, 125, 265
Right of Way Correction Slope . . . . . . . . . . . 211
416 RoadCalc
SE% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Slope Rounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 229, 255
Seeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Slope Rounding Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 61 Slope Seeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Select Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Outside Slope Seeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Select Multiple Models to Merge . . . . . . . . . . 341 Slope Seeding Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Select PT Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Slope Type . . 109, 117, 125, 180, 239, 240, 242,
Selected Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 243, 244, 266
Selection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Slope Type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Selection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Slope Type 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Send to Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Slope Type Drop List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Settings .122, 132, 138, 180, 246, 347, 350, 352, Slope Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
356, 367 Slope Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Shade Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Sheet Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Slopes Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Sheet Dimension Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Benching Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Sheet Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Clear Zone Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Sheet Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298, 325 New Benching Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Sheet Left/Right Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 New Clear Zone Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Sheet Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298, 325 New Right of Way Correction Slope . . . 239
Sheet Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298, 325 New Single Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Sheet Prototype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 298 New Width Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Sheet/Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Right of Way Correction Slope . . . . . . . . 211
Sheets, view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Single Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 117, 125 Slopes Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Show Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294, 319 Width Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Show Report when Finished . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Slopes Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Show Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Slopes Tree view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Side 234, 236, 280, 281, 283, 284, 286, 287, 330, Sp L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
331 Special Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Sight Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Single Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 238 Extend Existing Slopes Example . . . . . . 204
Single Slope Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Use of a Special Alignment
Use of Negative Single Slope . . . . . . . . . 211 for Dynamic Typical Sections . . . . . 203
Single Slope Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Special Alignments and Profiles . . . . . . . 10, 206
Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 110 No Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Skew Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 122 Resulting Cross-Sections of Applying
Skewed Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Both a Special Alignment
360 Degree Method for Measuring and Special Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Skew Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Use of a Special Alignment and Profile
DL and DR for Measuring Skew Angles . . 94 for Dynamic Typical Sections . . . . . 207
Explanation of RHF Convention . . . . . . . . 95 Special Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
LHF and RHF for Measuring Skew Angle 94 Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 156
Slope 52, 108, 115, 117, 125, 179, 238, 242, 266 Speed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 58, 59, 156
Slope Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Spiral Curve Labels, edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Slope Annotation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Spiral In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Slope Direction Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Spiral Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 63
Slope Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Spiral Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Slope Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Spiral Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Slope Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Spirals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Index 417
Spot Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 159 Step Through Cross-Sections Dialog
Spot Elevations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 160 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Spot Elevations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Step Through Cross-Sections Dialog Box . . .264
SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 60 Step Through Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
SR In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156, 158
SR Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Strip Material in a Fill Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Stack Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Strip removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Stake Distance from Catch Point . . . . . . . . . 377 Sub-project Design Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Start Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Sub-project Prototype Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Starting Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 New Sub-project Prototype . . . . . . . . . . .380
Starting PT Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Sub-project Prototype Settings Dialog
Starting Station 131, 262, 274, 297, 324, 365, 369, Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
370, 374, 377 Sub-project Prototype Settings Dialog Box . .380
Station . 35, 65, 73, 108, 110, 122, 125, 126, 128, subsequent actual surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
135, 151, 153, 160, 170, 260, 261, 291, 308, Superelevate Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 61
347, 349, 352, 355, 362, 363, 366, 368, 372, Superelevate Curve Dialog Box . . . . . . . .61
375, 376 Superelevate Curve Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Station Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Superelevated Road with High-side
Station and Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 and Low-side Rollover Specified . . . . . . . .51
Draw Station/Coordinate Object . . . . . . 373 Superelevated Road with High-side Rollover
Station and Coordinates Dialog Box . . . 371 Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Station and Coordinates Dialog Box . . . . . . . 371 Superelevated Road with No Rollover
Station Area Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Station Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Superelevating Subsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 63, 71 Superelevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Station Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Superelevation “Key Stations” . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Station Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Superelevation Calculator . . . . . . .31, 44, 52, 59
Station Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Superelevation Calculator Dialog Box . . . .53
Station Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Superelevation Calculator Dialog Box . . . . . . .53
Gap Equation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Superelevation Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Overlap Equation Example . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Crowned Divided Highway (Type II
Station Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 371 Superelevation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Station Range 112, 131, 330, 331, 332, 334, 357, Non-Crowned Divided Highway (Type II
374, 377 Superelevation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Station Range Beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 PT Codes on Divided Highways . . . . . . . .28
Station Range Ending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Superelevating Subsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . .29
Station Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Superelevation “Key Stations” . . . . . . . . . .27
station, character for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Superelevation Parameters and Type . . . .26
Station, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Type I Superelevation (Rotation
Station/Elevation Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 About the Centerline) . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Station/Elevation Labels, edit . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Type II Superelevation (Rotation
Stationing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 About the Inside Pavement Edge) . . .24
Stationing Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Type III Superelevation (Rotation
Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 267 About the Outside Pavement Edge) .25
Stations to Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272, 291 Superelevation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Stations to Plot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 291 Superelevation Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . .43
Stations to Plot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Superelevation Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .43
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 108, 150 Superelevation Parameters and Type . . . . . . .26
Step Through Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Superelevation Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
418 RoadCalc
Superelevation Transition Tie-ins on a Curb and Gutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
on Compound Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 To Clear Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Superelevation Transition on Reverse To Clear Offset Type Drop List . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 To Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Superelevation Transition Parameters To PT Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 254
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 To Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Superelevation Transition on Compound Toe of Cutslope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Toe of Foreslope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Superelevation Transition on Reverse Curves 47 tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Superelevation Transition Parameters . . . . . . 45 tolerance line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Superelevation Transition Parameters Dialog Top Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 top original surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 92
Surface . . . . . . . . . 117, 121, 264, 330, 331, 376 Top Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Surface Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Total number of Nodes selected . . . . . . . . . . 338
Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 125, 339 Total Rounding Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Surface Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 TR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 60
Surface Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 179 TR In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 321 TR Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Surfaces, manage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Transfer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Transfer Settings – Editor Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Synchronize Cross-Section Graphics Transfer Settings Dialog Box – Editor
and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Synchronize Cross-Section Graphics Transfer Settings – Export Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 134
and Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Transfer Settings Dialog Box – Export
Synchronize Cross-Section Graphics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
and Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Transfer Settings – Import Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Synchronize Graphics and Data . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Transfer Settings Dialog Box – Import
Synchronize Graphics and Data Dialog Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Transfer Settings Dialog Box – Editor Tab . . 136
Synchronize Graphics and Data Dialog Box . . 82 Transfer Settings Dialog Box – Export Tab . . 134
Synchronize Profile Graphics and Data . . . . . 172 Transfer Settings Dialog Box – Import Tab . . 133
Synchronize Profile Graphics and Data Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Transition After . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Synchronize Profile Graphics and Data Transition Distance After . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Transition Distance Before . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Transition Spiral Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
T Transition Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Transition Typical Section Breakpoints . . . . . 198
T (tangent length) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Result of Transitioning Between Two
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Typical Section Station Locations . . 198
Table Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Transitioning Between Typical Sections
Template – Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
With An Unequal Number
Text Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 289
of Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Text Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283, 284, 286, 287
Transition, minimum length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Text Rotation . . . . . . . . . 278, 287, 303, 315, 327
Transitioning Between Typical Sections
Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
With An Unequal Number
Text Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 303, 327
of Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Text Style/Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 303, 327
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 99, 101, 102, 139
Tie Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Type I R.O.W. Correction Slope . . . . . . . . . . 212
Index 419
Type I Right of Way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Unselect All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 61
Type I Superelevation (Rotation About the Update Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 144, 173
Centerline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Update Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 144, 173
Type II R.O.W. Correction Slope . . . . . . . . . 213 Upper Right X Coord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Type II Right of Way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Upper Right Y Coord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Type II Superelevation (Rotation About the Use Design Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Inside Pavement Edge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Use Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Type III Superelevation (Rotation About the Use Existing Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Outside Pavement Edge) . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Use Extend Subsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Use External CAD Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Typical Section 10, 179, 180, 184, 185, 186, 188, Use No Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
189, 257, 260 Use of a Special Alignment and Profile
Typical Section Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 for Dynamic Typical Sections . . . . . . . . .207
Typical Section Correctly Drawn . . . . . . . . . . 177 Use of a Special Alignment for Dynamic
Typical Section Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Typical Section Incorrectly Drawn . . . . . . . . . 177 Use of a Special Profile for Dynamic Typical
Typical Section Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Typical Section Level Mapping Use of Negative Single Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Considerations for MicroStation V8 . . . . 178 Use Outside Slope Seeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Typical Section Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 186 Use Plan CAD Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Typical Section Library Dialog Box . . . . 186 Use Point Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Typical Section Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 186 Use Slope Rounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Typical Section Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Use Spirals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Typical Section Location . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 259 Use Station Range 330, 331, 332, 334, 340, 357,
Typical Section Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 373, 374, 377
Typical Section Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 186 Use Step Through Modifications . . . . . . . . . .263
Typical Section Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Use Sub-grade Design Surface Only . . . . . . .340
Typical Section Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Use Surface Model for Original Ground
Typical Section Settings Dialog Box . . . 183 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Typical Section Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . 183 Use Zonal Compaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Typical Section Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 User-Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 182, 185 User-Defined Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 User-defined Corridor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Construct Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Using Precision Input for the Pavement
Edit Typical Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . 178 on the Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Manage Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Using the Fill Ditches Option . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Typical Section Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Utilities Displayed in a RoadCalc
Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Cross-Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
View Typical Section Graphics . . . . . . . 196 Utilities Displayed in a RoadCalc Profile
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
U Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 75, 77
Utility Annotation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Undercut Type Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Undercut Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Utilities Displayed in a RoadCalc
Unit Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Cross-Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Unmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Utilities Displayed in a RoadCalc
Unrestricted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 39, 153
Profile View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
unrestricted zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Utility Annotation Settings Dialog Box . . . .77
420 RoadCalc
Utility Annotation Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . 77 Volume Pay Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Utility CAD Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Volume Pay Units Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 360
V Volume Pay Units Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Volume Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
V.P.I. Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Actual Earthwork Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Vertical Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Add Zero Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Vertical Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 167
Adjustment Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Vertical Curve Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . 154
Balance Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Vertical Curve Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Borrow Pits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Vertical Curve Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Compaction Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Vertical Curve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Design Earthwork Volumes . . . . . . . . . . 348
Vertical Curve Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
New Adjustment Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Vertical Grid Line Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
New Borrow Pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Vertical Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 325
New Compaction Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Vertical Speed Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Pavement Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Vertical Speed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 157
Volume Pay Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Vertical Speed Table Dialog Box . . . . . . 156
Volume Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Vertical Speed Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 156
Volume Settings – Calculation Tab . . . . 358
Vertical Speed Table Library . . . . . . . . . 156, 157
Volume Settings – Display Tab . . . . . . . 356
Vertical Speed Table Library Dialog
Zero Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Box Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Volume Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Vertical Speed Table Library Dialog Box . . . . 157
Volume Settings – Calculation Tab . . . . . . . . 358
Vertical Speed Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Volume Corrections for Curves . . . . . . . 358
Vertical Speed Tables Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Volume Settings Dialog Box –
Vertical Stretch Factor . . . . . . . . . . 142, 183, 334
Calculation Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Vertical Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Volume Settings – Display Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 356
vertical tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Volume Settings Dialog Box – Display
View Alignment Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
View All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Volume Settings Dialog Box – Calculation
View Cross-Section Graphics . . . . . . . . 109, 141
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
View Cross-Section Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Volume Settings Dialog Box – Display Tab . . 357
View Mass Diagram Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Volume Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 359
View Plan and Profile Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 343
View Profile Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
VPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
View Profile Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
VPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 151, 155, 159
View Sheets Upon Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
VPI Stationing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
View Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 188
VPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
View Typical Section Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
View Typical Section Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
W
volume calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Volume Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362, 363
End Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303, 327
Mass Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Raw Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Width Control Slope Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Volume Corrections for Curves . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Width Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214, 243
Volume Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Wordpad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Volume from Prior Actuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Index 421
X
X (absolute horizontal distance) . . . . . . 179, 242
X (distance from beginning
of superelevation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 60
X (location in X direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
X In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
X Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Y
Y (absolute vertical distance) . . . . . . . . 179, 242
Y (distance from beginning
of superelevation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 60
Y (location in Y direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Y In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Y Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Z
Zero Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Zero Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350, 352, 368
Zero Volumes Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Zero Volumes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Zero Volumes Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Zero Volumes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Zonal Compaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
422 RoadCalc

RC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RoadCalc™ by Eagle Point

Table of Contents iii

5 Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Table of Contents vii

RoadCalc Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Figure 1-1 Sub-project Design Flow

RoadCalc Design Model

Previous RoadCalc Users

Library vs. Manage

Special Alignments and Profiles

Template – Typical Section

Figure 2-3 Type I Right of Way

Horizontal Angle Types

Figure 2-6 Horizontal Circular Curve Parameters

Figure 2-7 Transition Spiral Parameters

Figure 2-9 Overlap Equation Example

Figure 2-10 Type I Superelevation (Rotation About the Centerline)

Figure 2-13 Superelevation Parameters and Type

Figure 2-15 PT Codes on Divided Highways

Figure 2-17 Crowned Divided Highway (Type II Superelevation)

KEY-IN COMMAND: rcaldata

Figure 2-19 Edit Alignment Data Dialog Box

Edit Alignment Data Dialog Box Definitions

Figure 2-21 Edit Alignment Dialog Box (Display Angles/Distances)

See Horizontal Angle Types on page 18.

Figure 2-22 New PI Dialog Box Using Coordinates Method

Figure 2-23 New PI Dialog Box Using Angular Methods

New PI Dialog Box Definitions

Figure 2-24 Modify PI Dialog Box

Modify PI Dialog Box Definitions

This version of RoadCalc supports non-tangent curves.

Horizontal Curve Data Dialog Box Definitions

Figure 2-26 Superelevation Data Dialog Box

Superelevation Data Dialog Box Definitions

Figure 2-27 Superelevation Transition on Compound Curves

Figure 2-29 Superelevation Transition Parameters Dialog Box

Superelevation Transition Parameters Dialog Box Definitions

Figure 2-30 Superelevated Road with No Rollover Criteria Chapter 2: Alignments

Rollover Parameters Dialog Box Definitions

Figure 2-34 Superelevation Calculator Dialog Box

MRS Parameters Dialog Box Definitions

Figure 2-36 Create Curve Dialog Box

Create Curve Dialog Box Definitions

To help in selecting curve and superelevation parameters, RoadCalc provides several

Figure 2-37 Horizontal Speed Tables Dialog Box

Horizontal Speed Table Library

Figure 2-38 Horizontal Speed Table Library

Horizontal Speed Table Library Definitions

Figure 2-39 New Horizontal Speed Table Parameters Dialog Box

New Horizontal Speed Table Parameters Dialog Box

Figure 2-40 Superelevate Curve Dialog Box

Superelevate Curve Dialog Box Definitions

Figure 2-41 Combining Spirals

Combining Spirals Dialog Box Definition

Figure 2-43 Station Data Dialog Box

Station Data Dialog Box Definitions

Reference Station Dialog Box Definitions

Preview Alignment Graphics

KEY-IN COMMAND: rcalman

Manage Alignments Dialog Box Definitions

Figure 2-46 New Alignment Dialog Box

Figure 2-47 Associate Alignment Dialog Box